6 ijCM %^C

"^

EDUCATIONAL WORKS
PUBLISHED

r.V

OLIVER and BOYD,

Siixipkin, Marshall,

and

EdinlDurgh;
Co.,

Ijondon.

ENGLISH READING, GRAMIWAR, ETC.

s.

Aemstkong's English Composition, Part I. Is. Gel. Part II

Both Parts in one, 3s. Key to ditto
English Etymology, 2s. Do. for Junior Classes
Child's atory Book. Illustrated
Colville's Primer
First Headiug-Book, 95 jmges
Second Reading-Book, 4d. Third Keading-Book
Fourth Keading-Book, 216 pages
Fifth Keading-Book, 300 pages
Sixth Keading-Book, 394 pages
Dalgleish's Outlines of Grammar and Analysis IKey, Is.]
Progressive English Grammar [Ket/, 2s. 6d.]
Grammatical Analysis, with Exercises \_Key, 2s.]
Outlines of Englisli Composition [iTey, 4d.]
Introductory Text-Book of English Composition
Advanced Text-Bookof English Composition

4
1

IJ

4
8

Spelling and Dictation Exercises

Selections for Recitation
Initiatory English Grammar, including Analysis
Principles of English Grammar, including Analysis....
English Etymology, with Exercises
Etymological Guide to the English Language

3
6

6
6

9
6
1

2
Key... 2

*,* Both Text-Books bound together, 2s. 6d. The

Douglas's First Book, 2d. Second Book, 4d. Third Book
Fourth Book, Is. 6d. Fifth Book, 2s. Sixth Book

d.

2
2

1
1

6
6
6

6
1
1
Lamb's Tales from Shakespeare. Illustrated
Lennie's English Grammar, including Analysis [The Key, 3s. 6d.] 1 6
each
2
M'Culloch's First Book, lid.; or, 2 Parts, in Large Type
10
Second Keading-Book, 3d. Third Reading-Book
1 6
Fourth Keading-Book and Synopsis of Spelling
2
Series of Lessons in Prose and Verse
3
Course of Reading in Science and Literature
Manual 01 English Grammar, including Analysis.... 1 6
2
Peyde'b Studies in Composition. For Advanced Classes
6
Reid'b Rudiments of English Grammar, including Analysis
2
Rudiments of English Composition [The Key, 2s. 6d.]
Pronouncing Dictionary of the Eng. Language. ..redaeed to 2 6
Robinson Ceusoe. Illustrated. Oliver and Boyd's School Edition 1
each
6
Sessional School Old and New Testament Biography
3 6
Spalding's (Professor) History of English Literature
6
1
White's System of English Grammar, including Analysis

Oliver

and

Boyci's Educational

Works.

GEOGRAPHY.

s.

d.

1
Clyde's Elementary Geography, with 5 coloured Maps
4
School Geography, with 9 coloured Maps
DouGLAs'stntroductoryGeography.Bd. Progressive Geography. 1
withlOcoloiiredMaps
coloured
3
Maps
Text-BookofGeography,2s.6d.;
)
2"\
Lawsok's Geographical Primer
,^-'-'',
2 f
Geography of England
Geography of Scotland and Ireland...
Geography of Europe, 3d. Colonies.
4 J
Geography of Asia, Africa, & America
Class-Book of Geography, being the above Six Books
bound in One Volume, with 7 coloured Maps
1
Geographical First Book, with Diagrams and Map
England and Wales, a Geographical Reading-Book for
Standard III. Illustrations and Maps
1
Primary Physical Geography, for Standards V. and
VI., with diagrams and Maps

Geography of the British Empire

Outlines of Physiography ; in two Parts, 2s. 6d.; Parts

sold separately
...each
Elements of Physical Geographv, for Standard VIZ....
Text-Book of Physical Geography
Olivee and Boyd's Pronouncing Gazetteer, 5s. or with Atlas..
School Atlas, 32 full-coloured Maps
Handy Atlas
Reid's Rudiments of Modern Geography, with 5 coloured Maps...
First Book of Geography (Reid's Rudiments abridged)
Reid's (Hugo) Astronomy. Brought down ly liev. Dr Mackay
Phys. Geography, with Astronomy (Phys. Chart)..
;

6
6
6

6
1

6
3
1

Stewart's Geog.,withPhys.Geog.andAstron.(llcolouredMaps). 3
White's Abstract of General Geography, with 5 coloured Maps.. 1
System of Modem Geography, 2s. 6d.; with 6 Maps
2

6
9

HISTORY.

Simpson's Goldsmith's England Rome

each
T ytlee's Elements of General Histoiy 2 Maps, Frontispiece, etc..
White's History of England, Is. 6d. Scotland, Is. Rome
History of Great Britain and Ireland, with Map
History of France, with Map, 3s. 6d. Sacred History...
Outlines of Universal History
Elements of Universal History (or in 3 Parts, each 2s. 6d.]
.

3
3
1

6
6
6

3
1

2
7

SCHOOL SONGS, WITH MUSIC.

Hunteb's Elements of Vocal Music on the Sol-Fa System
School Songs for Junior Classes: 60 Songs, mostly for
2 voices. First Series, 4d. Second Series: 63 Songs...
School Songs Ibr Advanced Classes 44 Songs, mostly
for 3 voices, First Series, 6d. Second Series 46 Songs
',* Toxic Sol-Fa Edition of both Sevies, Siducedin price :
Junior Classes, 2d. Advanced Classes
Hcntkb's National School Song Book, compo.sed of 89 Songs,
Duets, Trios, Choruses, and Rounds Tonic Sol-Fa.
Wade's (Clipt) Songs for Schools, with Accompaniment. Ori^ina^
Second Series
[Continued at end of Book.

6
4

6
2
4
6

ITALIAN GRAMMAR.

A THEORETICAL AND TRACTICAL

ITALIAN GRAMMAR
WITU NUMEROUS EXERCISES AND EXAMPLES, ILLUSTRATIVE
OF EVERY RULE, AND A SELECTION OF
PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

#0r

ibc

anb pribufc Stubnits.

cist of Stljools

BY

E.

LEMMI, LL.D,

OF THE UNITEBSITT OF PISA ADVOCATE OF FLORENCE

ITALIAN TUTOR TO H.B.H. THE PRINCE OF WALES, ETC.
;

Fourteenth Edition.

EDINBURGH:
OLIVER AND BOYD, TWEEDDALE COURT.
LONDON:

SIMPKIN, MARSHALL,

AND

CO.;

P.

ROLANDI, Bernebs

Street.

'HlNTliD

BY OLIVER AND BOYD, EDINBUUGH

Hi

PREFACE.
The

principal motive which has induced us to prepare this

was the

We

Grammar,

hands of our Pupils a guide to the

desire of placing in the

Italian language, in accordance with our

own method

of teachiag.

we have succeeded in compiling an

number of similar works that
have already been published yet we trust that, owing to the simple
and practical method we have adopted, this wUl prove of greater
are far from imagining that

lUilian

Grammar

superior to the vast

;

than a more finished and complicated work.

To circumscribe any language within the limits of precepts is a work

utility to the student

much difficulty, but especially so in the case of the ItaUan language,

which never scruples " to snatch a gi-ace beyond the reach of art," by
violating even those rules that grammarians attempt most emphatically
to enforce.
We have therefore been sparing of precept and, mindful
that, we were writing for English, and not for Italian students, we have
introduced only those theoretical remarks wliich long experience in
teaching has shown us to be most useful for a practical and rapid
acquirement of the Italian language.
of

Each

we

rule

is

clearly illustrated

consider the best

method

by examples and

exercises

and

as

of learning a foreign language to be that

foUowod in the acquirement of one's own, in the beginning we have

made use of short and simple phrases, which gradually become more
difficult as the work proceeds
and towards the end, when the student
is supposed to be well grounded in the elementary part of the language,
the exercises are stUl more difficult, and the examples are nearly all
chosen. from the works of classical authors. In the fii'st lessons we have
introduced the two auxiliaries, to have and to be, accompanied by some
;

general rules for the use of verbs, in order that the pupil

may have

some notion of how they should be employed, even before he ima

reached the Chapter which treats of them.
The method we have adopted of numbering every word that refers
to any preceding rule, cannot fail to be most useful in impressing on
the mind of learners the subject of each lesson, as it obUges them con-

PREFACE.

y\

stantly to refer to

and

to reconsider all the rules they have already

studied throughout the Gramumr.

As

our design in preparing this book was to offer to the^ English

student a clear and practical method of acquiring the Italian language,

on the elements and principles of Grammar as a

those grammatical definitions and explanations
which every educated English person must already know as it is to
be supposed that, before attempting to acquire a foreign language, one
must have studied one's own.
We ofifer our work to our Pupils ; and should we have succeeded in
rendering the study of the most classical and beautiful of languages
pleasing to them, because clear and simple, we shall esteem ourselves
rewarded for the labour we have bestowed on our Italian Grammar.

and not a
study,

treatise

we have omitted

CONTENTS.
Ceaptee

I.

II.

III.

On
On
On
On
On

the Pkoncxciation,
the Prepositions called Segnacasi,

the Definite Article,

the Indefinite Article,
the Partitive Article,

FoEUATioN

IV. Gen-dee,

V.

On

....

of the

Plural

the Adjectite,

of

Nouns,

Cardinal Numbers,

Ordinal Numbers,

On AuGMENTATivES and DmrauTiTES,

On C0MPAP.ATIVE3 and Superlatives,
YJH. On Personal Pronouns,
On Possessive Pronouns,
On Demonstative Pronouns,
On Relative Pronouns,
On Indefinite Adectives and Pronouns
On the Particle Si,
IX. On Verbs,
Table of Eegdlar Verbs,
VI.

VII.

....
.

Irregular Verbs,
Transith-e and Intransitive Verbs,

Reflected and Reciprocal Verbs,

Impersonal Verbs,

Observations on Essere and Avere,

On Moods and Tenses,

On Will, Shall, Can, May,
Idioms and Rejlaeks on Verbs,

vili

CONTENTS.

ITALIAN ORAMMAR.
ON THE PRONUNCIATION.
The

Alphabet consists of twenty-two

Italian

nounced as follows
A,

B,

D,

C,

The

eh, effay, djee,

N,

0,

eii7ie,

0,

P,
R,
Q,
pea, con, erre,

is

letter

H,

I,

J,

L,

acca,

e,

ee,

elle,

G,

F,

E,

lee^ tehee, dee,

fl/e,

letters,

pro-

S,

T,

U,

esse,

tea,

oo,

V,

M,
emme,

Z.

voo, dzeta.

used in Italian before some persons of the

present of the indicative of the verb to have, in which ease

it is

mute, and employed only to distinguish those persons of the verb

from other words of a different signification Io ho, I have; tu
;

hai,

thou hast; egli ha, he has; eglino hanno, they have.

It is also used in Interjections,

when

sound to the vowel which precedes

alas

it,

it

as.

gives a protracted

Deh! pray! Ah!

The

letter

is

used between the letters c-e,

c-i,

g-e, g-i, to

give those letters a hard sound, in order to retain the primitive

sound of their

Ca

is

Ce
Che

roots.

pronounced as ca in the English -nord

...

as c^e in

...

cat.

cherry.

...

caper,

...

as ca

...

as chi in

...

chicken.

Chi

...

as

...

key.

Go

...

as CO in

...

costly.

...
...

cuckoo.
garb.

...

jelly.

...

gay.

Cu
Ga

...

as cu in

...

AH

Ge
Ghe

...

asje in

...

gain
as

ON THE PRONUNCIATION.

Gi is pronounced w&ji in the English word

Qhi
...
as ^? in
...

Go

...

as go in

Gu

...

See

...

as ^00 in
as sha in

Sci

...

as

jig.

gig.

...

gospel.

...
...

good.
shape.

...

she.

Gli has no precise corresponding sound in English; that which

most approaches

it

found in the word billiard ; but in the

is

words Anglia, Angli^ and in the verb negligere^ with its derivatives, gli must be pronounced as in English in the word negligent.
J, called in Italian

and

the beginning

when

it

lungo or long

at the end,

is

i,

pronounced like

is

in the middle of words,

jeri,

yesterday

and

ajuto,

e at

like double ee

help

heneficj.,

benefits.

The vowels
other open

and

have two

Pesca, a peach,
e
Meiin, less,
e
Togliere, to take away, o
Potere, power,
o

The

conjunction e

is

is

pronounced open.

is

rendered by ho, and

The

conjunction or

There
rules

we

is

one

close, the

open as in

pest.

close as in

pain.

open as in

stop.

close as in

pronounced

is

close ;

note.

the verb accented,

rendered by o close

the verb

/ have

pronounced open.

is

no sign whatever

mark when

order to

different sounds,

as

for these

two vowels

and

o,

in

the sound should be close or open; and the

which might be given are so uncertain and

so prolix, that

think they would serve more to confuse than assist the scholar.

teacher pronouncing the various sounds, and a close attention

on the part of the pupil to the words so pronounced, will prove

more useful than a

The

letter r,

sounded, which

The

final

is

on pronunciation.

followed by a consonant, must be well

seldom

sufficiently

done by the English learner.

vowels must be distinctly and audibly pronounced,

80 that the final e

When

treatise

when

may be

clearly distinguished from

i.

double consonants are found together they must be


ON THE ACCENT.
distinctly

pronounced

the

first

consonant being sounded with the

preceding syllable, and the second with that which follows, as in

the English word unnecessary.

ON THE ACCENT.
In Italian orthography there
ployed, which

is

but one accent commonly em-

is

the grave accent,

marked thus

vowel of some words on which

on the

final

voice,

as in bont, goodness

virt.,

falls

virtue

It is

(').

found

the stress of the

sar, I shall be.

These words are called tronche.

When
one, these

the stress of the voice falls on the last syllable but

words are called piane

The words

as pane, bread

vino, wine.

which the stress of the voice falls on the last

but two or more syllables, are called sdrucciole; as bile,
clever

in

difficile, difficult

caritatevole, charitable.

Monosyllables receive no accent, therefore

write with an accent

he was

:/;>,

it

is

incorrect to

su, upon.

But monosyllables consisting of two vowels forming a dipha?, pi, more

pub, he can gi, already;

thong take an accent;

qua, qui, here.

The

following words must be marked with an accent, to dis-

tinguish them from other words spelt alike, but having different
significations

a verb,
d, gives, a verb,
d, day, a noun,
, is,

si,

yes,

an affirmative,

ne, neither, conjunction,

t,

tea,

e,

and, a conjunction.

da, from, a preposition.

di, of,
si,

a preposition.

pronoun conjunctive.

ne, some, a rei.

te,

thee.

pronoun.

CHAPTEE

I.

INFINITIVE.

INFINITIVE.

Essere, To be

Avere, To have,
PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE.

Io sono,

Io ho,

tu sei, se',

tu hai,

egli

egli ha,

]
jLi
t3-

abbiamo,

noi siamo,

7ioi

voi siete,

voi avete,

eglino sono,

eglino hanno,

%
,

ON THE PREPOSITIONS CALLED SEGNACASI, OR SIGNS

OF THE CASES.
As

the Italian language does not admit of declensions, pre-

positions called segnacasi are

relations or cases,

employed

to express the various

which in Latin and Greek are indicated by

varying the terminations of nouns.

These Prepositions are

a, to;

di, of;

Di,
1.

The

preposition di

used in Italian

to

marks the

Un amico

di ca^a,
voce del popolo,
di Firenze,
La pena di morte,

La

Duomo

When
it

is

father's liouse.

An

connexion of one object with

Ex.

another.

3.

My

and

Ex.

Dante's poem.
eagle's wings.

2. It also denotes affinity or

which

relation of property,

form the possessive case.

La casa di mio padre,

II poema di Dante,
Le ale di un'aquila,

Il

da, from.

of.

one noun

is

fiiend of the family.

Tlie voice of the people.
The Cathedral of Florence.
The pain of death.

used adjectively to qualify another, of

indicates the character, country, material, Sfc, in Italian


PREPOSITIONJ

English order of

tlic

words must be reversed, and

Ex,
di.

tlie

tlic

two

substantives be connected by

4.

Una casa di campagna,

Un cucchiaio di argento,
Il Castello di Edimburgo,

A
A

Mercanti

Wine merchants.

di vino,

Lume

Raggio

lio

Di

Moonlight.
Morning-star.

di sole,

Sunbeam.

risoluto di studiare la lingua

have resolved to study the

Ita-

lian language.

Italiana,
visitare
di

sua

have promised to visit his sister.

I have forgotten to send the letter
I

sorella,

mandare

la let-

to the post.

tera alia posta,

Di

Ex.

generally used before infinitives.

is

Ho promesso di
Ho dimenticato
6.

Castle.

Ex.

same manner.

di luna,

Stella della mattina,

To

silver spoon.

English compound nouns, one of which qualifies the other,

are translated in the

5.

coxmtry house.

Edinburgh

before a vowel

an apostrophe

may be

before another

curtailed of the
this elision

and receive

always takes place.

Ex.

La repuhhlica di or ' America,

Il bel clima d'Italia,
La flotta

: Inghilterra,

The
The
The

'

'

EXERCISE
I have read

my

father's

letto

letter.

republic of America.
fine climate of Italy.
fleet of

England.

I.

He

has taken his

sister's

2^'''^^'^

(1)

straw-bonnet.
wish
book. We have bought
a
desidero
comprato un paglia

wine-merchants.
speak
They
your
music-master.
parlare
musica
maestro.
The agriculture Scotland. He a drawing-master. You
L' agricoltura
disegno
watch. The
have a gold
and
have
una oro
un
L!
The house-door open. The dove
aperto. La colomba
L'
and the
branch. We have
country house. They have
I

il

libro.

{2>)

cappello,
are

to

al vostro

(3)

(3)

of

is

Scozia.

chain,

(3) catena,

oil

olio

of Italy

is

olivo

is

uscio

ramo.

olive

oriolo.

migliore.

olive

(3)

a silver

the best.

il

(6)

il

to

[5)

oliva


PREPOSITIONS.

A mother's
Woollen
una madre
lana
The town Edinburgh. A vase
un vaso rose
Vamore. La
Where have you put
write always with a
penna Dove
con una
messo
Grammar (We wish)
read your
my
found

trovato

una

silk

stockings.

purse.

seta [S) borsa.

calze.

{1)

of

of

love.

rose-leaves.

(4) foglie.

citt (6)

steel-pen.

acciaio (3)

scrivo semj)re

brother's

Grammatica

fratello [I)

aunt's

to

Desideriamo [b)

zia

letter.

IMPERFECT.
Io era^

^
^

noi eravamo,
voi eravate,

'l

elleto erario,

The pronoun

it is

tu avevi,

ella era,

7.

Io aveva,

"1

tu eri,

ella aveva, or avea,

i-t

noi avevamo,
voi avevate,
elleno avevano, or
aveano,

^
P

not generally translated before the verb

and the verb must agree with the noun

which it relates. Ex.

essere,

Sono

io,

The

to

prepositions

to, at,

are translated in Italian

Towards the end

go

by

a.

of spring

Ex.

we

wil'

London.

Our cousin

is

home to-morrow.

at school.

infinitives,

which are go-

Ex.
Come and

Venite a desinare con me.

Corsero a difendere i loro amici,
a vedere il medico,

They

A ndiamo

10. Before

to

I shall not bo at

used instead of di before

verned by verbs of motion.

may

pronoun

to, at.

Verso la fine della primavera andremo a Londra,

Domani non sard a casa.
Nostra cugina a scuola,
9. .4 is

or

It is you.

Slete voi,

It is I.

A,
8.

dine with me.

ran to defend their friends.

Let us go see the doctor.

words beginning with a vowel, the preposition a

receive a d, especially before a.

Enli ha studiato ad or a Oxford,

Non ho parlato ad altri,

He

Ex.

has studied at Oxford.

I have not spoken to others.

PREPOSITIONS.

EXERCISE
I

have promised a book

promesso un
in town.

dine

Come

my

(will send)

son to Eton.

mander
Athens.

Andrew

(to)

and a sheet

of paper.

foglio

carta.

came

pound of

brother at Florence.

(shall

me)

tea.

give (to)

dare
(do

the doctor.

to

fra poco (10)

un amico,
buy
comprare

(Let us go) and

Andiamo

Parigi.

(9)

lady who lives

una signora che dimora

I have written to

meet

parlate

at Paris.

soon

return)

t.
scritto
una libbra
post
this newspaper.
at Eome.
Go and
Roma. Andate (9) impostare questo giornale.

incontrare

Edward a pen
Eduardo una penna
you speak ?) To a friend.

to
(5)

chi

to (see

to

fratello [8) Firenze.

To whom

vennero (9) vedermi

a

my

gone

are

andati [^)

ritorner

Dite (10) Andrea

They

figlio.

(10)

Tell

Atene.

They

son.

mio

to see

Venite {9)

desinai^ e in

II.

my

to

il

(7)

I ran
to
Corsi (9)
two years since I
due anni dach

at school to-day.

at

my

It is

son.

(7)

It

is

When we were
Quando
breakfast we have read your mother's
hope
go
colazione
spero
to-morrow
our
garden. Go and open the
was at Venice.

She was

(8) scuola

Venezia.

oggi.

letter.

to

domani
window.
finestra.

see

to

(5) atidare

letto

uncle's

(9) vedere nostro

zio

giardino

(10) aprire la

PREPOSITIONS.

The negation precedes

12.

Io non so

la

mia

the verb in Italian.

know my

I do not

lezione,
\

lesson.

13. In interrogative phrases, the pronouns follow the verb

may however be

they

the voice should

omitted

mark the

when

interrogation.

Avete voi capito?

Non siamo stati forse ingan-

the emphasis or stress of

Ex.

Have you understood ?

Have wo not perhaps been

nati ?

deceived

Da,

From

//-o???, by.

rendered in Italian by da; this preposition

is

never curtailed, even before words beginning with the vowel

a.

14.

is

Ex.

Andando a

In going to Constantinople I went

by Athens.

Costantinopoli passai

da Atene,

Da

From

Aprile fino a Luglio,

Da

April

July.

till

two words, the latter of which

expresses the use or destination of the former, and in this case
the English order is reversed.
Ex.
15.

Carta da

is

employed

to connect

Writing-paper.

scrivere,
|

Una

bottiglia da vino,
comprato un cavallo da
due cavalli da carrozza,

So

16. B/ is translated

wine-bottle.

have bought a saddle- horse and

two carriage-Iorses.

by da when preceded by a past

persone virtuose sono stimate da

tutti,

da un amico,
II ritratto di Dante, dipinto da

Siamo

A
I

parti-

Ex.

ciple.

Le

sella, e

stati invitati

Virtuous persons are esteemed by

every one.
We have been invited by a friend.
The portrait of Dante, painted by
Giotto.

Giotto,

17. Prepositions are generally repeated in Italian before each

noun, pronoun, or verb which they govern, whether they are

repeated or not in English.
Sono

Ho

Roma

Ex.

ed a Firenze,
udito questa novella da lui e da
stato a

altri,

Farliamo spesso
sorella.

di voi e

have been at

Rome and

Florence.

news from him and

from others.
We often speak of you and of your

I have heard this

bister.

PREPOSITIONS.

EXERCISE

We

do

III.

receive a newspaper from

not

Paris.

Have

(14)
(11) (12) riceviamo
Raphael ?
seen at Dresden the Madonna, painted by
dipinta (16) Raffaello f
veduto
Dresda la

you

Where

is

the

letter-paper ?

We have seen the

la lettere (15) carta.

painted by David,
dipinto

Napoleone

ritratto

il

go) from London

(They
Londra
Andranno
will

History of France, written by Michelet,

Dove

portrait of Napoleon,

is

to Paris.

The
La

very interesting.
molto interessante.

Francia scritta (16)

- room
small.
Gunpowder
is
was
La mangiare {\b) sala piccola, cannone [\) la polvere
invented by a German monk.
In Germany there are beerinventata
un '^tedesco '^monaco.
Germania
vi
birra
glasses of every shape.
Those coffee-cups
are a prestoria

The

dining

(15) bicchieri
sent.

Do not

gaio.

ogni

forma

Quelle caff (15) tazze

leave flowers in
lasciate fiori

una

bed
letto

un

re-

Bring

room.
{\b) camera.
-

Portate

dozen of wine-bottles. I have spoken this morning to

una dozzina
parlato questa mattina
(15) bottiglie.
your mother and your sister.
This picture was painted by
vostra
Questo quadro
dipinto (16)
(17)
a

Rubens and

Snyders.

hope

to

see

hair-brush.

capelli {!&) spazzola.

(17)

my

rivedere la mia

country
patria

again.
*

I do

(11)

not
(12)

ON TUE DEFINITE ARTICLE.

10

ON TUE DEFINITE ARTICLE,

18. Il

used before masculine nouns beginning with a con-

is

Ex.

sonant.
II

calzolaio

ha portato

le

The shoemaker has brought

scarpe e gli

shoes and boots.

gloves you have bought

stivali,

I guanti

The

che avete comprati sono

tropipo piccoli,

too

abbiamo passati

I giorni che

Lo

letter

s,

by another consonant.

leggi di

Lo

20.

printer prints books.

As long as the Spartans followed the
laws of Lycurgus, they were free.

Spartani seguirono
Licurgo vissero liberi.

its

also used before masculine

plural gli

dei poveri

'L'amico

is

is

nouns beginning with a

suppressed and replaced by an apos-

curtailed only before the letter

i.

Ex.

The

friend of the poor and of the

unfortunate.
The hatred of tyrants and of op-

sven-

degli

turati,

Uodio

by

The

gli

is

Ex.

diligent scholar is praised

bis master.

i libri,

vowel, but in this case the o

trophe

are
tlie

The

maestro,

Lo stampatore sfamjja
le

in

country.

followed

Fintantoch

spent

used before masculine nouns beginning with the

is

scolare diligente lodato dal suo

Lo

the

smaH.

The days we have

alla

campagna,
19,

11

ai tiranni e agli oppressori,

pressors.

In gran parte

le Indie Orientali
sono possedute dagl' Inglesi,

great part of the East Indies

21. Before words beginning with the letter

used indiscriminately.
Il

or lo zio
il

mi ha regalato un

Uncle has made

gold watch.
Sugar is sweet.

oriolo

zucchero e dolce,

22. Gli
Gli

Dei

degli

La

is

e.

Romani,

Dei falsi e bugiardi,

me

a present of a

The gods
\

Ex.

Romans.
and lying gods.

of the ancient

In the time of

false

in the plural, the elision takes place only before

parzialit tra il
povero,
Il fulmine percuote pi spesso
Velevate torri che le umili capanne,
Ve sempre della neve sulle Alpi,
il

be

Ex.

La morte non fa
ricco e

may

used with feminine nouns, and takes an apostrophe

before a vowel

the letter

or lo

used in declining the plural of Dio, God.

degli antichi

Al tempo
23.

is

2, il

Ex.

d'oro,

Lo or

is

in the possession of the English.

Death makes no distinction between

rich and poor.

The thunderbolt

strikes oftener high

towers than low cottages.
is always snow on the Alps.

There

ON THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.

12

EXERCISE

The

ship

of the desert

{IS) vascello m.

is

deserto

The pen
cammello m. penna
on the
The eyes
cameh

for the

is

IV.

the

'^Orientale hnetafora

in the ink-bottle.

is

metaphor

Oriental

m. {2S)

The

calamaio m.

f.

lapis

are the mirror of the

table.

f.

pencil

m.

The

soul.

tavola f. (20) ocelli m.

anima f. (20)
horror of
vice
and the love
of
virtue are the delight
orrore m. oxLvizioxn.
amor em. art. virt f.
deliziai.
of the wise.

The

The

blamed.

industriosi m.

antichi

gods (by offering them)

Where

the

m.

The sun,

sacrifizi.

sole

maladies
malattie

f.

were

alphabet
alfabeto

sacrifices.

the sugar ?
It
(21) zucchero m.

the

are

is

(19) spirito m. eleva art.

in the sugar-basin.

The
Phoenicians. The

of the soul.

man.

Fenici m.

The

mind

uomo m.

body, and the body acts on the mind.

agisce
corpo m.

CONDITIONAL.
Sarei,
saresti,

sarebbe,

saremmo,
sareste,

sarebbero.

The

f.

letters of

lettere

f.

invented by the

elevates

art.

the moon, and the

m. luna f.

zuccheriera

ind. 3. inventate

mind

-p.

(thought they could propitiate) the

credevano rendersi
propizi
(22)

is

stelle f

passions

va.

loro

offrendo

passioni

are

pigri m.

ant

The ancients

industria.

stars.

ma

lodati

and the bee are the emblems

of
ape f.
emdlema m. s.
formica f.

biasimati.

industry.

are praised, but the idle

industrious

savio m. [20)

influences
influisce

the

f.

culture of
coltura

f.

(on) the

ON THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.

13

USE OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.

The

24.

Ex.

taken in a deteinnined sense.

Ho ricevutole

lettere c/i'i'o aspettava

di Francia,
ritrovato l'anello che
aveva perduto,
i

cavalli che

have received the letters I was expecting from France.

has found the ring she had

My sister

Mia sorella ha
Avete veduto

both languages, before nouns

definite article is used, in

Have you seen

ho com-

bought

prati ?

25. Before a

noun taken

in a general

whole of a species, the article

La

libert

stato naturale

lo

is

the horses I

sense, expressing the

Ex.

used in Italian.
Liberty

del-

is

have

the natural state of'man.

Vuomo,

La ragione

Reason is often vanquished by force.

Education is the culture of the mind.
Heaven, earth, and ocean all proclaim to us the glory of God.
Fish swim, birds fly.

spesso vinta dalla /orsa,

L'educazione la coltura della mente,
Il cielo, la terra, il mare, tutto ci
narra la gloria di Dio,
I pesci sguizzano, gli uccelli volano,

26.

No

article is prefixed to

nouns taken in an

neither in a determined nor general sense.

is,

indefinite, that

Ex.

Appettiamo lettere di Francia,

Vi erano uomini, donne, e fanciulli,

We expect letters from France.

There were men, women, and chil-

Un

dren.
arhoscello con foglie e

27.

The

definite

fiori,

article is

'

shrub with leaves and

used in Italian before names of

continents, countries, islands, rivers, &c.

U Inghilterra domina

England

mari,

il giardino dell' Furopa,

Innumerevoli sciami di locuste coprirono la superfice dell' Egitto,
La Corsica, e la Sardegna sono due

h' Italia

isole del

28.

alluded

in the Mediterranean.

no idea of extent

to, or

prepositions in

La Regina
Ho passato

when
and

it

di,

is

vengo
di
di

i"

di Spagna,
Borgondia,
Terra Nuova,

is

connected with the country

used adjectively, and preceded by the

no article

Inghilterra,
l'inverno in Italia, la
primavera in Francia, ed ora

Vino
Cane

Italy is the garden of Europe.

Innumerable swarms of locusts
covered the surface of Egypt.
Corsica and Sardinia are two islands

Mediterraneo,

When

Ex.
rules the seas.

is

required.

Ex.

The Queen

of England.
I have spent winter in Italy, spring
in France, and now I come from
Spain.
Burgundy wine.

A Newfoundland dog


14

ON THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.

29. Before the following islands the article

Candia,

Cipro,

Creta,

Corfu,

not required

is

Capri, Lipari, Malta,

Ischia,

Maiorca, Procida, Rodi, Scio, Madera.

It- is

also

omitted before countries having the same

as their capitals, as towns receive no article.

Passammo per Candia e

We

Cii^ro ritor-

nando da Creta,
Ischia e Capri sono due belle isolette,
non lungi da Napoli,
Venezia stata chiamata la regina
del mare,
Napoli il regno

il

peggio governato

EXERCISE

the music

musica
souls.

^anime.

poeti

deve

its

art.

poesia

i.

great and sensitive

of

'^grandi

^sensibili

industrious.
industriosi.

Drawing

terrors for the true Christian.

vero Cristiano

va.

(25) disegno m.

origin to chance, sculpture to religion, and painting

religione f.
pittura f.
f. caso m. scultura f.

sua origine

of the other arts.

progresso m.
Sardinia,

Sardegna

and Turkey, were

f.

and of poetry is universal

Greece.

in Italy.

Prosperity and dignities

f.

dignit

Inghilterra

f.

Athens

is

Russia

i.-^.

f.

Atene

The love

of music

amore m.

The knights

of Malta.

cavalieri (29)

universale (28)

(25) prosperit

f.

allied against Eussia.

{21) Cfreciai.

colta

England,

France,

Francia

alleate contro

Turchia'i.

pi

altre artH.'^J^l)

the most polished city of

ancora

Poetry

filosofi.

particolarmente

f.

to the progress

still

particularly

(12) terrori

f.

owes

di essere

make men
Hunger and poverty
povert t rendono {25)
(25) fame L

Death has no
morte

prima

of the soul,

re-

V.

are poets before (they are) philosophers.

(25) uomini
is

passed Candia and Cyprus

turning from Crete.

Ischia and Capri are two beautiful
little islands not far from Naples.
Venice has been called the queen of
the sea.
Naples is the worst governed kingdom in the world.

della terra,

Men

name

Ex.

make men
rendono

proud,
orgogliosi

but adveravver-

(humbles them and teaches them) wisdom.

Ignored insegna loro saggezza f (25) ignostt f.
li umilia
ance is always presumptuous, true genius
is unassuming.
modesto.
ranzai. sempre presuntuosa vero genio va.
sity

fi.

ON THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.

15

IMPERATIVE.
Sii or sia, be thou.

him

let

Siamo,
Siate,

let us be.
be ye.

Siano,

let

Abbia,

let

Abbiamo,

let

Abbiate,

have

be.

them

be.

have thou.
him have.

Abbi,

Sia,

us have.
ye.

Abbiano, let them have.

30. In Italian, the imperative

is formed without the aid of any

and requires the pronouns, if expressed, to be placed
the verb
as sii tu, be thou
sia egli, let him be.

auxiliary
after

The second person

negatively,

is

singular of the imperative,

formed of the

infinitive

mood

when used

non parlare, do not

thou speak.
31. In Italian, the definite article

but

is

is

prefixed to surnames,

omitted before masculine Christian names, except

Petrarca pass molta parte della

sua vita in Avignone,
Francesco Petrarca finge di essersi
innamorato di Laura la mattina

when

Ex.

they are preceded by an adjective.

II

Petrarch spent a great part of his

\j illustre

Francis Petrarch feigns to have

fallen in love with Laura on Good
Friday morning.
The illustrious Francis Petrarch.

in

life

del venerd, santo,

Francesco Petrarca,

Avignon.

32. Before feminine Christian names, the article is sometimes

used.

Ex.

La Corinna e la Saffo,
Avete veduto la Maria
33.

Nouns

of

title,

tively, receive the

masculine

Non

teme il valente uomo

ma il morire da vile,

il

article.

morire,

non pensano ai poveri,

come ed il quando ci avvenisse

ti

Ex.

brave man does not fear death,

but the death of a coward.
The rich do not think of the poor.
I will relate to

you how and when

that happened.

racconter.

The

not preceded

I ric<;Jii

35.

when

Ex.

Queen Mary Stuart.

Mary Queen of Scotland.
Duke Alexander.
of verbs, adjectives, and adverbs, used substan-

Maria, Begina di Scozia,

II duca Alessandro,

II

Have you seen Maria ?

by a name, receive the article.

La Begina Maria Stuarda,

34. Lifinitives

Corinna and Sappho.

rank, and profession,

article is

repeated before nouns that come in suc-

cession, particularly before those of different gender,

distinct or opposite

meaning.

Ex.

and of


ON TUE DEFINITE ARTICLE,

16
senno

II

la

del

virtu,

The wisdom and

ler/isla-

virtue of

sapienza ed

il

The

coraggio del ge-

and courage of the ge-

ability

neral.

nerale,

^ignoranza

The
he Ignorance
ignorance and

e la superstizione de-

superstition of

the Indians.

gVIdiani,

EXERCISE

VI.

Cardinal Mazarin was the minister who married

ministro m. che spos
Cardinale m.
Austria, the proud

Iella

poets of Italy.

When (we

(31)

speak) of pronouns,

Quando parleremo
the definite

Italian

in

Italiano

che

'^definito

^articolo

eccettuato

four
great
quattro grandi

(we

pronomi m.

article

when

except

pronouns,

possessive
possessivi

Dante

(33)

Alighieri, Petrarca, Tasso, and Ariosto, are the

poeti

Anne of
Anna (28)

and beautiful queen of France.

altiera

tliat

tlie legis-

lator.

tore,

La

is

m.

si

p.

shall see)

vedremo

put
mette

before

innanzi

followed
by nouns of
(sono seguiti)
nomi

lent
my music-book to
I have
prestato mio
singolare m.
(3)
(33)
Miss Mary. He is always wavering between yes and no.
indeciso
no
signorina
fra (34) s
relation in the singular.

parentela

of England (allowed)
fece
(33) Elisabetta (28)

Queen Elizabeth

land (to be beheaded.)

^decapitare
as

know (how

to

To

to speak.)

parlare

quanto
severance
severanza

know (how

(34) sapere

The

Mary Queen
s

to listen) is as useful

ascoltare

soldati

m.

PRESENT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE.

Che

io sia,

che tu

sii,

or sia,

utile

enthusiasm and
pcrentusiasmom.
{db) per-

of the soldiers.
f.

of Scot-

(33)

Che io abbia,
che tu abbi, or abbia,

ch'egli sia,

ch'egli abbia,

che noi siamo,

che voi siate,

che noi abbiamo,

che voi abbiate,

ch'eglino siano,

ch'eglino abbiano,

17

ON THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE.

36.

when

The

personal pronouns

may

be omitted before Italian verbs,

they

their terminations suffice to distinguish the person

must, however, be used in the singular of the present and imperfect of the subjunctive, the terminations being alike in those

tenses

when

also

placed in contrast

more pronouns

there are two or

;

in a phrase

as

That I may have.

That he may have.

Cliio ahhia,
Ch'egli abbia,

Io avr un premio,
punito,

e voi sarete

I shall have a prize, and you will be

punished.

ON THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE.

37.

Un

The

indefinite article is translated in Italian

before any masculine

nant or a vowel

Uno

noun beginning

by

either with a conso-

before masculine nouns beginning with an

impure, or

tlie letter z ;

Una before a feminine noun beginning with a consonant

Un' before a feminine noun beginning with a vowel as

Un amico sincero,
Un figlio ubbidiente,

sincere friend.
An obedient son.
diligent scholar.
An affectionate uncle.

Uno scolare diligente,

Uno zio amoroso,
Una donna modesta,

38.

The

modest woman.
immortal soul.

An

Vn^anima immortale.

indefinite article is not translated in Italian before

nouns expressing the country^ rank^ title, profession, or any other

Ex.
attribute of the preceding noun.
Sono

Scozzese,

Il mio maestro di musica Italiano,

/Smo cugino Professore alV Universit di Vienna,
Mio nonno era Generale,

am

My

a Scotchman.
music-master is an Italian.

His cousin

is a professor in the University of Vienna.

grandfather was a general.

My

But when these nouns are accompanied by an adjective,

by some circumstance, the indefinite article is then
translated.
Ex,
39.

or determined

Maria Stuarda era una principessa

di sventurata razza,

E un medico celebre.
Nostro zio era un

arcJiitetio Scozzese,

Mary

Stuart was a princess of an

unfortunate race.
is a celebrated physician.
Our uncle was a Scottish architect.

He

ON THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE.

18

40, Before nouns of measure, weight, number, and time, the

Italians use the definite article instead of the indefinite, as in

Ex.

English.

Questa seta bellissima,

This silk is very fine, how much

have you paid for it a yard ?
Last year, bread cost threepence a
pound.
In Sicily, oranges cost little more
than a penny a dozen.

elianto

Vavete pagata il braccio?

L'anno passato il pane costava

tre

soldi la libbra,

Oli aranci in Sicilia costano poco

pi di un soldo la dozzina,
Abbiamo lezione di canto tre volte
la settimana,

No

41.
cento,

We

take singing lessons three times

a week.

indefinite article is used in Italian before hundred,

and thousand,

Ex.

mille.

The

Gli alberi del parco furono piantati

pi di cento anni fa,
Mille anni avanti Vera Cristiana,

trees in the park were planted

more than a hundred years ago.

thousand years before the Christian era.

Ho

venduto

il

mio cavallo cento

EXERCISE
Gulnare,

name rendered

Gulnara (38)

i^eso

the flower of the pomegranate.

have sold
pounds.

lire,

my

horse for a hundi-ed

VII.

by Byron, means
famoso (16)
significa
A true friend is an inestimable
famous

melagrana i. (Zl) vero amico m.. Hnestimabile

She has an uncle a
banker, and a brother an
treasure.
Hesoro m.
(37) do (38) banchiere m.
fiore

m.

times
a
We go
our
amici
m. aneliamo
(40)
that when a European people
hasFubeen remarked),
^Europeo Spopolo m
osservato
anno m.
to

officer.

friends three

visit

(9) visitare nostri

ufficiale

year.

(It

intend

to found a colony

prende a fondare colonia

in a

foreign

volte

tre

land,

they

if

are

'^straniero '^paesem.. se

{.

Spaniards (they build) a convent, if Italians (they erect) a

convento m. Italiani
edificarlo

Spagnuoli fabbricano
church,
chiesa

f.

if

Dutch (they
Olandesi

construct)

costruiscono

(they raise) a fortress, and

piantano
fortezzai.

if

an Exchange,
Borsa f.

if

English
Inglesi

they are French (they open) a

*
Francesi innalzano


ON THE

I'AIiTITlVE ARTICLE.

19

A hundred years make a century.

annifanno
secolom.
ballo {15) salai. {4^1)
m.
shilling
a dozen) (for these eggs.)
(a
I have
paid
* ^queste ova
pagato (37) ^scellino m. (40)
patron
of
Koscoe was an English merchant, and a liberal

theatre and a ball-room.

teatro

(39)

and

art
arti

f.

p.

'

'

^liberale ^mecenate (25)

literature.

(17) (35) letteratura

f.

IMPEUFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE.

20

ON THE PARTITIVE AETICLE.

Devo andare a comprare qualche

alcuni amici

must go and buy some Spanish

books.

libro Sjagnuolo,

Avr

a pranzo con me

have a few friends to dine

shall

me

with

oggi,

riandatemi qualclio

ma

libro,

to-day.

Send me some books, but not many.

non

molti,

44.

The

of quantity

it is

we simply mention

reference to quantity.

Ex.

mangiano mai

a certain

but in the phrase, noi

beviamo sempre acqua,

I Bramini non

we mean

evident

limited portion of the substance bread

idea

When we

connected with the substance named.

say, ho fame, datemi del pane,

the species without

The Brahmans never

The hatter sells hats,

eat any meat.

the shoemaker
shoes and boots.
I have seen iu England very fine

carne,

II cappellaio vende cappelli, il calzolaio scarpe e stivali.

Ho veduto in Inghilterra cavalli

horses.

bellissimi.

EXERCISE

Have you any

We

Germania
wounded at the

morning
mattina

of the

battle

battaglia

feriti

this

seen
some
veduto

have

Alma.

some

soldati

The

letters
lettere

f.

who were

soldiers

che ind. 3.

va.

painter Caracci
pittore

f,

f.

in

(42)

questa

have received

have some friends

Irlanda?

ricevuto

from Germany.

VIII.

friends in Ireland ?

(44) amici

Dublin.
Dublino

when no

partitive article is omitted in Italian

is

having been plundered by some robbers, drew their likeness so

essendo stato svaligiato
(43) ladri m. fece loro riti^atti cos
Never give any advice
well
that they were discovered.
[Non date mai) consigli]).
somiglianti
ind. 3. scoperti

that might be dangerous if followed.

pericolosi se seguiti

some mustard,
mostarda
flask.

Some

and some
f.

friends (were

fiasco

We

have no friends

2iii(]^

me) some pepper,

(Bring
pepe m.
Portatemi

salt.

sale

m. Mettete

faithful)

3. fedeli

in this

country.

questo paese

Put
(to

some wine

in

this

questo

him) in adversity.

^gli

When

avversit

you go

to

andrete in

f.

town

ON THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE.

21

and some pins.

some needles
(Send ns) some
spille f.
comprate (42) aghi m.
Mandated
Give me some cream and
strawberries and some raspberries.
lamponi m.
crema f
fravole f.
some sugar. If we had some ribbons.
nastri m.
Se sub. 2.

buy

COMPOUND TENSES.
The compound

tenses of essere are formed

verb as auxiliary, so7w stato,

literally, I ajn

by using the same

been.

PAST PARTICIPLES.
Siato, m.,

been

Plur. Stati, m.

stata,

state,

Avuto, m., had

f.

Plur. Avuti, m.

f.

avuta,

f.

avute,

f.

GERUNDS.

Avendo, having.

Essendo, being.
45.

The

past participle, after essere, must agree with the

Ex.

subject of the verb.

Egli

The

stato, ella stata,

the verb

when

it is

preceded by

/ libri
Le

He

has been,

glie

Las been.

past participle, after avere, agrees with the accusative of

che abhiamo avuti,

lettere che avete avute,

Ex.

it.

The books that we have had.

The letters that you have haJ.

j
'

CHAPTEE

III.

FORMATION OF THE PLUEAL OF NOUNS.

46.
is

to

The general

change the

rule for forming the plural of Italian nouny

final

vowel into

II cappello, the hat,

II cane, the dog,
II poeta, the poet,
La religione, the reh'gion,
II maestro, the master,

/.

Ex.

I cappelli,
leant.

I poeti.
Le

religioni.

I maestri.


FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS.

22

EXCEPTIONS.

Feminine nouns wLich end

changing a into e. Ex,
47.

in

1st,

La casa, the house,

La sposa, the wife,

Le case.
Le spose.

Nouns ending

48. 2d,

a form the plural by

in i or

ie,

monosyllables,

La metropoli, the metropolis,

La specie, the species,

IjC metropoli.

II

Ire.

re,

La

Le

the king,

Le

virtu, virtue,

and those

Ex.

ending in an accented vowel, are invariable.

specie.

virtu.

same manner

49. Adjectives form the plural in the

as nouns.

EXERCISE IX.*

In the Levant, it
Levante m.

is

strew
^costume m. spargere

and

bodies of the dead,

to place a

moi'to m. p.
(young persons.)
giovane m.

corpo m.

flowers on the

the custom to

2^^^^^^^

m.
bunch of flowers in the
mazzetto m.
chairs,
tables, and
{4:Q) fiore

The
mano
(47) sedia
the drawing-room. The nights
sala
(48) canape m.
charming. The days
our youth.
hands

of

f.

sofas

f.(35) tavola

of

notte

f.

f.

of Italy are

(49)

f.

Kings and peagiorno m. nostra gioventil f. (48) re m.

conincantevole
sants are equal before God.
(Let us imitate) their virtues and
Imitiamo
loro
virt f. ed
ladino
eguale avanti
principal cities
avoid their defects.
We have visited the
of

evitiamo
ofitaly.

difetto

m.

antico

modo

scrivere

bricks,

f.

tiles,

[17) mattone m. tegolo m.

on ivory, and on the leaves and bark of

corteccia^.
pietrai,
avorio m.
[35) foglia f.
our
civil and
We owe to our ancestors

and tables of
trees.

albero

(49) principale citt

visitato

Theancientmodeofwritingwas on

va.

stone,

Andiamo

debitori

antenato

va. [delle

nostre) civile

* Nouns are now given in the singular, also past participles and adjectives,

which

in Italian agree with the

noun to which they

refer.

FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS.

religious liberties.

religiosa

libert

kinds of

tliree

specie

tre

The

f.

of civil wars.

t,

diversa

in ca

qualit

and ga

and

Nouns

51.

in the plural,

porci

when

prezzo m.

in the singular take an h in

Ex.

I ducili.

Le

streghe.

of two syllables, ending in co and go, take an h

except Greco, Greek,

mago becomes maghi when

it

are)

f.

different prices.

differente

f.

the plural, in order to preserve the hard sound.

II duca, the duke,
La Strega, the witch,

(Here
Ecco

guerra

(25)

tea, of different qualities

Nouns ending

50.

calamities

calamit

f.

23

means magi.

II lago, the lake,

Ex.

it

pi.

Greci; porco, pig,

pi.

means magicians, and magi

FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS

24

Obbligo, obligation.

Pudico, chaste.

Opaco, opaque.
Parroco, curate.
Pedagogo, pedagogue.
Pelago, abyss, ocean.

Rammarico,

Pizzico, pinch.

Statico, hostage.

Presago, diviner.
Prodigo, prodigal.

Stomaco, stomach.

regret.
Bipiego, expedient.
Sacrilego, sacrilegious.

Sambuco,

Strascico, train.

Prologo, prologue.

The

Ubbriaco, drunkard.

may

following words

without an h

elder-tree.

be written in the plural with or

Astrologo, astrologer.
Equivoco, equivocal.

Pratico, practical.
Reciproco, reciprocal.
Rustico, rustic.
Salvatico, wild.

Filologo, philologist.

Mendico, beggar.

Monaco, monk.

Traffico, traffic.

EXERCISE X.

The

Turks,

(51)

instead of
ringing bells
to
call
invece [suonare il campanello) per chiamare

Turcom.

their servants,

clap

their

hands.

Have you

mano

f.

servo m. battono * art.

of Scotland ?

They are

Scozia
carit

(52) Tedesco m.

my

friends,

(53)

against

my

suffer

to

many

molta (50)
Tuscany. The

of

[27) Toscana

t.

phlegmatic and persevering. (Save me)

perseverante.
Salvami
{53) flemmatico

are

I can defend myself)

siccome posso difendermi

said a philosopher, (as

disse

enemies.

filosofo

The

nemico m.

contro

hills

(54) colle m.

seen the lakes

veduto
(51)

contribute
contribuiscono

The sunny

charities.
{4^S)

Germans
from

and

ricco va.

public

pubblica

rich,

m.

subjects of despotic
monarchs
suddito m. ^dispotico {50)'^7nonarcam.

much and complain

little, those of free governments

lamentano poco, quelli -libero Sgoverno va.
feed
and complain always. In Italy pigs
on
sempre.
(51) si pascono di

soffrono molto
suffer little

si

German musicians,
Italian classics,
peaches and acorns.
hnusicova.
ghianda f^ [5') '^classico m.. ^
(50) pesca t
The intrigues of the
French
cooks, and English mechanics,
^
Inglese^ meccanico va. (20) (54) m.
^Francese ^cuoco

demagogues.
(54) m.


FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS.

Nouns ending

55.

in

eia,

La
La

spiagge,

le
le

guance.

Except when the accent

distinctly pronounced.

Lm
Im

The
The
The

caccia, le cacce,

spiaggia,
Zrt guancia,

5G.

and gi,

lose

the

in

the

Ex.

plural.

is

scia,

25

on the

falls

shore.

i,

or

when

that vowel

Ex.
The
The

buga, le buge,
provincia, le provincie,

Nouns ending

cliase.

cheek.

lie.

province.

in io follow the general rule in the forma-

change the final vowel into i when the

two vowels of the singular termination are distinctly pronounced,

tion of the plural, and

as in monosyllahles, in the termination rio, &c.

II natio,

The
The
The
The
The
The

II deso, i desii.
lpendo, ipendii,

Lo

zo, gli zi,

L'arbitrio, gli arbitrii.

Il martirio, i martirii,

L'atrio, gli atrii,

57.

When

io is

the terminations
the o

is

uncle.
free will.

maityrdoin.
vestibule.

glio, gio, in

cio, scio, cJiio,

forming the plural,

Ex.
The eye.
The sheet of paper.
The beech-tree.
The watch.
The baker.
The voyage.
The kiss.

L'occiiio, gli occhi.

i fogli.

It faggio, i faggi.
L'orologio, gli orologi,
Il fornaio, i fornai,
Il viaggio, i viaggi.
Il bacio, i baci.

Observe.

wish, the desire.

declivity.

not pronounced as two distinct sounds, as in

dropped,*

II foglio,

Ex.

Tlie native.

i natii,

The termination

is still, by some, changed

but the best modern authors substiand two iV& in some instances, in order
to avoid ambiguity, as in the following words
beneficio, benefit principio,
principle, beginning
regio, royal
giudicio, judgment
which make in
the plural, beneficii, principii, regii, giudicii, in order to distinguish them

into

^'

io

was formerly, and

for the formation of the plural;

tute a simple i in the place of thej',

from

benefici, principi, regi, giudici, plurals of benefico, beneficent

cipe, prince

rege,

king

and giudice, judge.

prin-


FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS.

EXliUClSE XI.

poet has called

the sun aud
poetava,
appellato

The beech
(25)
(57)
woods. Bakers
grow

heaven.

time of pestilence.

in

peste

(53)

ancient

edifices.

edifizio

The

(57)

caprices

f.

hands

mano

There
are no harmless
231

there are

The

Mediterranean.
Mediterraneo m.

compare cheeks
{^Q) paragonano (bb)
lilies,
and teeth
to

to

(57) giglio m.

f.

many
mollo

Poets

(19) sciocco m. p.
stella

f.

the

of

(silly people.)

of

Eome

vi

(55)

eyes to stars,

roses,

(25) rosa

In

of the

f.

shores

m.

(57) capriccio m.

perla

the eyes of

ancient
{bb) quercia I
(54)
rich in time * of war and famine,
[2b) [01) divengono ricco
guerra L carestia L

(51)

pearls.

moon

and the oak -trees

-trees

and doctors

to

the

deiite

m.

Princes

who, in governinnocuo (bb) Principe m. che [nel gover-

f.

lies.

ing their subjects,

are not guided by principles of justice, ex{bl)
nare)
ecsuddito m.
guidato
cite

disaffection.

We

forget

citano scontento m. Si dimenticano

benefitsf more readily than

che
_?n"
presto
(bl*)

offences.

offesa

58.

f.

The

La

following nouns are irregular in the plural

Lc

Slillc, thousiind,

II hue,

tlie

ox,

L'uomo, the man,

mio, my,

wives.
Mila, thousands.
I buoi, the oxen.
Gli uomini, the men.

mofjlie, tlic wife.

mogli,

viiei,

tlic

my.

tuo, thy,

tuoi, thy.

When time

denotes a repetition of the action, or & point in a space of time,

translated by volta; as, the first time,

by tempo when a space of time is meant
it is

di guerra.

Tempo means

t Benefizio, giudizio,
giudicio, vfficio.

also w^eather

uffi-io,

are

la

prima

volta.

It is expressed

time of war, in tempo

bad weather, caltioo tempo.

as, in the

as,

more frequently used than

beneficio.,


FORMATION OF THE PLURALOF NOUNS.
siio, his,

suoi, his.

Dio, God,

Dei, Gods.

59.

Some masculine nouns become

and end

in a.

60.

The

5
6

in

the plural,

Ex.
Le centinaia, the hundreds.
Le migliaia, the thousands.
Le miqlia, the miles.
Le paia, the pairs.
Le staia, the bushels.
Xe uova, the eggs.

II centinaio, the hundred,

II migliaio, the thousand,
II miglio, the mile,
II paio, the pair,
Lo staio, the bushel,
L'iwvo, the egg.

following masculine nouns

in the plural.

feminir

27

When

in

a they

Lamella, the ring,

II braccio, the arm,
II budello, the bowel,
II calcagno, the heel,
II carro, the cart,
II castello, the castle,
II ciglio, the eyebrow,
II corno, the horn,
/Z dito, the finger,
II filo, the thread,
II fondamento, the basis,
II frutto, the fruit,
II fuso, the spindle,
/2 gesto, the gesture,
7Z ginocchio, the knee,
/Z grido, the cry,
/Z gomito, the elbow,
/Z labbro, the lip,
/? Zegrjio, the wood,
JZ lenzuolo, the sheet,
/Z membro, the member.

may end

are feminine
G/i

either in

or

anella.
braccia.
budella.

?ieZZi, Ze

I bracci,
I budelli,

le
le

I calcagjii, le calcagna.
I carri, le corra.
I castelli, le castella.
I cigli, le ciglia.
I corni, le corna.
I diti, le dita.
Ifili, le fila.
_

I fondamenti, le fondamenta.
Ifrutti, lefridta.

I fusi,

le

fusa.

I gesti, le gesta.
I ginocchi, le ginocchia.
I gridi, le grida.
I gomiti, le gomita.
I labbri, le labbra.
I legni, le legna.
I lenzuoli, le lenzuola.
I membri, le membra.

Carro means chariot as well as cart

carri not carra

must be used

for

the plural of chariot.

2

Corni are wind instruments

coma

are the horns of an animal.

3 Frutti means fruit of the same plant

fruit, dessert.

Frutti must be used

frutta means various kinds of

when employed

to express the interest

of money, or the consequences of an action.

4 Gesti means the gestures of an orator, of an actor

gesta

means

exploits,

great deeds.

5 Legni means carriages, ships

6

Membri

are the

members

legna, firewood.

of a society

membra, the limbs

of the body.


FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS.

28

I muri,

7 II muro, the wall,

L'osso, the bone,
Il pomo, the apple,
Il pugno, the fist,
Il quadrello, the airow,
8 II riso, the laugh, the rice,
Il sacco, the sack,
Lo strido, the cry.
Il vestigio, the vestigo,
Il vestimento, the garment,

Oli

mura.

le

ossi, le ossa.

I pomi, le poma.
I pugni, le pugna.
/ quadrelli, le quadrello.
I risi, le risa.
/ sacelli, le sacca.
Gli stridi,

le

strida.

/ vestigi, le vestigia.
/ vestimenti, le vestimenta,

EXERCISE XIL

The

games

and exercises practised by the Greeks were

esercizio m. praticato
(51) ind. 2
(J)l) giuoco m.
health
good for the
of the body
and the strength of the limbs.
salute L
corpo m.
robustezza f.
buono
(60^)
Wives must
rule
by sweetness and gentleness. His
gentilezzaL (58)
(58) debbono governare con dolcezza t
gestures became animated in speaking of the virtues and
* parlando
(GO'*) divennero ani/nato
(48)

great deeds of the ancient heroes.

basket of eggs.
paniere m.
(59)
simple sound
semplice suono
(fell,

A friend

eroem.

(60*)

The

walls of

lira

va.

on the contrary,)
caddero in vece

f.

ind. 3 inalzato

to the

sound of trumpets.
tromba f.

me)
(Bring
Portatemi

after the taking of

presa

f.

in

sei

(59)

for

ora.

(41)

(60*)

Muri, the enclosure of a garden, of a park miira

though la parete and its plural
;

is

dono m.
six pair of

Enea

Troy by the Greeks, form the subject

soggetto
Troia
(51) formano

of a town, also of a room,

8 Bisi

Presents

A man walked *a wager

iscommessa
cammin
a thousand hours. The exploits of -<Eneas

gloves
from Paris.
%ianco ^guanto xn.

two thousand miles

due
(58)
(59)

the walls of the city of Jericho

Gerico

appease not only men, but also gods.

solo (58)
placano
anche (58)

white

me

sent

hnandatohni
Thebes were raised by the
^

Tebe

(60^)

of the lyre

has

used in the plural of

rice,

ol

is

used in speaking

is

preferaLle.

and risa as the plural of laugh.

(1)

bellissimo

the ^neid.

poem,

beautiful

Virgil's

poema m.

The

stars,
animals,
{20) astro (35)

Eneide.

and even plants were amongst the Egyptian gods.

^Egiziano '^{58)
anche pianta t'md. 2 fra
of a deer killed

by

cervo ucciso

Prince Albert.

The horns
(60^)

must obey

Children

Alberto. {25) fanciullo

(33)

(to) their parents,

and pupils

genitore,

scolare

obbedire

(to) their master.

CHAPTER

IV.

GENDER.
In Italian,

all

nouns are either masculine or feminine, there

being no neuter gender.

The gender

may

of nouns

distinguished by their

be

ter-

minations.
61.

Mascoline terminations

are

0, except feminine names, as

the hand

la

Sappho

Saffo,

la

mano,

la eco, the echo.

Me, except

l'arme, the

weapon

hunger; la speme,*

la fame,

hope.

Re, except la febbre, fever

madre, the mother

la coltre,

la polvere, dust

the counterpane

la scure, the

axe

la

la torre,

the tower.

The following nouns ending

la carcere, the prison
la lepre, the hare

il

il

in

?-e

are of both genders

or la folgore, the thunderbolt

or la tigre, the tiger

il

or la

il

il

or

or

cenere,-];-

ashes.

Nte, except

la gente, people

la lente, the lens or lentil

la

mente, the mind; la corrente, the current; la sorgente, the source.

* Speme is used in poetry for speranza.

t II cenere is used poetically, il cenere degli
Wlien used in the plural, it is femiuine.

tors.

avi, tlie

dust of the ances-

The following words are of both genders U or la fante, the

man-servant or the maid // or la fonte, the fountain il or la
;

fronte, the forehead.

One, except la canzone, the song

la Bidone,
I,

Dido

la teiizone,

except la metropoli, the metropolis

la sintassi, syntax

the combat

la Gimione, Juno.

la enfasi,

emphasis

la analisi, the analysis

la tesi, the thesis

and

a few more words derived from the Greek.

EXERCISE

The

tiger

is

(61)

ferocious

XIII.

and the hare

feroce

timid.

is

(61)

The

prisons

timido.

(61)
not check) the progress of liberty.
progresso
libert
(25) dispotismo non arresteranno
Hunger is a powerful incentive to crime. Tears are the
potente
incentivo
delitto, lacrimai.
(61)

of

despotism

(will

mute

language of grief.
Seneca wrote the panegyric of
dolore.
scrisse
muto linguaggio
panegirico
poverty
by the light of a gold chandelier. The rose is the
lume
rosa f.
povert f. a
(3) candelabro.

queen of flowers and the emblem

of beauty.
emblema m. bellezza f.
regina
fiore

(fanatical

and

fanatico

ignorant) people become a terrible weapon in the hands of a

"^terribile ^(61)
ignorante popolo diviene
(61)
The current of the river. Her forehead was bound
despot.
tiranno.
flume.
(61) ind. 2 cinto
(61)

with a
di

The

wreath of myrtle, which

che
ghirlandai mirto

song.^

is

the

emblem

of love.

amore.

Ignorance is the source of supersiipermarinaro {I) {Ql) {25) ignoranza I

(61)
removed from
The ashes of Napoleon were
stition.
Napoleone
ind.
trasportato
3
stizione.
(Gif)
smell, and taste of a
Saint Helena to Paris. The colour,
colore (35) odore
sapore
Sant' Elena
sailor's

pine-apple.

ananasso.

A, except,

GENDER.

31

masculine names, as Andrea, Andrew.

1st,

Names

2d,

of dignities ov lirofessions of men, as

ilmonaixa, the monarch

the poet
il

Feminine terminations are

62,

Pope

V artista, the

//

legista, the

Also,

artist.

il

il

Papa, the

lawyer;

il

poeta,

regicida, the regicide

fratricida, the fratricide, &c.

M, Words

derived from the Greek, as

Anatema, anathema.
Assioma, axiom.

Idioma, idiom.
Pianeta, planet.

Clima, climate.
Diadema, diadem.
Diploma, diploma.

Poema, poem.

Dogma, dogma.

Scisma, schism.
Sistema, system.
Sofisma, sophism.
Stemma, coat of arms.
Stratagemma, stratagem.
Teina, theme.

Problema, problem.

Programma, programme.

Dramma, drama.
Emblema, emblem.
Enigma, enigma.
Epigramma, epigram.
Fantasma, phantom.

Ione,* except

Un milione, a million.
II padiglione, the pavilion.
II piccione, th(5 pigeon.

L'arcione, the saddle-bow.

L'arpione, the liinge.
11 battaglione, the battalion.
II bastione, the bastion.
11 campione, the champion.
11 dormiglione, the sluggard.

U, except,

il

Per, Peru

Lo

scorpione, the scorpion.

II settentrione, the north.

Lo storione, the sturgeon.
il

rag, the ragout.

EXERCISE XIV.

monarch

is

(G2)

is

beloved hj

hit;

amato

Climate

has great influence on the character of men.

grand' influenza
carattere
(58)
Planets are
opaque bodies which derive light and heat
calore
che derivano luce
(G2)
(54) ^opaco ^corpo

people.

popolo.

always powerful when

he
sempre potente allora che

(G2)

from the sun.

The most precious

pi preziosa

clemency.

is

The

No

we have

exercises

che

clemenza.
*

gem of
gemma

a monarch's diadem
(62)
written are easy.
scritto

positive rule can be assigned for other terminations in

are, for the

most

part, feminine.

facile.

e,

which

32

GKNUER,

When we

Have you read the poems of Scott ?

letto

in the prosperity

prosperit
fortune.

fortuita.

emblem

poet.

is

vision.

It is

lawyer

first fratricide.

The poem of Dante

of both genders form

vowel into

is

Words which end

\q

feminine by

Cugina, female cousin.

Cognata, sister-in-law.
Cameriera, lady's-maiJ.
Ebrea, Jewess.
Vedova, widow.

and

ente.,

from a town or country^ ending in

ese,

in ante

as well as those derived

are the

same

for both

Ex.

11 credente, the believer,

La
La

Un Inglese, an Englishman,
Un Fraicese, a Frenchman,

Una
Una

11 cantante, tlic singer,

Nouns which have

the feminine in trice.

cantante, the singer.

credente, the believer.
Liglese, an Englishwoman.

Francese, a Frenchwoman.

the masculine termination tore, form

Ex.

Esecutore, executor,
Imperatore, emperor.
Traditore, traitor,

66.

the

Ex.

a.

Ebreo, Jew,
Vedovo, widower.

65.

(of)

i(62)

Cugino, male cousin,

Cognato, brother-in-law,
Cameriere, valet,

genders.

carried

s'impadron

problem.

Nouns which admit

final

raramente (38)

(62)

^difficile

changing the

conflitto

rarely

is

(62)

serio

difficult

visione.

buono

The

battalion, after a severe conflict,

bastion.

64.

a part of their good

worst part of a revolution.

rivoluzione.
p eggior parte

modestia.

A
(62)
Cain was the
Caino
a

63.

enjoy

the

of modesty.

(62)

pleasure

godiamo parte

altro

restoration

viola

we

of others,
art.

restaurazione

violet is the

take

prendiamo piacere

(62)

The following nouns form

Esecutrice, executrix.

Imperatrice, empress.
Traditrice, traitress.

the feminine in

essa:

A
GENDER.

Harone, baron,

Contessa, countess.

Conte, count,
Dottore, doctor,
Duca, duke,
Gigante, giant,

Leone,

Dottoressa, female doctor.

Duchessa, ducbess.

Gigantessa, giantess.
I,eonessa, lioness.
Ostessa, hostess.
Poetessa, poetess.
Paonessa, pea-hcn.
Principessa, princess.
Profetessa, prophetess.

lion,

Oste, host.

Poeta, poet,

Paone, peacock,
Principe, prince,
Profeta, prophet,
Sacerdote, priest,

The names

G7.

33

Abadessa, abbess.
Baronessa, baroness.

Abate, abbot,

Sacerdotessa, priestess.

o fruit-trees ending in o arc masculine, but

by changing the o into a they become feminine, and signify the

Ex.

fruit.

La

II castagno, the chestnut-tree,

II pero, the pear-tree,
II ciriegio, the cherry-tree.

The

following nouns

l'arancio,

and

date,

cedro,

il

il

mean

dattero,

castagna, the chesnut.

Papera, the

La

the tree

and

pear.

ciriegia, the cherry.

and the fruit,

il fico,

il

limone,

lemon, orange, cedar,

fig.

EXERCISE XV.

An

actor and an actress

is

may

be virtuous and estimable.

[65) possono

attore

executrix

virtuoso

will,
and guardian of her
her husband's
tutore
marito (1) testamento

to

d suo

(65)

son and her daughter.

poet's wife is rarely

di rado

(63)

wild

with cherries.
di

a poetess.

(66)

covered with figs. The cherry-trees are laden

carico
coperto
di (51)
(67)
The duke and duchess (were walking) in the

fig-tree

''salvatico

She

stimabile.

(55)

[66)

passeggiavano

The prophetess Cassandra predicted

predisse
(66)
The Vestals were
but (was never)

avenue of
orange-trees.
viale m.
art.
always the truth,

believed.

non fu mai

verit

priestesses of the goddess Vesta,

(66)

dea

creduta.

Vestalem(\.2

and guarded the sacred

custodivano

^sacro

fire.
^


34

ON ADJECTIVES.

The emperor and empress were surrounded by

ind. 2 circondato

(65)
princesses,

princes

and

(66)

by barons and baronesses, by counts and countesses.

Groves of orange and lemon- trees.

Boschetto
(67)

CHAPTER

V.

ON ADJECTIVES.
68. Adjectives agree in gender and

they qualify
the

The

into a.

plural of adjectives

the rules given for nouns.

The
The
The
The

Oli uomini generosi e dotti,

Lt donne generose e dotte,

69. Adjectives in e or

Una regina

An
An

illustre e potente,

70.

When

and
and
and
and

learned man.
learned woman.
learned men.
learned women.

illustrious
illustrious

Illustrious

Ex.

and powerful king.

and powerful queen.

and powerful kings.

and powerful queens.

the adjective qualifies two or more singular nouns,

put in the plural.

II padre ed

generous
generous
generous
generous

Illustrious

illustri e potenti,

regine illustri e potenti.

it is

formed according to

serve for both genders.

re illustre e potente,

I re
Le

is

Ex.

L'uomo generoso e dotto,

La donna generosa e dotta,

Un

number with the nouns

by changing

those ending in o become feminine

il

figlio

Ex.

sono orgo-

The

father

and son are proud.

gliosi,

La vedova e sua jglia sono povere

ma industriose,
La rosa e la camelia sono belle.

The widow and her daughter

Il ricco ed

Eich and poor are mortal.

are

poor but industrious.

rose and the camellia are beau-

The

tiful.

71.

il

povero sono mortali.

When

the nouns are of different gender, the plural adjec-

tive agrees with the masculine.

La madre e il figlio sono sordi,

I soldati e le loro mogli furono
conoscenti e

The mother and the son are deaf.

The soldiers and thoir wives were
grateful

civili,

72. Adjectives

ri-

Ex.

may

and

civil.

generally precede or follow nouns, taste

ON ADJECTIVES.
and euphony being the best guide on
familiar style, adjectives which denote
s/cZ qualities,

35
point

this
taste,

however, in

shape, colour, phj-

and those derived from verbs or names of nations,

Ex.

follow the noun.

/ cavalieri

The

della tavola rotonda,

Una bandiera

bianca

il

segnale di

kniglits of the round table.

is the signal of truce.

white flag

tregua,

Un uomo

ha Vudito

cieco

blind man has sharp ears.

Milton's Paradise Lost.
legions were never able
to subdue the Caledonians.

acuto,

Il Paradiso perduto del Milton,

Le

legioni

Romane non potettero

soggiogare

Caledoni,

Two

73.

The Roman

'mai

more adjectives qualifying the same noun are

it.
Ex.

or

generally placed after

Un

oratore eloquente e persuasivo,

fanciulla bella e modesta,

An

Una

eloquent and persuasive orator.

A beautiful and modest young girl.

EXERCISE XVI.

The

ancient Caledonians were implacable

hospitable and generous friends.

generoso

ospitale

spires (to) a poetic

spira

enemies, but

ind. 2 implacabile (53) '^nemico

(54)

beautiful painting often in-

pittura spesso in-

(73)

mind with noble and

poetico (61)

Generous minds are capable

capace

lofty sentiments.

elevato sentimento

nobile

of great

sacrifices.

grande (57)

sacrifizio (27)

many

was

for

ind. 3

per

Poland
Polonia

years the seat of domestic

divisions.
molto
sede (50) domestico (62) divisione

An

amiable
temper and a good education are more valuable
amabile [Ql) carattere
educazione
jjregevole

than great

riches

or

ricchezza

che

celebrated

Irish

pompous
pomposo

titles.
titolo

Dr.
(33) Dottor

antiquarian, has proved that the

celebre (72) Irlandese antiquario

provato

towers of Ireland are of Christian origin, and

Irlanda

(61)

^Cristiano ^origine

threefold capacity of belfries,

triplice

uso

retentive

ferreo

Petrie, the

round

(72) rotoido

served in
servivano a

the

strongholds, and watch-towers.

campanile (17)

fortilizio

vedetta

and cultivated memory, an extensive and varied

coltivato
memoria
variato
esteso


36

ON-

ADJECTIVES.

knowledge, and a lively

(62) erudizione

vivace

in conversation.

sliine

conversazione

brillare

imagination, are necessary to

immagina:^ione
necessario per

wreath of white and red camellias,

ghirlanda
camelia
(72)

entwined with green leaves, was laid on the grave of the

intrecciato
verde foglia
deposto
sepoltura
Dandolo, at Milan.
Milano.

patriot

patriottu

The

74.

when governed by

following words are adverbs

verb or adjective, and are indeclinable

number

a noun, they are adjectives, and agree in gender and

with the word to which they relate

Molto, much, very.

Troppo, too much.

Poco,

vie di

few.

Exile is very painful.

He has many enemies and few fiiends.
How many priests and friars one
meets in the streets of Eome.
How difficult it is to learn to speak
a language fluently and correctly.

Boma,

difficile

little,

Quanto, how much.

Egli ha molti nemici e pochi amici,

Quanti ^;re<i e frati s' incontrano per
le

Tmito, so mucli.
Altrettanto, as much.
L'esilio molto penoso,

Quanto

but when governed by

Vimpararea parlare

correntemente e correttamente una

lingua,

Vi mando tre fogli del manoscritto,

e spero mandarvene altrettanti la

settimana prossima,

75.

How

send you three sheets of the

manuscript, and I hope to send
you as many more next week.

LONG, in speaking of time,

is

rendered by quanto

Ex.

tempo.

How long

Quanto temjio contate di trattenervi

do you intend

to

remain on

the Continent ?

sul Continente

How long

Quanto tempo avete studiato V Ita-

have you studied Italian?

liano

76.

LITTLE

is

expressed by un poco

Prendete un poco di vino,

Con un poco di pazienza riusciremo
nella nostra intrapresa,

di.

Ex.

Take a little wine.

With a little patience we

ehall suc-

ceed in our enterprise.

EXEKCISE XVII.

The

Italian painters

(72)

pittore

have

never

been surpassed

^non ^mai (45)

sorpassato

they


ON ADJECTIVES.
have many imitators, few equals, and
imitatore (51) eguale

(74)

(would become) tyrants

slaves

diverrebbero

schiavo

Religion (teaches us)

c'insegna
trials of this life.

vicenda

How many

letters

are satisfied (with

the

their lot

last ?

^durb

He

much

pleased

perduto
cautious

is

a folly.

little,

and
a

lavoro

Many

are very

momento

cauto nello scegliere

is

The labour

follia

choosing a horse, and very

in

earns

a few moments.

in

lost

persons

(with ourselves)
di
noi stessi

contento

years was

many

guadagna (74)

scontento

debolezza

Few

concert

dissatisfied

(74)

weakness, but to be too

many

(76)

'^concerto

in life.)

To be too much
(34)

power.
potere

little

have you received to-day

della loro sorte

spends much.
spende

Many

oggi

(75)

of

they had a
subj. 2

(74)

How long did

contento

no
superiors.
nessuno superiore

support
with patience the
sopportare

to

vita

Not many.

if

tiranno se

;^7

(74)

careless

choosing

in

trascurato

a friend.

Mezzo,

77.

7;r/(/;

when

but when placed before,

Una libbra e mezzo,

Due
Due

used substantively

Qiiasila meth dei soldati jJer irono cU

fame e di freddo,
Ho vmngiato ia met di un arancio,

79.

The

invariable,

pound and half.

hours and a half.
Half a pound.

Two

libbra,

mezzi scudi,

Half

is

Ex.

declinable.

ore e mezzo,

Una mezza
78.

'placed after the noun,

is

adjective bello

is

is
\

'

Two

half-crowns.

expressed by met.

Ex.

Almo.st the half of the soldiers

perished from hunger and cold.
I have eaten the half of an orange.

curtailed of the last syllable before

masculine nouns beginning with a consonant, except an

pure

before a vowel

apostrophe.
fT)}

Un

it

loses the final letter

Ex.

bel j9Z2so, a fine palace,

bello specchio, a handsome mirror,

Bell'occ/iio, a beautiful eye,

Bei palazzi.
Begli specchi.
Btgli occhi.

im-

and receives an

ON ADJECTIVES.

The

80.

adjective

grande

loses the final letter before

mas-

culine and feminine nouns beginning with a consonant, both in

the singular and plural.

an

This

elision does

and receives an apostrophe.

Gran j)opoU.
Gran flotte.

Una gv&n flotta, a great fleet,

Un grande scoglio, a great rock,

Un

final letter

Ex.

gran popolo, a great people,

if)i

not take place before

impure; and before a vowel, grande drops the

Grandi scofli.
Grand' imperi.

gvand'i/jjpero, a great empire.

81. Santo, when it means saint, and comes before a masculine

proper noun beginning with a consonant, an s impure excepted,
loses the

last syllable

santo translates holy.

San Paolo

San

this elision does

Pietro,

Buono

The
I

loses the final o before

vowel or a consonant, an

words beginning with a

Ex.

impure excepted.

Un buon architetto,
Un buon pittore,
Un buono scultore,
83.

when

Saint Paul and Saint Peter.

holy sepulchre.
Saint Stephen.

II santo sepolcro.
Santo Stefano,

82.

not take place

Ex.

good architect.
good painter.
good sculptor.

few adjectives vary their signification according as they

come before or after the nouns they qualify. Ex.

A gentle man.
Un gentil uomo,
A kind man.
Un uomo gentile,
A polite man.
Un uomo galante,
A worthy man.
Un galantuomo,
A tali man.
Un uomo grande.
A great man.
Un grand'uomo,
A certain news.
Una certa notizia,
Una

notizia certa,

EXERCISE

great fortune in the hands of a

(80) /or/Ma

news which

is

certain.

XVIII.
fool

is

a great mis-

dis(37) imbecille
The good people of this great city. Saint George is
f )rtune.
grazia.
(81) Giorgio
(82) popolo
the patron saint of England, Saint Patrick of Ireland, and Saint

^tutelare

Andrew
Andrea

(61)

of Scotland.
Scozia.

Patrizio

Polite

men

(83)

Irlanda

are not always worthy men,

(83)

ON NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.

The Athenians
Ateniese
laurel,

and

39

used (to crown) their great warrior with

solevano incoronare
guerriero di

their great poets with ivy

and

laurel.

How

di edera

alloro

have you studied drawing?

Two

years

and a
*

disegno

pound* of

coffee.

A great general makes good

geierale

caj^.

fa

long

{lb)
half.

Half

i'^'')

soldiers.

soldato.

a
*

Cupid
Cupido

represented
as a beautiful child with a bow and a quiver.
arco
rappresentato come
faretra.
(79) fanciullo

is

The

holy

office

of the Inquisition

(81) uffizio

Inquisizione

was founded by Saint

ma. Z fondato

Dominic.
The countryf of great men.
Domenico.
(83)

Numeral Adjectives
numbers.

are divided into cardinal and ordinal

40

CARDINAL NUMBERS.

84, Uno, oic, a, is used substantively to signify a mem, a

woman, a person, and is the only cardinal number which agrees
with the noun it accompanies.
Ex.
ITo perduto uno spillo di diamanti,
ed una collana di perle,

E uno che dice male di

have

a diamond brooch and

lost

pearl necklace.

He

lutti,

is

man who

speaks

ill

of every

one.

85.

When

must be
before,

the noun

placed after ventuno, trentuno. Sec,

is

in the singular, as

it

it

agrees with uno

agrees with venti, and

Vendnia

is

h'ra,

by

in,

which is used
Ex.

it

comes

Ex.

are rendered in

&e.,

mille e cento, mille e due cento.

the preposition

it

Twenty-one pounds.
Twenty-one pounds.

8G. Eleven hundred, twelve hundred,

Italian

but when

therefore in the plural.

Lire vent'una,

In speaking of years,

in English, is joined in Italian

to the definite article.

Nel mille quattro cento novanta due

l'America fic scoperta,
Nel mille sei cento sessanta sei fa
venduto il t a sessanta scellini la

In fourteen hundred and ninety-two

America was discovered.

In sixteen hundred and
tea

87.

was

8xty-.si.\,

sold at sixty shillings a

pound.

libbra,

The

transposition of the unit before the ten

sible in Italian.

is

not admis-

Ex.

Ifa combattuto in venti due

He

britta-

has fought in two-and-twenty

battles.

fflie,

Furon fatti

Three-and-thirty

trenta tre prigionieri,

prisoners

were

taken.

88.

may

The

conjunction between numbers

Alexandria was founded by Alexander the Great, three hundred

and thirty-two years before Christ.

89. In speaking of age, the verb to have

be,

and the expression, of age,

translated

by quanti

is

How
He

che aveva forse

used instead of
IIoio old

to
is

Ex.

anni, or che et.

fratello ?
Ha venti anni,

diecianni.

is

not rendered.

Quanti anni or che et ha vostro

Una sua figlioletta

not required, but

Ex.

be used after mille and milione.

Alessandria fu fondata da Alessandro il grande, tre centotrenta due

anni avanti Cristo,

is

old is your brother ?

twenty years of age.

of his daughters who was about
ten years old.

One

is

CARDINAL NUMBERS.

41

KXERCI3E XIX.

There are about four hundred famous pyramids in Egypt,

Egitto
circa
famoso piramide
smaller

three great ones, the rest

the

of the tliree

largest

pia grande
broad
high, and 1028 feet
great pyramids is 512 feet
in circonferenza
piede m. alto
planets,
Herschel, the most distant of the
at the bottom.
resto

pia piccolo

base.

Urano
make his

piti distante

[0)2)

round the sun

intorno a

pianeta

Saturn
Saturno
giro
a fare
29 years 5 mouths, and 17 days; Jupiter 11 years 10 months
takes 84 years to

revolution

mette

Giove

and 14 days; Mars,

1

year 10 months 21 days; the Earth,

Marte
(85)
year; Venus, 7 months 14 days; Mercury, 2 months 27 days.
Venere
Mercurio

Virgil

was one-and-fifty years of age when he died at

mor
(89) (87) (88)
Brundusinm, and was buried at Naples 18 years before the
Virgilio

Brindisi

avanti

ind. 3 sepolto

Christian Era.
2

The

Temple

of Diana, at

tempio

Ephesus, was supEfeso ind. 2 sos-

ported by 127 pillars, which were built by 127

tenuto
colonna
ind. 3 eretto
pillar

was sixty

13

feet high.
4

How

old are you ?

(39)

kings; each
ogni
(48)

At Marathon

Maratona[2>^)

small town, distant from Athens about two-and-twenty miles,

distante
Atene
(SI)
(59)
was
fought
the
the Persian
battle in which
ind. 3 combattuto
Persiano (72)
battaglia
cui
piccolo

army,
of a hundred thousand men, was defeated by ten
armata, forte
disfatto
(58)
thoxisand Athenians.
In 1859.

Ateniese

(86)

43

ORDINAL NUMBERS.

ORDINAL NUMBERS.
Primo,

ORDINAI, NUMBERS.

Eighth

his

he,

Elizabeth,

son

Edward
Eduardo

morirono in

tutto

the Sixth, Mary,

minister of Louis the Thirteenth,

ministro

lieu,

The fourth scene the

scena
plauded. Pope Sixtus the Fifth was
the King,

and Queen

(33)
Cardinal Kiche(33) Cardincde

on a Thursday.

died

all

43

of

was named the King

of

appellato

third act

was much ap-

atto

ap-

the son of a poor peasant,

plaudito

contadino

Sisto

and had been

guardiano di porci
the

son of a

tradesman
mercante

circle to the tiara,

Adrian vi. was

stesso Adriano
who added a third

himself;

hog-driver)

(a

John

egli
xii,,

Giovanni
che aggiunse
and wore three crowns,
(began

cerchio

by

mending

shoes)

col

raccomodare

scarpe

and Adrian

life

aveva cominciato

corona

port

was the son

iv.

of a

and had been a beggar himself.

beggar,

mendicante
92.

The

dates of the

month are expressed

in Italian

by the

cardinal numbers, preceded by the singular or plural definite

article

number

speaking of ihe first day of the month, the or dined

in
is

used.

Ex.
On

i, or li venti Settembre, gli Alleati

attaccarono e sconjissero i Bussi
all'Alma,
Il primo di Gennaio si ricambiano
in Francia molti regali,

the 20tli of SeptemLer, the Alh'ea

attacked and defeated the Russians
at the Alma.
In Franje, many presents are exchanged on the 1st of January.

II,

93,
dates,

The
is

preposition on, which

omitted in Italian.

II cinque di Novembre fu scoperta la

cosjnrazione della jolvere da cannone,
Sabato prossimo.

94.

A
A

What

o'clock is rendered

che ora fate merenda ?

che ora faremo colazione ?

is

employed in English before

On

the 5th of November tlie gunplot was discovered.

Ex.
powder

On Saturday

by che
|

ora.

At what
At what

next.

Ex.

o'clock do you hinch ?

o'clock shall we breakfast ?

ORDINAL NUMBERS.

41

The word

95.

in the phrases

by the

ber, preceded

understood, being

Noi facciamo
jranziamo

il

article

all

that

colazione

alle

alle

prendiamo

which translates

ora,

one o'clock, two

is

may be

omitted

num-

which agrees with the word ore

required.
Ex.

le,

otto,

We breakfast at ciglit o'clock, we dine

cinque e mezzo,

at half-past five,

meno un
dicci e un

we take tea
we sup

quarter to seven, and

quarter-past ten.

te alle sette

quarto, e ceniamo alle

quarto,

o'clock,

o'clock, &c., the cardinal

at a
at a

96. Distributive and Collective numbers

Ad

One by

Two

uno ad uno,
due a due,
Tutti c due,
Una coppia,
Una dozzina,
Bimestre,
Trimestre,
Semestre,
Biennio,
Triennio,

otto

couple.
dozen.

Two

months.

Three months.
Six months.

Two

years.

Three years.
Five years, or a

Una
Due

Once.
Twice.
Each, or a head.

Ten

volta.
volte,

Ago

or a testa.

is

rendered in Italian

by/a;

a fortnight, quindici giorni

quindici.

Lasciammo
fa,

A
A

Quinquennio, lustro,
Decennio,

Per uno,
97.

one.

by two.

Both.

this

lustre.

years.

day week, by oggi

day fortnight, oggi a

this

Ex.
la Scozia quindici giorni

We

left

Scotland a fortnight ago.

or sono,

Oggi a

Fra

otto si riapriranno le scuole.

quindici
vacanze,

giorai

avremo

le

This day week the schools will

open.
In a fortnight

we

shall

re-

have vaca-

lions.

EXERCISE XXI.

On
(93)

the 24th of April 1849, General Oudinot disembarked

sbarc
Generale
(92)

at Civita Vecchia with twenty-five thousand

men, and on the

(58)

30th of April the French

attacked
attaccarono

Eome

Roma

and were repulsed,

ind. 3

respinto


ON AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES.
leaving in the hands of the Komans,
lasciando
Romano
(61)

condotto

prigioniere

valoroso

45

by the

led

560 prisoners and fourteen

Garibaldi,

valiant

who were

officers.

Germany, we dined at two o'clock, and we supped at

Germania desinavamo
cenavamo
(95)
(You will find me) at home from six to eight o'clock. (I

Mi

six.

casa

troverete

In

ufficiale.

called

Passai

We

on) your brother-in-law twice.

were in Berlin a year ago.
cognato
da
Berlino
(96)
(97)
entered (in) the cave one by one, but in
proceeding

We

Entramyno
the

girotta

passage
passaggio

by two.

[divenne pi

At what

This day

walked

o'clock does the

*

leave

train

We

spent

London

departure
[11) partenza

pound each,

spendemmo

cambiato.

for

Hreno ^parte
arrivo

were changed.

two

camminammo

largo)

fortnight all the hours of arrival and

(97)
ind. 3

and we

(94)

(96)

{nelV inoltrarci)

(96)

widened,

(96)

CHAPTER

VI.

ON AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES.

In Italian the meaning of nouns

may be

ways, by adding to them certain syllables

modified in various
;

nouns so modified

are curtailed of the final vowel.

98.

The

and imply

terminations one,
size, strength,

one become masculine.

I.a

campana,

II ragazzo,

il

il

otto,

vigour

&c., are called augmentatives,

feminine nouns modified by

Ex.

campanone,

ragazzotto,

The
The

the great bell.

boy, the strong, stout boy.

bell,

99. Accio, astro, icciattolo, aglia, &c., are called peggiorativi,

and imply contempt,

ugliness.

Ex.

ON AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES.

46

Un soldato, soldataccio,
Un poeta, poetastro,

Boldier, a good-for-nothing solJicr,

poet,

La

People, mob.
man, a despicable

gentaglia,
uomo, omicciattolo,

f/ente,

Un

100. Ino,

a poor rhjmster.

etto, iccino, oncello, elio,

icello, eretto,

little

man.

&c., are called

diminutives, and convey not only an idea of smallness, but also

Ex.

that of beauty and endearment.

II cane, cagnolino,
II viso, visetto,
Il libro, libricdno,
Il bastone, bastoncello,

The
The
The
The

Un

dog, the nice little dog.

face, the pretty little face.
book, the small book.
stick, the small stick.
poor man, a poor unfortunate man.
The river, the rivulet.
An old man, a poor old man.

meschino, meschinello,

Il fiume, fiumicello,

Un

vecchio, vecchierello.

101.

Some

adjectives

and Christian names are modified

in

Ex.

similar manner.

Rich, very rich.

Ricco, riccone.
Fresco, freschetto,
Bello, bell7io,

Fresh, rather fresh.

Beautiful, pretty.
White, whitish.

Bianco, bianchiccio,
Maria, Marietta, Mariuccia,

Mary,

little

Mary.

102. Adverbs also admit of these modifications,

Poco, pochino, pochetto,
Adagio, adagino.

Bene, benino, benone,

Ex.

very little.
Softly, very softly.
Well, pretty well, very well.
little,

of these modifications being very numerous, we only give some of

the principal
practice and attention, better than rides, will guide the
One,
student in the application of this peculiarity of the Italian language.
accio, and ino are the most commonly used terminations, and may be applied

The

list

to almost all words, whilst the others cannot be used indiscriminately.

EXERCISE XXII.

in

walk
along a small stream,
Every evening we take a
Ogni
facciamo passeggiata lungo [100) ruscello
play.
which a thousand little fish
You speak Italian

cui
well,

pesce sguizzano

(41)

your

sister pretty well,

parlate

but your brother very well.

This

(102)
piece of music

pesso

must be played very slowly

dev'

sonata

(1^2)

at the beginning,

principio

and

OM COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES.

a

little,

very

little

for

ruy

at the

faster

end.

pia presto
doll

fantoccio

little sister.

little

(100)

fine
little

hands are too small

piccolo

We have given some

is

che

led

by a nice

little

money

to the poor

danaro

dato

(99)

man, who

(100)

47

buy a

I will

art.

for these great gloves.

old

Her

dog, that carries a

little

porta
(100)
strong lad rings the great church
*
(98) suona

condotto

Avery
on Sundays. She pronounces
pronunzia
(98) (93) Domenica.
should read a very
A

basket in his mouth.

* bocca.
paniere

Italian very well, but she

bell

little

dovrebbe

(100)
poor little
Margaret.
(101) Margherita.

slower.

piiX

great dog

CHAPTER

frightened

ha spaventato

adagio

VII.

ON COMrARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES,

In Italian, the comparative degrees of superiority and
feriority are

formed by translating more., pi;

less,

mono

in-

and

than by di or che.
103.

I'/'ian

and numeral

Xon

is

generally translated by

adjectives.

(Z/

before all pronouns

Ex.

vi gente pia credula di quella

che ha interesse di essere ingannata,
La Grecia era pi colta di tutte le
altre nazioni dell' antichit,
Non mi mandate meno di cento lire,

There are none more credulous tLan

those who have an interest in
being deceived.

Greece was more polished than any

other nation of antiquity.
not send me less than a hundred

Do

pounds.

104.

The

personal pronouns following di must be in the ob-

jective case, not, as in English, in the nominative.

Ex.

48

ON COMPARATIVES.
She

J^lla pill dotta di lui,

Eglino sono

stati

But when

pi saggi

di

is

more learned than he.

They have been

me,

wiser than

I.

a personal pronoun is followed

by a verb, of which
it is the subject, than is rendered by che, and the pronoun is
used in the nominative, as in English. Ex.

La

lingua Italiana pi facile che

io

non credeva,

The

Italian language
I thought.

is easier

than

105. When the comparison is made between two mjimtives,

two adverbs, or two adjectives, than is translated by che, and
also when the two 7iou7is compared are only separated by than.

meglio salvare

condannare un
Faceva pi caldo

un colpevole che
innocente,
ieri che oggi,

condemn an innocent person.

was warmer yesterday than to-

to
It

day.

E meglio tardi che mai,

It is better late

I suoi

Her

caplli erano
biondi,

than

It is better to acquit a. criminal

pi bianchi che

Vi s'incontrano pi uomini

che

donne,

One meets
women.

many

106. Before proper names, as in

be rendered by di or che ; when di

than never.
hair was more white than
there

fair.

more men than

other cases, than

may

a comparazione, in comparison of, is understood, and when che is employed, the verb of the proposition, accompanied by non, can be
repeated if the sense of the phrase does not admit of this reEx.
petition, che is not to be used.
is

used, the expression

Cesare pi stimato (a comparazione) di Pompeo, or che (non )

Cfcsar
pey-

is

more esteemed than Pom-

Pompeo,
meno paziente (a comparazione) della donna, or che [non

L'uomo
)

107.
it IS

Men

are less patient than

women.

la donna,

When

than

is

followed by a verb not in the

expressed by di quel che, or che non.

I grandi della

terra son

meno da in-

vidiarsi di quel che or che non si

crede,
II savio ascolta j)i di quel che, or
che non parla,

The

infinitive,

Ex.

great of the earth are less

envied than we think.

to

be

wise person listens more than he

speaks.

ON COMPARATIVES.
EXERCISE
Silver

preziosailOQ)

argento
robbers.

precious than gold.

is less

He

Usurers are worse than

peggiore

[bl] usuraio

perch
(103)
than to revenge, In the

forgive

better to

XXIII.

richer than a.krog, because he

is

ladro.
is

49

meglio * perdonare [105) * vendicarsi.

Eomans were more warlike than literary.
guerriero (105) letterato.

peace

more dangerous than an open war.

is

pace

pericoloso

transient than

beauty.

incanto

is less

grazia

poor than

is

believed.

(107)

si

crede.

tlian to merit.

Many

centuries the
secolo

feigned
[12) simulato

Nothing

more

is

coltivato

more than the graces of the most

allettano

It

charms of a cultivated mind

passeggiero
attract

first

happier.

Niente

aperto

The

is

He

faultless forms.

He

perfetto forma.
owes his success more to chance
piil

deve

caso

successo

more than they

strive to obtain

really

merito.
cercano ottenere
realmente
(107)
want,
and to appear better than they are. You are richer
sembrare migliore
abbisognano

(105)

than

but I

I,

am

Greater virtue
hnaggior
bad, Croesus had more gold

happier than you.

(103) (104)

(is re-

quired) in good fortune than in

chiede
fortuna {105) cattivo

Cyrus

Creso ind. 2

^si ri-

oro

but Cyrus had better iron than

conquistatore Ciro
miglior ferro {106)
early
than late.
Croesus.
It is better to rise
meglio
levarsi di buon ora (105) tardi.
than his

conqueror

108.

The

following adjectives

grees in two ways,

Buono,
Cattivo,

good,
bad,

* Migliore, peggiore,

things
ciali-

War

is tlie

Possession

is

may

form the comparative de-

Ex.

are

pia buono, or migliore*

better.

p)i cattivo, ox peggiore,

worse,

move generally used in speaking of abstract

evils, la guerra il peggiore dei mah so-

worst of social

better than hope,

il

possesso migliore della speranza.

50

ON COMPARATIVES.

pi grande^ or maggiore^\

Graide,

Large, great,

larger, greater.

pia piccolo, or minore,

Piccolo^

Small,

smaller.

109. In speaking of physical size, piii grande, pi, piccolo,

must be

used,

and not maggiore, minore.

// mio giardino e pi grande del

My

Ex.

garden

is

larger than yours.

vostro,

La

luna e pi piccola della terra,

110.

The

is

smaller llian the earth.

following adverbs form the comparative degrees

without the help oi pi or meno.

Bene,

The moon

Ex,


COMPARISONS OP EQUALlTV.
the desire

fare

desiderio

lucertola

crocodile

hirger than the

is

coccodrillo

but of the

lizard,

51

The
(110)
same
Xenophon

of doing better.

fatoily.

(109)
acquired greater

Senofonte

stesso

glory from his celebrated retreat than

celebre ritirata {107)
con

acquist

(108)

(many modern
2

(have obtained) from great victories,

^sub. 1 ottenuto
con

COMPARISONS OF EQUALITY.
111. Comparisons of equality arc formed as follows

SECOND TEEM.

FIRST TERM.

Come, as.
Quanto, as.

Cos or si, as or so,

Tanto, altrettanto, as or so

much.
Tale, such,

Pi, or quanto

Meno,

pil,

the more,

or quanto meno, the less,

Quale, as.
Pi, or tanto pi, the more.
Meno, or tanto meno, the less.

Tanto, quanto, should be used in forming comparisons of quan-

Ex.

tit!/.

Napoli non ha tanti abitanti quanti

ne ha Parigi,
L'occhio del servitore non xmle mai
cos bene come l'occhio delpadrone,
Questa stanza tanto lunga quanto
la vostra e larga,

Ve

lo

descrivevo tale quale l'ho veduto.

Naples has not as

seen
Pi, or quanto pi,
pi, or tanto pi,
giudicare,

uno
uno

e ignorante
j)'''onto

Meno, or quanto meno, studierete

meno, or tanto meno, imparerete,

The

112.
if

first

non

Non ha

ready one

The

less

gonzo

come ne ha

l'aria,

is to

is,

the moro

judge.

you study, the

less

you

will

know.

terms, cos, tanto, tale,

studiato quanto sua sorella,

inhabitants

it.

The more ignorant one

maybe

they relate to nouns of different gender.

Ef]li

many

as Paris.
servant's eye never sees so well as
a master's.
This room is as long as yours is
broad.
I will describe it to you as I have

He
He

omitted, but not

Ex.

is not so silly as he looks.

has not studied as much as his

sister.

Si e mostrato quale l'avevamo giudicato,

He

has shown himself such as

judged him

to be.

we


COMPARISONS OF EQUALITV.

52

La povert

nemico dell'indigente, il dissoluto ne ha tanti,

quante sono le sregolate sue brame,

solo

il

113. Tanto, quanto

sono

114. Al

tanti nemici quanti

par

di,

man

tbe only enemy of the poor

those of the dissohite are as
his unbridled desires.

is

numerous as

when governed by

equally, as,

noun,

.a

Ex.

and are declinable.

loro sudditi,

Poverty

tale, quale,

are used as adjectives,

I tiranni hanno

Tyrants have as many enemies as

they have subjects.

may be

used instead of

cosi,

come

Ex.

tanto, quanto.

Si mostrarono valorosi

par degli

al

antichi Spartani,
sarete ricompensato al par di
vostra sorella.

Non

They proved themselves

as valiant as
the ancient Spartans.
shall not be equally rewarded as

You

your

sister.

EXERCISE XXV.

The

inhabitants of towns are not

country.

She

is

as healthy as those of the

quello
(111) sano
The more he studies the more he wishes to study.
desidera
studia
(HI)

not so

proud

as her sister.

This

orgoglioso
other.

Aristides

was

as valiant

as

valoroso

Aristide
are not so high as they

appear in

pen is as bad as the

penna (112)
Those mountains
just.
giusto. Quello montagna
the distance.
The more

*
distanza.
sembrano
others
(we praise ourselves,) the more we dispose
alto

ci

our defects.

He was such

as a good

to criticize

a criticare
and happy man should

disponiamo

lodiamo

art. altro

dovrebbe
be.

His conduct was not such

as his enemies
la

condotta

The more he

studied nature, the

studiava

were praised as much as

(114)

rappresentarono

felt

veneration for

sentiva

(25)

the wisdom and omnipotence

onnipotenza
sapienza
ind. 3

more he

represented.

of the

their officers,

Creator.

The

soldiers


58

ON 6UPEELATIVE8.

ON SUPERLATIVES.
The Superlative Absolute
By changing the final vowel of

formed,

115.

is

Is/,

adjectives

and adverbs

into

Ex.

issiiuo.

Grande,

grandissimo.

Great,

very great.

Piccolo,

piccolissimo.

very

Little,

Observe
jectives,

little.

Adverbs which

are formed

Learned,

By

final

to ad-

vowel of the

cjrandissimamente.

grandemente,

Great,
Dotto,

very well.

Ex.

and adding issimamente.

Grande,

malissimo,

very badly.
benissimo.

by adding mente

form the superlative by omitting the

adjective,

2dly,

Male,
Badly,
Bene,
Well,

greatly,

very greatly.

dottamente,
learnedly,

dottissimamente.
very learnedly.

translating very by the adverbs molto, assai, oltre-

modo, &c., or by a repetition of the adjective.

Egli ajjpartiene ad una famiglia
assai ricca e molto stimata,
Voi mi sembrate oltremodo afflitto,
Quando mi vide, ella divenne rossa,

He

Ex.

belongs to a very rich aud es-

teemed family.

You seem very much

When

grieved.

she saw me, she became very

red.

rossa,

116. Adjectives ending in io lose these two vowels before the

superlative tennination zWrno

and those ending in co and ^o,

ca and ga, which take an h in the plural (see 50, 51), also
take

it

before issimo.

Ex.
very wise.
very rich.
Larghissimo, very wide.

Savio,

wise.

Savissimo,

Bieco,

rich.

Biechissimo,

Largo,

wide.

117.

A few adjectives

form the superlative absolute in errimo.

Ex.
Misero,

miserable.

Celebre, celebrated.

Acre,

bitter.

Integro, honest.

Salubre, salubrious.

Miserrimo,
Celeberrimo,
Acerrimo,
Integerrimo,
Saluberrimo,

very
very
very
very
veiy

miserable.
celebrated.
bitter.

honest.
salubrious.


ON SUPEKLATIVEB.

54

EXERCISE XXVI.
Tlie study of languages
studio
(25)

is

very agreeable and very useful.

piacevole

Eleventh and Ferdinand of Spain were both very

liouis the

Spagna

(91)

(96)

cruel

and very

perfidious, nevertheless (the former)

title

of very

Christian,

nondimeno

perfido

and

quegli

(the latter)

men have

spesso fatto

and very honest.

very rich

(116)

Very
(116)
mistakes. He
Cattolico.

very often made great

savio (58)

assunse

of Catholic.

questi

wise

assumed the

is

(80) (57) sbaglio.

Michael

Angelo was a (very

2

Michelangiolo

(117)

Napoleon

made

architetto.
^pittore scultore
(117)
very favourable laws for the Jews, and during his reign
durante
Ebreo
regno
favorevole legge

many

celebrated) (painter, sculptor,

and

architect.)

occupied very high posts.

Tlio ancient Gauls were very
occuparono
Gallo
eminente carica.
vain and fond of ornaments, and
wore
bracelets, necklaces,
portavano smaniglia collana
vano
amante

and rings of gold, of very great value.

anello
salubrious.

It is

much

(117)
example.
esempio.

118.

easier to
facile

meno, before the adjective.

11

T^ixx

Il

meno

felice degli uomini,

allegro della brigata,

la pi nobile parte della

grazia

sea air

is

very

(3) aria

teach
by precept than by
insegnare per precetto

The Superlative Relative

il

La

The

valore.

is

formed by placing

il piii^

Ex.
The happiest of men.
The least gay of the party.
Grace

is

the noblest part of beauty.

bellezza,

119. Tlie article

the noun.

Ex.

may

be omitted when pi and meno follow

A
ON SUPERLATIVES.
Kossuth

55

the most eloquent oiator

of our day.
Washington is the greatest citizen

Kossuth

Voratore pi eloquente dei

nostri tempi,
il cittadino pi grande
che abbia prodotto l'America,

Washington

is

America has

proihiceJ.

120, Adjectives ending in ore require no adverb to form the

Ex.

superlative relative.

// maggiore,

il

The

the least,

121.
gree,

greatest,

The

minore,

il

migliore,

the best,

peggiore.
the worst.

il

following words express the superlative absolute de-

and preceded by the

article the superlative relative

Ottimo, very gooJ,

Pessimo, very had,

L'ottimo, the host.

Jl pessimo, the worst.
Jl massimo, the greatest.
II minimo, the least.
// sommo, the highest.
L'infimo, the lowest.

Massimo, very great,

Minimo, very little.

Sommo, very high.

Infimo, very low.

EXERCISE XXVII.

The language

of a people

is

the most important

their history.

sua

Gold

storia.

is

(25)

monument

of

monumento

popolo

the purest and most precious of metals.

puro
prezioso
metallo.

God's power extends

(1) potere si estende

from the lowest abyss of the earth to the

{121) abisso
Men gifted with the best underhighest part of the heavens.
cielo
dotato di
(120) intelstanding and the greatest genius do not always shine in congenio
sempre brillano
letto
(17)
fersation.

The

richest people are not always the

most

contento

The most pernicious of crimes

pernicioso

satisfied.

slander,

is

delitto

it

often

ruins the

ccdunnia essa spesso rovina

reputation of the most honest people,

it

disunites

the

gente {mette la discordiafra)

most intimate

friends, and, in short, is the worst of crimes.

intimo
peaceful

conscience

^tranquillo ^coscienza

fine
is

the

highest

happiness

of

man.


5G

ON SUPERLATIVES.

The

highest Christian virtue, and the most difficult to practise,

^
*
praticarsi

(121)
is to

love our enemies.

Nature

a temple worthy of Deity.

Divinit
tempio degno

is

(25)

The

seat of true

sede

religion

is

the

homage

public expression of

heart.

Public worship

{&\) cuore

[^'2) religione

to the

omaggio

the

is

cidto

Sovereign

of the universe.

Monarca

(62)

ADDITIONAL EXERCISE.

weaken

Adversities and difficulties

(48) Avversit

(57)

^spirito

the faculties and energy of superior souls.

redouble

raddoppiano
changes are always dangerous.

who

ordinary minds, and

indeboliscono

and

lives

indefinitely,

vive

indefinitamente

representations

in

^rappresentazione

in

Europe.

four.

mosaics

Heatrale

two

o'clock,

and

(95)
of

Rome

are

tlje

(53) mosaico

Florence

produces the most beautiful

produce
inlaid woods.

man

1667 theatrical

(86)
at

{simile a)

ever.

The

repentino
like

is

cominciavano

(28)

ended
at half-past
terminavano

most famous

Humanity
(25) umanit
learns
In

impara
France
began

Sudden

Mosaics

(79)

may

a kind of painting,
be called
pittura
{si possono appellare)

{intarsi in legno)

landscapes
being formed of atoms of stone,
atomo
{51) paesaggio
south
marble, or wood. The twilight in the
is much
mezzogiorno
crepuscolo
the figures and

shorter than in the

(106)

north.
settentrione.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

CHAPTER

Vili.

57

58

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

Third Person

Fern.


PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
on the pronoun

pronouns are generally placed

in this case the

Ex.

after the verb.

I teacli you Italian and you teach

10 insegno a voi l'Italiano e voi insegnate a me l'Inglese,

11 maestro lod lei perche stata
diligente, e biasimo lui per essere

me

voi

praised her hecause she

has been attentive, and blamed

him for being negligent.

I speak to you, Henry.

Enrico,

The

123.

conjunctive pronouns are used

dative or one accusative in the

and

before the verb,

ho promesso

le

there

they

is

one

are placed

compound tenses before the auxiliary. Ex.

He speaks French to me, but I do
ma io non

lo cajnsco,
le

when

same phrase,

in

Egli mi 2)arla Francese,

Io

English.

The master

negligente,

Farlo a

59

tragedie

deW Al-

not understand him.

have promised her Alfieri's tragedies.

fieri,

'
EXERCISE XXVIII.

The

milliner has not

maker
zolaio

his boots?

disse

answered

bad poet
(99)

to

him.

My

the shoe-

bonnet.
cappellino

verses

cal-

me

cost

very

(H^)

costare

stivale

(123)
said a

little,

him

sent (to)

Has

me my

sent

mandare (123)

modista

they cost you what they are worth, was

(ceo
che vagliano) ind. 3

Did you speak

to

me

or to her ?

The

letter

risposto

(123)
(122)
was addressed to me, but was brought to
indirizzare (122)
portare

met

them

this

morning

in the

incontrare
recognise

me.

museum, but they

charter,

and they

Men

did not

(We should not believe)

Non
dovrebbe dar
si

(to)

fede

naturally love friends

called

it

Magna

-chiamare Ha

carta

Carta

I have

John's barons forced liim to grant

Giovanni (1)
costrinsero
a concedere

them the famous

Charta.

brother.

galleria

riconobbero (123)
(to)

my

who

those

who

flatter

us.

coloro che adular e {12 o)

love

them

but religion

(25)
*

The

regular verbs will be henceforth given in the present of the infinitive.


PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

60

teaches us to love our enemies, and to do

good
to them.
2
insegnare
ad
[far ^del bene

The book he gave

you

(to)

die dette

he gave

me.

(to)

Have you

bound (than the one)

better

is

{110) rilegare

(122)

di quello che

invited her ?

(123)

The CONJUNCTIVE pronouns

124.
2ia(\

joined to

1st,

it

When

in the following cases

are placed after the verb

:

they come with a verb in the

case the final e of the infinitive is dropped,

the final re

if it

in

which

ends in rre,

Ex.

omitted.

is

infinitive,

and

Aveva incominciato ad insegnarmi

He had begun

il

to teach

me

drawing.

disegno,

Spero (^'indurlo a venire a passare

vacanze con me,

I hope to induce him to come and

spend the vacations with me.

le

2dly, '^'xih present &xi.past participles.

Ex.

In writing to him, you can inform him

of your phan.
Having given us the message, he ran

Scrivendogli potete informarlo del

vostro progetto,
Fattaci Vimbasciata, par a gambe,

off.

2dl>/,

With

Kepeat your lesson to me.

Advise her to go on the Continent.

Eipetetemi la lezione.
Consigliatela

Ex.

the imperative used affirmatively.

ad andare

sid Conti-

nente,

Prestatemi

With

il

Lend me your

vostro temperino,

penknife.

the imperative used negatively, or with the third per-

sons of this mood, even

when used

pronouns />receJe the verb.

Nonmi parlate pili su questo

affirmatively, the conjunctive

Ex.

soggetto,

Do

not speak to

me any more

on this

subject.

Le dica la
Mi dicano
125.

Let him

verit,

quello che

When

hanno fatto,

her the truth.

Letthem tell me what they have done.
tell

the verb to which the pronoun

an accented vowel, or

is

composed

sonant of the pronoun, except of

case the accent

is

omitted.

Ex.

of

is

joined ends in

one syllable, the

gli, is

initial con-

doubled, and in the

first


PEIISONAL I'KONOUNS.

Appena

ci vide, invitocci

As

a pranzo,

CI

soon as be saw us, he invited us

to dinner.

Fammi

il

Do me

favore di tradunx la tua

the favour of translating thy

letter into English.

lettera in Inglese,

Give her the music which

Dalle la musica che sid inanofurtc,

is

on the

piano.

EXERCISE XXIX.
us,
makes us healthy and happy.
Mirth, by cheering
* rallegrare {\2i) rendere [l^Z) sano
gioia
felice.

Did you repeat

me

you see

my

to her

ripetere (123)

occupied.

words

Do not speak

occupare.

when

me when
quando

Give

me

(125)

(thy whole heart,)

tutto il tuo cuore

My father has promised me to

Lord.
Signore.

to

me

take

sailh the

dice
to Italy

promesso

condurre (124) in
In praising you he
shall be able) to speak Italian.
*
*
lodare (122)
potr

(I

Send me the books

by railway
either
[colla strada ferrata)
o
(124)
steam-boat. It was customary amongst the ancient
or by the
{battello a vapore.)
costume
fra
praises himself.

se stesso.

Gauls

to

Gcdlo

immerse their children in cold water

^
^
immergere

make them

strong.

rendere
shall

(to)

insegnare
thee

bless

him

teach

benedire
fui;

Teach

(in order to)

onde

thy son obedience, and he

ubbidienza

science,

and his

life

shall be use-

(124) scienza

teach him religion, and his death shall be happy.

Let them

viorte

me

write to

often,

and

I will never fail

[io

answer

to

non mancher mai)

(to)

rispondere

them.
126.

The English neuter

objective pronouns

rendered in Italian by the conjunctive pronoun

Zo,

it.,

them,

aie

w-hich in this

case serves as a relative pronoun, and agrees with the antecedent

to

which

tlie

it relates,

and precedes or follows the verb according to

Ex.

rules given for the conjunctive pronouns.

62

PHK30NAL PRONOUNS.
U mio

Chi ha preso

ha preso vostro

ombrello

Lo

zio,

Non

Idajete la lezione

Who

has taken my umbrella ? Your

uncle has taken it.
the lesson ? I do not

Do you know

la so,

know
Chi vi ha dato questi

Who

bei fiori ?

it.

has given you those Leautiful

flowers ?

Li ho comprati,
Sulla piazza di Palazzo Vecchio a
Firenze vi sono delle bellissime
statue ; le avete vedute ?

The

127.

final i into e

I have bought them.

In the square of the old Palace

in

Florence there are very beautiful

Have you seen them ?

statues.

conjunctive pronouns mi,

when followed by any

ti,

change the

ci, vi, si,

of the relative pronouns

lo,

These pronouns are written separately when they

come before the verb, and are joined to it when they follow. Ex.
la,

li,

ne.

le,

me hfece vedere,
Nel mostrarmelo, egli mi disse.
Ve ne abbiamo avvertito in vano.
Dove avete comprato questi aranci
Ce li ha regalati il nonno,

showed it to me.
it to me, he said to me.
warned you of it in vain.
Where have you bought tliose
Our grandfather has
oranges ?
made us a present of them.

Tlie keeper

II custode

In showing

We
:

Non posso

prestarvelo,

I cannot lend

So ne sono

jjentiti,

They have repented

Observe

By the above

lian the relative

examples

it

will

it

to you.

of

it.

be seen that in Ita-

pronouns are placed after the conjunctive, and

not, as in English, before.

In poetry, and for elegance, mei,

used instead of

me

Ors

tempo che tu ten

Mirtillo,

vada.

G.

lo, te lo,

ce

lo,

tei,

lo,

eel, vel, cen,

Mirtillo, it is time

&c., are

Ex.

ce ne, &c.

thou wert going.

P. Fido.

Zan.
Dio vel perdoni,
Temo cen privi. Tasso.

Non

ve

mei jermise.

When

He did not allow

May God pardon

it

to

you

me.
this.

I fear he will deprive us of

it.

same pronouns, the pronouns are generally repeated with each verb. Ex.
Niuna accademia si puo attribuire No academical body can arrogate the
128.

several verbs govern the

piena e sovrana signoria sopra una

lingua.
L'uso del popolo che la
parla il sovrano padrone ; i dotti,
gli scrittori, jossono bens mantenerla, illustrarla, pulirla, ed accrescerla,

Lo amiamo

e lo

stimiamo,

entire and supreme control of a

The custom of the
language.
people who speak it becomes an
absolute standard
authors and
scientific
men may, however,
maintain, illustrate, puiify, and
enrich it.
;

We

love

and esteem him.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

G3

EXERCISE XXX.

Fear

warns

us

composure to us.
calma
(123)

exercise, read

me, and
(12G)(127)

having written a

Pope examined
to

it,

and

better.

he has not

The

it

cos

bookseller begged

(127)

Dante

me

(72)

(as soon as) they arrive.

tosto che

it

Either

found the Italian language in

on a throne.

pose

[sul trono)

Courtiers

or lend

its

cradle,

it

m.
and

cuna,

tell

hide

to

it

them.

dicono

gli,

when followed by a

instead of changing the final

relative pronoun,

into e like the other conjunctive

pronouns, takes an e after the final

i,

and forms one word with

Ex.

Glielo dar volentieri,

Glieli /iO spediti, ed a quest'ora deve
averli ricevuti,
I suoi amici gliene parlarono in

I will

give

it

to

bim

willingly.

have sent them to him, and he

must have received them by this.
His fi lends spoke to him of it in

confidence.

confidenza,

130. Glie

sell

from monarchs
cortigiano nascondere
a

storico

the relative pronoun.

send

mandare

the truth, historians alone

The pronoun

you that

fut.

trovare

(128)

to tell

pregare

received the French books, but he will

yet

you

to

129.

sent

it

corretto

inf.

ancora

placed

(99)

having corrected

after

dopo

accertare (124:)

me.

A bad poet

correggere

libraio

to

it.

rimandare
the author, assuring him that thus corrected he would

much

them

scritto

fat.

correct

Benedict the Fourteenth, the

satira contro Benedetto
(91)

*
sell it

you have written the

satire against

(12G)

back

When

I will

to

it

them,

pericolo fermezza allontanare (126)

timore avvertire (123)

and restores
rendere

removes

firmness

of dangers,

is

also used for the feminine instead of

lowed by a relative pronoun.

Ex.

le,

when

fol-

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

64

ama

Su che mia cur/ina

mando

gliene

Avith or

and

fiori,

ed

io

sovente,

Dovete darglielo
avete promesso,

131.

x>oicli

to them, serves

foi-

without the preposition a;

huoni

consirjli,

132.

When

a conjunctive
there

is,

is, it

to her.

used

is

always follows the verb,

it

Ex.

I introduced my wife to them.

I gave them the half.

them good

It is useless to give

ad-

vice.

ecco, here

it

both genders, and

never joined to any other word.

is

to

cousin likes flowers, anJ

I send lier some often.
give it to her, as you have

promised

loro,

Presentai a loro, or loro mia moglie,

Nc detti a loro, or loro la met,
inutile dar loro, or a loro dei

word

know my

You must

voi glielo

pronoun is accompanied by the

must be placed after it, awjomed

Ex.

it.

Eccomi iironto a

Dove sono

servirvi,

gli altri

Eccoli,

Here I

am

Where

are the others ?

ready to serve you.

llere they

are.

Here we

Eccoci giunti,

arc

an

133. Wlien the pronouns myself, thjself himself e^c, only

repeat the subject of a verb which

not reflective, they are

is

omitted, or rendered by io stesso, tu stesso, egli stesso, &c., and

not literally by
L'ho tradotto io,
Gli ho parlato io
Ella stessa

134.

ci

ha

me

stesso, te stesso, lui stesso,

stesso,

sgridali.

But when

riposai

aWomhra

di

ti, si,

ci, vi, si.

una guer-

Ella

si

abbigli elegantemente,
si

Ex.

1 rested myself under the shade of

an oak.
She dressed herself elegantly.
They vainly flatter themselves that

cia,

In vano

Ex.

these pronouns are used as reflective pronouns,

they are expressed by mi,

Mi

&c.

I translated it myself.
I spoke to him myself.
She scolded us herself.

lusingano di persuaderci,

they will persuade us.

resigned ourselves to our

We

Ci rassegnammo al nostro destino,

fate.

EXERCISE XXXI.

The

Greeks, (in order to)

onde

(51)

home, forbid
proibire

(to)

them
(131)

their wives to remain at

oblige
costringere

to

wear shoes

(58)

Your

He wrote

portare

himself (his own epitaph).

n33) il proprio epitaffio

in the house.

sister

scrisse

wished
desiderare

to

see

tho


TEIISONAL PKONOUNS.
pictures that I

have bought

65

Florence, and I have sent Ihcni

quadro
to her.

(126)

Virtue unites men

vice,

on

(to)

the

them with
(131)

inf.

coll'

(130)

(25)
tual confidence
devole 'Sfiducia

by inspiring

^'"<^

mu-vicen-

contrary,

separates

them, by

opposto

dividere

(1'23) col

keeping them (on their guard one against the other.) Here is a
inf.
in guardia gli uni contro gli altri
(132)
(124)
letter for your master, have the goodness to give it to him.
bont
padrone
(129)

Where

are

my aunt's

show

I will

gloves ?

guanto

zia

it to

her,

but

mostrarei. (130)

have brought it to show

portare per
follow you. ! saw it myself.
is.

I sent

them

to her after breakfast.

(130)
can not give it to her.
posso
(124)

it

to you.

Here we

Here

are,

it

(132)m.
ready to

(123)

r/fZ/m. (133)

seguire

Ci, Vi,

Ne.

Ci and vi are not only used as conjunctive pronoims, as

we

have already seen, but also as relative pronouns, and as adverbs,

when they
they

may

However

generally answer to the French word y.

be employed, they follow the rules already given for

conjunctive pronouns.
135. Ci and

upon

them.

it,

Quando

vi,

as relative pronouns, signify

avr pensato risolver,

ci

Sono grandi sventure,

siamo rimediarvi,

Prima

ma

d'intrapreidere

convien

136.

Ora die

non pos-

una

ci

sono, voglio restarci fino

andremo

for, in, at,

AVlien I Lave thought of it, I will

take a resolution.
are great misfortunes, but we
cannot help them.
Ecfore undertaking anything, one

They

should reflect about

alla fine,
vi

to,

it.

as adverbs, ci translates here, and vi there.

To non ce la ho mai veduta,

Xoi

cosa

riflettervi,

Used

cf,

Ex.

(pianto

imma,

Now

Ex.

that I am here, I will remain

here to the end.
I have never seen her here.
"We will go there soon.

G6

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
137. In order to prevent repetition, vi and ci are substituted

Vi

Ex.

each other.

for

condussero, not vi vi condus-

ci

They took you

there.

sevo,
I

Ne

138.

used as a conjunctive pronoun, instead of

is

poetry, or in a lofty style

noun, to render some, any,

from a

them, away,

it is

of,

place.

employed as a

also

in

ci,

relative pro-

for, about, concerning him, her,

answers

It

to the

French word

it,

en.

Ex.
Ne ho
^Q

tanti che

mi

bastano,

parliamo costantemente,

Dopo
Efjli

il

primo

1 htave quite

enough of them.

We

it

speak of

constantly.

After the first act he went away.

He speaks of bini or it with much

atto se ne and,

ne parla con molto interesse,

interest.

Ne

Avete danari ?

139.
in

Ne

English

is

is

Have you money ?

ho,

employed

to

have some.

supply the omission of a noun, which

often understood.

Ex.
Have you any

Italian books ?

Avete dei libri italiani?

Ne ho dueo tre,
Ve ne dar io uno interessantissimo,

Una

One misfortune

have two or three.

you a very interesting

I will give
one.

disgrazia spesso ne conduce

often brings

many.

seco molte,

EXERCISE XXXII.
Flchier

was of low
basso

extraction

estrazione

bishop

having once

vescovo

(96)

alluded
to it with contempt, he replied
(My lord,) there
rispose Monsignore
disprezzo
fare allusione {135)
is this difference between you and me, if you (had been) born in
:

my

father's shop,

fra
you would be there

fool

to say, I did not think of

sezocco (34)
ficult if

you pay attention

fare

foste

nato

It is characteristic

pensare (135)
to

you do not know the way, I

sapere

proprio
ancora
This rule is not difit.

[1) bottega

of a

still.

it.

You

regola

will succeed in

If

It

it.

riuscire (135)

accompany you there.

accompagnare (137)

will

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

was an ancient Roman custom

G7

funeral

to recite

orations at the

recitare funebre orazione

women

burial of old

death of his wife.

morte

(it

[si

Eome

in

was the inventor of

weep

it.

for

it.

who

Cicerone che

Some
Chi

(138)

piangere

abhre-

inf.

in the time of Cicero,

ad usare)

si dice

one at the

Stenografia ossia

cominci

said)

is

first to recite

(139)
or the art of writing in abbre-

Stenography,

was used

viation,

viatura

was the

Cajsar

Cesare inch 3

funerale

Are there any public

pubblico (50)
Here some nuts

s.

laugh at

some

it,

ridere (138)

libraries in this

town?

biblioteca

There are

are

three.

(139)

fine

to

your

take some yourself,

bello noce

(132)

and give some

{\2A.)

{n^) per

voi

little sister.

(100)

art.

ON POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
SINGULAR.
MASCULINE.

PLURAL.

FEMININE.

MASCULINE. FEMININE.

Mio^

nna,

miei,

mie,

Tuo,
Suo,
Nostro,

tua,

tuoi,

tue.

thy, thine,

sua,

suoi,

sue.

his, hers, her, its.

nostra,

nostri,

nostre,

our, ours,

Vostro,

vostra,

vostri,

vostre.

your, yours,

Loro,

loro,

loro,

loro.

their, theirs.

my, mine,

140. In Italian, possessive pronouns agree with the thing j90ssessed,

by the
II

and not with the possessor; and are generally preceded

Ex.

definite article.

mio dovere,

la vostra giustizia, lo

My

duty, your justice, their virtues.

patria pi della sna

He

loved bis country more than his

loro virt.

Egli

amo

la stia

vita,

141.

life.

The

article is

omitted when the pronouns, loro excepted,

precede nouns of kindred or rank in the singular.

the article

is

used.

Ex.

In the plural,

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

C8
Tua madre

Tliy mother and tLy sister were at

Ina sorella furono a

casa di mia zia,

Sua Ifaest la Ber/ina

my

cugino abita in Firenze,

Le mie sorelle ed i miei fratelli sono
adesso in Italia,

Il loro

When

142.

by an

My

is

lettera

La sua

vostro

al

per

fratellino

143.

The

dis-

His disagreeable
pleases me.

gave your

may

possessive pronouns

ter-

Ex.

brother a letter for

little

is

sister

always

dis-

be placed after the noun,

placed before the noun instead of

Ex.

the pronoun.

L'Eccellenza vostra,
II padre nostro,
II dover mio, Vonor suo,

The

preceded

you.

mi fa sempre

in this case the article

144.

is

excellent father, and your affectionate mother.

voi,

sorellaccia

now

Your

una

jnacere,

and

brothers are

prefixed to the pronoun.

vostro ottimo j^ndre, e la vostra

dato

my

by a diminutive or augmentative

amorosa madre,

Ho

and

sisters

in Italy.

the noun of kindred in the singular

adjective, or modified

mination, the article

II

aunt's.

Her Majesty Queen Victoria.

Their cousin lives in Florence.

Vittoria,

Your Excellency.
Our father.

My

duty, his honour.

when they

possessive pronouns require the article

precede the following nouns of kindred.

II mio genitore,

La mia genitrice,

instead ofjmdre,

Il tuo germano,
La tua germana,
Il suo sposo,
Il suo consorte,

La
La

vostra sposa,
vostra consorte,

,,

madre,

father.

mother.

fratello, brother.
sorella,

sister.

marito,

husband.

moglie,

wife.

EXEUCISE XXXIII.
Cornelia, the mother of the Gracchi,

said

to

disse

as

she showed (to) them her sons,

"There

her friends
(140)

are

f.

my jewels."

gioiello.
mostrare
(132)
(131)
Holiness Pope Adrian the Fourth, the only Englishman
[III) Santit
solo
Adriano {l\)

mentile

His

(who ever attained)

mai pervenuto

che sia

to that dignity, rendered

rese

his

memory

(140) memoria


POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

G'J

infamous by condemning Arnaldo da Brescia

be burned.

to

*
bruciare.
ad
infame
" If you lose your colours,
round
rally
to
be sure
raccogliervi intorno
stendardo [non mancate)

my

white

feather

you

ever

will

find

sempre

pennacchio

road

to

cammino

di

in the

it

(12G) su

honour and glory," were the celebrated words of his Majesty,

ind. 3

(35)

Henry

celebre

(141)

before the

the Fourth, to his troojjs

truppa innanzi

Give

my

compliments

Fare

your

to

saluto

Jews, that

the

was distinguished by
per
distinto

their

Cato,
Catone

surnaraed the censor,

censore

and

inflessibile integrit.

the noun, preceded by the possessive pronoun,

Aspetto con impazienza vostre

He

suo parere che non vi andassimo,

by

il

La

mio,

il

consented to it for my sake.

his opinion that we should

was

not go.

il

tuo,

non prendete

pi grande

&c.

these pronouns agree in gender

their antecedent.

vostro cappello,
mio,
il

sua casa

It

possessive pronouns mine, thine, &c., are rendered

and number with

Ecco

is

not required

I expect impatiently letters from you.

lettere,

egli vi consent,

Era

The

is

Ex.

before the pronoun.

146.

the

his inflexible integrity.

used in a vague and indefinite sense, the article

in Italian

obstinacy
ostinazione

(17)

costume

Per amor mio

your aunt.

ardent love of his country,

his

austerity of his manners,

When

to

Ebreo

increased with their misfortunes.

sventura.

145.

and

(141)

aumentare

austerit

battaglia

(142)

has been) remarked of

rimarcare
Fu

(It

little sister

of Ivry.

battle

della

Ex.

Here

is

your hat, do not take mine.

His house

is

larger than ours.

nostra.

Conosco

suoi fratelli,

ma

non

know

his brothers, but not yours.

vostri,

147.

When

these pronouns

article is usually omitted.

Ex.

accompany the verb

essere, the


70

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

Questi fogli sono miei,

,
t>i cJd questa scatola ?
sua,
Le vostre cugine son mie scolare,

148.

The

These papers are mine.

Whose box is this? It is hh.
Your cousins are pupils of mine.

expressions a friend of mine, a sister of yours, &c.,

by un mio amico, una vostra sorella, &c, one of

more specified meaning, is rendered by
im dei miei amici, &c. Ex.
are rendered

my friends,

&c., having a

Scrivo in questo momento ad un mio

amico,
un mio nemico,
Un dei miei amici ha sposato un'amica vostra,
Un dei miei servi ammalato,

When

am

writing just now to a friend of

mine.
is an enemy of mine.
One of my friends has married a
I

He

friend of yours.

One

of

my

servants

is sick.

bj' a numeral
by a demonstrative or an indeterminate pronoun, with
the exception of tutto, or when followed by a noun in the vocative,
the article is omitted.
Ex.

149.

the possessive pronouns are preceded

adjective,

Due

Two

Datelo a questo mio amico.

Ila venduto alcune sue terre,

Give

rdici condiscepoli sono orai^rofessori neir Universit,

Ogni nostra speranza.

Tutte

le vostre

ragioni non mi appa-

my

of

fellow-students are

now

professors in the University.

it

to this friend of

mine.

He has sold some of his estates.

Our every hope.
All your reasons do not satisfy me.

gano.

My

Mio carissimo amico,

dearest friend.

EXERCISE XXXIV.

The customs

more simple and healthy

of our ancestors were

antenato ind. 2

than

ours.

friend of

mine has been appointed Professor of

(103) (146)

(148)
Greek, in place of a brother of theirs.

iiominare

The

the glory

It is

is his.

my

zoppo

All her thoughts are

opinion, and

(147)
so lame,
clic

labour

was mine,

travaglio ind. 3 [lAl)

vece

we cannot

it is

vours
"(146)

centered in her son.

concentrare

also.

drive

[andare

One

of our horses

is

'pure.

in legno)

to-day.

do
fare

this
lo

for

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

71

your sake.
One of my favourite studies is lotany. I was at
1
2
botanica.
(145)
your house tbis morning.
I have seen one of your nieces, and
"
^
(148) nepote
have spoken to her. The ribbons that you have sent to tlie

nastro

mine and not yours.

milliner are

modista

If

take mine.

Your

sister's

exercise

150. In Italian,

lia

i\iQ

male

when

Ex.
perduto

henl nella rivolu-

He

When

in

Put your purse

your pocket.

physical qualities, or any part of the dres?

is

by the verb

falls

on

its

not translated, and the verb

guasta

la salute col

troppo stu-

diare.

Egli s'invgoriscela, mente collo studio

subject,
is

used

He

ruins Itis health with too much

study.
lie strengthens his mind with the

della filosofia,

study of philosophy.

Eglino si bagnarono \ piedi nel fiume,

Si mise il mantello e usc,

152. But

when

They bathed

He

pronouns in the dative

II perrucchiere

gli taglio

Il chirurgo mi rimise

mano,

il

case.

capelli,

braccio,

E in questo modo scdvo loro la vita,

is

their feet in the stream.

put on his cloak and went out.

the action of the verb

the possessive pronoun

strinsi la

in

Ex.

reflectively.

Le

property in the revolu-

mo.

English the possessive pronoun precedes a noun,

the p)ossessive pronoun

siibject,

lost liis

foot pains

Turn your eyes towards the dome.

or body, if the action expressed

si

has

tion.

My

al licde,

indicating mental

Egli

be omitted and

there can be no doubt of the pos-

Mettete in tasca la lorsa,

Volgete gli occhi alla cupola,

151.

may

possessive pronouns

zione,

Ho

better written than ours.

is

(110)

replaced by the article

sessor.

fan,

ventaglio

(146)

Egli

you do not find your

(147)

is

not directed to

its

replaced by the conjunctive.

Ex.
The hair-dresser cut his hair.
The surgeon set my arm.
I pressed her

And

in this

hand.

way he saved

their

life.


72

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

EXERCISE XXXV.

He

his

lost

a naval engagement.
"navale ^battaglia

life in

perdere (loO)

having

a sleeping Cupid, (broke off) its arms and

dormente Ciqoido
ruppe
(152)

sculptiiretl

scolpire

hnried

the

Michael Angelo

statue

when

was found,

it

(it

sotterrare
to be
a precious
relic
of
che fosse
reliquia
soon proved it to be his own
*
hen tosto
(147)

when

pocket

was thought)
si credette

Grecian art;

but the sculptor

Greco

had my purse my
(150)
yonr house. He cut my hair too

I left

[sono uscito di)

work.
opera

in

(152)

^neas

p.

abandoned
his wife and saved liis father.
corto
Enea abbandonare (150)
salvare
A brave soldier having lost both his arms, his colonel offered
short.

colonnello offrire

(96) (150)
(to)

him a guinea; "You

(123)

ghinea

my

hand.

far male a [152)

The

153.

my

Do

not

sub. 1

gloves," answered the soldier.

rispose

hurt

lost

have

think, perhaps, that I

(61)

(Take off) your

Levare (151)

mettere

boots.

stivcde

(Put on) your coat.

possessive pronouns

il

vestito.

mio,

il

tuo, &c., are

sometimes

used substantively, and signify, in the singular, one's iwoperty,

share, &c., and in the plural, one's friends^ relations, supporters,

party, followers,

Szc.

He

EfjU ha scialacquato tutto il suo,

Finche spendete del vostro,
I nostri si son portati valorosamente,

has squandered

all

his fortune.

As long as you spend your own monei/.

Our troops conducted themselves
valiantly.

Andra a

passare Vinverno coi suoi a

Parigi,

Quando
154.

nostri

avranno

When

h>'s,

tutti votato,

her^

He

will go to spend the winter in

Paris with his relations.
our supporters shall all have
voted.

When

do not refer

to the subject of the vert, or


POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

when

there are two nonns of different genders in

position, in order to avoid ambiguity, the

di

lei,

i3

of him,

She has taken

Ella Jtapreso il d lui omhrelo,

Egli ama sua sorella ed i di hi figli,
Antonio trovT) il di lei anello in un

his umbrella.
loves his sister and her sons.

He

Anthony found

viale del parco,

The

lui,

Ex.

of her, replace suo, sua.

155.

same pro-

tlie

prononns di

lier

ring in a path in

the park.

expressed by the possessive pronouns

relation

is

sometimes conveyed in Italian by means of the conjunctive pro-

nouns in the dative case.

E(]U mi

e fratello, instead of,

mo fratello,
Io non gli sono amico, instead
non sono suo amico,
10

le

son figlia, instead

of,

Ex.
Egli

He

is

my

brother.

Io

am

not his friend.

Io son sua

am

her daughter.

of,

figlia,

156. One^s

own

is

rendered hy iir oprio

one of the possessive pronouns, my,

to

but

To
I

may

added

is

be trans-

Ex.

lated with the possessive pronoun, or alone.

11 confessare i propri /aHt il ijrlmo
passo verso Vemenda,
Llio vedxdo coi miei propri, or, coi

own

if

thy, &c., it

confess one's

own

fiiiills

is

the

first step towards amendment.

have seen him with my own eyes.

propri occhi.

Me

lo

porse

colle

He

sue proprie, or, colle

gave

it

to

me with

his

own hands.

sue mani,

EXERCISE XXXVI.

He

is

charitable

to

caritatevole verso

(They endeavoured)

to

(every one) except to his family.

tutti
verso (153)

persuade

me

not to

S'ingegnarono
I

know

her

by

am

but

storico

own.

(153)

not a friend of hers.

conosco (123) di vista

historian

my

claim
ripetere

sight,

The

(148)

Suetonius relates, that almost

Svetonio narrare
quasi

all

Caesar's assassins

own hand. We arc seldom

di
raramente
(134)
(156)
conscious of our own defects.
I have spent Christmas with
consapevole
passare Natale
(156) difetto
killed

themselves with their

uccisero


74

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.

my

family.

She

lent

mc

reward
her honesty.
ricompensare [l-)
her sister-in-law.
cognato
(154)

The games
her

seal.

liis

{\5i)

(153)

Their

He

He

my

is

gave her

liis

purse to

diede

sigillo

brother, and has married

sposare
are always beaten

sailors

by

ours.

marinaro

ended, she distributed the prizes and crowns with

terminare
premio

own hand.

Remember that he

(156)

is

ref.

your relation.
(155) parente.

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
157. Questo, this; cotesto, quello,

</?af,

used as adjectives,

agree with the nouns they accompany, and, as pronouns, they

Ex.

agree with the noun they represent.

Questa chiesa,

This churcli and that college.

Give me a dictionary, but not that
of youv sister.
The tyrants of Italy, and those of
Hungary and Poland.

e quel collegio,

Datemi un dizionario, ma non

quello

di vostra sorella,

J tiranni

Un-

d'Italia, e quelli di

gheria e di Polonia,

158. Questo* indicates a thing near the speaker, either with

regard to time or place.

Questo cacio,

Ex.

questa crema,
Questi ^7tt, e queste ^esc7(C,
e

This cheese and this cream.

These figs and these peaches.

159. Cotesto points out an object near the hearer, and distant

from the speaker.

Ex.
Where

did you buy that watch and

that chain ?
girls are very

Dove

avete comprato cotesto oriolo.

e cotesta catena ?
Cotesti ragazzi, e coteste ragazze

Those hoys and those

intelligent.

sono molto intelligenti

160.

who

Quello

points out an object alike distant from the person

speaks and the person addressed.

Quello, and

its

plural quegli, are used before masculine nouns

beginning with a vowel or an

in the singular,
* Questa

may

followed by a consonant; quel,

and quei or que\

in

the plural, are used before

be abbreviated to sta before the words mattina, sera, notte

as stamattina, stasera, stanotte.

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.

The formation

words beginning with a consonant.

nine

That garden and

Quel giardino, e queIl'o?"f ajipartengono a quei/ra^/,

Quello scudo, e quegli scJnopjn sono

to those

tliat

are very

ancient.

We

quelle ciriege e quelle

bought those cherries and those

olives at the fruiterer's.

olive dalfrutlaiolo,

These adjectives are generally repeated before each

Ex.

161,

noun.

These

cups and saucers do not

match.
These tumblers and wine-glasses are

Queste tazze, e questi piattini sono

scompagnati,
Questi bicchieri, e questi hicchierini
sono di cristallo di Boemia,

of-

Bohemian

glass.

Questi^ cotesti, quegli, are used often in the nominative

162.

singular to express

man, that man,

this

this one, that

reference to things, this one, that one, are rendered

testo,

orchard belong

monks.

That shield and those guns

anticJiissimi,

fu

by

one; in

questo, co-

Ex.

quello.

Questi

of the femi-

Ex.

is resfular.

Comprammo

75

felice,

This

quegli or cotesti

sfortunato,

man was

fortunate, that one

unfortunate.

who

Interrogandolo cJd questi,

Asking

Quale

AVliich of these

questo

di questi
quello ?

163.

The former,

volete

mazzolini,

liim,

you have,
the

latter,

may be

is this

may be

minatives in the singular.

will

in speaking

used, but only as masculine no-

Ex.

Un

clima freddo e asciutto pi

salubre di un clima caldo; quello
invigorisce, mentre questo infievo-

cold and dry climate is more

healthy than a warm one the
former invigorates, while the latter
weakens.
Racine and Comeille have represented men, the former as they
are, the latter as they should be.
;

lisce,

lacine e Corneille

one ?

expressed by quello,

questo, with reference mostly to inanimate things

of persons, quegli, questi

man

two bouquets

this one or that

hanno rappresen-

tato gli uomini, quegli quali essi

sono, questi qucdi dovrebbero essere,

EXERCISE XXXVII.

That brevity which

brevit

che

a defect of style.
stile

weakens

the vigour of a

[indebolisce)

The models

of these statues

narration.

Is

narrazione

were
ind. 2

Roman


DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.

7C

That spendthrift
scialacquatore
tradesman. When Crossus

peasants.

ruined his family and that

rovinare
(160)

lias

contadino
poor

showed

treasures, the latter said, Sire, if another

alcuno

(163) disse
than yours, he will be

Solon his vast

Solone

comes with better iron

viene

master of this gold.

(1^8)

This

padrone

(103)

us that honesty
teaches
2)robit
insegnare (123)

know

morning that we

this

sapere (158*)

(to)

mostrare

bottegaio

the best policy.

is

fiction

favola

We

did not

[120)politica

should sec
you this evening.
(^avremmo veduto)

can not distinguish the bones of your father from those of

distinguere
posso

Diogenes

Alexander, as the latter asked (to)

mentre (163)
what he saw
the philosoiher
ina heap of bones. I have
che
[ci
riguardasse)
mucchio
fdusofo

his slaves, said

to

schiavo

bought two shawls,

this

scialle

That

one

and

bigotry,

pride,

We

are

body and

idleness,

soul, the

command.

164.

Those

knives,

(159)

coltello

forks,

this

man.

Costei,

this

woman.

Costoro,

these men, these

Colui,

that man.

Colei,

that

Coloro,

those men, those

me.

caratterizzare

and spoons.
cucchiaio

women.

woman.
women.

are always used absolutely^ that

without reference to an antecedent

style,

for

should obey, the

dovrebbe

(161) forchetta

Costui,

The above pronouns

che

former

(163)

stolto

latter

is

which characterize

pigrizia

[&Q) orgoglio {l&\.)higotteria

fools.

you and that one

is for

(162)

is,

they are used in a familiar

and sometimes express contempt, when they correspond

to

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.

word

the English

fellow, loretch

77

they always refer

to

pcsons.

Ex.
Elettra

Io

serbo,

ancora

Oreste,

Nomar

2n madre

we

dare uo longer call our mother,

plunged into the breast of her con-

Al-

dajipoi.

I stili keep that dagger,

Orestes, which the woman, whom

Electra

Quel ferro io serbo, che al marito

in petto Vibri) colei, cui non osiam
fieri.

sort,

Here Electra makes use of the word colei, in speaking with horror
of ber mother, by whom her father had been killed.
Che farem noi, diceva l'uno aW alWhat shall we do with this fellow
said one to the other.
not follow that woman's

tro di costui ?

Non

Do

seguitar l'esempio di costei,

ex-

ample.
Coloro sono appunto usciti di pri-

Those fellows are just out of

prison.

gione,

Colui

mi

disse che

non era

That man

ricco,

that he was not

told

rich.

165. These pronouns, followed hy the relatives che or

express the

man

who, the

woman

&c., with no reference to an antecedent.

Colui che veramente ama la virt la
pratica,
Colei che lascio i comodi di una vita
agiata, per andare negli ospedali
dell'

ed

Oriente,

ad assistere

il

quale^

who, he who, she who, those who,

He who

Ex.
really loves virtue practises

it.

She who

left

the comforts of home,

to attend the sick

malati,

and wounded, in

the hospitals of the East.

i feriti.

Coloro che offendono, raramente perdonano a coloro che essi hanno

166.

He

Those who

rarely

forgive

ivho, she ivho, those ivho, that ivhich, those which,

in reference to an antecedent, are expressed

che, quella

offend,

those they injure.

che, quelle

che,

hy

used

quello che, quelli

according to the preceding noun.

Ex.
Tutti i soldati ricevettero una medaglia, quelli che si distinsero ricevettero

una

croce,

Il tappeto che vi mostrai,

quello

Ali the soldiers received a medal,

those who distinguished themselves received a cross.
The carpet I showed you is that

che abbiamo portato di Turchia,

which we brought from Turkey.

EXERCISE XXXVIII.

That man has chosen a wife with

(164)

scelto

his

(150)

eyes,

hut not with his

78

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS

reason.

Fortune often

pursues

those

{corre dietro a)

He who
(165)
bog. The man

the capricious goddess.

is

often obliged to

a mendicare

not

proud

too

is

who do

seek
cercare

(165)

work

to

orgoglioso per lavorare

who

assassinated

Henry

(165)

the Third, King of France, was a monk, by name James

ind. 2
di
Giacomo
frate

Clement.

" (How
Donde

liked

by every

grata a

Dante

is it)

that this fellow,

avviene

(164)

one, and

{non

one another."

Common
2

amare
rarely

meet.
That man
incontrare
(164)

the eyes

is

who resemble

happy are

so.

True

sense

is

si

that which

we most

(igc)

^j/ii

That which

pleases (to)

Those who believe themselves

(165)

taste

is

(134)

that which

leads

(166)

conduce

understand and appreciate that which

apprezzare
girls

(to)

seccatore

gusto

lo

is

(one another)

somigliare

bore.

not always beautiful.

(57)

fool,

a prince asked

is

lo siate)

(165)

like

is

saocco sub. 1

are not ? "

you

tutti

the poet replied, " Those

who

is

beautiful.

are very clever, particularly she

(100) ragazza

the

mind

These

who

to

little

(161)
repeated the

(166)

hymns.
inno.

167.

That which, what, when

not referring to any ante-

cedent noun, are rendered by ci che, quel che^ or quello che.

Ci die

superfluo spesso costa

di quello

pi

clie necessario,

Ci che mi dite non, mi sorprende,

Ex.

That whicli is superfluous often costi

more than that which is necessary.
What you tell me does not surprise
me.

168. That, this, so,

are translated

by

ci,

when

which

is

referring to an anterior sentence,

never joined to a noun.

Ex.

DEMoNSTPwVTIVE PRON'OUXS.
Di

ci

parleremo a miglior comodo,

Kon mi

ricordo di aver

mai

detto ci

Ci non sta lene,

shall speak of tliis at a more

convfuieiit time.
remember liaving ever said

'\^''e

I do Dot
that.

That

169. All, all that, all wiucii,

170.

Di

Le expressed by

All that glitters

is

tiilto

not gold.

I said all that 1 could to

him from his intention.
I will do

All those, all those which,

tutti quelli che.

not well.

is

may
Ex.

ci che, tutto quello che, or quanto.

Tutto ci che risplende non oro,

Dissi quanto seppi onde distorlo dal
stto proponimento,
Io faro tutto ci che, tutto quel che
or quanto dipender da me,

79

all

dissuade

that depends on nie.

are expressed

by quanti,

Ex.

quanti ho sentiti parlare, nessuno

mi piace.
Tutti quelli che, or (\\\m\\ predicano
il vancjelo dovrebbero seguirne i

Of all those I have heard speak, not

one pleases me.
All those that preach the gospel
should follow its precepts.

precetti,

171.
phrase,

Which, used in
expressed by il

is

Egli parti senza congedarsi,

sorprese

il

reference

che

to

a clause of a precedine

Ex.

che.
ci

He

left

without taking leave, which

surjirised us all.

tutti.

Quando ritorneranno in Italia, il

che spero sar fra poco, utilizzeranno a pro della patria,
ammaestramenti dell'esilio.

gli

When

they return to Italy, which I

hope shall be soon, they will employ in the service of their country
the experience gained in exile.

EXERCISE XXXIX.

Modesty

is

to merit

(25)
painting.

what shadows
ombra

are

to the figures of

merito [1^1)

in

Let ns not speak (of that) (any more.)

PLato says
2 (168)
quadro
Platone
^pm
that knowledge is what
man, but witliont religion
perfects
(167) perfezionare
cannot do so.
Men first invent that which
[non pu)
(1G7)

sajjienzcc

knowledge

necessary, then that

quindi

which

is

comfortable, and,

comodo

finally,

all

is

that

finalmente (109)


RELATIVE PE0N0UN3.

80
is

superfluous and luxurious.

dilusso
superfluo

leads

that virtue

From

to happiness.

conduce

that we may
conclude,
[168) possiamo concludere
Homer informs us, that in
Omero informare
a

time husbands gave a dowry to their wives, whicli, says

his

la

dote

(58)

Germans (used

Tacitus, the ancient

to do) (also).

-costumare

Tacito
of a sovereign

is to

sovrano

he has not.

(171)

The

^pure

policy
politica

preserve what he has, and to usurp what

usurpare
conservare (167)

That which changes

has no character.
easily
cambiar e facilmente
that which springs from the heart, and

(167)

True eloquence

is

nascere
(166)
enriched by the imagination.
The highest courage
immarjinazione
arricchire
(121)

is

eloquenza

which

is

is

that

tempered by prudence and humanity.

temperare

RELATIVE PRONOUNS,
Chi,

NoM.

Who.

who.

Chi,

Gen. Di chi,
Dat. a chi,

whom, whose.
whom.
whom.
Ace. Chi,
Abl. Da chi, from whom.
172. The pronoun who, when used without reference
antecedent,

is

of

to

rendered in Italian by

chi,

serves for both genders and numbers.

chi stato

You

suoi scolari

He

Mi- ha confessato chi la sua bene-

He

Xon

indovinereste

mai

disse

chi

erano

any

and

could never guess

Non posso

told

me

who has been

wlio were his favourite

has acknowledged to

benefactress

fattrice,

lo

to

invariable,

pupils.

prediletti,

che

is

elected.

eletto,

Mi

which
Ex.

scoprire chi sono

le

signore

proteggono,

Da chi avete

avuto queda
a chi V avete ripetuta ?

notizia,

ed

me who

his

is.

1 cannot discover who the ladies are

that protect him.
From whom have you heard this

news, and to
peated it ?

whom have you

re-

REr.ATIVF,

Chi may

173,

man

PRONOUNS.

81

also be used to express luhoever, whichever, the

who, he ivho, she who, those tvho, some one ivho,

when em-

ployed in a vague sense, and without reference to a noun expressed before.

Chi

ci

ama

Ex.

ci dice i nostri

difetti,

perci diffidatevi di chi vi adula

continuamente,
Chi vi ha detto ci si burlava di voi,

Those wlio love us

tell

us our defects,

therefore distrust those

you continually.

Whoever has

who

flatter

that

was

some one who

will

told

you

jesting with you.

Troverete chi vi additer

il

cammino,

You

will

find

show you the

174.

The

interrogative pronoun

can only refer to persons or things

Chi l'autore di questo saggio ?
Chi la vostra modista?
Chi sono coloro che fecero fiasco nella
nuova opera ?
Di chi sono questi baidi?

Da

chi stata scoperta V America ?

who

rendered by

is

persoiiified.

Who
Who
Who

waj'.

is

the author of this essay ?

your milliner

who

failed in the

new

trunks are these ?

By whom has America been
covered ?

dis-

are they

opera

Whose

it is

subject to be in the

Ex.

Chi sono i pi famosioratori dell'antichit

Chi vince le proprie passioni, degpo ddV altrui rispetto,

Chi semina raccoglie,

Who are

the most famous orators of

antiquity ?
their own passions, deserve the respect of others.
Those who sow reap.

Those who conquer

176. Some. ..OTHERS, used as distributive pronouns,

Chi

si

chi... chi.

un

una

may

be

Ex.

occupa al commercio, chi

belle arti, chi siegue

sione, chi

and

is

175. Chi requires the verb to which

singula?^, essere excepted.

rendered by

chi,

Ex.

alle

profes-

altra.

Some

are

engaged

in

commerce,

some in the line arts, some follow

one profession, some another.

EXERCISE XL.

Those who follow

blindly

their

own

passions, are not

(156)
(175) ciecamente
"Who has sent (to) you
to lead others.
(173)

(a condurre gli altri) (174)

flowers?

Who

fit

atto

those beautiful

(123) (159)

(79)

has greater pride and less humanity than a

(108*)
(103)
(172)

82

RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

fortunate

fool ?

The

man who

Sfortunato

fears the

who

generally he

knows the

least of virtue.

for

Whose

reward.
ricompensa.

fault is

it

Who

colpa

(To) some

like

me may
pu

the same work.

opera.

(get ready.)

first

reformers ?

riformatore

some another some praise,

un altro
Whichever of you will come

(to)

vuol

(173)

To whom have you told

allestirsi

enjoys sleep without

first

having endured fatigue

inf.

food without having

hunger

felt

told

you

Whose
^

this,

(168)

(173)
not admire

Who

Who relishes
gustare

patire

sqfrire

inf.

Whoever has

it ?

(126)

sonno
cibo

praise nor

blame
biasimare

with

were the

(l'^5) ind. 3

one author,
[11 Q)) piacere

some

(173)

of virtue,

bene

is

Whoever does

neither
seeks
[non) cercare
ne

love

the

err,

errare

(165) conoscere

good

least to

(HO)

(1^3)

children are those ?

s^jgo)

has misinformed you.

mal informare

Who does

the classical severity and simplicity of Alfieri's

ammirare
classico
tragedies ?
Those who sow oppression and tyranny, will inevi-

tragedia

(173)

tably reap discontent, hatred, and rebellion.

scontento
odio

RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
Che, Quale,
singular.

NoM. Che^ il
Gen. Bi cui,

quale.,

who, which,

that.

whom, of which.
Dat. a cui, cui, al quale, to whom, to which.
Ace. Che, cui, il quale, whom, which, that.
Abl. Da cui, dal quale, from or by whom or which.
del quale, of

RELATIVE TRONOUNS.

83

PLURAL.

NoM.

Che,

quali, wLo, which, that.

Gen. Di cui, de quali, of whom, of which.

Dat. a cui, cui, a! quali, to whom, to which.
Ace. Che,

Da

Abl.

When

177.

cui, i quali,

cui, da' quali,

whom, which, that.

from or by whom or which.

these pronouns refer to an antecedent expressed,

Che serves for

il quale.
employed without the article
and agrees with the noun to which it

they are rendered in Italian by che or

both genders and numbers, a-nd

quale requires the

Ex.

relates.

Uuomo

article,

is

che or

il

quale valuta pi

ricchezze che la scienza, e simile

che or il quale getta via
la noce e conserva il guscio,
Ill maestro di cui or del quale vi ho
le

allo stolto,

jmrlato,

The man who

values wealth more

than knowledge, is Hke a fool, who
throws away the nut and keeps
the shell.

The master

of

whom

I have spoken

to you.

Lc farfalle

che or

le quali

avete ac-

The butterflies that you have caught.

chiappate.

L'uomo

e il solo animale che or il

quale conosca il bene, e che or il
quale segua il male.
Il paese in cui or nel quale dimoriamo,

Man

is

what

the only animal

who knows

and who does what

is right,

wrong.
The country in which we
is

live.

178. Che, referring to an antecedent, can only be used in the

nominative and accusative

formed with

cui,

the other cases of this pronoun are

accompanied by prepositions

some cases be omitted.

L'uomo

di c\np)arlate, ed a cui aete

dato vostra figlia, mio amico,

The man
to

of

whom

daughter,
Il fiume

da

cui

il prato

the latter

may

in

Ex.

irrigato,

The

river

whom you speak, and

you have given your
is

my

friend.

by which

the field

is

watered.

may be used in the accusative; when

ambiguity between the subject and the object of the

179. Cui, as well as che,

there

is

phrase, cui, which can never be the subject, should be used,

Luomo
Conosco
padre,

and

Ex.

not che.

cui uccise vostro fratello.

il

ministro cui lodo vostro

The man whom your brother killed.

I know the minister whom yonr
father praised.

84

REr-ATIVE PRONOUNS.
180,

When

cui translates wJiose,

the article and the noun,

L'eroe

le cui

ravigliare il mondo,
Il chimico alle cui scoperte la scienza
va tanto debitrice,

La regina

cui

il

whose discoveries
science owes so much.
The queen whose name shall never
be forgotten, and whose reign was

nome non sar mai

il cui regno fu s

to

so glorious.

When

the pronoun relates to one of two nouns of different

gender or number, quale, preceded by the definite

be used, and not

che, in order that it

which noun the pronoun

II progresso della scienza,

ci

ha

asto-

nished the world.

dimenticato, ed

to

Ex.

required.

is

The chemist

glorioso.

181.

generally placed between

The hero whose deeds have

hanno fatto ma-

gesta

it is

and no preposition

may be

article,

must

clearly understood

Ex.

refers.

The

progress of science, which has

revealed to us so many secrets of
nature.
The love of country, which exile cannot eradicate from the heart.

la quale

svelato tanti segreti della

natura,

L'amore della patria, il quale Vesule non pu cancellare dal cuore.

EXERCISE XLI.
Voltaire used

to say, I

solere ind. 2

the friends

who

love

have three

kinds

of friends;

(48) specie

me, those to
(160)
detested. In

whom

am

indifferent,

and

{111) amare
those

by whom

am

detestare

countries, says

all

Ugo

tutto art.

Foscolo, I have seen two kinds of men, the few

who command,
comandare

and the generality

generalit

who

serve.

Persons

who speak much,

persona

always laugh, are tiresome companions.

ridere
compagno.
noioso

or

who

The

historian

relates

storico

narrare

things which have happened, the poet imagines things which

essere avvenuto
immaginare

may

happen.

Humility

is

a virtue without which all

[possono) accadere.

other virtues perish, and by which

[periscono)
altro

art.

men

learn to

know them-

a conoscere

A
85

IIKLATIVE PRONOUNS
selves.

The

Christian
2

religion,

whose origin

(180)

Spartan was reprimanded

rimproverare
Spartano

an occasion

in

divino. {37}
three words on
used
in
impiegare

having

for

inf.

which two would have

divine.

is

sufficed.

The hero whom

eroe (179)

[sarebbero bastate.)

England honours.

The

onorare.

watch-key

you bought on

that

ind. 3 (93)

oriolo (4) chiave (181)

Saturday.
182.

Quale and che

are also used as interrogative pronouns

quale means ichich of two or many, and requires no article

or che cosa only

means what.

Which

What

The exclamations what

uomini

gli

ivhat a

la

!
I

may be

are translated

by che

A^liat a misfortune the birth of a hero

What
What

mankind

a channing view
a beautiful flower

used to render some.. .some used distribu-

Ex.

Erano in uno stato da far piet, quale

cogli biti stracciati,
testa rotta

quale

colla

grondante sangue,

Quale potava, quale legava

185. Quale

is

le viti,

They were

in

a pitiable

condition,

some with their clothes torn, some

with their headsbroken, and streaming with blood.
Some were pruning, some were tying
up the vines.

often used to translate such as, as, instead of

(ale"-quale, tale being understood.

&pe>-o che lo troverete quale ve Ilio
descritto,
le

cose quali sono.

* Such a is translated by un
man, un tal uomo.

Ex.
hope you

will find it

described

vera filosofia consiste nel vedere

such a

we do ?

Ex.

belfiore!

184. Quale

shall

is for

Quale incantevole colpo d'occhio

La

last

night at the theatre ?

Che sventura e per

nascita di un eroe !

tively.

two pictures do you

Wliat opera did they perfonn

ieri sera al
?

or quale, without the article.

Che

horses are to run the race

^Vliich of
prefer?

teatro ?

Che or che cosa faremo

183.

che,

Ex.

Quali sono i cavalli che correranno il

palio ?
Quale preferite di questi due quadri ?

Che opera hanno dato

it

such as I have

to you.

True philosophy

consists in

seeing

things as they are.

tale, as,

such ai

sfortune,

una

tale

sventura;

RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

86
186.

Onde

is

often used in poetry, or in an elevated style, in

place of di cui, del quale, &c., to render of which, tuith which,

&c.

in prose, onde translates in order

Di quei sospiri ond' jo nutriva

P.
regno^oni'io la corona atfevdo, B.
Onde salvar la patria, Bruto si finse
pazzo,

punto

[disse al

was beginning
*

a
we have not a

peccato
see

vessels.

What a divine

poich

What

(185)

to

have

sncli

a brother.

(185*)

felicit

(183)

we might

(186)

when

spectacle religion offers,

spettacolo

(183)

in order that

telescope,

What a happiness

inl{l&0)lastimento

I should die, for

they are.

such as

cannocchicde

those

'^offrire

Christians forab-

(everything) iu order to carry truth to the Heathen.

sake

handonare

What a

portare

tutto

noise those children

chiasso

of these

was time

che dovessi

ind. 2

pity (that)

XLII.

di)

things

to see

my

I fed

kingdom whose crown I expect.

deatb, It

liis

Ex.

that.

In order to save his country, Brutus

feigned madness.

EXERCISE
said at

order

heart.

Un

Fontenelle

in

to,

Of those sighs with which

cuore,

il

desks
(56) leggo

I tell

Which do you

Sfanno

make

you

(182)

this in order to

Pagano
prefer

preferire

show

you

mostrare

dico

what powerful enemies you have.

What

can be more sublime

(182) potente
(182) pw
than great genius united to great modesty ? Historians reprerajjpremodestia
(80) genio
sent men such as they are, poets depict them such as they

dipingere

sentare

(185)
should
be.
Conscience
{dovrebbero)
coscienza

that of the body

corpo

the voice of the soul, the passions

voce
should we
listen ?
to which voice
* (182)
dovremmo
ascoltare
is

ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.

87

ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.

187. Tutto,

lowed

storia di tutti

le

definite article,

The

costumi di tutte

paese

il

lated

all

the customs of

When

by

al

The whole country regrets him.

The whole fleet was dispersed.

piange,

lo

]a flotta fu dispersa,

188.

history of

nations.

nazioni.

Tutto
Tutta

is always foland agrees with the noun

used adjectively,

the whole,

by the
Ex.

refers to.

it

La

all,

in Italian

tutti,

all is used as an indefinite pronoun,

unaccompanied by the article. Ex.

Tutti volevano comandare, e niuno

voleva ubbidij-e,
Tutti/eeero il loro dovere,

189. II tutto*

is

AH

wished

to

it

trans-

is

command, and nobody

would obey.
All did their duty.

used substantively to signify the whole

without the article means everything,

tutto

Ex.

all.

Qui tutto a buon mercato,

Neppure il tutto lo contento,

Here everything is cheap.

He was not even content with the

Hanno

They have

whole.
confessato tutto,

190. Tutto, and more generally del

to signify quite, completely.

Noi slam

confessed

tutto,

all.

are used adverbially

Ex.

We

del tutto hagnati,

are quite wet.

The coachman quite angrily replied.

The enemy was not completely van-

IlcoccJiiere tutto furioso risicose.

Il nemico non fu del tutto vinto,

quished.

Observe
translate

Tutto quanto,

tutti

quanti, &c.,

may

Tutte quante penrono,

avrebbero derubati tutti quanti,

All perished.

They would have robbed us

191. Before a numeral adjective preceded by

e is placed.

* Observe

tutto,

all.

the particle

Ex.

Tlie iclwle

used adjectively,

the article, but taken substantively,

Jirticle

also be used to

Ex.

all.

preceding

tutto.

tlie

is

expressed by tutto followed by

wJwle

is

rendered by

il

tutto,

tho


ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.
die andate voi cercando a quest'ora

What

tutti e tre ? B.
Tutti e quattro venfjon chiamati
Evangelisti,

All four are called the Evangelists.

EXERCISE

of

flatterer,

adulatore

If

you

give

non potete
of the

eloquenza

Courts in
Corte

all ages,

me

so that all the ridicule

in all countries,

must

fall

ridicolo deve

imitators.

moved

orator

imitatore

(78)
the whole nation.

(187)

lead
the fashions,
{introducono)
vioda

on them, and not on their servile

quite neglected.
(190) trascurare

(such as) love, hope,

^affezione

come

pity,

joy,

gioia piet

beatity,

whilst

bellezza

mentre che

the half.

su

Their education was

affections,

me

(189)

oratore [commosse)

and

The

(120)
the flowers in our

the whole, give

(124)

et

cos

the worst.

is

all

(60^)

cannot

The eloquence

three looking for at

the fruit and

all

all

XLIII.

{1S7) ^domestico

has destroyed
grandine
guastare

you

hour

domestic enemies,

all

hail

garden.

are

this
(jli

the bad

all

All virtuous
^

add
aumentare

deform

the

passions

to

[contraffanno)

All three have

rob
it
of allits charm.
privare (126)
vezzo p. (191)
confessed their crimes, and they have all been condemned to
delitto
(188)
death.
The laws of Nature are immutable, and the same for

countenance, and

fisonomia

stesso

legge
all

people. It

is

sign

a great

segtio

p.

of

folly

follia

per

to

laugh

at

(34)

ridere

di

everything.

(189)

192, Ogni, every, each,

used in the singular

it

is

of both genders,

takes no article.

Ex.

and can only be

ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.

La

guerra produce ogni male,

Ogni scienza ha i suoi principii, ed
ogni et

suoi divertimenti,

War

begets every

Every science
I

every age

89

evil.

lias its principles,

its

193. Ogni is used adverbially in some locutions, as ogni

per ogni dove, in ogni luogo, everywhere, wherever. Ex.
In ogni luogo s incontrano viaggiatori Inglesi,

Chiaro mi fu allor come ogni dove

lu cielo Paradiso, D.

194. Ognuno,

Ognuno

is

every

one,

conveys a

it

and adjectively, and imply a

appellerebbe

colui

un

distributive idea.

ti-

ranno,
Ciascun paese ha i suoi costumi,
Ciascheduno dinoi ha dei doveri da
adempiere,

195.

The

collective

pronouns

sense, while ciascuno, ciascheduno, are used both as

Vun

each.

only used in the singular, with or without reference to

an antecedent, but always as a pronoun

Ognuno

dove,

English travellers are met everywhere.

It was then clear to me, that everywhere in heaven Paradise exists.

ciascheduno,

ciascuno,

and

enjoyments.

Ex.

Every one would

call

that

man

tyrant.

Each country has its customs.

Each of us has duties to perform.

expressions each other, one another, are rendered by

Ex.

l'altro.

Si assistono Tun l'altro,

Sparlano I'un dell'altro,

Nonfuron mai

veduti I'un dall'altro

They assist each other.

They speak ill of one another.
They were never seen separated
from each other.

divisi.

EXERCISE XLIV.
great men have protected literary men and
"
grande
{protetto) letterato
encouraged arts. Every century, every generation, and every

In every age

"'

secolo

generazione
(192) secolo
remarkable for some useful discovery. The customs

incoraggiare arte.
country,

is

rimarchevole
of each country

utile

and every one of good sense

differ,

differiscono

conform, as

much

as

conformarsi per quanto

which one dwells.

(177)

scoperta.

(194)

possible, to the usages of the country in

uso

Every obstacle may be

dimorare.

should
{dovrebbe

pu

overcome with persuperare


ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.

90
Beveivance.

fico

liis

Every
life

Wherever

difesa

beautiful

see

citizen
should
willingly
sacri(82) cittadino dovrelbe di buon animo sacri-

in defence of his country.

ficare {150)

we

good

(193)

and picturesque

views.
prospettiva.

{ci

we

turn

voltiamo)

The Ota{Gli abitanti

cat separated from

one another, and each maintains

{Idi) {maitiene)
(195)
profound silence during meals. Every truth may be
told
profondo silenzio durante pasto.
narrare
pu
heitans

separare

d'Otaiti)

under the disguise of an allegory.

sotto

allegoria.

velo

196. Altro, other

which

.^

used adjectivehj^ ;igrees with the noun

to

Ex.

relates.

it

llfi(jUo non ehhe altra eredit tranne

la spada del padre,

Tlic son liaJ no otlier inheritance

Dovete convincermi con

You must convince me with

altri

than the sword of his father.

argo-

menti,

197.

When

used substantively, altro

and means something

negation,

it

another thing

else.,

expresses nothing

Altro il parlar di morte, altro

morire,
Non avete altro da dirmi?

Parliamo

198.

un

other

arguments.

Another surprise awaits you.

Other hopes and other cares.

sorpresa vi attende,
Altro speranze ed altre cure,
C'ji'altra

else.

indefinite

altro, altri.

masculine singular,

accompanied by the

Ex.
speak of death,
but another to die.
Have you nothing else to toll me ?
Let us speak of something else.
It is one tiling to

il

tZ'altro,

The

is

pronouns another^

others, are expressed

by

Ex.

Un

altro sarebbe stato scoraggiato

dalla risposta,
Altri colsero la gloria delle sue scopei'te,

Another would have been discouraged by the answer.

Others reaped the glory of his discoveries.

199. Altri... ALTRI, gli uni. ..gli altri,

distributive sense,

and signify

Altri soio di lui jni vivaci, altri

pensatori e meno parowi,
parolni,

jn

soyne... others.
\

may

be used

in

Ex.

Some

are more lively than lie, others

thinkers auu
and less prosy.
greater iiiniKerH

Gli uni aravano, gli altri seminavarai,

Some were ploughing

sowing.

some were

A
0\ INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.
200. Altki

qualcun

altro,

In a familiar
altri,

91

sometimes used in the nominative singular

is

and means some

style, altri is

or ani/, one else,

sometimes joined

for

amj other man.

to noi, voi ; as, noi

Ex.

voi altri, we, you.

Noi

We

Scotch reflect before we sjicak.

Voi

You

children

altri Scozzesi riflettiamo prima

d parlare,
altri fanciulli potete andare a
ruzzare,
Ne voi ne altri mi persuaderete a
partire,

201. Altrui, others,

noun

to

which

prepositions

o/and

may

it

either precede or follow the

and be declined with or without the

Altrui only refers to persons, and, pre-

to.

ceded by the definite

Critico severamente

relates,

it

play.

only used as the complement, never as

is

the nominative of a verb

may go and

Neither you nor any one else wil

persuade me to leave.

article,

means

or d'altrui,
L'altTuigloria or la gloria vitnn non
deve renderci invidiosi, ma stimolarci ad acquistarne noi pure,
Chi desidera l'altrui si rende moralmente reo di fur to,

Ex.

property of others.

the

He

difetti altrui

criticised severely the defects of

others.

glory of others should not make

us jealous, but stimulate us to acquire the same.
AVlioevercovets others' property, becomes morally guilty of theft.

The

EXERCISE XLV.

we would have others do to us.

facessero (122)
(198) (ci che vorremmo che)
Correct your own faults, and
let
others correct theirs.
Correggere
lasciare
difetto
Let us do

to others

as

long procession of

ants

some (were setting

ind. 2

are not always to be adopted.

[da seguirsi.)
tune of others.

Other

else

(197)
^

anything

else

(197)

with them ?

people's opinions

to do.

'He

left

for-

the other

da

half of his fortune to his other nephews.

(78)

others

(201)
Charity rejoices at the good
godere di

We had nothing

(201)

out,)

partire ind. 2

formica (199)
returning, all active and industrious.

Have

they brought

The

other citizens envied his suc-

ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND rRONOHNS.

92
cess.

We should respect

tlie

opinions of others, however incor-

{Dohbiamo)
rect they

(may seem)

others

to

sembrare sub.

roneo
is

the

us.

er(201) per quanto

covet the property of

To

step towards dishonesty.

You children may
passo verso
disonest.
potete
(200)

first

(201)

now go and

play.

(9) divertirvi.

202. Veruno, niuno, nessuno, no one, nobody, noperson, no,

When

none.

negative, but

the verb

after,

must be preceded by

Ex.

nan.

Non

these pronouns precede the verb, they require no

when placed

v'

There

nessuno in casa.

is no one at home.
no triumph for an eagle to
vanquish a dove.
No one is a prophet in his own

Ninna (jloria ad aquila aver vinta

una colomba, B.
Nessuno profeta nel lropro paese,

It is

country.

203. Niente, nulla, nothing.

verb followed by these

words must be preceded by non, but when they come before the
verb, the nee:ative

Non ne

is

omitted.

Ex.

so nulla,

Nulla mi

Purea che nulla

si

potesse

far di

It

of

it.

said nothing to me.

seemed that nothing could be

better done.

meglio,
Clii

know nothing

He

disse.

non azzarda

nulla, niente

Those who risk nothing, gain nothing.

gua-

204. Niente and nidla are often used with the signification of
something, anything,

always /oZ/ow,

is

when

the verb, which in this case they

da me ?
Se io 2}Osso far niiWa per voi, comanVolete nulla or niente

datemi,

205. Nothing

Ex.
Do you want

not preceded by non.

i

may

also be rendered

non lianno mai che fare,

me ?

me

know.

panied by non, which precedes the verb.

I pigi

anything from

If I can do anything for you, let

I

by che
Ex.

or cosa,

accom-

Idle people have never anything to

do.

Non

w' cosa peggiore che

amico,

un falso

There

is

friend.

nothing worse than a

false

ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.

206. Nulla and niente sometimes take an
Egli rientrato noi nulla donde

He

lias returned to the insignificance

from whicli he rose.

sortito,

Solo Iddio piC dal niente creare

qualcosa,

93
Ex.

article.

There is only God who can creato

something out of nothing.

EXERCISE XLVI.

An

who was

artist

artisla

a painting

criticising

criticare

sented Marriage, remarked, " Nothing

matrimonio

is

(203)

than a good marriage, even in a picture."

The

[a farsi)
best society

is

inire

(103)
that in which no one

The Eomans

seeks

to

said

they, no one

ind. 2.

(202)

without passing through the second.

than constant adulation

God

more

dries

the

town? "We

sfuggire

corrompente

Nothing

(165)

Do you

may have arms

(Possiamo)

di

pericoloso

corrupting

its

from nothing.
(206)
tears.
Those who

learn nothing.
(204) imparare (203)

arme

first

more dangerous

is

earth

quickly than
lagrima.
prontamente

observe anything,
'^osservare

pu

(202)
created

ever arrives at the

'
'mai

(203)
can escape

no one

ind, 3.

asciugare

are pleased.

all

Nothing

per

inf.

influence.

and

shine,

brillare
contento.
(188)
(202) cercare
placed the temple of honour beside the temple
tempio
accanto a
(posero)

of virtue, because,

from

wliicli repre-

quadro (177)
more difficult to make

ind. 2

wish

never
^mai

^noi

anything
(204)

desiderare

against
arrogance,
contro (25) arroganza

against calumny, against insult, but none against ridicule, from

calunnia
insulto
ridicolo
(202)

which

no

(177) (202)

virtue

is

safe.

sicuro.

Qualche, alcuno, some, any.

(8ee 43.)

ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.

94

207. Alcuno,

alcuni,

qualcheduno, are
Ex.

qualcuno,

substantively in the sense of some one, some persons.

Some one knocks

Qualcuno hussa alia porta,

Se qualcheduno verr a cercarmi,

some one

If

ditegli d'attendermi,

at the door.

calls for

me,

him

tell

to

wait.

Some bear more

Alcuni sopportano pi pazientemente

patiently great mis-

fortunes than trifling cares.

grandi sventure, che insignificanti

cure,

Non

conosco alcuno in Irlanda,

208. TVlien some.,

they

refer,

any., are

know nobody

in Ireland.

not followed by the noun to which

they are translated by the relative pronoun ne.

Ne ho
datteri prendetene.
presi, grazie,
Non ho spille, bisogna che ne compri,

Ecco dei

Here are some

Ex.

dates, take some.

have taken some, thank you.

have no pins, I must buy some.

209. Ambo, entrambi, ambidue, l'uno e l'altro, hoth.

These pronouns are followed by the definite article when they
before a verb, it is omitted.
Ex.
precede a noun
;

Ambo

le

mani per dolor mi

morsi, D.

Furono entrambi condannati a morte,

Ambidue le mie sorelle sono maritate,

I bit for

tion.
Ex.
Non vidi n l'uno n
Non perdoneranno

Italian,

l'altro,

all'uno

211.

both

my

hands.

to death.

sisters are married.

l'altro,

when preceded by

be accompanied by the negasaw neither of them.

They

all'altro,

my

Both of

210. Neither of them, ne l'uno ne

a verb, the verb must, in

gi-ief

They were both condemned

\

will forgive neither of them,

Qualunque,* chiunque, and

chicchessia,

whoever,

may

refer to

persons or things, the two last can only relate to persons.

Chiun-

whatever, whatsoever, are indeclinable

que

is

the

first

used sulstantively, and qualunque adjedwely.

Chiunque lo ha udito, ha dovuto

ammirare la sua eloquenza.
Qualunque siano i vostri talenti, voi
non ne fate uso.
Egli accetter un impiego qualunque.

Ex.

Whoever has heard him must have

admired his eloquence.

Whatever your talents may be, you

do not employ them.
He will accept any employment
whatever.

212.

Per quanto,

or simply per,

is

used to render however,

* Qualsisia and qualsivoglia may be used instead of qualunque, and

tUe plural become qualsisiano, qvalsloofjliano.

in


ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.
whatever

before an adjective, jser quanto

is

VJ

indeclinable, but

it

Per can only be used before

an adjective; the verb which follows Qiihev per ox per quanto
must be in the subjunctive, and is preceded by che when jjer is
used. Ex.
agrees with the noun

it

precedes.

Per

quanto vantaggiose siano le

vostre offerte, or, per vantaggiose

However
posals

advantageous

may

your

pro-

false,

Mill

be.

che siano,

Ogni sistema perquanto/Zso,

che

falso

or, per
trover dei difensori.

sia,

Per quanti sforzi facessimo,

In ogni cuore, per quanto corrotto,
or, per corrotto che sia, vi sono
alcuni germi di virt,

Every system, however

find defenders.

AVhatever efforts we made.

In every heart, however
there are

some srerms

corrupt,

of virtue.

EXERCISE XLVir.

Love and vanity

are both equally

blind.

The

supersti-

vam't

(209)
(51) cieco
tious believed that any crime whatever was expiated by giving
ind. 2
[2\\) [venisse) espiare * doiare
largely to monasteries and churches.
The law will punish
monastero
punire

them

both.

The

object of every education whatever

should
(211) {dovrebbe)
be the perfection of the intellect and of the body.
Some persons,
oggetto

(209)

(207)

however prosperous they may

be,

always

are

dissatisfied.

scontento

(212)

Some laws

are

suitable

in

some places and

opportuno
others.

luogo

Some

unsuitable in
disconveniente

one wishes to see you.

By the laws
desiderare
{\2A:) Secondo
(207)

whoever was

Draco,

Bracone

(211)

punished with death.

convicted
convinto

of

wilful

True

goodness carries on its face a

portare in (150)
be, cannot
[non imo)
Whatever experiments we made, we did not succeed.
sperimento
sub. 2
ina. ^riuscire.
(212)
di

imitate.

was

volontaria

stamp which a hypocrite, however clever he may

impronta
ipocrita
abile
(212)
imitare

poverty

of

96

ON THE PARTICLE

SI.

ON THE PARTICLE
213.

Si,

when used

SI.

as an indefinite pronoun^ corresponds to

the French on, and in English io people, one, they, we, some, &c.,
employed with an indeterminate signiflcation. Ex.

Non

diventa maestro senza essere

si

stato

prima

become a master withhaving been a pupil.

by teaching.

Olio does not

out

scolare,

first

Insegnando n'impara,

We

Nei paesi

In hot countries, people live almost

always in the open air.
People say, or it is said, that popular
songs reveal the character of a

caldi si vive quasi sempre

all'aria aperta,
Si dice che le canzoni 2')opolari rivelino

il

carattere di

un pojwlo,

learn

people.

The

214.

particle

si is

used in Italian instead of the auxiliary

and in this case the verb which

must be in the same tense and person as that in
which the auxilianj woidd be were it employed. Ex.
Un nomo onesto si rispetta, or risAn honest man is respected even by

essere to form a passive verb ;

accompanies

si

pettato, anche dai poco onesti,

Il grano si vende, or venduto a
buon mercato.
In et avanzata non si cambiano con

facilita le abitudini,
glorie dei nostri antenati

Le

the dishonest.
sold cheap.

Wheat is

Habits are not easily changed in old

age.

si

We

remember the glories

ancestors with pleasure.

ricor-

dano con piacere.

215.
si.

The

co?rtpowji(7

of our

passive tenses are formed as follows with

Ex.

Si trovato un raro manoscritto,

Si sou trovati rari manoscritti,

216.

When

si is

rare manuscript has been found.

Rare manuscripts have been found.

used as an indefinite pronoun,

it

is

the nomi-

must always be in the third person

employed as impassive reflective pronoun,

native of the verb which

singular ; but
it

when

si is

always accompanies a verb in the third person singular or

plural, according to the subject of the verb.

ricevono con doppio

piacere quando si conferiscono
dagli amici,
Nella Ciana si comprano e si venbenefizi

dono

si

In China, children are bought and

sold.

i fanciulli.

Si corre sempre alle piazze ed ai

giardini quando comincia

moto,

Ex.

Benefits are received with double

pleasure when friendsconfer them.

il

terre-

People run always to the squares

and gardens when the earthquake
begins.

ON THE PARTICLE

97

SI.

217. Whenever si would cause any ambiguity in the sense of

the phrase, the passive verb must be formed with essere or venire;
venire

is

Ex.

only used in the simple tenses.

Vengono or sono

i^ersuas

not

si

2Krsuadono, which might mean,

they persuade themselves.
Gil uomini vengono or sono reputati felici quando sono ricchi; not
si reputano, which might mean,
men think themselves happy,
Sono stati venduti; not si sono venduti, they have sold themselves,

They

are persuaded.

Men

are considered
they are rich.

They have been

happy when

sold.

EXERCISE XLVIII.

Gold

is

by

tested

(25) {21^) provare

men

by gold.

are tested

Beer

(216) con

drunk by the peasants of Germany, wine

is

is

birra

drunk by those

contadino

(214)
of Italy.

life.

fire,

con

Perfect happiness

attained in this
is
never
2(214) ^non ^mai ^raggiungere

The

arts

are

cultivated in peace.

One becomes

conspi-

(214)
(213) {diviene) rimarcuous, and even ridiculous, by not following the fashions of the
*
chevole
anche
noda
day.

We

admire

talents,

we

praise beauty,

(214) (216) talento

but we love goodness.
The beautiful
bont
bello

which

for

this

reason

are

called

is

we honour

the aim of the arts,

scopo

the fine arts.

(177)

They

bello
(214)
justly punished in presence of the whole army.
(187) armata.

tranquilly

in

tranquillamente

a free country.
^

The

virtue,

title
titolo

were

(217)
People live
(213)

of laws

was
i(214)

formerly
written with a kind of red wax, called rubrica,
"
^anticamente
specie (72)
cera
from this (is derived) the expression rubric.
They have been
viene
rubrica.
(168)
(217)
invited to spend a week with us.

a passare

98

ON THE PARTICLE

When

218.

the pronouns

/,

SI,

thou, &c., are the subjects of a

passive verb, which in Italian governs the dative of persons, as

dire,

comandare, promettere, &c., the personal nominative proin Italian by the dative.
Ex.

noun must be translated

Vi

You were

Mi

si promise, r vi fu promesso, vi
venne promesso,
si comanda, or mi comandato,
mi vien comandalo,
Gli si domanda, or gli domandato,
gli vien domandato,

When

219.

am

lie

promised.

ordered,

is

asked.

the indefinite pronouns one, we, then, are used as

the nominative of a reflected verb, they are exprssed in Italian

by uno,

noi, l'uomo, altri, alcuni, la gente, &c.,

sense of the phrase, to avoid the repetition of

Uno

si

One

avvez~a facilmente alla vita

oziosa,

idle

220. Si

may

Ex.

accustoms one's-self to an

life.

Some persuade themselves.

People flatter themselves.

Alcuni si persuadono,
gente si lusinga,
L'uomo si dimentica spesso,

La

Man

forgets often.

follow the verb and be joined to

there is a negation in the phrase,

Non

The adverbs

vi, ci,

and,

it,

non always precedes

Death

si.

when
Ex.

not feared.
The coast from Eeggio to Gaeta is
thought about the most delightful
part of Italy.

temesi la morte,
Credesi che la marina da licggio a
Gaeta sia quasi la pi dilettevole
parte d'Italia, B.

221.

easily

according to the

si.

is

and the conjunctive pronouns, always

si, which then be-

precede si; the relative pronoun ne follows

comes
Vi

ni

Ex.

se.

The French language

parla principalmente la lingua

si

Troppo

se

Non

se ne

222.

is

principally

spoken there.

Francese,

Non mi

am not told.
Too much has

dice,

ne parlato,

been said about it.

People do not speak more of it-

parla pi,

When

the particle si

is

used, the pronoun nominative of

the passive or active verb, and the accusatives, him, her, them,
it,

of the active verb, are not translated in Italian

agrees with the pronouns as

if

they were expressed.

the verb

Ex.

ON THE PARTICLE

We

Si educano con molta cura,

Si ammirano per la loro seriplicit,
La tiranna il flagello della so-

They are admired for their simplicity.

Tyranny is the scourge of society,
and we always see it joined with
hypocrisy, superstition, and ignor-

vede sempre congiunta

ciet, e si

99

SI.

educate tliem with great care.

air ipocrisia, alla superstizione, e

ance.

all'ignoranza,
Si veduto a corte,

We

have seen him at court.

EXEPX'ISE XLIX.

The

twelfth century, in which

presented to us the noble

is

secolo

spectacle of

human

(221)
(177) (214)
intelligence struggling with superstition and
[che lotta)

tyranny.
that

(215)
produce tvrants.
'

mobs

canaglia

town.

The

(213)

for

them

when one has no

what occasion can there

pu
Ramazan, when one fasts all

during the month of

* digiunare durante

the year

We

riches ? or

ricchezza

fast

see

They

them seldom.
(222) raramente.

return to their country.

It

avvenisse

(to)

them.

has

One
(219)
The barbarous
lets

(167)
*

sport

(80)

tlie

inf.

of the bull

divertimcito

was introduced into Spain by

giostra[2U)
(28)
it was celebrated with great pomp,
(7)

known what

lasciare

fight

to

[permise)

one's-self easily be persuaded

do what (one likes.)

a
piace
(167)

to

were allowed

(218)
never been

\2lb)'^nonhnai
happened

religion of

(they say), can one

i
[possono)

when one has no water? how can one give

elemosina

be to

how

for

poich

iI/aome//o (214) sub. 2

fare
alms

(193)

negare

(48)

was made

perform ablutions

(221)

deny that the

of the desert

tribes
tribii

Mahomet

liberty, and
producono
They speak of it everywhere in

been said that tyrants produce

It has

toro [B)

Arabs, amongst

Aralo


ON THE PARTICLE

100

SI.

ADDITIONAL EXERCISE.
(Merchants from
2

all

countries) (are seen there.)

One

finds

fi;

In nature, one
utile.
cercare
(221)
m vain the model of it. Often one does not follow the path
sentiero
(221)
(11) (220) Sfatare
of virtue, because at the beginning it is found thorny and painspinoso
(214)
fui
but one should reflect, that as the first
rays of the
dovrebbe riflettere
(.57) raggio

there the beautiful united to the useful.

Bun produce a dazzling and unpleasant sensation

abbagliante

one

until

sintantoch (219)

dispiacevole

more one advances in

avanzarsi
(135) cos (111)
the path of virtue, the more pleasing and beneficial one finds it.
(not) (gets accustomed) to them, so the

abituarsi

?,\ih.\.

j222)

They say

that Italian

them

land.

is

music spoken.

It was not permitted to

[permise)

to

A man

Avould do well, says Bacon, to carry a

portare

sbarcare.

moment;

pencil in his pocket, to (write down) the thoughts of the

lapis
appuntare
those which

are generally the best, and should

come unsought

dovere

spontaneo
be secured, because they seldom return.

Nothing

worth
[die valga la

having

pena
no

can

be gained without

di possederlo) ^ ^(214)
real

enjoyment without

(202) vera
south
is
mezzogiorno

its

The

and there

twilight

in

is

the

crepuscolo

travaglio.

much shorter than in

northern countries

the days

settentrionale

in winter are longer, but in

with

effort,

sforzo-^.

labour.

talons

and

{150) [57) artiglio

summer

shorter.

The eagle attacks

wings, not witli

(17)

its

beak.


lOX

CHAPTER

IX.

OX VERBS.
known by

Italian there are three conjugations,

In'

the termi-

nations ARE, ERE, IRE.

The

following table contains a model of those conjugations,

may

which

serve for all the regular verbs.

It will assist the pupil in

that in

all

learning the Italian verbs, to remark,

tenses of all verbs the

the second person in

te,

first person plural ends in mo,

and the third person, with few excep-

tions, in no.

The second person

plural of the preterite of the indicative,

and the imperfect of the subjunctive, are formed by the addition

of an s to the second person plural of the present of the indica-

amate, you love

tive,

might love

amaste, you loved

credete, credeste, che credeste

che amaste, that you

;

sentite, sentiste,

che

sentiste.

The

person plural of the conditional

first

is

formed from the

by doubling the m, remmo ; and the

second person by adding an s to the future rete, and changing it
to reste ; verbs of the first conjugation change the a of the infinitive are into e, in forming the future and conditional, amer,
future termination remo,

amerei,

Szq.

Remark.
sons

The

besides tu

wards those

Italians

and

whom

voi,

have three ways of addressing per-

they employ, as a mark of respect to-

they address, the third person singular of the

verb with the feminine pronoun

ella.

comes between the pronoun ella and

must be feminine, and agree with ella ;

If the verb to he alone

an adjective, the latter

but

if

any other verb instead of

agrees with the person addressed

man, and feminine

for a lady.

to
;

le

that

is

employed, the adjective

is,

masculine for a gentle-

REGULAR VERBS.

102

TABLE OF CONJUGATIONS.
REGULAR VERBS.
1st Conjugation,

104

REGULAR VERBS.

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Do

not thou

bui/,

REGULAR VERBS.

That I

migiil

have

That I

bought, &c.

Che

io avessi

prato

vi/'r/ht

sold,

com- Che

io

have

To hnj,

That I might have

united, &c.

&c,

avessi veu-

tinto

INFINITIVE MOOD,

lOi

Che

io avessi

imito


REGULAR

106
the indicative, in
tive, as follows

PRESENT

tlie

imjoeralive,

VERr.S.

and the present of the subjunc-

IRREGULAR VERES.

107

IHEEGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION IN ABE.

Andare,

lo go; pres. io

vado or

vo,

tu vai, egli va, noi andiamo, voi

andate, eglino vanno ; imp. io andava, tu aidavi, &c.
prct. io
andai, tu andasti, egli and, &c.
past indef. io sono andato, noi
siamo andati; pluperf. io era andato, noi eravamo andati; fut. io
andr, tu andrai, &c. ; imper. va
tu, vada egli, andiamo, andate,
vadano; pres. subj. che io vada,
che tu vada, ch'egli vada, che noi
andiamo, che voi andiate, che coloro
vadano ; imp. subj. che io andassi,
che tu andassi, &c.
cond. io andrei, tu andresti, &o.
ger. andando ; part, past, andcdo, andata,
andati, andate.
Dare, to give pres. io do, tu dai,
egli d, noi diamo, voi date, eglino
danno ; imp. io dava, noi davamo ;
jiret. io diedi or detti, tu desti, egli
diede or dette or p. die, noi demmo,
voi deste, eglino diedero or dettero
or p. dierono ; past indef. io ho
dato, noi abbiamo dato; pluperf. io
aveva dato; noi avevamo dato;
iut. io dar, noi daremo; imper.
d tu, dia egli, diamo noi, date
voi, diano eglino; pres. subj. che
io dia, che noi diamo, ch'eglino
;

Fare, to do

pres. io

fo

or faccio,

tu, fai, egli fa, noi facciamo, voi

fate, eglino fanno; imp. io faceva,
noi facevamo ; pret. io feci, tu

facesti, egli fece, noi facemmo, voi

faceste, eglino fecero; past indefinite, io ho fatto, noi abbiamo
fatto; fut. io fari), noi faremo;
imper. fa tu, faccio egli, facciamo
noi, fate voi, facciano eglino ; pres.
Bubj. che io faccia, che noi facciamo ; imp. subj. che io facessi,
che noi facessimo; cond. io farei,
noi faremmo ; gerund, facendo ;

part, past, fatto, fatta, fatti, fatte.

The

derivatives

are

conjugated

in

the same way.

diano or p. dieno; imp. subj. che

io dessi, che tu dessi, ch'egli desse,
che noi dessimo, che voi deste,
ch'eglino dessero; cond. io darei,
noi daremmo; ger. dando; part,
past, dato, data, dati, date.

ricordare, &c., are regular.

stavamo;

pret. io stetti,

tu stesti,

stemmo, voi steste,

eglino stettero; past indefinite, io

egli stette, noi

noi siamo stati; future,

noi staremo; imper. sta
stiamo noi, state voi,
stiano or stieno coloro; pres. subj.
che io stia, che noi stiamo ; impcrf.
subj. che io stessi, che tu stessi, che
egli stesse, che noi stessimo, che voi

sono

stato,

io stari),

tu, stia colui,

steste,

che eglino stessero or stes-

sono; cond. io starei, eglino starebbero or starebbono ; ger. stando;

part, past, stato, stata, stati, state,

N.B.

Ridare is conjugated in tlie

same way
but circondare and

N.B.

to remain
pres. io sto, tu
stai, egli sta, noi stiamo, voi state,
eglino stanno; imp. io stava, noi

Stare,

Contrastare and other deriva-

tives, are regular.

lURDGULAR

108

VEIIBS.

IRR.KGULAR VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION IN ERE.*

The

following are denominated verbs in ere

sJiort,

on account

of the stress of the accent falling on the antepenultimate syllable,

instead of the penultimate.

In the following table of verbs, the irregular tenses only are

given

the other tenses, being regular, arc understood to have

the same inflections as those of the regular verbs given in the

Table of Conjugations,
Accendere, to kindle

prct.

102.

p.

accesi,

accendemmo,

accendesti, accese,

ac-

cendeste, accesero; ger. accenden-

do; part,

past, acceso,

-i,

-a, -e.

Accingersi, or accignersi, to prepare

one's-self, ref.
v. cingere.f
Accogliere, or accorre, to welcome, v.
;

cogliere.^

Accorgersi,

mi

v.

giungere.
Agere, to freeze, p.
has only the
preterite ahi, &c.
Alludere, to allude, v. deludere.
Ammettere, to admit, v. mettere.
Ancidere, to kill, p. v. recidere.
Angere, to afflict, p. has only 3d
person singular of the present,
ange.
Anteporre, to prefer, v. porre.
;

to

accorsi,

ti

perceive,

ref.

accorgesti, &c.

pret.

part,

past, accortosi.

Accorrere, to hasten, v. correre.

Accrescere, to augment, v. crescere.
Addurre, or adducere, to bring
forth,
pres. adduco,
to allege
adduci, adduce, adduciamo, adducete, adducono; imp. adduceva,
&c. pret. addussi, adducesti, addusse, adducemmo, adduceste, addussero ; future, addurr, &c.
imper. adduci, adduca, adduciamo,
adducete, adducano; prcs. subj.
che io adduca, adduca, adduca,
adduciamo, adduciate, adducano ;
cond.
imp. subj. adducessi, &c.
addurrei, &c.
ger. adducendo ;
;

addotto.
Affiggere, to post up, v. prefiggire.
Affliggere, to afflict ; pret. afflissi,
])art. past,

affliggesti,

Aggiungere, or aggiugncre, to add,

&c.

part, past, afflitto.

Ajjjendere,

to

hang up

preterite,

appese, appendesti, &c. part, past,

appeso.
Apporre, to add, v. porre.
;

Apprendere, to learn, v. prendere.

Ardere, to burn pret. arsi, ardesti,
;

&c.
part, past, arso.
Arrendersi, to surrender, ref.
v.
rendere.
Arridere, to smile, v. ridere.
Arrogere, to adjust, to add, hns
only the sing, of the third person
present, arroge.
Ascendere, to ascend, v. scendere.
Ascondere, to hide
pret. ascosi,
ascondesti, &c.
part, ascosto, or
;

ascoso.

Ascrivere, to inscribe, v. scrivere.

Aspergere, to sprinkle, v. spergere.

* Observe that the verbs ending in rrc, as addurre, trarre, belong to this conjugation.
t

The

reflected verbs are

marked thus:

ref.; the poetical, p.

Accingersi being conjugated like cingere, the student

gularity.

is

The

v.

means

vedi, see.

referred to this verb for

its irre-

IRREGULAR VERBS,
Assistere, to assist

part, past, assis-

sorto.

Assumere, to undertake
sumi, assumesti, &c.
;

pret. aspast,

part,

assuiito.

Astergere, to clean, p. ; v. tergere.

Astrarre, or astraere, to abstract,

v.

trarre.

Astringere, or astrignere, to constrain,

stringere.

Attendere, to wait, v. tendere.

Attenere, to keep one's word, v. tenere.
Attingere, or attignere, to reach, v.

v.

Compungere, ovcompugnere, to grieve,

v. pungere.
Conchiudere, to conclude,

chiedesti,

&c.

part,

past,

chiesto.

Chiudere, to shut pret. chiusi, chiurpart, past, chiuso.

desti, &c.
Cingere, or cignere, to gird pret.
cinsi, cingesti, &c.
part, cinto.
;

Circoncidere, to circumcise,

v.

re-

cidere.

chiu-

Configgere, to nail, v. affliggere.

Confondere, to confound, \. fondere.

Congiungere, or congiugnere, to unite,
V. giungere.
Connettere, to unite

Conoscere,

pret. connessi,

part, connesso.

know

to

pret.

conobbi,

conoscesti, &c.
part, conosciuto.
Conquidere, to afflict, to cast down,
;

V. recidere.

Consistere, to consist, v. assistere.

Conspergere, or cospergere, to besprinkle, V. spergere.

Consumere, to consume,
Contendere, to
Contorcere, to
Contrapporre,
Contrarre, or

v.

assumere.

dispute, v. tendere.
distort, v. torcere.
to oppose, v. porre.
contraere, to contract,

V. trarre.

Convincere, to convince, v. vincere.

Corre, to gather, v. cogliere.
Correggere, to correct, v. reggere.
pret. corsi, corresti,
Correre, to run
;

&c. part, corso.

Corrispondere, to correspond, v. rispondere.
Corrodere, to corrode, v. rodere.
;

Circonscrivere,

to

circumscribe,

v.

scrivere.
Cocere, to cook, v. cuocere.
Cogliere, or corre, to gather, v. sciov. metter.

to affect, v. movere.

Compiangere, to pity, v. piangere.

Comporre, to compose, v. porre.
Comprendere, to comprehend,

Corrompere, to corrupt,

v.

rompere.

Cospargere, to strew, v. spargere.

Cospergere, to water, v. spergere.

gliere.

Commettere, to commit,

Commovere,

v.

dere.

Concludere, to conclude, v. deludere.

Concorrere, to concur, v. correre.
Concuocere, to digest, v. cuocere.
Condescendere, condiscendere, to condescend, V. scendere.
Condurre, or conducere, to conduct,
V. addurre.

connettesti, &c.

tingere.

Attorcere, to twist, v. torcere.

Attrarre or attraere, to attract, v.
trarre.
Avvincere, to bind, v. vincere.
Avvolgere, to envelop, v. volgere.
Cagqere, to fall, an ancient verb, of
which only caggia and caggendo are
used by the poets.
Chiedere, to ask pres. cJiiedo, and
in poetry chieggo, or chieggio ; pret.
chiesi,

compromise,

to

mettere.

tito.

Assolvere, to absolve pret. assolvei

or assolsi, assolvesti, &c. ; part,
past, assoluto or assolto.
Assorhere, to absorb part, past, as-

V.

109

Compromettere,

Costringere, or costrignere, to constrain, V. stringere.

grow

Crescere, to
v.

prendere.
Comirrincre, to compress, v. ojypri-

cesti,

&c.

Crocifiggere,
fissi,

pret. crebbi, cres-

part, past, cresciuto.

to crucify

crocifiggesti,

crocifisso.

&c.

pret. croci-

part, past,

IRREGULAR VERBS.

TIO
Cuocere, to cook
cosse,

pret. cossi, cuocesti,

cuocemmo, cuoceste, cossero;

part, past, cotto.

Decidere, to decide, v. recidere.

Decrescere, to decrease, v. crescere.
Dedurre, to deduce, v. addurre.
Deludere, to delude pret. delusi, depart, past, deluso.
ludesti, &c.
Dej)orre, to depose, v. porre.
Deprimere, to depress, v. opprimere.
Deridere, to deride, v. ridere.
Descrivere, to describe, v. scrivere.
;

Desistere, to desist, v. assistere.

tere.
v.

pingere.
Dirigere, to direct, v. erigere.
Disapprendere, to unlearn, or forget,
V. prendere.
Discendere, to descend,

Ergere, to erect; p. pret.

&c. part, past, erto.

ersi, ergesti,

Erigere, to raise

pret. eressi ; part.

past, eretto.

Escludere, to exclude, v. deludere.

Esigere, to exact
part, esatto.
;

Esistere, to exist, v. assistere.

Espellere, to expel pret. espulsi, espellesti, &c.
part, espulso.
Esporre, to expose, v. porre.
Esprimere, to express, v. opprimere.
Estendere, to extend, v. tendere.
;

Estinguere, to extinguish pret. estinsi, estinguesti, &cpart, estinto.

Estrarre, to extract, v. trarre.
Fendere, to si)lit t^vq. fendei, fen;

desti

part. \ast,

fenduto or fesso.

Figgere, to affix, v. affggere.

Fingere, to teign, v. pingere.
Fondere, to melt Tpret. fusi, fondesti,
&c. Y>ATt.fuso.
;

v. scendere.
Disciorre, and disciogliere, to untie,
V. sciorre.

Frammettere, to interpose, v. mettere.

Frangere, to break
pret. fransi,
;

Discorrere, to discourse, v. correre.

Discutere, to discuss pret. discussi,
;

discutesti, &c. part, past, discusso.

Disgiungere, and disgiugnere, to separate, V. giungere.
Dismettere, to dismiss, v. mettere.
Dismovere, or dismuovere, to avert,
V. movere.
Dispergere, to disperse; pret. dis;

persi; part, past, disperso.

Disporre, to dispose, v. porre.
Distendere, to extend, v. stendere.
Distinguere, to distinguish, v. estingnere.
Distogliere, or distorre,
from, V. togliere.

divert

to

Distrarre, or distraere, to distract,

v.

trarre.

Distruggere,

leg-

gere.

Elidere, to retrench, v. recidere.

Eludere, to elude, v. deludere.

Detrarre, to deduct, v. trarre.

pret. difesi,
Difendere, to defend
part, past, difeso.
difendesti, &c.
Diffondere, to pour out, v. fondere.
Dimettere, to forgive, pardon, v. met-

Dijnngere, dipignere, to depict,

Eleggere, to elect, to choose, v.

to

destroy,

v.

strug-

gere.

Disvellere, divellere, or disverre, to

pluck up, V. svellere.

Dividere, to divide, v. recidere.

frangesti, &c.

Tpart. franto.

Frapporre, to intermeddle,
Friggere, to
flessi,

v.

porre.

fry, v. affliggere.

kneel
pret. genugenuflettesli, &c. part, genu-

Genuflettere,

to

flesso.

Giungere, or giugnere, to join, or

arrive; pret. giunsi, giungesti, &c.;
part, giunto.
Illudere, to deceive, v. deludere.

Immergere, to plunge, v. mergere.

Impellere, to impel, v. espellere.
Imporre, to order, v. porre
Imprimere, to impress, v. opprimere.
IncJdudere, to enclose, v. chiudere.
Incidere, to engrave, v. recidere.
Includere, to include, v. deludere.
Incorrere, to incur, v. correre.
Increscere, to be sorry, v. crescere.
Indurre, or inducere, to induce, r.
addurre.
Infingere, to dissemble, \. fingere.
Infondere, to infuse, \. fondere.

IKKEGULAK VEKBS.
Infraiif/ere, to break, v.

frangere.

Inframettere, or intramettere, to interfere, V. mettere.

Ingiungere, or ingiugnere, to enjoiu,

V. giungere.
lscrivere, to inscribe, v. scrivere.

Insistere, to insist, v. assistere.

Offendere,

Ill
oflend

to

pret.

offesi,

part, offeso.
offendesti, &c.
Ommettere, to omit, v. mettere.
Opporre, to oppose, v. porre.
Opprimere, to oppress pret. oppressi,
opprimesti, &c. part, ojyprcs.so.
pret. pascei, pasPascere, to feed
part. ^;asci^o.
cesti, &c.
Percorrere, to run over, v. correre.
;

Insorgere, to rebel, v. sorgere.

Intendere, to understand, v. tendere.
Intermettere, to discontinue, v. mettere.

Percuotere, to strike

pret. percossi,

part, percosso.
percotesti, &c.
pret. 2^^''^<^^
Perdere, to lose
persi; t^uv. perduto ov perso.
Permettere, to permit, v. mettere.
;

Interporre, or inlraporre, to interpose, V. porre.

Interrompere, to interrupt, v. romjKre.
Intingere, or intignere, to steep, v.
///ere.

Intraprendere, to undertake, v. ^^reuf?ere.

Persistere, to persist, v. assistere.

Piangere, or piagnere, to weep,

v.

frangere.
Fingere, or pignere, to paint; pret.
part, pinto.
pinsi, piingesti, &c.
Porgere, to present pret. porsi, porpart, porto.
gesti, &c.
Porre, or pionere, to put, to place,
&c. pongo, poni, pone, ponghiamo
or poniamo, ponete, pongono ; imp.
pret. posi, jwnesti,
poneva, &c.
pose, ponemjno, poneste, posero ;
iat.jyorro, &c.; ivn^er.2wni,j)ongu,
pongJiiamo or pianiamo, ponete,
pongano ; pres. subj. che io ponga,
jmnga, ponga, p)ongiiamo or 2^011iamo, ponghiate or poniate, pongano ; imp. subj. che io ponessi;
;

Intridere, to dilute, v. recidere.

hitrodurre, to introduce, v. addurre.
Intromettere, to introduce, v. mettere.

Intrudere, to intrude pret. intrusi,

part, intruso.
intrudesti, &c.
Invadere, to invade, v. i^ersuadere.
Ledere, to wrong pret. lesi ; part.
;

Zeso.

Leggere, to read pret.

&c. part, letto.
;

lessi, leggesti,

Manomettere, to

ill-

use, &c., v. met-

tere.

pret. mersi,
Ilergere, to plunge
part, merso.
mergcsti, &c.
Mescere, to mix pret. mesciuto.
;

cond. porrei; ger.

ponendo;

Posporre, to postpone,

desti; part, morso.

Movere, or muovere, to move pret.
part, mosso.
7nossi, movesti, &c.
Mungere, or mugnere, to milk pret.
munsi, mungesti, &c. part, munto.
Nascere, to be bom pret. nacqui,
part. nato.
nascesti, &c.
Nascondere, to conceal, v. ascon-

Prefiggere,

dere.

Negligere, to neglect ; part, neglessi,

negligesti, &c. ; part, negletto.
Nuocere, or nocere, to hurt ; pret.
nacqui, nocesti, &c. ; part, nociuto.

part.

posto.

Mettere, to put ; pret. misi, mettesti,

&c. part, messo.
Mordere, to bite pret. morsi, mor-

v.

porre.

Precidere, to cut, shorten, v. recidere.

Precorrere, to outrun, v. correre.
to

pjrefiggesti,

prefix

&c.

pret.

prefissi,

part. p)refisso.

Premettere, to place before, v. mettere.

Prendere, to take pret. presi, prenpart. 2;re50.
desti, &c.
Preporre, to prefer, v. porre.
Prescegliere, to choose before, v.
;

scegliere.

Prescrivere, to prescribe, v. scrivere.

v. assumere.
Pretendere, to pretend, v. tendere.
Pretermettere, to omit, v. mettere.
Produrre, to produce, v. addurre.

Presumere, to presume,

IRREGULAR VERBS.

112

Profordere, to dissipate, v. fondere.

Promettere, to promise, v. mettere.
Promovere, or 2)romuovere, to pro-

Eestringere, ristringere, and riatrignere, to restrain, v. stringere.

Eiaccendere, to light again, v. accen-

mote, V. movereProporre, or froponere, to propose,

V. porre.
Prorompere, tobreak fortli,v. rompere.

Riardere, to scorch, v. ardere.

Eichiedere, to ask again, v. chiedere.
Eichiudere, to shut again, v. chiudere.

Prosciogliere, or prosciorre,

dere.

ab-

to

solve, deliver, v. sciogliere.

Proscrivere, to proscribe, v. scrivere.

Prostendenti, to prostrate one's-self,
V. tendere.
Proteggere, to protect ; pret. protessi,
proteggesti, &c.

part, protetto.

Protrarre, or profraere, to protract,

V. trarre.

Pungere, or piugnere, to sting, to

smart pret. punsi, pungesti, &c.

part, punto.
Rabbattere, to diminish, v. battere,
laccendere, to light again, v. accen-

dere,
lacchiudere, to enclose, shut up, v.
chiudere,
laccogliere, or raccorre, to collect, v.
cogliere,

liadere,

to

shave, &c.

radesti, &c.

prot.

rasi,

part. rasa.

Eaggiungere, raggiugnere, to

rejoin,

V. giungere.
Eavvolgere, to envelop, v. volgere.

Ecassumere, or riassumere,

to

re-

assume, V. assumere.
pret. i-ecisi,
Eccidere, to cut
part, reciso.
cidesti, &c.

re-

pret. redensi,

part, redento.
redimesti, &c.
Eeggere, to rule pret. ressi, reggesti,
&c. part, retto.
Eendere, to render, restore ; pret.
part. reso.
rendesti, &c.
resi,
Some conjugate this verb lik<i
vendere, regular.
;

'primere, to repress pret. repressi,

reprimesti, &c. part, represso.
Eeserivcre, or riscrivere, to write

Pi,

anew, v. scrivere.
Eesistere, to resist, v. assistere.
Eespingere, or respignere, to repulse,
V. spingere.

cogliere.

Elcomporre, to recompose, v. porre.

Eicondurre, to reconduct, v. condurre.
Eicongiungere, to reunite, v. giungere.
Riconoscere, to recognise, v. conoscere.
Ricorrere, to recur, v. correre.
Eicorreggcre, to coiTcct anew, v. correggere.
Eicrescere, to increase, v. crescere.
Ricuocere, to cook again, v. cuocere.
Eidere, to laugh pret. risi, ridesti,
;

&e. part. riso.

Ridurre, to reduce, v. addurre.
;

Riedere, or redire, to come again, p. ;

has only pres. riedl, riede, riedono;
imperf. rediva; imperat. and pres.
subj. rieda, riedano.
Rifondere, to melt again, v. fondere.
Rifrangere, to reflect, v. frangere.
Rifriggere, to fry again, v. friggere.
Rigiungere, to rejoin, v. giungere.
Rileggere, to read again, v. leggere.
Rilucere, to shine pret. rilussi, rilucesti, &c,
no participle.
Rimettere, to remit, v. mettere.
Rimordere, to bite again, v. mordere.
Rimovere, to remove, v. movere.
Rinascere, to spring up afresh, v.
;

Eedimere, to redeem

Eicingere, to enclose, v. cingere.

Eicogliere, or ricorre, to compile, v.

nascere.

Rinchiudere, to shut in, contain, v.

chiudere.
Rincrescere, to be sorry, impers.;
pros, mi rincresce, ti rincresce, &c.
pros. sub.
pret. mi rincrebbe, &c.
che mi rincresca, &c. pai-t. past,
;

rincresciuto.

Rinvolgere, to envelop, v. volgere.

Ripascere, to feed again, v. pascere.
Ripercuotere, to strike again, y.percuotere.

inUEGULAR VEKES.
Biporre, to replace, v. iJorre.
lUprenJere, to reprove, to retake,

gano ;
v.

reproduce,

to

v.

ijro-

durre.
Eipromettcre, to promise again,

v.

oiiettcre.

spingere.

Rispondere, to answer pret. risposi,

part, risposto.
rispondesti, &c.
;

Ristringere, or ristrignere, to restrain,

v. stringere.

Ritingere, or ritignere, to dye again,

V. tingere.
Ritogliere, or ritorre, to take again,
V. togliere.

Ritorcere, to twist, or wring again, v.

torcere.

Ritrarre,

to

describe

or

draw,

v.

trarre.

Rivivere, to revive, v. vivere.

Rivolgere, to turn over, or change, v.
volgere.

Rodere, to
&.C.

gnaw

pret. rosi, rodesti,

part. roso.
to

&c.

ptesti,

break
;

pret. ruppi,

rm-

part, rotto.

Scegliere, or scerre, to choose

scelgo,

che io sciolga,

cond. scioglierei, or sciorrei;

Scommettere, to bet, v. mettere.

Scomporre, to derange, v. porre.
Sconfiggere, to conquer, defeat, v.
affliggere.

Riscrivere, to write again, v. scrivere.

liscuotere, to recover, redeem, v.
scuotere.
Hisolvere, to resolve, v. assolvere.
Risorgere, to rise again, v. sorgere.
Bisospingere, to repulse, v. spingere.
Eiapingere, or rispignere, to reject,

Rompere,

subj.

part, sciolto.

in'cndere.
Jiiprodiirre,

V.

&.C.

113
pres.

sceglie,

scegli,

pros.

scegliamo,

scegliete, scelgono ; pret. scelsi, scegliesti, &c. ; imper. scegli, scelga,

scegliamo, scegliete, scelgano; pres.

sub]', che io scelga, &c.
part, scelto.
pret. scesi,
Scendere, to descend
scendesti, &c.
part, sceso.
Schiudere, to open, to exclude, v.
chiudere.
;

or sciorre, to untie, or
loosen
pres. sciolgo, sciogli, scioglie, sciogliamo, sciogliete, sciolgono;

Sciogliere,
;

pret. sciolsi, sciogliesti, &c.

future,
scioglier or sciorro; imper. sciogli,
sciolga, sciogliamo, sciogliete, sciol;

Scontorcere, to wrest, to wreath, v.

torcere.

Sconvolgere, to overturn, v. volgere.

Scorgere, to see, perceive, v. accorgere.

Scorrere, to run in haste, slide, v.

correre.
Scrivere, to write ; pret. scrissi, scrivesti, &c.
part, scritto.
Scuotere, to shake, v. percuotere.
Sedurre, to seduce, v. addurre.
Smungere, or smugnere, to dry up, v.
;

mungere.
Smuovere, to

stir, v.

movere.

Socchiudere, to half-shut, v. chiudere.

Soccorrere, to succour, v. correre.
Soggiungere, or soggiugnere, to add,
V. giungere.
Sommergere, to submerge, v. mergere.
Sommettere, to submit, v. mettere.
Sopporre, to subject, v. porre.
Sopraggiungere, or sopraggiugnere,
to come unexpectedly, v. giungere.
Soprappore, to place above, v. porre.
Soprascrivere, to superscribe, v. scrivere.

Sopravvivere, to survive', v. vivere.

Sopprimere, to suppress, v. opprimere.
Sorgere, to rise pret. soi'si, sorgesti,
&c. part, sorto.
Sorprendere, to surprise, v. prendere.
Sorreggere, to support, v. reggere.
;

Sorridere, to smile, v. ridere.

Soscrivere, to subscribe, v. scrivere.
Sospendere, to suspend pret. sospesi,
;

sospendesti, &c.

part, sospeso.

Sospingere, or sospignere, to push,

v.

spingere.
Sottintendere, to be understood, v.
tendere.
Sottomettere, sommettere, to submit,
V. mettere.

Sottoporre, to subdue,

y.

porre.

114

IRREGULAR VERBS.

Sottoscrivere, to subscribe, v. scrivere.

Sottrarre, to subtract, v. trarre.

spento.
Spendere, to spend pret. spesi, spendesti, &c.
part, speso.
Spergere, to disperse
pret. spersi,
;

spergesti, &c.
part, sperso.
Spingere, or spignere, to push pret.
spinsi, sjnngesti, &c.
part, spinto.
Sporgere, to project, jut out, \. por;

gere.

sciogliere.

Torcere,

bend,

to

v.

cocere.

Stravolgere, to turn, to wrest,

v. vol-

gere.
Stringere, or strignere, to squeeze, to
press
pret. strinsi, stringesti, &c. ;
;

Trafiggere, to pierce, v. affliggere.

Tramettere,
to
put between, v.
mettere.
Trarre, or traere, to draw
pres.
traggo, traggi or trai, trae, tragghiamo or traiamo, traete, traggono
imp. traeva, &c. ; pret.
;

trassi,

traesti,

trasse,

cidere.

Svellere, or sverre, to pluck

up

pret.

svelsi, svellesti, &c.

part, svelto.
Svolgere, to unfold, v. volgere.
Supporre, to suppose, v. porre.
Sussistere, to subsist, v. assistere.
Tacere, to be silent, to hold one's
tongue
pres. taccio, taci, tace,
tacciamo, tacete, tacciono ; pret.
imper. taci,
tacqui, tacesti, &c.
taccia, tacciamo, tacete, tacciano ;
pres. subj. che io taccia, taccia,
taccia, tacciamo, tacciate, tacciano;
;

traemmo,

fut. trarr, &c. ;

tragga, traiamo,
traete, traggano; pres. subj. che io
tragga, tragga, tragga, traiamo,
tragghiate, traggano; imp. subj.
che io traessi, &c. cond. trarrei,
;

traggi,

&c.

gerund, traendo; part, tratto.

Trascegliere, and trascerre, to choose,

V. scegliere.

Trascendere,

part, stretto.

Struggere, to melt, to dissolve pret.

strussi, struggesti, &c. part, strutto.
Subdividere, to subdivide, v. re-

pret.

imper.

Storcere, to twist, v. torcere.

Straccocere, to cook too much,

twist

to

torsi, torcesti, &c.

part, torto.
Tradurre, to translate, v. addurre.

traeste, trassero

Stendere, to extend, v. tendere.

surmount,

to

v.

scen-

dere.

transgress, to run
over, V. correre.
Trascrivere, to transcribe, v. scrivere.
Trasfondere, to transfuse, v. fondere.
Trasmettere, to transmit, v. mettere.
Trasporre, to transpose, v. porre.
Travolgere, to invert, v. volgere.
Uccidere, to kill, v. recidere.
Ungere, or ugnere, to anoint, v. pungere.
Vilipendere, to despise, v. sospendere.
Vincere, to vanquish
pret. vinsi,

Trascorrere,

to

vincesti,

&c.

Vivere,

to

&c.

fut.

part, vinto.

live

pret. vissi,

vivr

vivesti,

cond. vivrei, &c.

part, vivuto or vissuto.

part, taciuto.

Tendere, to tend pret.

&c. part. teso.
;

tesi, tendesti,

Volgere, to turn

&c.

The

Tergere, to wipe, to clean p. pret.

tersi, tergesti, &c.
part, terso.
Tingere, or tignere, to dye, v. pingere.
Togliere, or torre, to take away, v.
;

Sovragiungere, to happen unexpectedly, V. giungere.

Spargere, to spread, scatter
pret.
sparsi, spargesti, &c. part, sparso.
Spegnere, or spengere, to extinguish
pret. spensi, spegnesti, &c.
part.

pret. volsi, volgesti,

part, volto.

following verbs are termed iu ere long, because the force

on the penultimate syllable, as in antivedre,

of the accent

falls

dovre,

instead

S:c.,

of the

antepenultimate,

as

iu prdere,

IRREGULAR VERD8.
crscere^ lggere, fndere, fingere, &c.

115
but

tlie

pupil will ob-

serve, that ciltbough tbe accent falls on the e of re\

broad accent, to be pronounced like

aire.ij,

it is

not a

but an acute accent,

have the kind of intermediate sound of error in English, as

Without this remark, the pupil might suppose that tbe e,
from having an accent, should be pronounced broad.
to

errnj.

IREEGULAE VEEBS IN ERE LONG.

Antivedere, to foresee, v. vedere.
Assidersi, to

sit

down, ref. pret. mi

jiart. past,
&c.
;

assisi, ti assidesti,

assiso.*

Astenere, to abstain, v. tenere.

Avvedersi, to perceive, ref., v. vedt-re.
Bere, to drink, p. pres. beo, bei, bee,
beiamo, beete, heono; imp. beeva,
&c.
pret. bevvi,
beesti,
bevve,
beemmo, beestc, bevvero; fut. bero,
&c. iraper. bei, bea, beiamo, beete,
beano ; pres. subj. che io bea, bea,
bea, beiamo, beiate, beano; imp.
subj. che io beessi, &c. cond. berei,
part.,
&c.
ger. beendo ;
past,
;

bevuto.
Bevere is regular, and
generally used in prose.
Cadere, to fall pret. caddi, cadesti,
&c. ; fut. cadr, &c. cond. cadrei,
&c. part, past, caduto.
Calere, to care, to be concerned for,
p.; has only: pres. ?iit cafe; imp.
mi caleva; pret. mi calse; pres.
subj. che mi caglia.
Compiacere, to comply with, to please,
ref., V. piacere.
Condolersi, to condole witli, ref., v.
;

dolere.

Contenere, to contain, v. tenere.

v. cadere.
Detenere, to arrest, v. tenere.
Discadere, to decline, v. cadere.
Dispiacere, to displease, v. piacere.

Decadere, to decay,

Except

in the preterito

aud

Dissuadere, to dissuade, v. persuadere.

Dolere and dolersi, to complain, ref,
pres. mi dolgo or doglio,^ ti duoli, si
duole, ci dogliamo, vi dolete, si
dolgono; pret. mi dolsi, ti dolesti,
imper.
&c. fut. mi dorr, &c.
;

dolgasi,

duoliti,
tevi,

dolgansi

dogliamoci, dolepres. subj. che mi

dolga, ti dolga, si dolga, ci dogliamo, vi dogliate, si dolgano ;

cond. mi dorrei, &c. imp. subj.
che mi dolessi, &c. ger. dolendosi;
part, past, dolutosi; comp. mi sono
doluto, ci siamo doluti, &c.
Dovere, to owe devo, devi, deve,
devono, delibo or deggio, debbi,
;

debhe, dobbiamo, dovete, (debbono,

deggiono or deano ; pret. dovetti,

&c. fut. dovr, &c. no

imperative
pres. subj. che io
debba, debba, debba or deggia,
dovesti,

deggia, deggia, dobbiamo, dobbiate,

debbano or dcggiano; cond. dovrei;
part, past, dovuto.

Equivalere,

be

to

equivalent,

v.

valere.

Giacere, to lie down, v. tacere.

Tntertenere, or intrattenere, to entertain, V. tenere.

Lecere and
licensed.

licere, to

parliciple, assidei il

is

be permitted or

These verbs have only

the third j)ersou

uut

useil,

singular of the

but iakre.

IRBEGULAB VERDS.

116

present tense of tlio indicative,

and lice, and are merely employed in poetry.
Mantenere, to maintain, v. tenere.
lece

Ottenere, to obtain,

v. tenere.

Parere, to appear pres. pajo, pari,

pare, pajamo, parete, pajono; pret.
fut. parr,
parvi, paresti, &c.
&c. pres. snbj. che io paja, &c.
cond. parrei ; part, paruto and
parso.
Persuadere, to persuade pret. perpart, persuasi, persuadesti, &c.
suaso.
Piacere, to please, v. tacere.
Possedere, to possess, v. sedere.
Potere, to be able
pres. posso, puoi,
pu or puote, possiamo, potete,
possono ; fut. potr, &c.
no
imper. pres. subj. che io j)0ssa,
possa, p)ossa, possiamo, possiate,
possano; cond. potrei; part, past,
potuto.
Presedere, to preside, v, sedere.
Prevalere, to prevail, v. valere.
Prevedere, to foresee, v. vedere.
Provvedere, to provide, v. vedere.
Pattenere, to arrest, v. tenere.
Pavvedersi, to correct one'sself, ref.,
;

Riavere, to have again, v. avere.

Ricadere, to fall a^ain, v. cadere.
Rimanere, to remain pres. rimango,
rimani, rimane, rimaniamo, rima;

rimangono ;

pret. rimasi, ri-

manesti, &c. fut. rimarr; imper.

rimani, rimanga, rimaniamo, rimanete, rimangano; pres. subj. che
io rimanga, rimaniamo, rimaniate,
rimangano ; cond. rimarrei; part,
past, rimasto or rimaso.
Risapere, to know by hearsay, v.
sapere.
Risedere, to reside, v. sedere.
Ritenere, to retain, v. tenereRivedere, to see again, v. vedere.
Rivolere, to will again, v. volere.
Sapere, to know; pres. so, sai, sa,
;

sappiamo,

sediamo, sedete, seggono ;

imper. siedi, segga, sediamo, sedete,
seggano; pres. subj. che io segga,
segga, segga, sediamo, sediate, segsiede,

gano ; part, past, seduto.

Soggiacere, to be subject, v. giacere.
Solere, to be accustomed pres. soglio,
suoli, suole, sogliamo, solete, sogliono ; imp. soleva ; pres. subj. che io
;

soglia, sogli, soglia, sogliamo, so-

sogliano; part, past, solito.

In the tenses not noticed here, the
verb essere is used with the parti-

gliate,

ciple

as, io

fui

sapete,

seppi, sapesti, &c.

sanno
fut.

pret,

sapr, &c.

solito,

customed, &c.
Soprassedere, to supersede,

was

ac-

v. sedere.

Sostenere, to sustain, v. tenere.

Spiacere, to displease, v. piacere.

Sprovvedere,

to leave destitute, v.
vedere.
Tenere, to liold pres. tengo, tieni,
tiene, teniamo, tenete, tengono; pret.
;

tenni, tenesti, &c.

v. vedere.

nete,

imper. sappi, sappia, sappiamo,

sappiate, sappiano: pres. subj. che
io sappia, &.C.
cov\. sapirei ; part,
past, sapido.
Scadere, to decay, to fall off, v. cadere.
Sedere, to sit down; pres. seggo, siedi,

imper.

tieni, tenga,

fut. terr, &c.

teniamo, tenete,

tengano; pres. subj. che io tenga,

tenga, tenga, teniamo, leniate, tengano; cond. terrei, &c. part, past,
;

tenuto.
Trattenere, to entertain, v. tenere.
Travedere, to see double, v. vedere.
Valere, to be worth ; pres. vaglio or
valgo, vali, vale, vagliamo, valete,

vagliono; pret. valsi, valesti, &c.

fut. varr, &c.
imper. vali, vaglia,
vagliamo, valete, vagliano ; pres.
subj. che io valga or vaglia, &c.
cond. varrei ; part, past, valuto.
Vedere, to see pres. vedo, veggo, or
;

veggio, vedi, vede,

vediamo or veg-

giamo, vedete, vedono or veggono;

pret. vidi, vedesti, &c.
fut. vedr,
&c. imper. vedi, veda or vegga,
vediamo or veggiamo, vedete, vedano
;

IRREGULAR VERBS.
or veggano; pres. siibj. che io veda
or Jcgga ; comi, vedrei, &c.
part,
past, veduto or visto.
Volere, to be willing; pres. voglio or
;

VI,

vuoi,

vuole,

vogliamo, volete.

117

vogliono; prof, volli, volesti, &c.

no imperative
fut. vorr, &c.
cond.
pres. siibj. che io voglia, &c.
vorrei; ger. volendo; part. past.
;

voluto.

IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION

IN IBE.
Apparire, to appear

pret. apparii

or apparvi; part, past, apparito

or apparso.
It is the same with

comparire.
Aprire, to open, like servire ; but in
the pret. aprii or apersi, apristi,
&c. part, past, aperto.
;

Assalire, to assail, v. salire.

Assorbire, to absorb
part, past, as;

sorbito or assorto.
Avvenire, to arrive, v. venire.
Benedire, to bless, v. dire.

Discucire, to un sew, v. cucire.

Disdire, to deny, v. dire.
Divenire, to become, v. venire.
Empire, to fill pres. empio, empi,
empie, empiamo, empite, emjnono ;
imper. empi, empia, empiamo, empiite, empiano; pres. subj. che io
;

empia, &c.
Escire, to go out, v. uscire.
Gire, to go, p., has only the following
imp. giva or
tenses gite, you go
gia, givamo, givano or giano ; jiret.
giste,
girono ;
gisti, g orgia, gimmo,
imper. gite, go che gissi, &c., that
gito, gone.
I might go
Instruire, to instruct pret. instrvssi,
instruisii, &c., or regular, instruii
&c.
part, past, instruito and in:

Circonvenire, to circumvent, v. ue?izVe.

Comparire, to appear before, v. apXHirire.

Construire or costruire, to construct,

V. instruire.

Contraddire, to contradict, v. dire.

Contravvenire, to contravene, v. venire.

Convenire, to agree, v. venire.

Coprire, to cover, v. aprire.
;

.;

strutto.
Interdire, to prohibit, v. dii-e.
Intervenire, to intervene, v. venire.
Ire, to go, p., has only ite, go
iva,
ho went ivano, they went iremo,
we shall go irete, you will go ;
;

sew pres. cucio, cuci, &c.

imper. citci, cucia, cuciamo, cucite,
cuciano; pres. subj. che io cucia,
&c.
Dire, to tell, to say pres. dico, dici
or d, dice, diciamo, dite, dicono ;
imp. diceva, &.C.; pret. dissi, dicesti,
disse, dicemmo,
diceste, dissero;
imper. d, dica, diciamo, dite, dicano; pres. subj. che io dica, &c.
Cucire, to

iranno, they will go

and

(]ire

gone.*

or

* Ire and

ito,

rile,

of a better aound.

3Ialedire, to curse, v. dire.

Morire, to die pres. muojo or moro
muori, muore or more,
li poetry
muojamo or moriamo, morite, mvojono; fut. morir or morr, &c.
imper. muori or mori, muoja or
mora, muojamo or moriamo, ino-

ger. dicendo; part, past, detto.

Discoprire, to discover, v. aprire.
v. venire.

Disconvenire, to disagree,

gire

muojano

or

morano

jircs.

mvoja, muoja
mora, muojamo or moriamo, mo-

Bubj. che io nuoja,

same verb the letter g being added in some instances for the sake
The prosaic verb for to go is andare. Ancient writers have made use ol

are the

ire in their prose writings also.

IRREGULAR VERBS.

Ili

riate,

muojano

or

muorano; cond.

morirei or morrei, &c.

part, morto.

Offrire, to offer, v. aprire.

Olire, to smell, p., has only

imp.

oliva, olivi, oliva, olivano.

Pervenire, to attain, v. venire.

Predire, to predict, v. dire.
Prevenire, to prevent, v. venire.
Provenire, to proceed from, v. ve-

Sdrucire, to rip up, v. cucire.

Seguire, to iollow
pres. sieguo,
siegui, siegue, seguiamo, seguite,
siegiiono ; imper. siegui, siegua,
seguiamo, seguite, sieguxino ; pres.
subj. che io siegua, siegua, siegua,
seguiamo, seguite, sieguano. This
verb is also conjugated regularly.
;

bury

to

Seirpellire,

part,

past,

seppellito or sepolto.

nire.

This
poetry, has

Bedire or riedere, to return.

introduced in
only riedi, thou returnest; riede,

verh,

he returns.
Riapparire, to reappear, v. apparire.
Riaprire, to open again, v. aprire.
Ribenedire, to bless again, v. dire.
Ricoprire, to cover again, v. co2)rire.

Ridire, to say again, v. dire.

Riescire, to succeed, v. riuscire.
Rinvenire, to find again, v. venire.
Risalire, to ascend again, v. salire.
Risovvenire, to recollect, v. venire.
Rivenire, to return, v. venire.
Riuscire, to succeed, v. uscire.
pres. salgo, sali,
Salire, to ascend
sale, saliamo or sagliamo, salite
salgono ; imper. sali, salga, saliamo
or sagliamo, salite, salgano ; pres
subj. che io salga, salga, salga,
saliamo or .sof/liamo, saliate or
This verb, as
sagliate, salgano.
well as its compounds risalire,
assalire, soprassalire, may be con
jugated also like unire.
Scomparire, to disappear, v. coin
parire.
Sconvenire, to be unbecoming, v
;

venire.

Scoprire, to discover, v. coprire.

Scucire, to unscw, v. cucire.

Soffrire, to suffer, like servire, but in

the pret. soffrii or soffersi; part.

past, sofferto.

Sopravvenire, to happen, to come

unexpectedly, v. venire.
Sovvenire, to succour, v. venire.
Sovvenirsi,

remember,

to

ref.,

v.

t^enire.

Svenire, to faint away, v. venire.

Udire, to boar pres. odo, odi, ode,
udiamo, udite, odono; imper. odi,
oda, udiamo, udite, odano; pres.
subj. che io oda, oda, oda, udiamo,
udiate, odano.
Venire, to come pi'cs. vengo, vieni,
;

veniamo,

viene,

venite,

pret. venni, venisti,

imper.

vieni,

venite,

vengano

venga,

venga,

&c.

venga,
;

vengono;
verro;

fut.

veniamo,

pres. subj. che io

venga, veniamo,
cond. verrei;

veniate, vengano;
part, past, venuto.

pres.
to go out
uscite,
esce, usciamo,
imp. usciva, &c.
pret.
uscisti, usc, &c.
imper.
uscii,
esci, esca, usciamo, uscite, escano;

Uscire

esco,

or escire,

esci,

escono;

pres. subj. che io esca, esca, esca,

usciate, escano;
imp.
usciamo,
cond.
subj. che io uscissi, &c.
uscirei, &c.
gcr. uscendo ; part.
;

past, uscito.


TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE VERPS.

TRANSITIVE
Verbs

AND INTRANSITIVE

are divided into two classes

119

VERBS.

namely,

transitive

and

intransitive.

223.

When

an object,

to

the verb expresses an action passing from an actor

transitive,

it is

the auxiliary avere, to have.

II giudice

lia

condannato alla viarie

un

is

compound

tenses with

The judge has condemned

The huntsman has

cervo,

The passive form, which

the subject,

its

the mur-

derer to death.

il reo d^ omicidio
Il cacciatore ha ucc

224.

and forms
Ex.

killed a stajr.

liary essere with the past participle of a transitive verb.

Sono

stati accusati di vilt,

vostra costanza alfine premiata.
Il monarca die temuto rara-

La

it is

When the verb

Ex.
of cow-

ai-dice.

Your constancy is at last rewaj-ded.

The monarch who is feared is selbeloved.

expresses an action confined to the actor,

and forms

intransitive,

liarv essere.

They have been accused

dom

mente amato,

225.

its

compound

tenses with the auxi-

Ex.

venuto a j^assare

il

mese della

He

has come to spend the vintage

month

vendemmia alla campagna,

Quando le foglie sono cadute,

When

Sono

They have gone away without

partiti

senza venire a dirci

in the country.
the leaves have fallen.

tak-

ing leave of us.

addio.

Sono

by

expresses an action suffered

formed, as in English, by conjugating the auxi-

arrivati col battello

a vapore,

They have come by

the steamer.

226. The following verbs, although intransitive, form their

compound tenses, like transitive verbs, with avere, as in Italian
there is an object understood, without, however, any passage of
the action from the subject taking place

Camminare

1}

Passeggiai
Cenare,
Desinare,
Pranzare.

to walk.

to sup.
[-to dine.

Regnare,

to reign.

Ridere,
Riposare,
Sbadigliare,
Sorridere,

to laugh,

to smile,

to rest,
to

yawn,

Dormire,

to sleep,

Stranutire,

to sneeze,

Gridare,
Peccare,
Piangere,

to cry.

Tossire,

to

to sin.

Vegliare,

to

Viaggiare,

to travel.

to

weep.

cough,
watch,


TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS.

120

The

227.

following verbs

may

with the auxiliary essere or orere

being

is

Avendo

denoted, with avere

form their compound tenses

;

when an

with essere when a state of

action is expressed
:

Sentendo Arriguccio esser corso

corso dietro aU'amico tuo, B.

tro loberto,

Having run

after

Hearing

thy friend.

die-

T>.

Arriguccio had run

tluat

after Eobert.

La

La febbre

febbre ha cessato di esser perico-

cessata sid far del giorno,

Tlie fever lias ceased towards daybreak.

losa.

The

fever has ceased to be dangerous.

Abbiamo dimorato

Wo have lived in

NclVisola di Circe essendo alcun

tempo dimorato,
Having lived some time in the island

nella stessa casa,

the same house.

of Circe.

II male molto cresciuto,

The disease has much increased.

Questo accidente ha cresciuto il male,

This accident has increased the malady.

Io ho fuggito i miei nemici,

1 have fled my enemies.

Abbiamo passato

We

il

Io son fuggito dalla jrigione,

I have fled from prison.

Siamo

teatro,

He

have cnlled at the post-office.

Egli salito or montato sulla collina,

He
Abbiamo

sceso

We

We

have lived happy days.

di

lias

ascended the

hill

Sono sceso da cavallo,

I have dismounted from horseback.
Son vissuti insieme felicemente,
They have lived together happily.
Eravate seduti sulVerlia,

monte,
have descended the mountain.
Abbiamo vissuto giorni felici,
il

Abbiamo seduto all'ombra

passati dalla posta,

We

bave passed the theatre.

ha salito or montato le scale,
has gone up stairs.

liJgli

un pla-

tano,

We

You were

bave sat under the shade of a

seated on the grass.

plane-tree.

EXERCISE

L.

Aristophanes having died in battle,

Aristofane
(225)
Athenian
poets should not go to war.
Ateniese {72)
{dovessero)
the highest mountains of Scotland.

it

was ordered that

Wc

have ascended
(227)

We have

lived in

America

(227)
three years, and have received
cans.

They have

much kindness from

the Anieri-

gentilezza p.

grown
crescere

so

much

(74)

(that) they

were not recogind. 3


TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS.
nised.

Marat

was

come

to Paris

by Charlotte Corday, who had

killed

uccidere

from Caen

Carlotta

irr.

for the purpose.

We have

(a questo fine.)

and sound.

safe

-salvo

'^sano.

has
(225)

irr.

121

had sculptured on
inf.
Adirano fare

number

arrived

(225)

Adrian

died on account of the

a cagione

(225)
all

his

tomb,

"

He

of his physicians."

medico.

Since

From

Greece poetry has passed into Italy. Eepublics have

"
Repubblica
in (28)
(225)
(27) Grecia

the founalmost always fallen from liberty into slavery.

Da
quasi
schiavila.
(225)
dation of Constantinople, the glory of the Eoman empire has
Costantinopoli

day by day

decreased.

have

(di giorno in giorno) declinare.

watched.

We

have

venerate the dead, because their virtues alone

(226)
(222)
survive
(to) them
sopravvivere
their virtues

slept while you

(226) mentre

solo

p.
;

the vices which were once blended with

ind. 2 (96)
misto
a

have died with themselves.

loro.

(225)

REFLECTED AND RECIPROCAL VERBS.

228. Reflected verbs are conjugated in
the conjunctive pronouns mi,
in the plural.

in Italian

ti,

The compound

with essere.

si in

all their

tenses with

the singular, and

ci, vi,

Ex.
INFINITIVE.

Divertirsi^

Divertendosi,

Essersi divertito,
Essendosi divertito,

si

tenses of these verbs are formed

amuse one's-self.
amusing one's-self.
to have amused one's-self.
having amused one's-self.
to

REFLECTED AND RECIPROCAL VERBS.

122

INDICATIVE MOOD.

Mi

diverto,

amuse myself,

Ti diverti,
Si diverte,
Ci divertiamo,
Vi divertite.

thou amusest thyself,

he amuses himself,

we amuse

ourselves,

you amuse yourselves,

they amuse themselves.

Si divertono.

PAST INDEFINITE.
j\Ii

I have

sono divertito, &c.,

amused myself.

IMPERATIVE.

Non

do not thou amuse

divertire,

ti

Si diverta,
Divertiamoci,
Divertitevi,

Si divertano, &c.,
229.
it is

When

the verb in the reflective form

conjugated with the pronouns

pound tenses with

Noi ci vediamo,

essere.

may

The English

ci, vi, si,

Wo

used reciprocally,

see one another.

You see one another.

They see one another.

reciprocal pronouns, one another, each other,

be expressed in Italian by Vun

mutually

is

and forms the com-

Ex.

Voi vi vedete,
Eglino si vedono, &c.,

230.

thyself,

amuse thyself.
let him amuse himself.
let us amuse ourselves.
amuse yourselves.
let them amuse themselves.

Divertiti,

l'altro, or

reciprocamente, reciprocally.

Noi

ci siamo aiutati l'un l'altro,

Voi vi siete amati scambievolmente,
Eglino si sono offesi reciprocamente,

We

LI.

ancients were

(semidei)

themselves by extraordinary
2)cr straordinario

have helped one another.

You have loved one another.

They have offended one another.

EXERCISE

The demigods of the

scamhievohnente,

Ex.

men who had

(228)

courage and virtue.

distinguished
distinto

The

Athii-

REFLECTED AND RECIPROCAL VERES.

nians

wit
prided themselves on their
spirito
gloriare
di

and learning.

One has * right enjoy

duty. She sang Spanish songs,

one's

(156) dovere

They

on the guitar.
chitarra
con

wounded one another.

ferire

Spagnuolo
have fought

possess

(165)

much

are not

who

rich as those

so

little.

Dress yourself as quickly as

[il pi.

accustom

should

(229)

content

(Ill)

ourselves

{Dovremmo) avvezzare
blame ourselves, people
biasimare

we

inf.

accompanying herself
accompagnare
duel, and they have

should love and help each other.

{dovrebbero)
(230)

di

We

having done

Men

irr.

themselves with

his

adempiere

a
(228) battersi in duello

(230)

Those who

perform

to

one's-self after

to

He

sapere

reproached hiroself with having neglected

inf.
trascurare
di
rimproverare
promise.

123

gente

everything.

to

a
believe more than we
(107)
than

s.

praise ourselves, people believe

possible.

presto possibile)

less

When

we

say, but when

we

say.

They

(110)
fatigued themselves too much.

have

(228) stancare

231.

Many

(74)

intransitive verbs in Italian are

are not so in English, as the following

Addormentarsi,

to hasten.
'

iSpici

y''^''Levarsi,
)

to get

Maritarsi, '}
Annoiarsi, to get tired.
rsi,

to lean.

which

Ajprossinarsi, )
Accostarsi,
Y ^o approach.
Avvicinarsi,
Arrendersi, to sun-ender.
Astenersi, to abstain.
Attristarsi, to get sad.

to fall asleep

Alza

Ammoqliarsi,

reflected,

-,

marned.

Avanzarsi, to advance.
Avviarsi, to go forward.
Bagnarsi, to bathe, to get wet.
Compiacersi, to take pleasure.
Contentarsi, to be satisfied.
Crucciarsi,

Adirarsi,
Arrabbiarsi,

"

> to get
I

angry.


REFLECTED AKD RECIPROCAL VERBS.

124

Opporsi, to

Dilettarsi, to delight.
Dimenticarsi, . p..
^ ^^'^et.
Scordarsi,
\ |
Dolersi, to grieve.
Fidarsi, to trust.

Pentirsi, to repent.

"*". {;:rpi;'.r

Imbarcarsi, to embark.
Impadronirsi, to get possession
IiifaMidirsi, to get weary.
Ingegnarsi, to endeavour.

Rallegrarsi, to rejoice.
Ricordarsi, to remember.
Riposarsi, to rest.
Rompersi, to break.
Sentirsi bene, male
to feel well,
unwell.

of.

Innamorarsi, to fall in love.

Lamentarsi, to complain.
Maravigliarsi, to wonder.
'jrst, to

Svegliarsi, to awake.

Vantarsi, to boast.
Vergognarsi, to be ashamed.

take offence.

EXERCISE

Epic poets delight

in

LII.

depicting

battles.

Since

you

Poich

(34) iescr/yere inf.

have sincerely repented, I forgive you.

(231)

e/;/co

We

should often be

(231)

(228)

of our finest actions, if the world saw the motives which

bello
sub. 2
(231)
produced them. Narcissus fell in love with his own beauty.

ashamed

Narciso (231)

awoke

in the midst of the night.

di

When we

(156)
are

we remember with

pleasure (of) the days of our youth.

come to-morrow
{di

(231)
he did not carry

porre

it
irr.

Eepenting of

early.

buon ora)

into

effect.

in

esecuzione

Pietro

his project,

(231)
servant ran to

tell

on

fire

Speak about

{in fiamme)

to ray wife,

answered the poet, without rising

(231)

irr.

awakening from the meditation

in

from his
inf.

desk,

scritloio

which he was absorbed.

irr.

laden
ricolm.0

with favours he always complains, and seems

di

to take pleasure in boasting of his

(231)

it

(138)

inf.

Although

(to)

irr.

Peter Cornelius that the house was

or

Do not

(jioventit

(231)
forget to

old,

(57) vecchio

(231)

(231)

(231)

own

ingratitude towards forverso


IMPERSONAL VERBS.
tunc.

A Roman who

friends

bad separated from bis wife, said to bis

(228) separarsi
is it not
were astonished at it You see my shoe
scarpa
sorjjreso (138)

wbo

made ? does

well

it

not

But do you perceive where

well ?

fit

stare

irr.

it

125

me

hurts

(231)

Frederick

the First,

Federico idi)
far male
and Alexander the Great died after

Alessandro
river of

fiume

Eed

called

beard,

nominare
(72) barba
having bathed in a small
(228)

(231)

inf.

Armenia.
Armenia.

IMPEESONAL VERBS.
232. Impersonal verbs are, properly speaking, only conjugated
in the third

noun

person singular

in the plural^ they are

but in Italian, when followed by a

this case they lose their characteristic of impersonal, as the

them becomes their

some of the most in use in Italian
that follows

The

subject.

following are

Accade,
Avviene,

Basta, it is sufficient, enough.

Albeggia, it dawns.
Annotta, it grows dark.
Balena,
{

Interviene,
Pare, it appears.
Si addice, it becomes.
Fa di mestiere, "|

-.^^^^^^^^.^

it

^ it

Conviene,

^it

Grandina, it hails.
Tuona, it thunders.

Bisogna,
Disdice,

it is

Gela, it freezes.
Digela, it thaws.

Sembra,

it

233.

The compound

happens.

is

d'uopo.

snows.

noun

Piove, it rains.
Pioviggina, it drizzles.

Nevica,

In

used in the third person plural.

it is

necessary.

needful.

unbecoming.

seems.

tenses of impersonal verbs are furmed

with essere, and the pronoun

it is

generally not translated.

Ex.

E piovuto tutta la notte,

It has rained all night.
It has happened it has snowed.
accaduto ; nevicato,
234. The English expressions one must, we must, are rendered
1

in Italian

by the impersonal verbs conviene, bisogna, with the

Ex.

following verb in the infinitive.


12 fi

IMPERSONAL VRRHS.
One must

perdonare le offese,
Adesso dieci siamo divertiti, conJjisogaa.

Now

when

235. But

that

forgive offeucea.
played,

we have

wc must

work.

vien lavorare,

the subject, instead of one, we,

is

any other

word, the verb which follows conviene or bisogna must be in the

by

subjunctive, preceded

Bisogna ch'io

vi dica la

che,

mia

Ex.
must

opi-

con-

you

teli

my

opinion.

nione,

Conviene che
sigli del

malato segua

il

patient must follow the doctor's

advice.
When the husbandman has ploughed
his field, he must sow his grain if
he wishes to reap.

medico,

Quando

il contadino
ha arato il
campo, bisogna che lo semini se

vuol raccogliere.

Some verbs

236.

are conjugated impersonali^/ with the con-

Ex.

junctive pronouns in the dative case.

Mi

dispiace che,

am

we

Ci dispiace,

sorry that.

are sorry,

Ti dispiace,

thou art sorry.

Vi dispiace,

you are

Gli dispiace,

he

Dispiace loro,

they are sorry.

Le

she

dispiace,

is sorry.

Mi piacciono lepersone istruite,

he piace molto la lettura dei classici

I like well-informed persons.

She

gli riuscito di

to read

the

has not succeeded in persuading

me.
We thought it too dear.

They want
I

EXERCISE

enough

to

(232)

dently.

much

He

persuadermi,

Ci paruto troppo caro,

Ahhisofjnano loro dei guanti.
Mi abbisogna un paio di stivali.

It is not

very

likes

Italian classics.

Italiani,

Non

sorry.

is sorry.

How do you

gloves.

want a pair

of boots.

LIII.

speak correctly, one must also speak pru(234) anche

like this

town

It rains, thunders,

and

(232)
(236)
all at once.
This dress becomes you very well.
lightens,
{al tempo stesso.)
vestito (232)
Do you think (that) it freezes now? It is necessary to study

{22,&) parere

mythology

in

sub. 1

order

understand the

to

mitologia
sufficient to love virtue

(232)

(232)
classics.

classico.
;

one must also practise

f234^

not
You must
It

is

it.

(235)


IMPERSONAL VERBS.

buy note-paper, pens, and

ink.

127

Despots abhor

and

progress,

it

(15)
suffices

man

for a

che

(232)

be the friend of truth and science, to

to

per

sub. 1

(draw down) the persecution of those enemies of humanity.

attirarsi

What

has

happened

to

(182) (233)
florid than is becoming
fiorito

(107) (232) sub.

composition.

It

you

Michelet's

style

is

perhaps more

stile

(to) the severe character of historical

1

storico

happens often that we only wish

(232)

for

a thing

be obtained.
In the life of a man
a (214)
there are two cardinal points which
insure
his happiness or
cardinale^
(177) assicurare
his unhappiness
his birth and his marriage
it is not enough
*
* matrimonio
(232)
because

it

appears

difficult to

'

They have not

be happy, marriage must be so too.

sub, 1
la pure.
(235)

for birth to

che

succeeded in freeing their country from a

di

(236)

foreign

yoke.

'^straniero ^giogo.

inf.

OBSEEVATIONS ON ESSERE AND AVERE.

237.

The compound form, so much used in English, / am

I was speaking^ is not admissible in Italian, and must

speaking^

be expressed with the simple tenses of the verb in the present

participle, io parlo, I

speak

Ella scrive al suo avvocato,

To ricamava un fazzoletto,

238.

When

the English

or continuation,

auxiliary to be
venire^

and

parlava, I spoke.

io
I

compound form expresses progression

and represents an action as

may

stare.

Ex.

She is writing to her lawyer.

I was embroidering a handkerchief.

still

iiicomplete, the

be expressed in Italian by the verbs andare,

Andare and venire

are used with verbs that

OBSERVATIONS ON ESSERE AND AVERE.

128

express motion and progression, but stare can only be used to

describe a progressive action denoting repose, rest.

Andava errando

tutta la notte

He was

per

la foresta,

Ella stava disegnando,

Il fior che intatto io
bando, Ariosto.

239.

wandering

Ex.
night in the

all

forest.

She was drawing.

mi venia

The

ser-

flower that I was preserving

for myself.

untouched

may be

Venire* and andare

used instead of essere in the

simple tenses of passive verbs, but in tbe

must be used.

compound

tenses essere

Ex.

He
He

Egli vien lodato.

Egli stato lodato, not Egli venuto lodato,
Il vero merito va congiunto colla

is

praised.

has been praised.

True worth

modestia,

is

accompanied by mo-

desty.

240. Idioms formed with Essere

Essere in grado

To bave

di,

it in one's power, or
be able.
be in a critical position.
be in readiness.
be good for nothing.

to

Essere
Essere
Essere
Essere
Essere

To
To
To

a mal termine,
all'ordine.

un poco di
u buono.
uuono
'\
in procinto
lo di,
per,
'

punto di, )
buon concetto,

To be on

the point

To have

a good or bad cha-

j"

racter.

of.

Esse^e sul

Essere
Essere
Essere
Essere

Non

in

in cattivo concetto,

To
To

a grado,
d'accordo.

a grado,

agree.

They

sono in grado di oiporre lunga

e seria resistenza.

Se vi

like, to feel inclined.

If

i^rendetelo,

are not able to oppose a long

and serious resistance.

you like it, take it

EXERCISE LIV.
It is not

always in our power to extinguish our passions, but

estinguere
(240)

* In Italian, the verb venire

going where another person

is,

is

or of

Verr da voi questa sera, I will go

lid Continente,

We

will

used to translate

to go,

in

speaking

of

accompanying those to whom we speak.

you this evening Verremo con voi

to see

go with you to the Continent.


OBSERVATIONS ON ESSERE AND AVERE.

129

The enemy M-as

govern and regulate them.
(238)
(128)
examining our fortress. He was on the point of publishing a
pubblicare
(240)
doubling our capital.
work.
The interest that we receive is
opera
(238) raddoppiare
we can

(at least)

almeno

irr.

History proves

that philosophers have always been preceded

filosofo

by poets and painters.

Mediocrity

precedere

(239)

always punished with

is

mediocrit (238)

Some

were gathering flowers in the meadows,

prato
dimenticanza. (176) (237) cogliere
others were making wreaths and nosegays for the approaching
ghirlanda
mazzetto
vicino
(237)
oblivion.

ball

von

all

were looking busy and happy.

'
(237) sembrare attivo

to the

end of the avenue.

I will

go

with

(239*)

was listening with great plea-

viale

(238)
sure to an amusing discussion while you were dancing.
*
dilettevole
mentre
not in

my

power

to

do you this favour.

All

It is

nations and re-

(240)

(187)
ligions agree in
giving (to) music and poetry a place in Paraposto
(240) art. inf.
Ossian has always been reputed the

dise.

Homer

of the

High-

Omero
lands.

241.

When

the preposition to precedes an infinitive, which

depends on the verbs

Ho
Ho

to

have or

to be, it is

expressed by a or

Ex.

da.

fare qualche visita,

parlarvi di affari,
uomo da seguire
esempio,
.VoH c' tempo da perdere,
, -A presumersi,

a.

(la

Non

il

cattivo

bave
have

He

to
to

pay some visits.

speak to you on business.

not a man to follow bad esample.

Tbcre is no time to lose.
It is to be supposed.
is

ODSERVATIONS ON ESSERE AND AVERE.

130

When

242.

an
a.

the infinitive depending on essere

adjective^ alone, or

accompanied by a noun,

preceded by

is

to is

expressed by

Ex.

facile a credersi,

It is

Questi fiori son belli a vedere,

Quest'uva non buona a mangiare,

These flowers are beautiful

These grapes are not good

243.

When

easy to be believed.

the auxiliaries to have and

by dovere.

obligation, they are often expressed

Devo vedere il medico oggi,

Dobbiamo scrivere delle lettere avanti

Ex.

bave to see the doctor to-day.

We have to write letters before
dinner.
I

was

You

244. Idioms formed with Avere

Avere a mente, a memoria,

Avere a mano, or in pronto,

to eat.

convey an idea of

I
I

pranzo,

Doveva andare in citt,

Dovete pagare i vostri debiti,

to be

to look at.

to

go

to town.

are to pay your debts.

:-

To remember.
To have a thing

at hand, or in

readiness.

Aver

caro,

Averla con uno,

Aver caldo, freddo.

Aver

cervello, giudizio,

To be happy.
To be angry with a person.
To be warm, cold.
To act prudently, to be sensible.

Aver fretta,
Aver fame, sete, sonno,
Aver fama, voce di,
Aver luogo.
Aver l'intenzione,
Aver male.
Aver paura.
Avere piacere.
Aversela per, or a male,
Abbiatemi per iscusato,

Aver ragione.
Aver torto.
Aver voglia.
Aver buona cera,
Aver cattiva cera,

To
To
To
To
To
To
To
To
To

be in a hurry.
be hungry, thirsty, sleepy.

To
To
To

wish.
look healthy.
look unhealthy.

have the reputation of.

take place.
have a mind, to intend.
feel pain.

be afraid.
be glad.
take offence at.
Pray excuse me.
To be right.
To be wrong.

ORSERVATIONS ON ESSERE AND AVERE.

131

EXERCISE LV.

There are many diseases

known

not

is

co7ioscere

(214)

difficult

malattia
(of them).

be

(241)

(138)

inhabitants of a rich and fertile

tlie

cure, because their origin

to

(242)
It is not to

(214)

are

soil

paese sub.
dolent.

You have nothing

(not) often in1

fear from these

to

denied that

men.

Modera-

(164)

(203) (241)

desired in all things, and extremes are to be

tion is
be
to
estremo
(241) (214)
It is to be deplored that genius has not always been
blamed.

sub. 1

devoted to the service of truth.

consacrare

Those who think

they are

(173)
(244)
always right are sure to be often in the wrong. I advise you
consigliare
(244)
Do not be afraid
(as a) friend to be more prudent in future.

da

(244)
to censure at all times the profane

(244)

even although he

scoffer,

quando
have a mind

beffardo anche

should
take offence at your
reproof.
rimprovero
dovere sub. 2 (244)
di

go

to

in

Switzerland this year, and I would be very happy

Svizzera
(244)

accompanied

me

thither.

Our

to

(244)
if

you

Italian friends are always cold,

sub. 2

even when we are very warm.

Some of

us

and

rest.

me

if

What cause

we

and I

noon,

mezzo giorno
historians

want

are all in
to

be angry with

am

in a great hurry.

(244)

have to

tell

dire

me ? Excuse

(244)

but I have to post those

impostare
(243)

(243)

of refreshment
ristoro

had you

motivo
I leave you,

are hungry, some

(244)

(176)
are thirsty, some are sleepy

the truth.

letters

before

Satirists

and

scrittore di satire

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

132

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

The Infinitive Mood

expresses an action in an indefinito

manner, without any reference

used substantively in Italian.
Parlare, cantare,
II biscazzare fonte di grandi sventu7'e,

to time

or person,

and

is

often

Ex.
To
|

speak, to sing.
is a source of great misfor-

Gambling
tune.

'

The Indicative Mood simply

expresses or affirms an action.

Ex.
JS^oi

lavoriamo,

The

we work.

distinction

N'oi studiamo,

made

we

in using the imperfect

study.

and the preterite

tenses requires particular attention.

245.

The Imperfect is used to express an action which

Ex.
unfinished when another took place.

1st,

remained

still

Io vi scriveva quando voi entraste,

E(fifa coronato quando era ancora
fanciullo,

2d,

To

Metastasio soleva

was writing to you when you entered.

he was yet a

He was crowned when

cliild.

dire,

"mi

costa

rondini

To

we speak was

habitual

Ex.

meno di credere che di dubitare,"

Comparava Cicerone gli amici finti
3d,

denote that the action of which

ox frequently repeated.

alle
le

Metastasio used to say, " It costs me

less to believe than to doubt."
Cicero used to compare false friends
to swallows.

describe the qualities of persons or things

the state or

place in which they were in a time past, without defining the

period of

its

Ex.

duration.

Francesco primo, lie di Francia,

amava la r/loria, ed era di uno spi-

La Regina
crudele,

Elisabetta era vana e

possedeva pure delle

ma

grandi qualit,

246.

Francis the First, King of France,

loved glory, and had a chivalrous
spirit.

rito cavalleresco.

Queen Elizabeth was vain and

cruel,

but she also possessed great qualities.

The Preterite

is

used in speaking of a past action, com-

pleted at a period quite past, and of which no part remains unexpired, so that this tense cannot be used in speaking of to-darj^
this

week,

this

year.

Ex.


ON MOODS AND TENSES.
Perdettero nella loro giovent

Thcy

i geni-

133
their

parents

in

tlieir

Romulus founded Eome, and

killed

lost

youth.

tori,

Romolo fond Roma,

suo

e uccise

his brother.

fratello,

Licurgo

fece

uno

amo pia

stato che

Lycurgus established a state which

lasted more than 800 years.

di ottocento anni,

The Past

247.

Preterite Indefinite

or

is

used in speaking

of & past action, without determining the time in

Abbiamo

un

dimorato

anno

Boemia,
ha mostrato una rara

Mi

We

in

is

it

hap-

a rare collection of

butterflies.

also used

time not

have resided a year in Bohemia.

He showed me

collezione

di farfalle,

It

which

Ex.

pened.

when

the action has taken place in a period of

Ex.

coriipletely elapsed.

Io ho avuto un abboccamento questa

mattina col console.

Abbiamo pranzato

We

oggi

prima

had an interview

this

morning

v.-ith

the consul.
dined to-day earlier than usual.

del

solito.

EXERCISE LVI.

When we

lived near the sea,

we bathed every

(245)

nand and Isabella reigned

lumbus discovered

the guidance of Moses.

condotta
Mos
whilst I

was

mentre
beautiful, not

antiquity.

if

Ferdi-

left

Egypt under

Egitto
Ebreo
(27)
I visited the tomb of Virgil last year

at Naples.

The

Greeks, in perception of the

sensibilit
(51)
only equalled but excelled all the nations of
solo eguagliare
sorpassare

Newton was born

antichit

as

in

(245)
(28) Ispagna
America.
The Jews

scoprire (246)

day.

(231)
Spain at the time that Co-

nascere

the same day that Galileo died,

irr.

nature did not wish to have any interval between these

sub. 2
framezzo

come
two great minds.

To censure
(34)

is

easy, the difficulty lies in doing

stare

inf.

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

134

that hope
better. I read to-day Plato's remark,
Platone osservazione
(247)

when we

are awake.

Louis

sveglio

the court of the

is

xv. was entering his carriage in

in carrozza
(245)

when Damiens

palace of Versailles

at-

(246)

corte

tempted

our dream
sogno

assassinate

to

him.

War

is

which

like a law-suit,

processo

tentare

win.
The court of Louis
ruins
even those who
rovinare pure (173) (175) guadagnare
the Fourteenth was most brilliant, and in accordance with the

armonia

(115) brillante

(91)

monarch, who loved glory and magnificence

taste of that

in all

gusto
things,

and surrounded himself with the greatest men of the

(H^)

di

circondare
age.

tempo

The Future

represents an action as yet to come.

Io passer da voi domani,

Noi andremo alla

caccia delle heccacce

verso la fine del mese,

248. In English, ihe present of the indicative,

by such words
used to express

ti

when, quando
future action

if,

when preceded

se ; as soon as, tosto che, is

but in Italian the future must

Ex.

be employed.

Quando

as

Ex,

you to-morrow.
We ai-e going to shoot woodcock at
the end of the month.

I will call on

verrete, sarete

il

When

hen venuto,

you come, you

shall be wel-

come.

Se tu crederai

al

mio

consiglio, tu

If you take my advice, you will not

go out to-day.
As soon as the post arrives, we will
go and ask if there are letters for

non

uscirai oggi,

Tosto che la posta arriver, andremo

a domandare se vi son lettere per
noi.

The Conditional

expresses an action subject to a condition.

Ex.
Vi

scriverei pia spesso se

tanto occupato,

non fossi

would write

to

not so busy.

you oftcncr

if I

were

ON MOODS
249. The

A.ND TENSES.

135

future and the conditional are also employed in

Ex.

Italian to express douht^ uncertainty^ surprise.

E sar vero ?

Can

A\rk forse

He

Sarebbe

il

250.

it be true ?
has perbaps bis reasons.
Has tbe doctor returned ?

sue ragioni,
medico tornato ?
le

The Imperative Mood commands,

permits; the imperative has no

the second person singular

is

first

ini seccare,

Do

Insegna alla tua sorellina Valfaheto,

EXERCISE

it is

Ex.

infinitive.

not tboii trouble me.

Teach thy

and

when

accompanied by a negative,

rendered in Italian by the present of the

Non

exhorts, entreats,

person singular, and

the alphabet.

little sister

LVII.

send you some partridge and some

woodcock if I
pernice p.
(55) beccaccia]).
kill
any.
When I have finished this drawing, I will go to
disegno
(248) (138)
(248)
the (post-ofiice).
Do not (thou) awake me before seven o'clock.
posta
(250)
(95)
I will

As

soon as they arrive

me

let

know

(it).

If you

come

(248) fare (127) sapere

(248)
to-morrow to breakfast with us, I will show you a picture that
noi
quadro

my

me

cousin has sent

from Italy.

please (to) his brother.

Perhaps he

"

di

He has

Forse

fears to dis-

(249)

perhaps resolved to leave this

irr.

country on account of his health.

a cagione

with you.

I will let

it.

All that you

had

time, I

would go

sub. 2

you know as soon as we have decided

sapere

fare

do

If

undertake

(248)
to do,

do

it

to

irr.

well.

intraprendere

The Subjunctive

is

the

mood

of uncertainty,

and

is

always

preceded by another verb, expressed or understood, to which

is subordinate.

it

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

136

The

251.

subjunctive

is

used after any verb exj)ressiiig doubt,

fear, wonder, wish, hope, surprise, admiration,

command,

Sembra che non

Comand

appears you are not satisfied.

ordered that they should attack
the enemy.
He wonders that men can follow
vice, which always brings misfor-

siate contento,

che attaccassero

il

It

He

nemico,

Egli si maraviglia che gli uomini

possano seguire il vizio, che sempre porta seco danno e sventura,
Spero che ora siano convinti ?

Bench

tune and suffering.

I hope they are convinced now ?
Because the wicked man sometimes
prospers, do not imagine that he

scellerato qualche volta

lo

non 'immaginate pero

prosperi,

che sia felice.

is

Permetto che voi andiate,

Desiderate che io vada ?

happy.

I allow

you

Do you

desire

to go.

me

to

252. After an action in the superlative relative

the only

solo,

or con-

Ex.

sent.

whoever

il

primo, the

first

qualunque, whatever.

Edimiurgo la pi bella citta ch'io

abbia mai veduta,
L'esempio di una vita esemplare,

il

chiunque,

Ex.

Truth

Speak, whoever you are.

Whatever may be your

guarir,

will cure

253. After the conjunction

the best lesson we can give to our

fellow-men.
is the only thing which does
not change with time.

posaa dare
ai nostri simili,
verit la sola cosa che non si
alteri col tempo,
Parlate, chiunque voi siate,
Qualunque sia il vostro dolore, il
la miglior lezione che si

lo

the last

l'ultimo,

also after

Edinburgh is the most beautiful

town I bave ever seen.
The example of an exemplary life is

La

tempo

go

se,

if,

grief,

time

it.

whether, the imperfect of

must be used, when the sentence implies doubt,

condition.
Ex.
Oh, if I had my pen in my mouth
Oh, se io avessi la mia penna in
the subjunctive

bocca ! esclamo

un poeta

quale

il

tartagliava.
Se Vira non vi accecasse,
Egli parlo come se dubitasse della
vostra sincerit.

254.

The

subjunctive

is

Quando non
r)

vi dispiaccia, io
del vostro nome.
vogliate,

27

who stammered.

If passion did not blind you.

He

spoke as

if

he doubted your

mi var-

sin-

cerity.

required after quando, ove, dove,

these words are used instead of se.

Ove

exclaimed a poet

when

Ex.
If you do not object, I will
of your name.
If you wish it.

make

use

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

When

255.

negative before

the relative pronoun

it,

137
a noun having a

refers to

the verb following must be in the subjunctive.

Ex.
know nobody who

Non

Non

There

conosco alcuno che sia pi orgoglioso di lui,

c' donna che sia piU cortese
di lei,

The

256.

subjunctive

is

is

although

accioche, in order that

more proud

woman more

not a

kind

than she.

used after various corijunctions and

adverbs, which imply condition or uncertainty

tunque., bench.,

is

than he.

such as quan-

purch., provided that

finche., until

quand'anche, even although, and several

Quantunque and bench also govern the indicative when

the idea expressed is positive, and in no way doubtful.
Ex.

others.

Bench

ella sia la

Although she is the most powerful

queen in the world.
Although I have many times expe-

pi potente regina

della terra,

Quantunque

io

abbia sperimentata

molte volte la sua generosit,

Purcl non vi scordiate,
Finch non abbiate jrrove pi certe,
Quand'anche no7i riusciste,
Bench non furto il mio. Tasso.

rienced his generosity.

Provided you do not forget.

Until you have surer proofs.

Even

if you did not succeed.

iVlthough the theft is nut mine.

EXERCISE

The

who

first

LVIII.

discovered the circulation of the blood was

(252)
Cesalpino,

Tuscan, although Harvey, an Englishman, was

(38) Toscano
the

first

(256)

who proclaimed

(252)
united and

the discovery (of

proclamare
free, what a powerful

state she

it).

If Italy

(138)

(253)

would

be.

(183)

It appears

(251)

that all nations like to boast of a glorious origin, and even

amare

were

if

ac7;e(254)

(231)

history does not confirm their pretensions, they

fable.

boldly
invoke
arditamente

Biante said, "

we

should live with our friends as

if
come{25')
"
they were to become our enemies ;" but Aristotle says,
we
dovere * divenire
Aristotele

favola.

{dovremmo)

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

138

should treat our enemies as

Aspire

to perfection,

Aspirare
has placed you.

fate

fato

irr.

monarch

is

if

they were to become our friends."

whatever may be the position

which

in

(252)
The only power which can support
potere
(252)

the love of his subjects.

The

who

last person

o,

could

suddito

influence

my

decision.

(252)
Constantinople, seen from the sea, pre-

view

sents the most enchanting

that I have ever seen.

(252) mai
If men were
be forgiven.
potere irr.
(253)
be happy. I have found nobody who

incantevole [colpo d'occhio)

Forgive in order that you may

all

(256)
good, they would

all

(202)

can teach
(255)

me

Chinese.
Chinese.

irr.

257. According to the idea conveyed by the

verb, the subordinate verb

When

or the subjunctive.

may be employed
when

may

first

or governing

be used either in the indicative

certainty

is

expressed, the indicative

on the contrary, the subjunctive

uncertainty or doult

is

denoted.

is

required

Ex.

Credo che V anima immortale,

Credo che sia ancora a Parigi,

I believe that the soul is immortal.

T think he is still in Paris.

So che

know he

Non

do not know

giunto in citt,
so se sia in /scozia,

258.

The future and

the conditional,

expression denoting uncertainty,

the present, and the second

may be

is

come
if

to town.

ho

is

in Scotland.

when preceded by an
replaced, the

by the imperfect

first

by

of the subjunctive.

Ex.
Temo

che non venga or verr jtrima

della fine del mese.

ritornaste or

Noi sjyeravumo che

ri-

I fear he will not

of the month.

We

come

till

the end

hoped that you would return.

tornereste,

259. In Italian, the subjunctive

the infinitive.

Ex.

is

often

employed

in place of

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

Dite al cameriere che mi svegli or
di svegliarmi di buon ora,
lo preghiate, or di pre-

139
awake me

Tell the servant to

E inutile che

It is useless to entreat

earlj.

him.

garlo,

260.

The English

dered in Italian, the

expressions, were
first

by

se,

I to, had

&c., are ren-

/,

with the following verb in the

Ex.

imperfect of the subjunctive, the second by se avessi, &c.

Were we to entreat you.

Were they to study.
Had he had prudence.

Se noi vi pregassimo,
Se eglino studiassero,
Se egli avesse avuto ])rudenza,
la
Se voi ne aveste parlato,

261.

The

Had you

spoken of

it.

tense in which the subjunctive should be used,

determined by the preceding verb on which

is

After

depends.

it

the present and future of the indicative, the jyresent of the sub-

junctive

is

Voglio che

generally used.

me

Ex.
wish you to give it to me.
I will praise you, provided
I

lo diate,

Vi loder purch

lo meritiate.

serve

you de-

it.

we use

After the imperfect, preterite, or conditional,

the im-

perfect of the subjunctive to express a present or future action

but we use the pluperfect to denote the past.

He

Voleva cKio gli dicessi,

Sperava che voi riusciste,
Avrei voluto che voi foste venuto la

Ex.

wished I would

tell

him.

I hoped you would have succeeded.

I would have liked you had come

settimana, scorsa,

last

week.

EXERCISE LIX.
It is

supposed that the city of Venice owes

irr.
Venezia irr.

origin to the

its

(214)

incursions of the barbarians, which forced the inhabitants of Padua,

barbaro
and of the neighbouring towns,

Padova

amongst some
{a refugiarsi)
fra
rocks and islands of the Adriatic, where they might live in
to take refuge

circonvicino

Adriatico

scoglio
safety.

believe

sicurezza

although
(256)

men do

that virtue

potere
is

preferable

(257)
they thought

not act as if
agire
(253)

to

wealth,
ricchezza

so.

He ordered

cos

(261)

OM MOODS AND TENSES.

140

US not to leave the house.

knew

their address.

sapere

I would not

You would

forget the offence if you really

The Indians who

worship no God believe that

adorare (202)
(257)
rash,
you would commit fewer

Indiano
exists.

Were

you

less

precipitoso

(260)

blunders.

Had

(57) sbaglio

you

to

I not

known

you, I would not have intrusted

confidare

(260)

this secret.

The Present Participle ends

tion,

and

endo

in

262.

When

preposition^

compound
;

Credendo, believing.
Cadendo, felling.

Udendo, hearing.
Sentendo, feeling.

is preceded by a
by the infinitive^ and by the
preceded by the prepositions dopo^

translated in Italian

of the infinitive if
for.

Ex.

II giudicare senza conoscere presunzione,

Dopo aver passeggiato per due ore,
ci

the English present participle

it is

per*

undo for the first conjugaand is invariable. Ex.

in

for the other two,

Cantando,
singing.
Cominciando, beginning.

after

if

(253)

indirizzo

forgave him.

he

hesitate to write
esitare

(259)

To judge without knowing

is

sumption.
After walking two bours,

rested.

we

pre-

riposammo.

Furono promossi per

They were promoted

avere agito

263. After the prepositions m,

may

for acting so

bravely.

cosi valorosamente.

o?i,

or hy, the present participle

either be translated literally, the preposition being omitted,

by the prepositions
more commonly accompanied by the article nel, col,

or be expressed by the infinitive^ preceded

in, C071, a,
al.

Ex.

* The participle whicb follows ^er

infinitive,

may

only

when a past

be used in English

iloJug, or for

having done

action

Era
so.

is

is

translated

by the compound of the

compound participle
he was praised for

expressed, and the

lodato

per averlo

fatto,

Quavio tempo

si

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

141

How much

time one loses in paying

perde facendo or

nel far visite,

All'udire il canto delV usignolo,
Vi e pi piacere nel donare che nel

visits

hearing the nightingale's song.

is more pleasure in giving
than in receiving.
In speaking of the sea, Homer calls
it a river.

There

ricevere,

Omero parlando or nel parlar

mare, lo chiama un fiume,

del

The present participle, when used

264.

expressed in Italian by the

is

On

infinitive

by a noun. Ex.
La stampa yi< inventata

as a

noun

with the

in English,

definite article,

or

Il
Il

Printing was invented in the fifteenth century.

The rising and setting of the sun.
Her singing is sweet.

nel dcimoquinto secolo,

sorgere ed il tramontar del sole,
suo cantare or canto dolce,

When,

265.

in English, a present participle is

by another verb,
Ex.

accusative
finitive.

it

Sento cantare nelValtra stanza,

Li vedo venire,
Vedemmo i cacciatori galoppare nei
camjn,

When

266.

is

able.

that,

in the

by the

in-

I hear singing in the other room.

I see them coming.
saw the huntsmen galloping in
the fields.

We

the English present particijAe can also be ex-

pressed by the indicative or subjunctive

pronoun

governed

translated in Italian

mood with

or without the

who, which, in Italian this second manner

prefer-

is

Ex.

II cane che abhaia mio,

The dog

La

The lady sitting, or wJio sits, at the

window embroidering, or who

harking, or which barics,

is

mine.

signora che siede presso alla

finestra e ricama, la fidanzata
di mio cugino,

embroiders,

is

my

cousin's

ho-

trothed.

267.
sive

The present participle, preceded

pronoun,

is

English by

in

rendered in Italian by the

infinitive

the article, and the English possessive pronoun

s.

personal pronoun in the nominative, which

non aver

egli

parlato dispiacque

alV assemblea,

Lo

is

posses-

changed into

placed after the

Ex.

infinitive.
II

is

a.

preceded by

scriverci ella cos spesso ci

molto piacere,
L'andar voi ogni sera al teatro ci fa
dispiacere,

His not having spoken displeased

the meeting.

fa

Her writing

so often gives us

much

pleasure.

Tour going every evening

theatre displeases us.

to the


142

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

When

268.

\q

the

noun

to

participle present

used as an adjective, the

is

changed into te, and

which it relates. Ex.

termination do

is

generally placed after

it is

I Negri hanno occJd brillanti,

Ho le mani tremanti,

The laughing face.

Negroes have sparkling eyes.
My hands are trembling.

Una

A falling

11 viso ridente,

La

stella

cadente,

The

luna sorgente,

star.

rising

moon.

EXERCISE LX.

The

sailors, foreseeing the

returned to the harbour.

squall,

in *
porto
" Are there no children in Athens?" said a Spartan, on seeing
fanciullo
(263)
The Druids chose the misletoe
an Athenian caressing a dog.

prevedere

burrasca

Ateniese

(265)

of the oak, (on account of) misletoe

appunto perch
tree.

In

teaching, one learns.

Druido
growing

beccare

fruit.

vischio

so rarely

on that

(266)
painted a cluster of
grappolo
Apelle

Apelles

(263)
grapes so naturally, that birds, on seeing
(263)

pecking at the painted

irr.

it,

flew
round
it,
volare attorno (135)

Formerly

tlie

Doge

of Venice

granello p.

used to perform the ceremony of espousing the Adriatic, by

con
(262)
^
throwing a ring into it. Your coming so often displeases him.

solere

(263)

(267)

(135)

Aristotle teaches, that the

more he

is

more an animated being

is

perfect, the

essere
(111)
Before
capable of feeling pleasure and pain.

(262)

men

Avanti che

possessed the art of writing, all deeds worthy of being preserved

sub. 2
(604)
(264)

A weeping willow. He
(268)
master's
My having

were transmitted
tramandare

to posterity in verse.

was dismissed

disobeying (to) his

orders.
(262*)
padrone

licenziare

for

salcio.

(267)

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

rewarded bim,

is

a proof of

my

143

being satisfied witb bis conduct.

(267) contento di

Tbe Past Participle, used adjectively witbout any

and number witb tbe word to wbicb

269.

auxiliary, agrees in gender

Ex.

it relates.

Tbe winter spent in Greece.

The withered flowers.
The battles gained by the Turks

L'iiiverno passato in Grecia,

fiori appassiti,
Le battaglie vinte dai

Turchi nella

in

the past war.

passata guerra,

Vedemmo due signore vestite a

We saw two ladies dressed in mourn-

lidio,

The past participle^ preceded by tbe verb essere, agrees

gender and number witb tbe nominative of tbe auxiliary. Ex.

270.
in

ma

Ugli era rispettato,

erano disprezzati,

Una

signora

due

fu

gli

He was

altri

leggermente

Wben

i\xQ

slightly

two others were

altre furono uccise,

271.

respected, but the others

were despised.

One lady was

ferita,

wounded, and

killed.

past participle follows tbe verb avere,

it

agree witb tbe object of tbe pbrase, or remain invariable

usually agrees

wben placed
Le

wben

comes after tbe

Ex.

it

before.

lettere che avete impostate,

Io ho impostato
date,

272.

nouns

it

che

and

is

it

invariable

The letters you have posted.

1 have posted the letters you have

mi avete

given me.

Wben

preceded by any of tbe proemployed as tbe objective of tbe

must agree witb tbem, to avoid ambiguity. Ex.

lo, la,

pbrase,

le lettere

object,

may

tbe past participle

le,

li,

mi,

ti,

ci, vi,

Llio trovato a casa,

Ella disse : Mi avete conosciuta fin
doli infanzia.
Li ho veduti, or

is

found him at home.

You have known
She said

mo

from

childhood.

ho vedute pas-

le

saw them walking together.

seggiare insieme,

Che

belle trote;

dove

le

avete pescate?

What

fine

trout;

caught them

273.

Tbe

past participle

witb avere, never varies

have no

object.

Ex.

its

of

where have you

intransitive verbs,

conjugated

termination, as tbis class of verbs

ON MOODS AM)

114

Egli or ella lia passeggiato,

ErjUno or elleno hanno dormito,
gli or ella ha tossito,

274.
essere,

The

ticiple, in locutions

or she has walked.

They have
|

present participle

may sometimes

TI'-NSES.

He
He

slept.

or she has coughed.

of the

auxiliaries

and

avere

be omitted in Italian before the past par-

introduced as incidental propositions.

Ex.

Gli alleati, sconfitti i lrissi all'Alma,

andarono ad assediare Sebastopoli,

The

E cos detto,

Ilaving said so, and having raised it

to her lips, she kissed it.
The letter being written, he went
away.

allies

having defeated the Eus-

sians at the

Alma, went

to besiege

Sebastopol.

appressatolo alla bocca,

B.

lo bacio,

Scritta la lettera, se ne parti.

The past participle

275.

is

used before the word

meaning of when,
Ex.
ing a compound tense.
in such case, the

Inteso che n'ebbe

il

after, or as

soon

che,

having,

as, preced-

When

he had heard the motive, ho

forgave us.
soon as the power of the nobles
was overcome, and the war with
the archbishop was finished.
After the king had arrived at the
confines of Spain.

motivo, egli ci

Doma che fa la potenza de' nobili,

e finita che fa la guerra clV Arcivescovo, Uav. S.
Pervenuto che/w il re ai confini della
%, Day. S.

As

EXERCISE LXI.

Having exposed himself

in

(274)
both arms.

(209)
immortal.

The

to the

enemy's

fire,

he was wounded

Greeks were persuaded that the soul

Cicero was assassinated by Popilius Lena, whose

Popilio

he had

formerly

saved

when

killed

his

own

(163)

father.

(262)

Demetrius, on being informed that

Demetrio

irr.

the Athenians

life

(180)

the latter was accused of having

altra volta

uccidere

is

irr.

had overturned
atterrare

his

statues,

(274)
remarked, " They
osservare

them

have not overturned the virtues which have erected

erigere

irr.

to

ON MOODS AND TENSES,

Socrates

said,

How

much

145

on hearing that the Athenians had conirr.

(263)
(127)
demned him to death, " Nature has condemned them also to

me,"

death,"

(272)

gained us
procurare

(not) often

slept

(122)

fine

We have

clothes have

often laughed at that story.

(273)

irr,

Our
The

the doctor has seen her.

dottore
dache
(272)
since

having seen the town,

left

with the night train.

sera treno

friends,

postilion

partire

(274)

having made us a

polite

(274)

was a

civility

vestito

(74)

She has

and

attention

civile

bow,

declined accompanying us, as

inchino ricusare

it

(265)

holiday,

giorno di festa.

WILL, SHALL, CAN, MAY.

When

276.

woidd,

will,

shall, shoidd, can, could,

may, might,

are used in English as auxiliaries, they are not translated in

Italian

but when they are used as separate verbs, they are ex-

pressed

by

Volere,
Dovere,
Potere,

Voi dovreste pagare i vostri debiti,

Egli mi deve ancora una bagattella,
Non possiamo sempre procurarci il
jnacere, e non possiamo sempre
evitare

il

To will, to be willing.
To be obliged, must,* ought, to owe.
To be able, to have the jiower, can.
You

should pay your debts.

me still a trifle.
cannot always obtain pL
and we cannot always avoid

He

dolore,

Posso sperare che voi

lo

raccoman-

May

Vi dobbiamo cento

277, Dovere
or prohahility.

recommend

"We owe you a hundred pounds.

lire,

is

frequently used in a sense signifying likelihood

Ex.

* Must, when used

bisogno di; as,

I hope you will

him?

derete ?

to study

owes

We

in the sense of to

Abbiamo bisogno di

libri

have need of, is rendered by aver

per studiare, we must have books

146

WILL, SHALL, CAN, MAY.

He is expected to come to-tlay.

He was judged by the king lilcely

Egli deve venire oggi,

Fu

Re

giudicato dal

La

dover essere

Dav.

eccellente ministro,

to

he an excellent minister.

S.

Queen Catherine, who

Regina Caterina, che chiara^

mente conosceva tanta animosit

AoxBTt un giorno produrre qualche
gran male, Dav. S.

so

much animosity

day

to produce

clearly

knew

to he likely

some great

one

evil.

278. Whenever, in English, the verb will^ followed by the

auxiliary have,
to choose,

volere

is

is

used with the signification of

to like, to wish,

and may be replaced by these verbs, the simple verb

used in Italian

but when the sense of the phrase does

not admit of this construction in English, the auxiliary have

must be translated

in Italian.

Ex.

Volete una pera ?

Volete un higlietto per

Non

il

Will you have, or d

Wee,
pear ?
Will you have, or do you wish, a

concerto ?

ticket for the concert ?

I will not have, or I do not wish for,
any fruit to-day.

wogVio frutta oggi,

Will you have the kindness to see

her home ?

Volete avere la hotit di

gnarla a casa ?

In the last example,

toill

have cannot be replaced by the verbs

and the auxiliary have

to wish, to like,

The English form

is

translated.

would have, is often followed

by another verb in the infinitive, preceded by a noun in the objective, but in Italian it is rendered by volere, and the verb which
follows volere must be in the subjunctive, preceded by che, and
the noun in the objective becomes the nominative of the second
verb.
Ex.
Will you have me go alone ?
Volete ch'io vada solo ?
"\\'Tiat will you have me say ?
Che volete ch'io dica ?
Vorrebbe che lavorassero tutto il
He would have them work all day.
279.

will have,

giorno,

280. Volere, dovere, potere, as well as fare, to

cause, to let

sapere, to
habit

lasciare, to

know

allow

let or

sentire, to feel or hear

udire, to hear

when

d^Europa,

le

principali citt

make

or

intendere, to hear
;

solere, to be in the

followed by an infinitive, do not

require any preposition after them.

Vollero visitare

Ex.

They wished
of Europe.

to visit the chief towns


WILL, SHALL, CAN, MAY.
Dohl'amo moderare

We

nostri desi-

must

147

restrain our wislies.

dera,
Potete venire

You may come when it

quando vifar comodo,

convenient

is

to 3'ou.

EXERCISE

We

courages
ref.

divide

LXII.

as
should encourage the Beautiful,
poich
Bello
(276)
itself.

{da se

them

Sentiments

stesso)

man

join

Useful en-

the

Utile

man, opinions

to

unire

(25)

the friendships of youth are founded on sentiment,

the dissensions of age

from opinions

spring

we

if

risultare

could

(253)

when we are young,

on this
we might, in
{mentre siamo ancor giovani)
potere
a (168)
forming our own opinions, acquire a liberal view of those of
^
^
acquistare
(263)
others, and we would endeavour to unite
by
sentiment,
cercare
per mezzo di
reflect

Many things

what opinion has divided and embittered.

amareggiare

(167)
we cannot do alone,
eva

noi

A
(201)

ance of others.

(to) his superiors.

may

easily achieved with the assist-

be

(276) (214)

soldier

effettuare

must accustom himself

to

obey blindly

(276)
I

(that)

must have money

danaro

(276*)

to

pay what I owe.

irr.

Will you have a pen or a pencil ? I will have neither.

Would
lapis
(278)
(210)
(279)
you have me
blame
him unjustly ? Will you have the
biasimare (251)
(278)

kindness to read these verses

aloud ?

The Queen

is

{ad alta voce)

to

arrive in Scotland this week.

(280)
the

ever.

Those who cannot

(173)

bonds of vice at a blow, will probably

(57) laccio

tratto

expected
(277)

break
(175) rompere
bear them for

portare

IDIOMS AND KEMAllKS ON VERBS.

Id8

IDIOMS

AND REMAEKS ON

VERBS.

FIRST CONJUGATION.
281. Verbs ending in care and gare take the letter h before
the vowels e or

z.

Ex.

Peccare,

pecco,

To

I sin,

sin,

Pagare,

To

pay,

pecca,
he sins,

pecchiamo, &c.

paghi,
paga,
thou payest, he pays,

paghiamo, &c.

pecchi,

thou sinnest,

pago,
I pay,

282. Idioms formed with the verb Andare

we
we
:

sin.

pay.

Andare a piede,
Andare in legno, in carrozza.
Andare a cavallo.
Andare a vele gonfie.
Andar dietro a,
Andare a male,
Andare a marito.
Andare a vuoto,
Andare in estasi.
Andare in collera,
Andare in mal ora,
Andare alla lunga,

To walk, to go on foot.
To drive.
To ride.
To prosper.
To follow.
To decay, to decline in health.
To get a husband.
To fail.
To fall into ecstasies.
To get into a passion.
To go to ruin.
To last a long time, to go on

Andare

To end

slowly.
alle corte.

quickly, to

come

to a

decision.

To be proud, haughty.
To like.
To sink.
To cross one's mind.
To get worse and worse.
To get better and better.

Andare altiero.
Andare a genio.
Andare a fondo.
Andar per la mente.

Andar
Andar

di male in peggio.
di bene in meglio,

In the long-run, in the end.

lungo andare,

exercise
(Old people) like
(57)

vecchio

what
(167)

is

lxiii.

useful,

(young people) follow

giovane
(282)

IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

all

that

and think

glitters,

of the end.

little

risplendere

(169)

want
mancanza

are decaying for

(282)

and

of light

occupies.

The

Naples

state of

now

well be proud of the position (that) she

In the long-run,

are

liars

hugiardo

even when
anche

as they (are not believed)

meritar fede

when

Indians got into ecstasies

beads and spangles.

perla

to
be
pitied,
(241) (214) compiangere
they tell the truth.
The

them some

the sailors offered

Law-suits

last so long, (that)

they often

processo

ruin (the gainer as well as the loser.)

chi vince e chi

the vessel sink.

air.

while
Sardinia steadily
mentre che Sardegna

(282)

may

These flowers

fine.

luce

gets worse and worse every day,

improves, and

149

From the

shore

we saw

perde

People who

get easily into a passion should

(173)

never
the

argue,
as passion blinds
disputare
accecare

weapon

first

principale (61)
to ask favours

ously.

All

requisite

for

reason,

and so deprives us of
*

togliere

an argument.

I do not like

necessario

from strangers.

Our

affairs are

going on prospcr-

a
their

plans

have

failed,

and

their position

is

get-

prorjetto

ting worse and worse.

Every crime

begins with a

criminal
^delittuoso

thought, which

at first

crosses

da prima

returns to tempt

its

victim,

stealthily

the mind, and often

alia sfuggita

who in

the end follows

its

promptings,
instigazione

and

blindly

ciecamente

goes to ruin.

IDIOMS AND REMARKS

150

Dare,

to give.

283. Addarsi^ to perceive, to addict one's-self

to,

and ridare^

to give again, are conjugated like dare.

Dare means

also to strike.

Fercli date a cotesto ragazzo f

vha

che

egli fatto ?

284. Idioms formed avith

Dare addosso ad

Dar fede
Dare ad

Dar

uno,

nella rete,

Dare il cuore,
Mi da V animo

a,

To run away, to take

To fall foul of one.
To fall into a snare.
To have the heart.

a,

To

del voi a,

a.

alla luce,

nel rosso, &c.,

Darsi pensiero

di,

Dar del furfante a.

Dar -parola.
Dar la burla, la baia,
ad uno.
Dar in prestito.
Dar fuoco,
Dar la caccia a,
Dar principio, ox fine
Dar conto.

To promi
la

quadra To make game of one.

a,

allo studio.

Dar di naso da per

Darsi bel tempo.
Darsi pace di,
Darsi briga.
la colpa

ad

tutto,

uno.

flight.

the 2d person singular.

address one in the 3d person feminine singular.
To address one in the 2d person plural.
To bring forth, to publish.
To begin to do somethin*.
To border on red.
To take to heart.
To call one a rascal.

Darsi a fare.

Dar

Dare

a,

del lei

Darsi

do you strike the boy ? what

has hb done to you ?

To believe.
To make believe.
To address one in

Dar

Dar

Why

I do not fear to do.

di fare,

intendere

Dar
Dare

or V animo

a.

del tu

Darsela a gambe,

Dar

Ex.

To lend.
To set on fire.
To give chase to.
To begin, or to finish.
To account for.
To apply one's-self to study.
To meddle in everything.
To enjoy one's-self.
To console, reconcile one's-self.
To give one's-self much trouble.
To throw the blame on one.


IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

Dar

To
To
To
To

retta a,

Dar mano a.
Dar una mano
Dar luogo a,

a,

151

mind, to listen, to
begin to do.

lieed.

help.

occasion, to give rise to.

EXERCISE LXIV.

The

first

person

who was

addressed in the 2d person plura.

(214)

was Julius

Cassar.

The

Giulio Cesare

person feminine

(284)

custom of addressing one

singular,

was introduced

cavalry

Italy

by the

rise to strange laws and customs.

When
strano
(284)
advanced, the Russians took flight,
They have

cavalleria

promised

into

War gives

Spagnuolo
our

the od

in

irr.

Spaniards.

in

(61) costume.

(284)

us

to

(284) (123)
the time of our

change the furniture of our parlour.

mobilia

first

parents, every

the blame on his neighbour.

From

{Fin da)

salotto

criminal is ready to throw

delinquente j^ronto
(284)

The

Epicureans lived to enjoy

Epicureo
per (284)
hair
themselves, and never took anything to heart. The
of
capello p.
(284)
Titian's beauties often borders more on red than on fair.
Tiziano hello L
biondo
(105)
(284)
Erostratus set fire to the Temple of Diana, in order to imErostrato (284)
Tempio
(18G)
vicino

Do

those who (speak ill) of

sparlare
(284) (165)
every one, and do not believe those who always speak well of

mortalize

name.

his

(194)
themselves.

have not
"To

(284)

his law-suit.

sell

(72)

the heart to

tell

glow-worms

which the
(178)

him

that he has lost

(284)
for

lucciola

lite

Italian proverb, of

not heed

meaning
significazione

lamps,"
lanterna
is,

is

a pretty

that people

(213)

try

volere

152

IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

make

to

us believe something whicli has not happened,

(280) (284)

(233)

Fare,
285,
suit

The

to

make,

to do.

derivatives, as assuefare, to accustom

disfare, to

undo

soddisfare,

to

imitate, to forge, are conjugated in the

286. Idioms formed

with Fare:

Farsi animo,

Far animo.
Far

capolino,

Far all'amore
Far alto.
Far pompa,

con.

Fare il grugno.
Sul far del giorno,
Sul far della notte,

Far

di mestieri.

Farsi innanzi,
Farsi in qua,
Farsi in l, indietro,

Far brindisi.
Fare la spia.
Fare il sarto, il calzolaio, &c.
Fare una visita.
Fare una passeggiata,
Fare ini bagno,

Far bel tempo.

Far cattivo tempo.
Far freddo, caldo, umido,
Far colazione,
Far merenda,
Far vista di,
Far mostra d.
Far piacere a.
Far le veci di,
Far naufragio^
Far vela.

satisfy

confare, to

same manner asfare.

To take courage.
To give courage,
To peep in.
To make love to.
To halt.
To boast.
To sulk.
At
At

contraffare, to

encourage.

the break of day.

the close of evening.

To be necessary.
To advance.
To draw near.
To draw back.
To drink a toast.
To be a spy.
To be a tailor, shoemaker.
To pay a visit.
To take a walk.
To take a bath.
To be fine.
To bo bad weather.
To be cold, warm, damp.
To breakfast.
To lunch.
To pretend.
To display.
To please.
To replace, to represent.
To be wrecked.
To set sail.


IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

Far
Fare

accoglienza,

Farsi

Fare

153

To turn a deaf ear.

To give a reception.
To ridicule, to jeer.
To pay attention, to be careful.
To show.
To hurt.
To mention.
To give proof of courage.

da mercante,

V orecchio
beffe di,

attenzione,

Far vedere,
Far inale a,
Far parola di.
Far prova di coraggio,

EXERCISE LXV.

Alexander

his friend Clitus, for ridiculing the title

killed

Alessandro Kccidereirr.
of

(286)

Son of Jupiter, which he assumed.

Never

Giove

good advice.

We

are often

more inclined

consiglio

than to
(105)
die of

to ridicule misfortunes

a (286)

disposto

them.

pity

disgrazia

At Naples, a nobleman (would

than

a merchant

be

rather)

preferire

nobile

averjnetcl (138)

hunger

turn a deaf ear to

(286)

at Venice, Florence,

[anzich] (286)

and Genoa, on the contrary, commerce can boast of many names

a
incontro mercatura
(286)
of the noblest lineage.
Philosophy could never take the place

lignaggio
of Christianity.

We were

(286)
ordered to halt at the close of the

filosofia

(218)
(286)
evening, and to (set out again) at break of day.
ripartire

they will

cheat

you.

Do

(286)
not mention

ingannare

On

(286)

Be

careful or

(286)
(of) it to

any

one.

chicchesia

(286)

the Continent, friends paid us often visits after dinner.

(286)
the reign of Louis XII., people dined
(91)

supped almost
cenare quasi
courage,

my

when we

breakfast,

lunch.

and

(286)

(213)

Why do you hurt him Take

?

despair

(286)

(286)

(286)

friend,

when we

In

is

unworthy of a Christian.

disperazione

The

154

IDIOMS

AND REMARKS ON VERBS

greatest part of the Spanish

Armada was wrecked on

naviglio

coast.

Queen Henrietta

the Irish

(286)

at first pretended to be very favourably

(286)
misled
every one,
ingannare
(194)
displaying great moderation in her religious views.
(33)

disposed

towards

and

Protestants,

opinione

(286)

Stare,

The

287.

by

to be distant

to

remain.

following verbs are conjugated like stare:

;

restare, to stop, to discontinue

Distare,

soprastare or so-

vrastare employed with the signification to delay, to temporize,

and contrastare
stare

in the sense of to be against, are conjugated like

but when sovrastare means to threaten, to sway, and con-

trastare

means

to contest either

by word or

action, both of these

verbs follow the regular conjugation.

288. Idioms

formed with Stare

Stare in piedi,
Star bene, or male,

To stand.
To be well,

or unwell, to be well

off.

Sta lene.
Star su,
Stare a sentire,
Stare a sedere,
Star per.
Star bene a cavallo.
Star di casa.

He

Come state di salute f

Non mi state a dire.

How

Questo vestito non vi sta bene,

Ci non sta bene.
Stare alt erta,
\
Star colV occhio alla penna, j
alla
cintola.
Star colle mani

is

well.

To get up.
To listen.
To be seated.
To be on the
To ride well.
To reside.

Do

point

of.

are you ?

tell me.
This dress does not become you.

not

That

is

not right.

To be on

one's guard.

To remain

idle,

with

crossed.

Stare a vedere^

To

wait, to do nothing.

arms


IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

Star
il

in dubbio, or in forse,

fra To be

155

in doubt, wavering.

si e il no,

To bold firm.
To agree together.
To be quiet.
To be silent.
To cheer up.
To let alone, not to

Star saldo,
Stare in pace, d'accordo,
Star fermo, quieto,
Stare zitto, cheto,
Star allegro, di buon animo,
Lasciare stare,
Sta a me, a voi, &c.,

my

It is
for

touch.

turn, your turn,

me,

it

is

for you.

EXERCISE LXVI.

Tasso was on the point of being crowned at Rome, but on

inf.
coronare
a
(288)
the eve of the day on which the solemnity was to take place he
in

vigilia

died.

We

(243)

remained standing

all

the time that

(244)

we were

Queen's presence.

That

child cannot

be quiet half an hour.

(288)

The

in tlie

(288)
(77)

inhabitants were in doubt whether they should open the

(288)
(253)
gates of the city to the victorious army of their enemies.

porta

vittorioso

Reason and imagination, says Pope, are

like

two relations who

parente

although intended to live together and to help one

(288) quantunque fatto per
another.
I shall not stay to hear the end of the concert,
as
I
a
siccome
(230)
never agree,

am

not well.

(288)

Are you better now Let me alone, and I will

(288)
The
That Arab rides with grace and
?

soon feel well.

ease.

Arabo
Turks remain

all

(288)
dreaming. People
sognare

('288)

grazia

disinvoltura

day with their arms crossed, smoking and

who

fumare
want
firmness are perpetually
mancare di

in

166

IDIOMS

doubt.

Misers

live

AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

always

poorly
to-day to be well off tostentatamente
per

avaro

morrow.

Those who

listen to

what

their friends are saying, do

(237)

not always hear themselves praised.

inf.

site

In Dresden we
oppoDresda
dirim A great misfortune
lived

the English ambassador's residence.

petto a

ambasciatore

threatens

sventura

palazzo

us.You have heard my

reasons,

(287)
decide.

it

is

for

you

to

(288)

was

Caisar

in

doubt

if

he should

cross

dovere sub. 2 attraversare

the Rubicon.

Rubicone

SECOND CONJUGATION.
289. All words that have the diphthong mo, drop the u when
the tonic accent

falls

on the syllable that follows the diphthong.

To cook, I cooked, I will cook,

To move, I moved, I will move,

Cucere, Cocva, cocer.

Muvere, Moveva, mover.

290. Verbs ending in the infinitive

solere, valere, &c., take a

singular,

and the

first

in lere,

before the letter

as volere, dolere,
in the first person

and third persons plural of the present of

the indicative, and in all the persons of the present of the subjunctive.

Ex.

Voglio, vogliamo, vogliono,

voglia, voglia, voglia, vogliamo,

Che

vogliate, vogliano,

Soglio, sogliamo, sogliono,

Che soglia, soglia, soglia, sogliamo,
sogliate, sogliano,

Vaglio, vagliamo, vagliono,

Che valga, valga, valga, vagliamo.
vagliate, vagliano,

we wish, they
I, thou, he, we,
wish.
I, we, they are in the
That I, thou, he, we,
I wish,

That

wish.
you, they

may

habit.

you, they may

he accustomed.
worth, we, they are worth.
That I, thou, he, we, you, they may
be worth.
I

am

291. Verbs ending in the infinitive in nere, as rimanere,

tenere, take a

in the

first

person singular and third person

plural of the present of the indicative, and in all the three per-


REMARKS ON VERBS.

IDIOMS AND

157

sons singular and third person plural of the present of the sub-

Ex.

junctive.

Rimango, rimangono,
Che rimanga, rimanga, rimanga,
rimangano,

I remain, they remain.

That I, thou, he, they may remain.
I hold, they hold.
I, thou, he, they

Tengo, tengono,

Che tenga,

That

tenga, tenga, tengano,

may

hold.

292. All verbs ending in lere and nere double the consonant

Ex.

r in the future and conditional.

To be

Valere, varr, varrei.

To

Tenere, terr, terrei,

worth, I shall be worth,

would be worth.
hold, I shall hold, I

would

hold.

293. Let the pupil observe that the preterite of irregular verbs
is

only irregular in

person plural; the

i\iQ first

first

and third persons singular, and third

which always ends in i, is changed

person,

into e for the third person singular,

person plural.

and into ero

for the third

Ex.

Scrissi,

Scrisse,

Scrissero,

I wrote.

he wrote.

Presi,

Prese,

I took.

he took.

they wrote.
Presero,
they took.

Lessi,

Lesse,

I read.

he read.

Lessero,
they read.

EXERCISE LXVII.*

hung
In the captivity of Babylon, the virgins of Judah
schiavit
Babilonia
Giuda appendere
on willow-trees and wept. Benvenuto Cellini wrote
salice
(150) arpa a
(293)
his biography at 60 years of age.
The reasons that they adduced
their harps

addurre

biografia

are

not convincing
enough.
convincere (268)

witnesses.

testimone

He

He

preferred an obscure

(brought forward)

six

produrre
and tranquil

anteporre
* Irregular verba are no longer marked.

life

(73)

to

the

IDIOMS AND HKMARKS ON VKRliS.

158

splendour of a throne.
arono

ginning of spring.

We

They are

remain in town until the be-

will

(292)

fino

in the habit

going every year

of

(290) (280) (262)

two months

for

the sea-shore.

to

Whilst Galileo was tortured

Mentre

presso

by the Inquisition

torturare

for his theory, that the earth

teoria

(289)

the sun, he calmly said: "nevertheless,

number

of

moves

pure
the Edinburgh Review

it

does move."

will contain

an

round
ref.

intorno

The next

article

on the

Rivista

Some

pretend that the Celtic and Etruscan knCeltico

Etrusco
(290) volere
guages are both derived from the Phenician, and are very like
Fenice
simile
(251) (209)
one another, but of the Etruscan language there only remains
[fra loro)
(291)
(232)
inscriptions that nobody can read.
fine

arts.

294.

To KNOW

Sapere implies

is

rendered in Italian by sapere and conoscere.

to

know through the mind, and is used

may be learned by heart. Ex.

in

cing of things that

Sapere la

lezione,

Io conosco vostro

zio,

to

know through

but not io so

vostro zio,

295.
Focili

To know

Conoscere implies

To KNOW how

sanno godere della

know your

Ex.

uncle.

is

simply rendered by sapere.

felicita

che posseggono,

Few know how

Sapere a mente, a memoria,

Saper viale.
Saper trovare il pelo nell'uovo,

To know by heart.
To displease.
To be clever, cunning.
I

can

toll

you.

Ex.

to enjoy the happi-

ness they possess.

296. Idioms formed with Sapere

Vi so dire,

the lesson.

the senses.


IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERES.

Sapere
Ex.
of.

is

159

also used in the signification of to taste of^ to smell

Saper di cattivo, di buono,

Saper di poco, di niente.
Saper di muschio, di sale, &c.

To smell, to taste badly, well.

To have little, no smell, taste.
To smell of mask, to taste of salt

EXERCISE LXVIII.
"

How

all

know ?"

(169)
" I would give much more to

(74)
conceited pedant to a lady.
all

know

mucli woiild you give to

you do not know," was the

answer.

witty

Charles

said

iv.,

how much

" Prince, I

they have

to

the

Emperor

know

all

these great men, I

it is

for

you

done
operare
;

in

Petrarca

medals
valuable ancient
medaglia
prezioso

(263)

know

Petrarch,

spiritoso

presenting some

said a

to imitate

know

them."

(288)
(74)
This
Camellias are beautiful flowers, but they have no smell.
Camelia
(296)
(79)
oranges smell badly.
These
dish has very little taste.
vivanda
(296)
(57) arancio (296)

Those who are not able

able to

command

others.

bridle their

to

capace

(173)

frenare

Dolabella

own

passions are not

(156)
said to

Cicero,

"

Do you

Cicerone

know

that I

am

only thirty years of age?"

" I ought to

know

(89)
it,"

answered Cicero,

you (have been)

andare

" for
dachi

telling

it

it

is

now more than

(7)
to

ten years that

Many wish know

No one knew mankind

me."

to

(127)
everything without studying anything.
(189)
better than

La

{gli uomini)
(262)
(202)
Bruyre.
It displeases him that you were not

(296)

IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

160

able either to write or send.

ne

kuew how
(295)

had the

ne
to

It

cooks (of old)

said that

is

{51) cuoco antico

(214)

dress
vegetables in such a way that they
cucinare (57) erbaggio
(185*) guisa

taste of fish or fowl.

The

polio

gondoliers of Venice know

gondoliere
(296)

by heart whole stanzas of Tasso, which they sing with a

intiero

ottava

peculiar

melody.

particolar

melodia.

(31)

297. Idioms formed with Tenere:

Tenere da uno,
Tenere a bada,
Tenere in contrario,
Tenere uno per galantuomo
Tenere le lagrime,
Tener le risa,
Tener conto di,
Tenere a battesimo.
Tener mano.

To
To
To
To
To
To
To
To
To

side with one, to

trifle

back one.

with.

be of different opinions.
believe one an honest man.
restrain one's tears.

keep from laughing.

esteem, to value.
be godfather, godmother
be an accomplice.

298. Idioms formed with Volere

and Mettere

to.

To love, to like.
To hate, to dislike.
One must have.

Voler bene a.
Voler male a.

Ci vuole.
Si vuole.

It

is

said,

they pretend,

they

believe.

Voler dire.
Mettersi a,
Mettersi a dormire,
Mettersi a tavola.
Mettersi a sedere,
Mettersi in testa.
Mettersi all'ombra.
Mettersi in via, in viaggio,

To
To
To
To
To
To
To
To

mean.
set about, to begin.

go to sleep.
go to table.
sit down.
take into one's head.
go in the shade.
set out on a journey.

exercise lxix.

Dante used, during the summer evenings,

solere

to

himself on


IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.
a

stone
opposite the
pietra dirimpetto

served in Florence.
servare

when he began

still

is

Duomo

^(214)

pre-

^ancora ^con-

Salvator Eosa worked so quickly, that

presto

paint a landscape in the morning, he could

dipingere
paesaggio

to

(298)

before evening.

finish it

Cathedral, which

161

In

setting out on our journey, the

(263)
carriage overturned, and as

vettura

we were

not hurt,

rovesciarsi

from laughing.

He

took

it

into his

head

to

(298)

We recommended him
honest man. He
with
alone.

to you,

ascend Vesuvius
Vesuvio
(297)

(297)
said

could not keep

we thought him an

as

all his creditors,

trifles

It is

we

(286)

that the language of a people

the type

but
\nQn \he

is
2

(298)

and pays none.

(202)
tipo

To be an accomplice a crime
a
(297)
begin
same
commit

a (298)
che
than
an enemy. mean that one must have
(105)
(298)
(298)
precepts
be
good
The
come pure precetto per
Queen was godmother
the
In order speak
of their national character.

in

carattere

is

the

as to

friend

to

inspiration

delitto

it.

to dislike a

It is easier to

like

(as well as)

to

to

princess.

poet.

ispirazione

(297)

or to

to

(66)

write well, one must have ideas and words present to the mind.

(298)

We should only value the

(276)

(297)

approbation of the good.

approvazione
p.

the good fortune to back the horse which

(297)
beth never ceased to hate a French
(298)
ridiculed her French pronunciation.
pronunzia.
(286) (154)

won.

He had

Queen

vncere

Eliza-

(33)

ambassador, for having

(228)

IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERR3.

162

THIRD CONJUGATION.
299. Idioms formed with Venire

To faint, to fail.
To be esteemed.
To be blamed, praised.
To come to blows, to a

meno, venir manco,

Venire stimato,
Venir biasimato, lodato, &c.
Venire alle inani, alle strette,
Veiiir

conclu-

sion.

Venir voglia, desiderio.

Gli venne voglia di viaggiare,
Mi viene in mente,
Mi vengono le lagrime agli

To

take a fancy, to wish.

He

wished

to travel.

I remember.

The

tears

come

to

my

eyes.

occhi.

To come

Venire alla luce,

to light, to appear.

DIFFERENT SIGNIFICATIONS OF CONVENIRE.

300. This verb,

when employed with

compelled, or of being convenient, must,

and takes no preposition

verb.
Ex.
campar

He was

Convenire may
Ex.
person.
esser egli

also

mean,

uomo dabbene,

Convenire is used
Ex.
assemble.

imper-

life.

That cannot be convenient

to

him.

agree on some point with a

I agree in his being an honest

man.

in the sense of to meet by appointment, to

Convennero sullapiazza del mercato,

Udire,

to

is

by another

obliged to escape in disguise

to save liis

la vita,

Cio non pu convenirgli,

Convengo

be necessary,

after it if followed

sonal,

Gli convenne, fuggire travestito, per

the signification of being

to

to hear.

They met

Sentire,

in the market-place.

to feel.

301. Both these verbs are employed in Italian to render the

verb

to

person,

hear ; Sentire likewise means

is

rendered by ricever

Udirono, or sentirono
Io mi sento male,

Abbiamo

una

voce,

ricevuto lettere d'Italia,

to feel.

lettere, or notizie.
I

They heard
I feel

We

To hear from a
Ex.

a report.

ill.

have heard from Italy


AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

IDIOMS

163

EXERCISE LSX.

him who has

I agree with

(173)
(300)
must be a good man.

said, that

be a good poet, one

to

per

They

met

in

but

a friend's house,

(300)
(300)_
separated without agreeing (on anything), having nearly come
quasi (225)
di
nulla
separarsi
(300)
Cato, at eighty, fancied for the first time to learn
to blows.

(299)
(299) Catone
Gothic ruins on the banks of
viewing the
Greek. In
riva
(263) contemplare
(50) Gotico rovina
the Rhine, we remembered the famous robbers of the thirteenth

Reno

(299)

whom

century, against

the merchants of more than

secolo

towns agreed

to

form

a league,

The

first

stampare

lega

(300)

hundred

(41)
printed books that

We hear

appeared were only printed on one side of the leaf.

da
parte
foglio.
(299)

(301)
Tasso was once

from our friends in Ceylon every three months.

reduced to such poverty, that he was obliged

to cease

writing at

(300)

having no candles

night,

from

hunger.

Xenophon

and Eacine beheld Corneille

blamed

is

Senofonte (299)

with a

pen.

novelist's

rendere
of ignorance

to

fit

To

writing

for

govern men,

it

is

necessary to

(300)
be governed, by dissipating the darkness

capace

and

history

(262*)

Per

romanziere

make them

faint

(299)

tenebra

superstition.

The

ambassadors assembled in
(300)

settle
the dispute between Switzerland and Prussia.
per comporre
Svizzera
fra
Newspapers first appeared under the aristocratic government

Paris to

gazzetta

(299)

of the Republic of Venice.

aristocratico


REMARKS ON VERBS.

IDIOMS AND

1G4

To Play.
The English verb

302.

different significations,

to play, which
must be rendered

cular verb, according to

To play a game,
To play upon an
To play a part,
To play on one,
To play false,
To ^play,
in the
"
amuse one

To
To

is

used with so

many

by a
Ex,

parti-

in Italian

various significations.

its

Giuocare

a.

Suonare

instrument.

il.

Fai^e, rappresentare la parte.

Prendersi giuoco
Ingannare.

di.

sense of to") r>ty Divertirsi, ruzzare.

Tf.

s-self,

play, speaking of a fountain. Gettare, zampillare.

Fare una

play a trick.

To TAKE,

303.

prendere,

is

in the sense of to carry, to bring, to

to signify to conduct, to lead

take away.
'^

wear ; by condurre, menare,

by levare, portar

"""' ''''''^^' ""''

T'"^'

^y

^'""''^ ^'^

Portate la sella al sellaio.

Mi condusse a fare una visita,

Take the

Prendete questo libro.

/ Turchi portano il turbante,
Levate la tovaglia,

Take

To UNDERSTAND, TO

FORMED, can be translated

He

off,

me

to

pay a

visit.

table-cloth.

LEARN, TO BE TOLD, OR TO BE IN-

in the following

ways

I have been told.

I am informed.

stato detto,

305. It is said, it

^^''^^'-

this book.

Take away the

vien riferito,
Sento che,

la voce, correr fama.

took

*^'

saddle to the saddler.

Turks wear turbans.

Ho sapulo,
Mi
Mi

via, to take

Ex.

^^'sMla

304.

celia, burla.

rendered by portare, when used

I
I

am given to understand.
hear or learn that.

reported, may be rendered by correr

Ex,

is

Corre la voce che il Parlamento

verr i)resto disciolto,

It is reported that

soon be dissolved.

Parliament will


IDIOMS

AND REMARKS OX VERBS.

165

EXERCISE LXXI.

The

Swiss, on hearing their national

Svizzero

long

played,

(so

much)

bramare talmente
was forbidden to play it
proibire

Henry

service.

of

iv.

the

to (see again) their

Bans

own

des Vaches,

in the

country, that

rivedere

-inf.
it

air,

nazionale aria

^(263)

Swiss regiments in the French

a
France used

to plav with his children,

(280)

carrying them on his

(303)
soothe

Saul's

back.
David played on the harp to
per
{150) spalla p.
fury.
The fountains played all day at Pots-

calmare Saidle smania p.

dam.

Spanish

(302)

nobleman was banished from the Court

Spagnuolo

for

esiliare

having won several games of chess which he played with the

parecchio partita scacco-^.
(302)
king.
Molire died whilst he was playing the part of the
mentre

Imaginary Invalid^ the last comedy that he wrote.

The
immaginario ^malato
commedia
favourites of James the First played on their royal master's imGiacomo
imbecility, but the king, in his turn, played them
shamefully
(a sua volta)

becillit
false,

vergognosamente

expressing to them the greatest affection

esprimere

them.
perdere

solved to ruin

sador, because

Louis

when he had

xiv. created a subject

re-

an ambas-

suddito (38)

he played

billiards skilfully.

Do

not play the

bigliardo abilmente.
fool.

sciocco.

The

It is reported that a revolution

(305)
Spaniards brought chocolate

Dutch
Olandese

and English

claim

(302)
has (broken out) in Sicily.
scoppiare
Sicilia.

from

Mexico, and
Messico

the

the honour of having carried the

attribuirsi

166
first

cargo of tea to Europe.

carico

AND REMARKS ON VEUHS.

IDIOMS

Take these hyacinths

to

your

sister.

giacinto
(303)
Socrates was not ashamed to phiy with children. In Louis
Socrate
(231)
(302)
in

the Fourteenth's reign, courtiers rode to dinner, and wore at

cortigiano (282)
(303)
table their boots

and

{\bO) stivale

spurs.

Mazarin,

sjrone.

took

before his death,

Mazzarini

Colbert to Court, and introduced him as his successor to the

kinsf.

VERBS WHICH GOVERN, IN ITALIAN, A DIFFERENT

PREPOSITION FROM THE ENGLISH,
306. Verbs which require to be followed by the preposition

A bbisognare
Abbondare

dl

danaro,

di provvisioni,

Accorgersi di uno sbaglio,

Adornarsi

di

gemme,

Affliggersi delle sventure altrui,

To want money.
To abound in provisions.
To perceive a mistake.
To adorn one's-self with jewels.
To grieve for the misfortuneB

of

others.

To be satisfied with little.

To burn with indignation.
To blush for shame.
To pity the unfortunate.
To perceive the deceit.

Appagarsi di poco,
Ardere di sdegno,
Arrossire

vergogna,

di

Aver piet

degli infelici,

Avvedersi elVinganno,

To
Caricare

Colmare

di

grano una nave.

di gentilezze,

Contentarsi del necessario.

ridicule or laugh at a fool.

To load a vessel with corn.

To load with kindness.
To be satisfied with what

is

neces-

sary.

Coprire di un velo.
Decidere della vittoria.
Diffidarsi

eW adulazione.

Dimenticarsi del passato,

Empire

di confusione,

Guarnire di velluto,
Innamorarsi di una persona,
Intendersi di

belle arti,

Ingombrare la tavola di
Languire d fame,
fiancare di buon senso.

libri,

To cover with a veil.

To decide the victory.
To distrust flattery.
To forget the past.
To fill with confusion.
To trim with velvet.
To fall in love with a person.
To understand the fine arts.
To crowd the table with books.
To languish with hunger.
To want cood sense.

IDIOMS AND

REMARKS ON VERBS.

Cagionare

di politica,

Rammentarsi

)
i n
^^^^^^ Promessa,
incordarsi
\
Ridersi delle censure.
Ringraziare ei favore.

To remember

the promise.

To laugh at censure.
To return thanks for the favour.
To resent an injury.
To surfeit with food.
To decrease in popularity.
To revenge a betrayal.

Risentirsi di un'ingiuria,
Satollarsi di dbo.

Scemare

167

To wonder at the phenomena.

To threaten with death.
To oppress with taxes.
To weep for joy.
To rejoice at the good news.
To argue or to speak on politics.

Ilaravi^Uarsi dei fenomeni,

Minacciare di morte,
Ojprimere di tasse,
Piangere di gioia,
Ballegrarsi della huoia notizia,

di jjopolarit.

Vendicarsi di wn tradimento.

EXERCISE LXXII.

We

laugh at the miser who

(starves himself)
in order to
avaro
lasciarsi morir di fame
(306)
enrich his heir. They were threatened with torture, and even

tortura
(306)
they refused to reveal the names of the conspira-

erede.

with death,

if

svelare
tovi.

In

cospira-

his painting representing the sacrifice of Iphigenia,

tore.

Timante having exhausted

Ifigenia
(268)
in the faces of the spectators every

esaurito

spettatore

volto

conception of grief, and distrusting the farther power of

with a veil the features of the miserable father.

sembianza
misero
are

trimmed with ermine.

Those who

(306)

who

is

a sign of great fully.

not even allowed to speak on politics.

The best

(306)

the future.

robes
veste

are not so

(165)
content themselves with little, To laugh at

(306)
the censure of the world

is

(306)

ermellino

rich as those

the past,

Regal

much

possess

hid

art,

ulteriore

(306)

to live actively in the present,

In

way

(306)
Italy,

to

it

is

forget

(120) moc^oc?/ (306) ref.

and to remember often
(306)

Count Ug'olino languished nine days with hunger

(34) Conte

(306)


IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS,

168

and

thirst before

he died.

The

island

abounded in
(306)

inf.

provisions,

but the

natives

on

lived

fruit

game

and

cacciagione

and on

roots.

(306)
Simonides perceived such a connexion between painting and
Simonide
fra
(306)
poetrv, that he called painting mute poetry, and poetry speaking
(268)
painting.

307. Verbs which require to be followed by the preposition A

Adempire

ai

Affidarsi ad uno sconosciuto,

Appigliarsi ad un partilo,

Appoggiarsi

al

muro,

ApprossimaTsi^^^^
Avvicinarsi

Badare

'

To draw near

alle

al coccJiiere,

Dispiacere

ai genitori,

Domandare ad un

or approach the

fii'o.

'

conseguenze,
Credere ad wn impostore,

Dire

To perform one's own duties.

To trust a stranger.
To take a decision.
To lean against the wall.

propri doveri,

amico.

Disubbidire alle leggi.

Insegnare all' ignorante,
Inspirare ad ognuno stima e

rispetto,

To mind the consequences.

To believe an impostor.
To tell the coachman.
To displease one's parents.
To ask a friend.
To disobey the laws.
To teach the ignorant.
To inspire every one with esteem and
respect.

Nuocere al prossimo,
Pensare ai lontani,
Perdonare ai nemici,
Permettere ai lavoranti di far festa,
Pervenire agli onori,
Piacere ai buoni.
Proibire ai nostri figli distare oziosi,
Bassomigliare ad una persona,
Pesistere alle tentazioni,
Ribellarsi aXVopressione,

To injure one's neighbour.

To think of the absent.
To pardon enemies.
To allow the workmen a holiday.
To attain honours.
To please the good.
To forbid our children to be idle.
To resemble a person.
To resist temptation.
To rebel against oppression.
To

Piflettere all'avvenire.

Rinunziare al mondo.
Rispondere ad una lettera.

Rubare

ai viaggiatori.

Sopravivere a&a. perdita della

tazione,

Ubbidire

reju-

refuse charity to the poor.

To reflect on the future.

To renounce the world.
To answer a letter.
To rob travellers.
To outlive the loss of one's
tion.

ai genitori,

To obey

one's parents.

reputa-


IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

169

EXERCISE LXXIII.

Those who are not able

(173)
avoid

it.

to
to
resist temptation ought
(276) (280)
(280) (307)
chose for the device of his shield a
*
Spartano scegliere
divisa
scudo

(276)
A Spartan

evitare

size,
and being ridiculed by his friends, he
fly
of natural
grandezza
mosca
"
answered them,
I will approach the enemy so closely, that he

[da vicino)

(307)
shall see clearly

enough

this

mark."

Dante

says, that

it

is

great misery to think of past happiness in present misfortune.

dolore
miseria
(307)

We

gave them time

to reflect

(307)

di (307)

cision.

Bacchus was

the

first

on our

before taking a de-

offer

ojerta

to teach

men

(262)

to cultivate the vine.

Bacco

The
water,

vite

inhabitants of Nola having refused

Virgil

a glass of

(307) Virgilio
he was passing through their city, displeased the

as

mentre

per

(237)

(307)

poet so much, that he (blotted out) the

cancellare

second book of his Georgics.

Georgica

name

of

Nola from the

Pythagoras believed

in the trans-

Pittagora

tras-

migration of souls, and forbade his disciples to slay animals or

migrazione
discepolo
uccidere
(307)
to use

(of)

servirsi

them

for food.

(138)

degree of splendour.

grado

The

city of Syracuse attained a great

Siracusa

cibo

cdto

(307)

Vespasian, on becoming emperor, renounced

Vespasiano

(263)

(307)

the vices of his youth, and faithfully performed all the duties of

Martial music
(307)
confidence. Christianity
the only

(307)

inspires troops with courage

his position.

'^marziale

is

Cristianesimo

(252)

and

soldato
religion

which teaches men

(307)

IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

170
to ininre

no one, and

(307)

It

tion

to forgive their enemies.

(307)

(202)

has heen already given as a general

to,

before infinitives,

is

And when

the preposition to

motion, by

a.

308.

The

(See

rule, that the preposi-

rendered in Italian by
is

9.)

following verbs also require the infinitive by which

they are followed to be preceded by the preposition

no motion

is

'}

Condannare a viver

in esilio,

Continuare^^^j
Cominciare

although

'

To accustom

one's-self to study.

To adapt one's-self to live simply.

To aspire to imitate.
To attend to sewing.
To condemn to live in exile.

To

continue to liem.

J
)

Principiare r'^''"'^''''''
Dilettarsi \ ,
Divertirsi r^''''''^''
Dare a raccomodare,
Esibirsi

'"<".
Froferird} '

S;;-.-i

-/"'.

To begin

Impiegare a copiare,
Incoraggiare a parlare,
Insegnare a ricamare,
Invitare a venire,
Obbligare
Costringere > a chiedere scusa,

to print.

To amuse

one's-self fishing.

To

give to be mended.

To

offer to teach.

To expose
To

Forzare

a,

expressed.

Abihiarsi
Accostumarsi
studiare,
Assuefarsi
Avvezzarsi
Adattarsi a vivere senza lusso,
Aspirare ad imitare,
Attendere a cucire,

Seguitare

(See 5.)

d.

governed by a verb expressing

one's-self to sulTer.

learn to sketch.

To employ to copy.
To encourage to speak.
To teach to embroider.
To invite to come.
To

oblige to apologize.

Occuparsi a fortificare,
Perseverare a negare.
Prepararsi a viaggiare,
Proseguire a querelarsi,

To be occupied in fortifying
To persevere in denying.
To prepare to travel.
To continue to complain.
To remain

Tenersi pronto

!x

partire,

sitting.

To be ready

to start.


IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

171

EXERCISE LXXIV.

The Spartans placed

the statue of death

beside

that of

morte accanto a
sleep, in order to

accustom themselves

sonno
as the

self

to consider sleep

and death

(308)

same

thing.

Domii'ian,

Eoman

Domiziano (38)
and killing flies

catching
acchiappare

emperor, amused him-

(308)
in

his

imperial palace.

ammazzare

palazzo
Joan of Arc, who, under the walls of Orleans, defeated the
(60'')
Giovanna
sconfiggere
English, and forced them to raise the siege of that town,
levare
assedio
(308)
having afterwards fiillen into the hands of her enemies, was
quindi

(225)

condemned

be burned as

to

(308)
Rouen.

From Horace

to love virtue

was invited

witch in the market-place of

(38) Strega

(3)

one learns to laugh at vice from Persius,

Ora^20 (213) (308) (306)
Persio
and Juvenal teaches us to detest vice. Plato
Giovenale
detestare
Platone

to give a

(308)
(on being asked)

code

of laws to the

codice

why he

domandatogli

town

of Gyrenes, and

Cirene

persevered in refusing, he answered, that

(308)

the inhabitants were too opulent to begin to follow his laws.

per (308)
seguire
Daring the siege of Constantinople, the inhabitants, instead of
Durante
assedio
in vece
thinking of the common danger, were occupied disputing
pericolo
contrastare
(308)
about theological questions, and before (that) they
accanitamente sopra

(307)

bitterly

were prepared to receive him, the Sultan arrived to put an end

Sultano giungere
{por fine)
(308)
to the controversy.

controversia.

172

CHAPTER

X.

Advei'bs are invariable, aad are joined to a verb, an adjective,

or another adverb, to express

manner, &c.
Giunsero

tardi,

Dimorano
B09.

Italiano molto bene,

..

They

j.^

live

well.

near the bridge.

adverbs are formed from adjectives by adding

Grande, grandemente,

Great, greatly.
Diligent, diligently.

'

310. Wlien the adjective ends in

o,

that vowel

is

changed

Ex.

Oscuro, oscuramente,
Bieco, riccamente,

Empio, empiamente,

311.

arrived late

Ex.

Diligente, diligentemente,

into a.

of time, place,

She speaks Italian

Italia very

vicino al ponte,

Many

They

...

Ella
Mia
_ parla

mente.

some circumstance

Ex.

When

'

Obscure, obscurely.
Eich, richly.
Impious, impiously.

the adjective ends in

Amorevole, amorevolmente,
Particolare, particolarmente,

le

or re, the e

must be sup-

Ex.

pressed in forming the adverb.

i

Loving, lovingly.

Particular, particularly.

Ex.

312. Adjectives are sometimes used adverbially.

Vi parlo chiaro,

Piangendo

forte,

'

I speak plainly to you.

Weeping

bitterly.

313. Mai, giammai, never, or ever, are generally accompanied

by the negative non ; when employed negatively, non is usually

placed before the verb and

Non

La

mai

rideva mai,

Previdenza tace

or
I

talvolta,

ma

dorms mai,

non
|

giammai

after.

Ex.

He

never laughed.
Providence is sometimes
never sleeps.

silent,

but

314. Mai, giammai, employed without the negation, have the

any time ; we occasionally find they

signification of ever, or at
lire

used without a negation in a negative sense.

Ex.

173

ADVERr.S.

Chi

mai pensato

vi avrebbe

Fu il pi

contento

uomo

Who

He

che giammai

fosse, B.

ever was.
orders to the women, that
they were never to reveal to any
one who they were.

He gave

comandT), che ad
alcuna persona mai manifestassero
chi fossero, B.

Alle sue

315,

femmine

Mai

would ever have tliought it ?

was the most contented man that

often precedes or follows sempre,

sJ,

no,

when

it

is

used as an expletive, and gives more strength to these words.

Ex.
Una parte

mondo che si giace,

in ghiaccio ed in gelate

del

Mai sempre
hrine, P.

world that lies for

over entombed in ice and frost.

It is a part of the

The negation not is expressed by non ; no

Noi is tlie abbreviation of non

316.

both languages.
rendered by
s,

yes

alike in

Yes

but the following expressions are also used

is

di

Ex.

di no, no.

Noi vedesti tu

Non

si

is

lo.

No,

lo conosco,

Gli rispose di s, quando avrebbe

dovuto risponder di no,

Did you not see him

I do not know him.
He answered him

No.
yes,

when

should have answered no.

EXERCISE LXXV,

Love without esteem

is

stima
lights

easily

and

accendersi

like

{simile

fire

ad)

of

straw,

which

paglia

goes out quickly.

No action
pronto {ZIO) (202)

can

estinguersi

properly
be called virtuous
unless
it be fully
proprio (310) (214)
(a meno che)
pieno (310)
approved of by one's own conscience. The best champion of
*
(156)
(121) campione

liberty

is

he

who always obeys most

(165)
devotedly the laws.
devoto

Then

scrupulously and most

(307) (110) scrupoloso
Calandrino said, " Wert thou ever

Allora

there ? " to which he

answered, " No, never,"

(171)
ever have thought, that a
(314)

(313)

man

Who
(172)

so lately poor himself

{poco fa)

(314)

would
would

174

ADVERBS.

have treated so cruelly others in poverty.

felt

by a corrupt

heart.

welcome novelty.
accogliere
his

The

The

Friendship

human mind

is

is

never

(313)
ready to

ever

(315) iironto

whom

Cardinal to

Ariosto dedicated

novit

well-known poem, Orlando Furioso, asked the poet

sarcasti-

(307)
(622) ironico
cally, " My good fellow, where did you ever find such nonsense?"
[caro mio)
corbelleria p.
(310)
(624)

Physicians

cure

sometimes,

guarire
cheer their patients.
rallegrare
malato

relieve

often,

and generally

sollevare

A Spanish king

obstinately refused to

employ as secretary an excellent Catholic subject, simply beper

'^Cattolico huddito
cause his name was Martin Luther.
Lutero.
Martino

The

317.

a,

principal adverbs oi place are the following

Vi, col, l, ivi, cos, cost,

From
From

Quindi,
Quinci,

Up here.
Up there.
Down there.
There below.
Up and down.

e gi,

When

318.

no particular
is

used

the place

is

not mentioned, and no emphasis or

signification falls on the

in a contrary case, l or col,

adverb of place,

ci or vi

qua or qui must be em-

Ex.

ployed.

Andate

tLat place.
this place.

Where.
Whence.

Dove,
Onde, donde, di dove,
Quass,
Lass,
Quaggi,

Su

:-

Here.
There.

qui, qua,

col,

dach qui non

Go

there, as here there is

no room.

posto,

Chi ia?

Or

die siete cost, vi consiglio di

Vinvevno,

fvjstarvi tutto

Who

there?
Now that you are there, I advise you
to remain all the winter.
is


ADVERBS.
319. Qui or qua

speaker

we

is

175

used to indicate the place in which the

is

cost, cost,

the place in which the person

L,

are speaking or writing.

distant alike from the speaker

col,

ivi,

quivi,

Let

whom

to

a place

Ex.

and the hearer.

Scrivetemi come passate cost il

vostro tempo, noi qui non facciamo
die divertirci,
Quando voi ritornerete col da dove

is

mark

me know how you spend year

time there

we

are enjoying our-

selves here.

When

you return there from whence

you came.

veniste,

EXERCISE LXXVI.
Skins for the use of writing were
pelle

gamus, in

gamo

dressed at Per-

first

Perda prima conciare

We
Asia, whence the name oi parchment is derived.
derivare
pergamena
(317)

are in the habit of going there every year for three months.

(318)

(280)

He

alleged, as proof of his innocence, that he

addurre

when

the crime was committed.

long

Here

Do you intend

(318)
remain there

you wrote at Vallombrosa,

(132)
(that)

you gathered there.

cogliere

we

to

(319)
are the verses (that)

and the flowers

Florence

was not here

When we were

in

(318)

lived
near the cathedral
dimorare presso
duomo

and afterwards we

took a house between Florence and Fiesole.

Since

you are

Poich
there,

you should

visit

(319)

we proceeded on
a
spent the night.

mines.
coal
the
[carbon fossile) cava

foot as far as the

Men are always

(317)
neighbouring town, where we
vicino

pursuing
correr dietro a

passare

From thence
a mirage called

fantasma

never grasped here below.

The house
raggiungere (317)
you see there below is an hospital. There lies my friend.
ospedale
giacere
(317)

happiness, which

is

176
320. Ora, iow,

Allora, composed of

Finora,
Qualora,

Till

Early.
Since tben.

Fin d'allora.
D'ora in ora.
In mal ora,
Per ora.
D'allora in

From hour

For the present.

From

poi.

in poi,

then

is

employed

is

Just now.

used when

tlien signifies

for consequently,

corresponding word in Italian.

Era

allora costume

pranzare

nella

mattina,

Slamo dunque

allegri e grati nella

prosperit, e rassegnati nell'avver-

at that time ; but

dunque, and not allora,

was then the custom to dine in the

morning.
Let us, then, be cheerful and thankful in prosperity, and resigned in
misfortune.

vero,

dunque mi avete ingan-

you have de-

If that be true, then

ceived me.

322.

No

longer

pi lungi, non pi

is

translated by non pi ; no farther by non

non pi innanzi.

oltre,

In both

placed before the verb, and pi, pi lungi, pi

after.

the

It

nato.

Non

when
is

Ex.

sit,

Se do

that time.

Henceforth.

ora, teste, poco fa,

321. Allora

to hour.

In an unlucky hour.

D'oggi in poi,

Or

now.

Whenever.

buon'ora,

D'ora

expressions

a quella ora,

Ex.

then, at that time.

Di

many

used in the formation of

is

with various significations.

oltre,

non is
pi innanzi,

cases,

Ex.

voglio sopportare piii quest'umi-

I will bear tbis humiliation no longer.

liazione,

Non andiamo pi innanzi,

Non voglio incoraggiare pi
323. Quando, when,
tions.

is

I will encourage
tensions.

no farther your pre-

used in forming several adverbial

locii

Ex.

Di quando
n-itempo
Ui

Da

US go no farther.

Ij(it

oltre le

vostre pretensioni,

in quando,

.^

tempo,
quando in qua,
in

Fino a quando,
Quando... quando,

'

-,

now and

then.

since when,

how

how long

is it

since ?

long.

now. ..now, sometimes. ..sometimes.


17'

ADVERB,
Egli venne di quando

He

in (quando

now and then

carne

to see

vederci,

Fino a quando resteremo schiavi?

Da quando in qua siete in Iscozia

How long shall we remain slaves ?

How long have you heen in Scot-

land

He continued hia journey now

Prosegu il viaggio quando a piedi,

quando a cavallo,

now on

on

foot,

horseback.

EXERCISE LXSVII.
Louis the Sixteenth then mounted the
(321)
the following words to the people
seguente

enemies

my

I wish that

scaffold,

and addressed
indirizzare

palco,

(91)

" Frenchmen, I forgive my

(307)

death"... The

King could proceed no

procedere

General Santerre then ordered (the drums) (to be

2
tamburo i (214)
(322)
(321)
(33)
beaten,) in order that the people should hear no longer the King's
(256)
(322)
voice.
We amuse ourselves sometimes shooting, sometimes fish-

farther, as

ing.

How long

The

(323)
is it

since they

(265)

have

let

their

house?

appigionare
(323)
Gauls were then husbandmen, and were easily subdued by
Gallo
agricoltore
soggiogare

the warlike

Romans.

Her language, though unstudied,

bellicoso

and then highly dramatic.

have just now

is

now

semplice
(323)
seen the " Pilgrim's

Pellegrino
"When you hear from
your

(320)

Progress" translated into Chinese.

tradurre
family, let

me know

fare{\21)

(it.)

are never effaced

(320) (214) (313) cancellare

ceives early

(248)

(301)

The impressions which a child

from
mind. We expected
re-

its

aspettare

you hourly.
(320)
324. Merc, signifying by the grace or kindness

of, is

followed


178
by the genitive, and is sometimes preceded by the definite article.
Ex.
I came here, where, by the ^xaq,q of
Q me ne venni, dove, merce d'Iddio
1

e di questa gentildonna,

325.

God and

scampato

sono, B.

lady, I

Come prima, and

more used

in

iion

the kindness of this noble

am

in safety.

prima, as soon

an elevated style

as,

no sooner, are

appena or

subito che, tosto che,

come, in familiar language.

Ex.
Be sure, that as soon as you were
Vivi sicuro, che come prima addorasleep you would have been murmentato ti fossi, saresti stato ammazzato, B.
or appena

Come

dered.
lo

videro tutti gli

As

soon as they saw him, they

to meet him.

326. The following

commonly in use

some of the adverbial locutions most

are

Ad

Da capo, again.
Da senno, seriously.
Da solo a solo,_ |tgte.-tte.

alta voce, aloud.

belVagio,
J ^^ j^.;^^^^_

Con comodo,

A
A

buon'ora, early.
caso, by chance.
destra, to the right.

Ad onta,

in spite

malincore,
> unwillingly.
3Ial volentieri, )
Di mano in mano, gradually.
Di nuovo, again.

gara, in emulation.

AlVimprovviso, unexpectedly.
AWincirca,

i
i,

i.

un di presso,

Almeno,

r^'-'^^'"'^''''^at least.

Al pi

A
A
A

al pi, at the utmost.

jioco a poco, by degrees.
proposito, by the by, seasonably.
sinistra, to the left.

^mquadro,^
Alia rinfusa,

A
A

r>a banda,

dire, that is to say.

\ i

disparte, i^''"^^-

f)a banda a banda,

Da parte a parte,

Dirottamente, heavily.

dirotte lagrime, bitterly.

In avvenire,

\ through and
j

in future.

{^">

tin short.
Jn somma, )
In fretta, in a hurry.
In un batter d'occhio,

marno
In un attimo,
|
In vece, instead.
Niente

tratto, all at once.

Di nascosto,
i ui
Di soppiatto, r^'^'^^^'^Di presente, presently
Di rado, seldom.

'

tempo, in time.

Cio, vale

In

^^^

sufficienza, sufficiently.

A un

,
\ ,.
i'^^^'^'Sb-

of.

^gr-^';^^}now-a-days.

quattro occhi.

Di buon grado,
Di buona voglia,
Di mala voglia,

buon mercato, cheap.

all

went

andarono incontro,

through.

affatto, not at all.

Ogni qual volta, whenever.

Per esempio, for instance.
Per ischerzo, in jest.
Per Vappunto, exactly.
Per lo pi, generally.
Per tempo, in lime.

179

Prima

di voi, &c., before you.

Quanto prima,
\ as soon as
possible.
II pi presto possibile, )

Su due piedi,

at once.

Tanto pi,

much

so

the more.

^^'''^'.]-sooD, byandby,
'
A
momenti, j
'

'

Vie pi or via pi,

much

more.

EXERCISE LXXVIII.

The language

of the heart

and of truth

linguaggio
palaces.

Hail

is

seldom spoken in

is

(214)
rain crystallized

by the cold before reaching

arrivare

cristallizzare

the earth.

Taste

rather a gift of nature than an acquisition

is

dono
(326)
shovdd rather die than commit a dishonourable

gusto

of art.

One

action.

Play

(213) (276)
that piece of music again.

The

(302)
(326)
vented by Pythagoras, a native of Samos
Pittagora
Samo

y was

in-

the two branches are

ramo

emblematical of the two paths of virtue and

emblematico
sentiero
stretching to the rigbt side, the latter to the
*
(326)
tors died willingly

letter

vice, the

(163)

The
gladiaRomans. From

gladia-

left.

amidst the applause of the

former

tore

(326)
that time he has by degrees increased his savings, and
'
risparmio
(320)
(326)

shortly he will be rich

enough

to retire

from commerce.

now

A word

ritirarsi

of advice given in

season,

may

just be

in time to save one

consiglio

life

(326)
of repentance.
As soon as we opened cur trunks, the

(custom-house officers) examined them with

doganiere

than we expected.
attendersi.
(107)

It

much more

rigour

was raining heavily, when by chance we

(326)

(326)

180

PKFPOSITION8,

met the servant with an umbrella.

she heard the sentence.

is

She wept

bitterly as soon as

(326)
(325)
read aloud in a foreign language
Straniero ^
(326)

To

a most useful exercise.

CHAPTER XL
PREPOSITIONS.

We

have already treated of the prepositions di, a, da^ employed as segnacasi, in the first chapter but as prepositions are
often used in Italian in a way differing altogether from the
;

English application of them, we will in this lesson show how

some

of

them may be employed.

Di,

327. In Italian, di

is

of.

substituted for the English preposition

to, after

nouns which express relationship, inheritance, &c.

Voi

l'erede di

siete

ima gran

You

for-

Ex.

are heir to a large fortune.

tuna,
TI

The Prince

Principe di Prussia nipote del

of Prussia

is

nephew to

the king.

328.

When

the nation or town of a person

use the preposition di; but

if

is

mentioned,

the town or place of birth

tioned, to signify a native of that country or town,

da

is
is

we

menused.

Ex.
This gentleman is from Dublin.
The Medicis of Florence.
Raphael a native of Urbino.
Leonard a native of Vinci.

Questo signore e di Dublino,

famiglia Medici di Firenze,
Raffaello da Urbino,

La

Leonardo da

329.

Vinci,

When

the preposition
Additatemi

Vho

the words road, way, are followed in English by

to,

in Italian

la strada di

Livorno,

incontrato sulla via di Pisa,

it

must be translated by di. Ex.

Show me the road to Leghorn.
I

met him on the way

to Pisa.


181

PREPOSITIONS.

330.

Di

used in the following phrases

is

Esser adorno
carico

contento

dotato

To
To
To
To
To
To
To
To
To
To
To

di,

di,

di,

di,

provveduto

di,

soddisfatto di,

sorpreso

di,

stupefatto di.

Viaggiar di giorno^
di ?2oe.

Vivere di radici e di ere,

A,

The

be
be
be
be
be
be
be
be

:-

adorned with.
laden or loaded with.
pleased with.
endowed with.
provided with.
satisfied with.

surprised at.
astonished at.
travel by day.
travel by night.
live

on roots and vegetables.

to, at.

a indicates the end or object to which

the action of a verb, or an idea, is directed
it expresses tendency towards, and for this reason, verbs of motion, which always
imply movement directed towards some point or end, are followed by the preposition a. Ex.
331.

preposition

Eglino vennero a trovarmi,

Io mi appoggiai al mziro,
Avvicinatevi 8l fuoco,
Stiamo di casa dirimpetto a

voi.

Tliey came to look for me.

I leaned against the wall.
Approach the fire.
live opposite you.

We

332. In Italian, the preposition a

of expressions

Andare
Andare
Andare

a due a due,
al buio,

sWoscuro,

alla volta di

Roma.

Cantare a maravialia,
Cvcinare alla Francese,

ko,..

Darsi a conoscere,
Fare sW^ peggio, alla meglio.
Giungere n\Y impensata,

Morire a

is

and adverbial locutions

centinaia.

Partire alla sfuggita,

Spendere &\V impazzata,
Stare a bocca aperta, a capo
chino, a occhi bassi, &c.,

used in a great number

To go two by two.
To go in the dark.
To go towards Eome.
To sing wonderfully well.
To cook, in the French fashion.
To make one's-self known.
To do one's worst, one's best.
To arrive suddenly.
To die by hundreds.
To set oif by stealth.
To spend foolishly.
To remain open mouthed, with
one's head hung down, with
downcast eyes.


182

PREPOSITIONS.

To keep away from.

To cut in slices.
To treat familiarly.
To find things topsy-turvy.
To dress in the Italian fashion.
To live after the ancient style.

Stare alla larga^

Tagliare afetie^
Trattare alla buona,

Trovare
Vestire

cose alla rinfusa,

le

W Italiana,

&c.,

Vivere &\Vantica,
Un battello a vapore,
Un bastimento a vela,
Un mulino a vento,
Un cannone carico a metraglia,

A
A

steam-boat.

A
A

wind-mill.
cannon loaded

sailing-vessel.

with grape-

shot.

Un fucile

carico a palla,

gun loaded with

balls,

EXERCISE LXXIX.

Almost
This

all

European nations dress

Europeo
(332)

macaroni
maccherone

Parmesan

dressed

is

cheese.

promotes

his

Napoletano

One

Parmigiano formaggio

own

French fashion.

Neapolitan fashion, with

the

in

(332)

p.

in the

who

(173)

happiness

is

endowed with prudence

(330)
but one who

is

endowed with

promuovere
1

vegetables.

The

hills

are

collina
so

great

that

we

The

Brahmins live on
Bramino (330)
covered with snow. The heat was

eneficence promotes that of others.

neve

(330)

by

slept

day and

travelled

bv night.

(330)

Although he was the king's son, and heir to the throne of

(256)
land, the judge reprimanded him.

The

great wings, strong

eagle,

aquila

giudice
claws,

[51) artglio

intended to live on prey.

The

preda
plains of Babylon, and those
pianura Babilonia

destinare

of

and

sharp

Eng-

provided with
(330)

beak,

is

clearly

tagliente

shepherds
pastore

who

Egypt, seem
Egitto

to

inhabited the

have been the

(259)


183

PREPOSITIONS.
first

devote
themselves to the contemplation of the stars.
consacrare

to

giant.
The Swiss
gigante
Svizzero
(332)
on the Neapolitans (with) cannons loaded with

Don Quixote mistook

a -wind-mill for a

Chisciotte prendere
soldiers

fired

far fuoco
grape-shot.

In a short time there

sailing-vessels.

The

more steam-boats than

(332)
musical scale was invented by Guido, a
*

(332)

(332)
will be

scala

native of Arezzo, called Aretino.

We

(328)

happy

are

to hear that

(244)

you are pleased with your new home. The road to Portici
dimora
(330)
(329)
crosses
charming hills, covered with vines, from which (the

ameno

attraversare

(330)

famous wine, called lagrima

vite

Cristi,)

(is

made).

1(214)

Da, from.
333.

The

preposition da, from,

is

used to express the point

from which a person or thing departs or comes

idea of physical or moral
difference,

and dependence.

it

conveys an

movement, separation,

derivation,

Ex.

Non voglio allontanarmi AaW&patria,

I will not go

Vengo dalla mia villa,

Essendo incalzati dal

nemico,

si

noia nasce dai piaceri sfrenati.

334.
to,

Da

when

person.

is

away from

my

country.

come from my country-seat.

Being pressed by the enemy,

tliey

way

defended themselves the best

they could.
Satiety springs from pleasures.

difesero alla meglio,

La

employed with verbs of motion

the object towards which the motion

to express

is

directed

at,
is

Ex.

Ud seguente Giacomo and da Teresa,

Next day James went

Questa sera vi condurr da lei.

Ieri venni da voi per pregarvi
"gassare oggi da me,

I will take

di

to Teresa.

you this evening to her.

Yesterday I called on you to beg of
you to call on me to-day.

184

niEPOSITlONS.

But

if

person

who

Vado a

casa,

is

going,

it is

We

understood

is tlie

place or house of the

Ex.

necessary to say a casa.

am

Voi andate a casa di vostro

da vostro zio,

335.

movement

the object of the

You

zio, or

going home.
are goiug to your uucle's

say partir di Napoli, di Firenze, dalla

but

we must

say, partir

da

lui,

citt

liouse.

being

partir da loro.

Ex.
Abbiamo

ricevuto lettere di Londra,

|

We

have received

letters

from Lon-

don.
I

336.

The employment

tensive, as the following

of the preposition da is varied and exexamples will show. Ex.

non

We

Combatt da leone, e si condusse

sempre da galantuomo.
Datemi da scrivere, da leggere,
Dite da vero or davvero
uri azione da mariuolo,
Eqli fa da dottore, da medico,

He

Abbiamo da

vivere,

abbiamo molto

beneh

da. fare,

Cfiulia dalle bianche braccia.

Lo ha

trattato da amico.

L'ho fatto da me,

Levarsi da dosso un peso,
L'errare da uomo,
Non cosa da ridere,
Uomo da poco, da niente.
Uomo da bene or dabbene,
Vi parlo da padrone, e voi dovreste
ubbidirmi da servo,
Vi giuro da tiomo d'onore,
Venite qua da me,

have enough to live, although we

have not much to do.
fouglit like a lion, and always
acted like a good man.
Give me something to write, to read.
Do you speak seriously ?
It is a knavish trick.

He plays the doctor.

Julia of the white arms.
He has treated him as a friend.
I

have done

To
To

it

alone.

get rid of a burden.

err is

human.

is no laughing matter.
good-for-nothing man.

It

A
A

good or
I speak to

worthy man.
you as a master, and yen

me as a servant.
you as an honest man.
over "here near me.

should obey
I swear to

Come

EXERCISE LXXX.

Sympathy

said to

is

simpatia (214)
situation

with

those

arise

from an imaginary change of

nascere

who

excite

our compassion.

eccitare

on
(334)

him

to-day, but

he was not at home.

called

passare

Sublime and

pas-


185

PREPOSITIONS.

was introduced into Eome not many years

sionate eloquence

by the two Gracchi, by Crassus, and

of Cicero,

birth

before the

Crasso

nascita

by

Sulpitius.

The

first

Sulpizio

pheasants came from the banks of the

riva
fagiano

Phasis, a river of Colchis.

Colchide

France

is

separated from Italy by

the Alps, and from Spain by the Pyrenees.

and died

hero,

He

lived

as a Christian.

He

did

it

alone.

as

Pireneo

A2)e

(336)

went

to

(336)

your house, and asked your servant to give

2

eat

me something

and drink.

They

to

(336)

have not treated us

as

friends.

The

(336)

Pyramids served as (burying-places) for the kings.- -Princes

sepoltura
Piramide
should punish as Christian rulers, and not as executioners.
carnefice

(336)

(280)

From tyranny

arises

free

government, and from the abuse

of

tirannia nascere
liberty despotism returns.

Con, with.
337,

The

preposition con conveys an idea of company, and

points out the

Venite

means by which a thing

a desinare con

Spaventare con minacce,

Il pittore

lavora col pennello,

scultore collo scarpello,

meglio sdrucciolar

coi

colla lingua,

This preposition
nouns mi,
se.

ti,

si

is

is

achieved.

Ex.

Come and dine with us.

To terrify with threats.

noi,

lo

piedi che

painter works with a brush, and a

sculptor with a chisel.
with the feet than
with the tonsue.

It is better to slip

often contracted with the personal pro-

7neco, teco, seco, instead of

con me, con

Ex.
N

te,

con


186

PREPOSITIONS.

Se varrai meco,

egli

ritorner teco,

If thou comest with me, he will rcturn with thee.

In, into, in.

338. This preposition indicates station, time, space,

Dimorare

in citt,

Eprofessore in quella Universit,

in due anni,

Imparo Vltaliaiw

339. Tlie article

we wish

to

To

is

He
He

Ex.

zc.

live in town.

professor in that University.

learned Italian in two years.
is

often joined with the preposition

convey the idea of anything being inside

in,
:

when

in

em-

ployed alone, on the contrary, often implies something on the

Ex.

surface.

I pesci

vivono nel mare,

L'uccello non nella gabbia,

Fish

II pranzo

Dinner is on the table.

He had on his hat, and wore a ring

Aveva

il

The

in tavola.

cappello in testa,

un amilo

live in the sea.

bird is not in the cage.

on his finger.

in dito.

840. In speaking of going to a country, the English preposition to is expressed

Come

by

Ex.

in.

se in Francia, o in Ispagna,
alcun altro luogo lontano,

o in

andar

volesse,

As

if

to

B.

he wished to go to France, or
Sixain,

341. In Italian, the preposition in

is

often used without ren-

dering the definite article which accompanies

may be

seen from the following examples

Vivere in campagna,
Essere in giardino, in cucina,
in

it

in English, as

To live in the country.

To be in the garden, in

in

the kitchen,

in the parlour.

salotto,

Avere

any other distant

or

place.
|

To have

mano.

in the

hand.

EXERCISE LXXXI.

Our propensity

to

sympathize with sorrow

simpatizzare

is

very strong, and

dolore

our inclination to sympathize with joy very weak.

The

for operas

was introduced

When wo

Gnd no happiness

into

taste

gusto

gioia

France by Cardinal Mazarin.

in ourselves, it

is

useless

to

inutile (34)

seek

it

187

PREPOSITIONS.
elsewhere.

There

is

grandeur in the works of nature which

grandezza

altrove.

art cannot

Amongst

attain.

Eomans,

the

parricides v/ere

raggiungere

and thrown into the

(tied up) in a sack,

legare

made

the

first

many branches

step in

have never made the second.

next

snake

summer
his hand.

in

staff,

dorare

asta

with

(flowers-de-luce.)

(57) giglio.

Will

me

you come with

(337)
represented

is

to

(340)
with a

Esculapio (238)
The royal standard of France was a
stendardo

silk
flag
seeded with
di
(72) bandiera spargere
not
If you do
find them in the garden, go

white

(248)
look for them.
cercare *

into the house

of civilisation, but they

Esculapius

serpente (339)

gilded

The Chinese have

ramo

jKisso

France

sea.

gettare (339)

sacco

and

One

(341)
learns with one's

(213)

experience, never with that of others.

The Seine

own

(156)
into

falls

Senna shoccare
the sea.

The

sticks,

Chinese eat with

which they

(51) stecco

two

ivory or
avorio

ebony
ebano

handle with great dexterity.

maneggiare

Per, for^ through,

The

little

by, in.

per expresses motion through a place,

and conveys an idea oi passage in the moral and physical analogy
of the term.
Ex,
342.

preposition

Ora viaggia per la Francia, dopo

aver fatto un giro per l'Italia,

He

is

after

now

travelling

in

France,

having made a tour through

Italy.

Ilo ricevuto questo

posta.

danaro per

la

Un'idea strana mi pasfb per la

mente,
Per pi giorni stava malissimo,

I have received this money through

the post.
strange idea came into my head.

For several davs he waE vcrv

ill.


188

PREPOSITIONS.

343. Per
action

it

as, about,

is

also used to express tlie motive or intention of

may sometimes be

from,

some

out of ; and in

in,

infinitive, supplies the place of the

Andate per

cases,

when

joined to an

Ex.

present participle.

Go

fatti vostri,

about your business.

From

Per soverchia letzia,

Per non poter tener le

an

used to translate the English words

great joy.
able to keep from laugh

Not being

risa,

ing.

L'ho incontrato per

344.

When

la strada,

the preposition

to,

has in English the meaning of

be translated by per.

Lo fari)

in

met bim

in the street.

which precedes an

order

on account

to,

infinitive,
of, it

must

Ex.

per non dispiacervi,

1 will (lo
you.

They

Sono in prigione per aver rubato,

it

in order not to displease

are in

prison on account of

having robbed.

345.
is

The

employed

Andar
Andar

following are a few of the expressions in which per

:

To go for the doctor.

To go by land, by sea.
You do not heed what I

per il dottore,
per terra, per mare,
ci che io vi dico,

Avete per nidla

Gli fu offerto

]peT

parte del

pesci guizzano per mezzo delle

pinne,

To rise early.
To pay ten shillings

Levarsi per tempo,

Pagare

say to you.

was offered to him in the king's

name.
Fish swim with the aid of their fins.

It

re.

dieci scellini per uno,

Per amor suo lo faro.

Per mezzo i boschi,
Per modo or via di diporto.
Risposero per V appunto gli uni come

I will

do

it for

a-piece, a-hcad.

his sake.

In the midst of woods.

By way

of

amusement.

They answered exactly

alike.

gli altri,

Si spaccia per dotto.

Vendere per minuto,
Viaggiare per tutto il

He

pretends to be learned.

To
To

retail.

travel all over the world.

EXERCISE LXXXII.

When

the family of the

triumph through the streets

trionfo
(342)

King

Macedon was led in

Macedonia
menare
of Eome, by Paulus Emilius, their
of

Paolo

Emilia


189

PREPOSITIONS.

misfortunes attracted the attention of the Romans, more tlian the

sventura attrarre

glory of

tlieir

measure, one's

conqueror.

own

True

interest

generosity sacrifices,

advance that of others.

to

(344)

was

arrested for not having his

the marriage

to

tell

of

naufrago
(243) (280) (244)
went about the streets begging and singing, with a

old
antichit

tavoletta

mendicare

(343)

hung

tablet

round

their neck, on

appendere intorno a (150)

their misfortunes, in order to

lost

rectly in

distress,

and out of love

to compassion.

not having answered cor-

for

At

last, out of pity for their

Alia foie (34:3)
di
you) who sent them, I gave them

logic.

(for

dipingere
public

pubblico

his

mathematics and

which were painted

collo

move the

(344)
examination
{Non pass a) (150) esame

He

us
Write
(344)
The shipwrecked

passport.

take place.

to

is

He

passaporto.

(262)

when

some

in

vostro

a pound a piece.

The father

of Frederick the Great of Prussia

(345)

was the

enemy

avowed

of poets

having read some verses

dichiarare
written on the door of his palace, he sent for the poet, and

ordered him to go about his business, and leave Prussia.

(345)

Su

or Sopra, on, upon, over.

346. These prepositions are used indiscriminately to translate

Oil,

upon, over, and imply

literal signification.

rest, reliance,

both in the moral and

Ex.

Riposiamoci svAVerha,
Riposate svi[\& mia parola,
Col pastrano sopra le spalle,

Let us rest on the grass.

Eely on my word.

With a

cloak over his shoulders.

190

I'REPOSITIONS

347

Su, super, np, conveys an idea of elevation

Up

Su per la collina,
State sa,
In euWalba,

Towards dawn.

Sulla sera,

At

348. Sopra

is

hill.

Stand up.
the

of evening.

fall

often used in Italian to express beyond,

more

Twenty

milea beyond Florence.

She loved her son more than her

sopra Firenze,

Ella amava il figlio sopra la vita sua,

Ordinarono un grandissimo esercito
per andare sopra i nemici, B.

Fra

su, in su,

Ex.

than, against.
Ve7iti mit/lia

the

Ex.

expresses tendency towards a certain point.

life.

They organized a very numerous

army to go against the enemy.

or tra, between, amongst, in the midst of.

349. These two prepositions are alike in meaning, and indicate

connexion between two or more objects.

Cominciarono

tra loro

ad aver

fi'a i

They

to consult

among them-

selves.

siglio,

Fra due amici,

Vivere

Ex.

They hegan

corir

Between two

To

piaceri,

also

between two

mark a space
objects.

live

friends.

amidst pleasures.

of time between

two

dates, or space

Ex.
pay you in two months.
Between the library and the bedroom,
there was a dressing-room and a

Vi pagher) fra due mesi,

Tra la libreria e la camera da letto,
vi era uno sjiogliatoio ed il bagno,

I will

bath room.

350. Fi^a or

midst

of,

tra,

used before one object, implies being in the

being surrounded by.

Ex.
Then almost

Poi quasi stanca, tra la pi folta erba

postami a giacere, mi posava,
Vi vidi per un momento fra la calca,

tired,

est grass I lay

I

e subito vi persi di vista,

amidst the thick-

down

to rest.

a moment in the midst

of the crowd, and then lost sight of

saw you

for

you.

351. To speak to one^s-self

is

translated

by parlare

tra se.

Ex.
Egli aveva il costume di piasseggiar
solo, e parlar tra se ad alta voce,

He

used to walk
aloud to himself.

alone,

speadng

FKEPOSITIONS.

191

EXERCISE LXXXIII.

Amongst
(349

the gods, Jupiter was the

first.

Jupiter

frequently

is

Giove

(22)

represented with an eagle on the top of his sceptre

aquila
rappresentato
cima
scettro
ivory

sormontare

Eomans when they returned

(239)

omicidio

his

In
palace
day. have read

victorious.

murder was committed at the break of

Henry

and an

surmounted by an eagle, was carried by

sceptre, also

avorio (3)

the

that

that

(347)

iv.,

King

children on

of France, used to

his

amuse himself by carrying

(280)
back. A country house, situated in the

(150) spalla p.
midst of groves and flowers.

There

is

a flower which, at a

boschetto

(350)

{da

bee
resting on the cup of a
ape (266) riposare
calice
often speaks to himself in the street.
Amongst the

resembles
a
lontano) rassomigliare
distance,

He

flower.

(351)
Iroquois, the language with

Irocchese

which they express

their resolution

linguaggio

" Let us go and eat that

making war against an enemy is,

muover
a
nation."
Heather grows up the mountains, and
of

at a distance

crescere (347)

gives

them a purple hue. At the

purpureo tinta.

owls begin to
civetta

of evening,

bats

and

pipistrello

appear.
sortir fuori.

The

352.

following

is

list

be followed by the segnacasi

di

is

of prepositions which require to

di, a,

which, as will be seen,

jective,

ployed

fall

or da, or the

may

noun

in the ob-

often be promiscuously

generally used before a personal pronoun

em-

192

PREPOSITIONS.

Accanto,

allato,

accosto,

presso, vicino, dol,

al, \\

appresso,
fuoco,

Addosso ad uno,
A guisa, a modo, a foggia,
mezza luna,
Al di l del, dal mare,
Al di qua dei, dai monti,
Alla volta

Near, by

di

una

fii^.

one's person or back.

In the form of, like a half moon.

Beyond the

On

Firenze,
Appi della colonna,
Avanti, davanti, innanzi, dinanzi,
alla, la

side of the

tlie

On

di

sea.

this side of the mountains.

Towards Florence.
At the foot of the column.
In the presence of the Queen.

regina.

About twenty

Circa venti, or a venti miglia.

Contro di me.
Contro al, il nemico,
Dentro, entro al, il baule.
Dietro alla, \a, porta.
Dirimpetto, in faccia, di fronte

miles.

Against me.
Against the enemy,
lu the trunk.
Behind the door.
alla

Opposite the church.

chiesa.

Dopo
Dopo

di voi.
la colazione.

Fino, sino, infino, insino, a Pasqua,

Vi accompagner fino a Parigi,

Fuori

di casa,

Intorno, d'intorno, attorno alla tavola,

Incontro a me.
In mezzo alla, della strada,
Lungi, lontano, discosto dal proprio
paese.
Lungo alla, la spiaggia,
Oltre a, di ci,
Prima, avanti di me.
Secondo, giusta la vostra opinione.

Senza danaro.
Senza di me, senza me.
Sopra del, al, il letto,
Verso il cominciar di primavera.
Verso, inverso,

di,

After you.
After breakfast.
Until Easter.
I will accompany you as far as Paris,
Out of the house.
Round the table.

Towards me.
In the middle of the street.
Far from one's own country.

Along the

shore.

Besides, moreover.

Before me.

According to your opinion.

Without money.
Without me.

On

the bed.

Towards the beginning

Towards me.

a me.

of spring.

EXERCISE LXXXIV.

Numa

Pompilius, the founder of the ancient religion of Rome,

Pompilio
pretended to be
near

fondatore

advised

by the nymph Egeria,

consigliare

ninfa

a mysterious fountain.

(352)

Black Sea

The

fleet

flotta

set

(286)

a flock of splendid birds.

(352) stormo
like

whom

sail

he met

towards the
(352)

Hospitality was a
ospitalit

193

CONJUNCTIONS,

the Caledonians not only practised towards

sacred duty whicli

Caledone

sacro

but also towards their enemies.

friends,

my

house, and

The church
The bees

not far from the

castle.

Demosthenes

gave the

roses.

title

Filippica

Macedon and Cicero,

Cicerone
Macedonia

the orations he wrote against Philip of

Filippo
in imitation of

him, gave the same

Mark Anthony.

They have

Jifarco Antonio

name

to those

he wrote against

a country house near the

built

fabbricare

sea, at the foot of

about thirty miles from town.

hill,

(352)

(352)
ing to the king's order, they were
sells

it

Accord-

(59)
led

to

Palermo.

The brewer

menare

makes beer and

(352)
flew

of Philippics to

Demostene

(352)

opposite

ape svolazzare

castello

round the

(352)
is

wholesale

birraio

or retail, according to the

all'ingrosso

wants of his customers.

avventore

Bourbon
Alps.

Murat

inhabited the palace Elyseabitare

until his departure for Naples.

The lands beyond

the

partenza
(352)
(352)
The vineyards and olive-groves along the Arno.
vigneto

oliveta

CHAPTER

(352)

XII.

CONJUNCTIONS.
353.

The

use of the conjunction pure., yet,

is

varied

and

difficult.

Pure

is

often used instead of the adverb only,

not only, not even.

Ex.

and ne pure

for

194

CONJUNCTIONS.

^ avvenne pure una volta, ma se

ne sariano potute annoverar mille,

It

happened not only once, but we

might reckon a thousand times.

B.
I

In phrases which express opposition, pure

Ma,

is

used

arrabbiato,

j)ure

non

But he, however, being enraged,

would not listen to reason.

volea

sentir ragione.

Pur troppo

pur

Ex.

signifies only too.

trojypo vero,

Pure

It is only too true.

Pure

is

He

also

was put

Do

Ed

pur vero, che l'uomo non

contenta mai.
La cosa and pur cos'i,

if,

more

force to the

si

pray eat.

How

true

it

is,

man

that

The

affair

happened just

future.

is

expressed, and in the future

(See 253, 248.)

or implies certainty, the indicative

il

never

so.

whether, which in English governs the indicative,

certainty or condition

ci

is

content.

requires, in Italian, the verb to be in the subjunctive,

is

des-

perate grief, which oppresses my

heart already, even thinking of it
before I speak.

Ex.

Mangiate pure,

354. Se,

to death.

Even thou forsakest me.

Thou wilt have me renew the

often used as an expletive., to give

sense of the phrase.

action

Ex.

often translates the adverbs also, even, likeunse.

Eqli pure /if messo a morte,

Tu pure mi abbandoni !
Tu vuoi ch'io rinnovelli Disperato
dolor che'l cor mi preme, Gi pur
pensando j)ria ch'io ne favelli, D.

Se
Se

how-

for

Ex.

ever.

soccorso fosse giunto in tempo.

pagherete alla fine del mese.

is to

If the action

be employed.

when unwhen the

is

present,

Ex.

If the aid had arrived in time.

If you pay us at the end of the

month.
Se

Se

i nostri antenati non avevano

tante ricchezze, essi avevano certamente meno vizii della presente

generazione,
io dico ci j^er vostro bene,

355. The

verb

to

had not so much

wealth, they had certainly fewer
vices than the present genera-

If our forefathers

tion.

If I say that

it is

for

your good.

following conjunctions require almost always

be in the subjunctive

the

195

CONJUNCTIONS.
Accnoche,
-Ji,

Dato

Un

befon

che,
J-

Bench,
Ancorch,

unless.

Supposto

) although.

Quantunqu
ique,

Conciosiach,
ach,

Avvegnach,

for fear that, lest,

'

such time

till

as, until, as
>
Finch,
long as.
Sinch,
J
Nel caso che, in case that.
Non che, not that.
Nonostante che, notwithstanding.
supposing, proPosto che,
"I
that.
Posto il caso che, >- vided

AiHinti che.

Anzi

che,

Fer
tema che, )
.-,.
Fino a tanto che,

Prima che, J
A meno che, except,

admitting that.

che,

Di tema

order that.
Perch,
e,
)
,.
,
_^^^_^
condition
A condizione che, > npon
tliat, provided
patto che,
[if.
Purch,
i
he,
Affinch.

j^ ^^^^ ^,^^^^

Quando

che,

in case.

.}if;incase.
_

che,

whenever,

if,

though.

EXERCISE LXXXV.
"

May

I die

I do not revenge myself on you," said

if

(354)
Euclid's brother to him
(a Euclide suo fratello)
force

you

to love

me

vendicare
" and T," replied Euclid, "

again."

tongues in order that they

The

blind.

the

pretty well although they are quite

(102)

was union between

Tarquinio

people and the nobles, as the latter feared a reconnolile

ciliation

(190)

(355)

as the Tarquins lived, there

(355)

Eoman

to all the nations of

predicare

They can write

As long

cieco

I do not

Apostles received the gift of

Apostolo

might preach

(355)

the earth.

if

(163)

between the people and the banished tyrants.

Yes, he

scacciare
replied,

rejoice that

my

(231)
provided he

good

son

is

great in the face of men,

* faccia a

the eyes of God.

Although Phocion
a
Focione
(355)
was elected general by the Athenians fully forty times, he was
is

in

(355)

hen
nevertheless

nondimeno

condemned

to

death by them, and

was not even

(218)

2(353)

196

CONJUNCTIONS.

permitted (to him) tbe right of burial.

Regulus kept only
^accordare
sepoltura Regolo mantenere
too well the promise that he gave to the Carthaginians, although

Cartaginese

he knew (that

a) certain

him

awaited

death

(355)

at his return to

attendere

the enemy.

Vespasian

was all but

condemned
Vespasiano [corse pericolo di essere)

to

he happened to
yawn whilst Nero was
venne fatto)
sbadigliare
Nerone [237)

death, because

[gli

singing in a theatre at Eome.

If

it

not true,

is

it

is

well

(354)

invented, says an Italian proverb.

If we did not succeed,
trovare
riuscire
proverbio (354)
was not our fault.

it

coljm

356. Ne. ..ne, neither... nor

se non che., but, only ^cA,

a che, unti] these conjunctions require the verb
be accompanied by the negation.
Ex.

fintantoch, fino
to

Fintantocli non ahhia pi certe

prove della sua capacit,
Attendetemi finch io non ritorni,
Non possedeva se non clie un piccolo

Until you liave surer proofs of bis

capacity.
for me till 1 return.
He only possessed a little fami.

Wait

poderetto.

Non

One

si deve ne con pa
parole n con
azioni far danno al prossimo,
1

357. Anzi,

on

this

conjunction

the contrary, with pleasure,

not injure one's neig

is

often used alone to signify

moreover

anzi che no signifies

Ex.

i'ather.

Non

ardivano ad aiutarlo, anzi

cogli altri insieme gridavano dici
fosse morto, B.

Volete

slioiild

bour either in word or deed.

due sparagi

Anzi mi far

did not venture to aid him

on the contrary, they exclaimed
with the others that he was dead.
Will you have a little asparagus?

They

With
Vlio incontrato, anzi

gli

ho parlato,

pleasure.

met him, and, moreover, I spoke

to him.

Egli che

ricco anzi

358.
tions

The

che no,

He who

following are the most

is

rather rich.

common

conjunctive locu-

CONJUNCTIONS.

197

Olt radiche.

Almeno, at

A fine

order

di, in

Cio, that

besides that.
Oltre che,
0...0, oppure.. .oppure.
(either
Ovvero... ovvero,
|...or.

least.
to.

Ossia... ossia.

is.

Perche, why, because.

Peroch,
)
Perciocch,
> because.
Imperciocch, )
Poich,
seeing
that.
\ since,
Giacche, /
after.
Quaid' cos, in that case.
Quand'ecco, when, all at once.
F.econdo che, according as.
Suhito che,

Tosto che,
> as soon as.

Cio a dire, that is to say.

Ci non di meno,
'J
Ci nvn per tanto,
neveri
Ci non ostante,
however.

Contuttoci,

Di

maniera che,
Talmente che,

In modo

che,

Infine,

In .wmma,
Mentre che,
Tanto

Nemmeno

-,

whilst, as long as.

io,

in conclu-

sion.

die,

so that.

in short,

")

Neppure

>

Appena

voi, &c.

che,

Tanto jn, so much the moro.

&c., nor I either.

nor you either.

Nondimeno,

\ nevertheless, how-

Nulladimeno,

Tuttavia,
Tuttavolta,

)
\

nevertheless, yet, at
all events, however.

ever.

EXERCISE LXXXVI.

The

inventor of
gunpowder
was neither a hero nor a
schioppo (15) polvere
eroe
(356)

soldier.

Danger

does

dannt

not

the war-horse

intimidire

contrary,

it

(357)
(idle

appears only to
add
new
aggiungere
(232)

man) counts

ozioso

counts the years.

fire to his

the minutes, whilst a (busy

Metaphors
metafora

on

the

courage.

man)

An

scarcely

industrioso

(358)

may

destriero

be used in every style

(214)

however, we find them oftenest either in familiar language or in

linguaggio
(358)
(358)
poetry.
In short, languages always preserve the impress of the
ritenere
impronta
(358)

times in which they have been formed.

It is a great misfortune

neither to have talent enough to speak well, nor judgment enough

(34)
to

be

silent.

(288.)

Since you
(358)

senno
are not able to defend your opinion, you


DELLA INTERIEZIONE.

198

must not advance

it.

No

philosopher ever described a republic

dipingere
filosofo

(202)

either so beautiful or so just as that

which was instituted by the

(239)

(358)
Apostles,

(358)
soon as a

(358)
to adopt

new

it.

fashion appears,

moda
The imitation

however

ridiculous,

(212)

ridicolo

male

free-will,

like

best.

3(236)

we

As

are ready

of evil always exceeds the example,

superare

always rather inferior.

(357)
so that he can do good and avoid evil.

whilst the imitation of good

(358)

istituire

In that case yon are free to do as you

is

Man has

bene

volont (358)

CHAPTER

XIII.

DELLA INTERIEZIONE.
Le

359.
affetti

interiezioni esprimono sorpresa, gioia, dolore, e vari

dell'animo.

Le pi

usitate sono le seguenti.

0, Oh, Oi, Oime.

me

Oh

beato sojjra gli altri amanti.

liberalit di

Oime

Natan quanto

P.

se'tu maravigliosa.

lassa me, dolente me, in che

mal ora

B.

iacqui f

B.

Talora, singolarmente nelle espressioni di dolore, dopo l'addiettivo, che

accenna la miseria,

propriet di linguaggio.
pili

buono a nidla.

Fra Ahi

mi

si

si

pone

Oh poverino

la

persona in dativo, per

me

ch'io

non sar mai

Firenzuola.
frappone talvolta alcuna voce dinotante mag-

giore effetto.

Ahi

lassa

me

ch'assai chiaro conosco,

come

io

ti

sia

poco cara

B.

Deh, Interiezione deprecativa che corrispondo

all'inglese />ra^,

DEL RIPIENO.
suole .iver dopo di se

vocativo

il

entrare in questa fatica

Guai, Interiezione

199

Deh, amico mio, perch

vuo'tii

B.

di minaccia, o di dolore

che ha dopo di se

Guai a me die mi manc quello che ]n m'era di bisogno.

Passavanti.
Cos, si adopra a modo d'interiezione, e in buona e in cattiva
il

dativo

parte

Cos cresca

E cos vada,

s'

bel lauro in fresca riva.

il

pur mio

destino.

P.

P.

DEL KIPIENO.
360. Chiamansi Ripieno alcune particelle completive proprie
della lingua Toscana, le quali
alla tela

non sono assolutamente necessarie

grammaticale, che potrebbe stare senz'esse

ma

che

Noi

per accrescono all'orazione forza, grazia, e ornamento.

faremo soltanto menzione di alcune delle pi comuni.

Ecco^ Questa particella

clausola, e

d forza

suole

si

al parlare,

l'operazione, ed affetto

Ecco,

adoperare in principio di

mostrando tolora prontezza

io

non so ora dir di

tio,

donna me n'hai pregato. B.

Bene, Questa particella accresce forza di espressione
corso
La donna disse : bene, io il far. B.

al-

per

tal

dis-

al

Talvolta

Calandrino

si
:

trova preceduta dalla particella

s

bene.

Or bene, come faremo?

Bello,

si

ed ora

Disse

B.
B.

adopera addietivamente come ripieno di forza

port cinquecento

he.'

fiorini d'oro.

Le

B.

Pure, aggiunge evidenza. La cosa and pur cos. B.

Gi, aggiunge forza Ora fossero essi pur gi disposti a venire.
:

B.

Mica, Punto, aggiungono

eificacia alla

negazione

Una ne

non mica d'uomo di poco affare. B.

Madonna, Tetaldo non punto morto, ma vivo, e sano. B.
Egli, Ella, si adoprano per ornamento, e sono sempre invariabili
Egli non sono ancora molti anni passati, che in Firenze fu
una giovane. B.

dir,

200

dell'apostrofo.

Ella non andr

Esso,

dopo

B.

cos.

adopra indeclinabile in ambedue

si

la particella con^ avanti alcuni pronomi, e

generi e numeri,

anche senza.

Fatti alla finestra e chiamala, e d che venga a desinare con

B.

esso noi.

Oka, si adopra per ripigliare, o continuare il discorso Come

non sapete voi quello, che questo voglia dire f Ora io ve l'ho udito
:

B.

dire mille volte.

Le

particelle 3Ii, Ci, Ti, Vi, Si, Ne, si trovano

ai verbi

mi

senza necessit,

credo, che

Che

le

ma

suore sian tutte a dormire.

tu con noi

ti

rimanga per questa sera

Chetamente ne and per la camera

Non,
guaggio

Diragli da mia parte che

si

Io

B.
n' caro.

B.
B.

infino alla finestra.

pone talvolta dove nulla opera per propriet di

si
:

accompagnate

per sola propriet di linguaggio

lin-

guardi di non aver troppa

non credere alle favole di Giannotto. B.

Uno, Quell'uno, quest'uno, e simili, dove la voce uno di pi,
Deh
e solamente accenna con maggior evidenza, e precisione
B.
desti tu a tutte, o a quest'uno, quella fede che a me donasti ?
E caramente accolse a se quell'ima. P.
Tutto, aggiunge energia La donna udendo costui parlare, il
quale ella teneva mutolo, tutta stord. B. Tutto a pie fattosi loro
creduto, o di

incontro, ridendo disse.

B.

DELL'APOSTROFO.
361. Chiamasi Apostrofo quel piccolo segno a guisa di virgola

che suol porsi

trassegno di
della vocale

al termine, o al principio

mancamento
e,

di lettere.

d'una parola come conCos: grand' eroe

manca

e l'apostrofo posto al termine della tronca parola

lo indica.

Gli Accademici della Crusca nella Prefazione al Vocabolario

insegnano che non sempre in mancanza di una o pi lettere

deve far uso dell'apostrofo

si

e che quelle parole che soglionsi

troncare anche quando vengon seguite da consonante, non vanno

dell'apostkofo.

201

segnate dell'apostrofo n pur quando incontransi con vocale

perci cuor^ parlar^ pensier e altre simili voci che
troncare, seguane o vocale, o consonante,
trofo

anche innanzi a vocale.

si

possono

si

scrivono senza apos-

un uomo senza
ma non si
un anima senza il contrassegno della mancanza
non potendosi scrivere un donna, ma ima donna;

apostrofo, poich

dovr scrivere
della vocale a,

si

Quindi

scrive

si

pu anche scrivere un

libro,

&c.

quindi converr scrivere un'anima facendo uso dell'apostrofo.

Le

Lingua Toscana

parole della

pochi monosillahi in fuori

per,

finiscono tutte in vocale,

in,

non, con, &c.

da

Ond', che

sovente, o per togliere alcuna asprezza di suono, o per render pi

concatenata, e robusta l'orazione

si

troncano

le

parole in

fine, e

segnansi di apostrofo.
I

nomi

Italiani

ammettono generalmente l'apostrofo nel sinuna vocale. Come otiest'uomo,

golare allorch s'incontrano con

fedeV amico.

Non

per nel plurale, se non quando

trano, siano le stesse.

Le

due vocali che s'incon-

le due vocali differenti

ma si potr per scrivere dold inpiagge erbose avendo luogo l'incontro fra due i e due e.

essendo
canti,

le

Quindi bisogner scrivere onesti uomini

:

parole sulle quali

si

trattiene alcun poco la voce

non

si

troncano, e ci avviene delle parole ultime dei periodi, membri, &c.

Le parole che hanno

cano, n

si

l'accento in sull'ultima sillaba

dice per esempio

non

si

tron-

pari' onestamente per parl ones-

tamente.

La

parola che con tutti

suoi composti, bench, perch, &c.,

quantunque abbiano l'accento

contraffatta della persona.

Le

vanno

in sull'ultima sillaba, pure

eccettuate, solendo talvolta ricever l'apostrofo

Bench'effe /osse

B.

parole che finiscono in a non

si

troncano innanzi a conso-

nante, eccettuatone Suora quando sta per aggettivo, usata

sostantivo non

ammette troncatura

suoi componenti
meile

sua

non parlate.

cella.

Non

intendo, disse la Suora, se

Passavanti.

Firenzuola.

come

e l'avverbio ora con tutti

pi

specijca-

Vide correre suor Maria alla

Talor sua dolce vista rasserena.

B.

dell'apostrofo.

202

Innanzi a consonante possono troncarsi

in e senz'accento

le

parole che finiscono

purch l'ultima consonante che rimane,

via Ve sia una di queste,

?i,

/,

r, e la

tolto

seguente parola non cominci

impura Non si vuol dire, B. Datole mangiar pan

Essendo una mattina il marito di lei cavalcato in
alcun luogo per dovere stare alcun giorno. B.
L'avverbio come, la voce nome, ed i plurali dei nomi che finiscono in e non si troncano. Quindi non si pu dire pen^gravi

da un

B.

lavato.

per pene gravi

ri

com^ state, nom'conosciuto, per come state,

nome

conosciuto.

Le

grande. Frate quando stanno per addiettivi, e pre-

voci

cedono immediatamente
innanzi a consonante

Le

B.

loro sustantivo, perdono l'ultima sillaba

ci,

che

ad ogni altro, grande, e presto versiFra Puccio non andava mai fuor della terra. B.
Fu,

portato aveva. B.
ficatore.

il

Gli convenne fare gran mercato di

oltre

parole che finiscono in

i si

possono non di rado troncare

Si cominciarono

innanzi a consonante.

ad

avere in odio fuor

di modo. B,

Molte parole

finienti

in lo,

mo, no, ro,

Soglion questi tranquilli,

lunga ne sospinge. D.

e lieti

so, si

La sera

tima vocale innanzi a consonante.

amanti. P.

Questo far

troncano dell'ul-

desiare, odiar l'aurora

Andiam, che

io volentieri, sol

la

vii.

che voi pro-

mettiate. B.

Le

parole che finiscono

il

Ilo,

mio,

si

trovano spesso troncate

grande della persona. B.

Vagliami il lungo studio e'I grande amore. Che m'hiin fatto cercar
Le voci corallo, cristallo, ballo, snello, non si
lo tuo volume. D.
trovano mai tronche.
Bel giovane,

dell'ultima sillaba.

La

voce santo innanzi a vocale perde Vo, e riceve l'apostrofo,

innanzi a consonante

si

tronca dell'ultima sillaba purch stia per

addiettivo, e sia innanzi

questo sia
infino

nome

proprio

immediatamente
Venutosene per

a San Giovanni. B.

Cittadino, Zanobo

Roma ad

Antonio.

il

Santo.

Uno

lo

al

suo sustantivo, e

corso degli Adimari

antichissimo nostro

Salvini.

Andiam

impetrare dal Sauto Padre. B.

Vescovo, e

noi con esso lui

/ miracoli

di Sant'-

dell'accrescimento delle parole.

Le

voci dell'infinito dei verbi

si

203

possono troncare deirultima

vocale innanzi a consonante, ed innanzi a vocale, sostitxtendovi

Simili troncature per s'incontrano rade volte nei

l'apostrofo.

buoni Autori, e debbonsi solamente praticare, quando l'orecchio

lo consiglia

veggendo se non poter ritornare^ in tanto mut

V animo, che mimo pi fiero Ghibellino,

come

a Guelfi avversario, fu

B.

lui.

DELL'ACCRESCIMENTO DELLE PAROLE.

362. Nella Lingua Toscana sovente

si

accrescono le parole in

principio, o in fine, o per togliere l'asprezza, che nasce dall'in-

contro di alcune consonanti, o per empiere

che risulta dal

l'iato,

concorso delle vocali.

Quando

la parola finisce

comminci da

appresso,

consonante, e quella che viene

in

da un'altra consonante,

s segi;ita

accrescere la seconda parola in principio d'un

la pronunzia

iscoglio

Le
si

Voi mi avete

colto in iscambio.

particelle a,

si

B.

pu

si

per raddolcir

Di

scoglio in

andando. B.
e, o,

innanzi a parola che cominci da vocale,

un d ; et la
un r: Vi cominciarono

soglion talvolta accrescere di

caso

i,

accresce di

ad accender lumi,
fiumicello.

Radunare

B.

ad adorarlo. B.

Senza far

Viotto

Ed

particella su in simil
le

ivi

genti

s.

andare, e

presso correva un

ad amico, od a parente.

ogni mese la banda del suo quartiere in sur

B.

una piazza.

Segni.
I Poeti accrescono talora le voci, che

tima
ecco

sillaba,

di un'e, o di

pi andar mi

onde Piegava,

tolse

un

Vei^ba, che'n

sereno a mezsdl die

Fer

le

un

o,

rio,

hanno l'accento in

per far pi sonoro

il

sull'ul-

verso

Ed

Che'n ver sinistra con sue picciole

sua ripa uscio. D.

Che quasi un

bel

tenebre mie. P.

Nei Prosatori antichi s'incontrano sovente tali accrescimenti, e

non sono scarse le occasioni ove garba anche oggi il terminare
con la

la terza voce singolare dei preteriti della seconda, e terza

coniugazione.

UECAriTULATOIlY EXERCIBEb

204

IIECAPITULATOKY EXERCISES
ON ALL THE RULES.

ON THE CUSTOMS AND HABITS OF THE ANCIENT

CALEDONIANS.
The

the vigour of

ancient Caledonians esteemed highly

Caledone

(54)
the body

pregiare

swiftness in the

race,

They

(60^)

constituted the principal merit of

(245^)

considered also as an important

anche

(213)

strength of the voice, either because

gagliardia
(358)
or because

and

limbs

mcmhro

(35)
corso

velocit

strength,

(310)

majesty of person, robustness of the

(25)

heroes.

alto

it

Sforza

was a sign of personal

it

indizio

(was useful)

in

valer molto

per

the

frightening
atterrire

2*1

(262)

enemies, and in inspiring (to) the soldiers with courage.

*
quality was moreovernecessary for (to) them, to
*
inoltre

inf.

in spite

titude of

(228)

of winds and torrents, in calling to

dispetto

(25)

(17) (35)

war a mul-

(263)

men, who lived dispersed in groves

and
per bosco (51)
(58) (177)

But neither physical

(356)
llem to fame,

qualities nor military exploits

deserts.

entitled

impresa dar

unaccompanied by
quando andar disgiunto
if

This

make themselves

(131)

heard,

tlieir

(140)
quality, the
pregio

justice

diritto

and humanity.
(17)

ON

The

THE

Al.I,

violent,

sopraffattore pi.

pi.

were generally

pi.

stigmatized with the ignominious

coiidannare

The

205

KUl.ES.

and the

tyrannical,

erne], the

title

of " ignoble souls."

oscuro

principal and almost perpetual exercise of the Caledonians

perpetuo

was war, which they undertook

an injury

in order to revenge

intraprendere

torto

(186)

done to the nation or to an individual, and sometimes merely

from the desire of conquest.
*

per

particolare

talora

They always

sent to declare

(213)

war

(2452)

by a herald, and a curious ceremony was that of defying to

per
araldo
sfidare
torch on the top of
battle
a singer plants a lighted
accendere {12) fiaccola
cantore
punta
:

a lance, shakes

it

to the

scuotere [12Q)

wind, and then

sticks it in the
*
quindi conficcare

ground, accompanying this act with words of defiance.

terra

If the

sfida

herald intended to offer peace, he threw his lance at the foot of

(5)

him

to

whom

he was

sent

and the same act was amongst

{21A.) inviare

(165)

warriors a sign of friendship and reconciliation, or

The

that the warrior acknowledged himself vanquished.

darsi per
vincere

tunate or oppressed
pi.

who came

pi.

to ask

(9)

help

suited

convenevole

from the
attitude

cdteggicnnento

pi.

to their situation

unfor-

soccorso (307)

generous and powerful, presented themselves in an

pi.

indicated

it

they held in one hand a shield

scudo

covered with blood, and in the other a broken lance

spezzare
(306)

the former

(163)

an emblem
per *

in sign of the death of their friends, the latter as

of

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES

206
their misery

and

If the chieftain resolved to

despair.

capo
them, he presented

(to)

them with a
*

(124)

help
soccorrere

symbol of hospitality

shell,

conca

and friendship.
In war they did
in

not

make

(11) (12)
a mountainous country.
^

use of horses, which were scarce

They always

"
mention
far memion di

^paese

the

horses of the strangers," which shows that the few they hai
straniero
quello
(171) (286)

were pillaged from the Britons or the Danes.

Britanno
predare sopra
Danese
nevertheless, used

to

go sometimes

contuttocib (245^)

talora

The

nobles,

a chariot, either on

in

sopra

account of the dignity of their rank, or in order to be better disgrado

(110)
Their battles were fought with
tinguished from their followers.
seguace
(214)
great ferocity, and without any discipline
(80) ferocia

night separated the

(25)

dividere

combatants, and to attack the enemy by night was considered a

riputare
(330)
(34)
base
and ignoble action. The chase after war was the
caccia
d'animo basso
(73)

common

as with

occupation of the Caledonians, especially

speciale

(311)

this exercise alone they provided for their subsistence,

*

^solo

plied (to) the deficiency of agriculture.

particularly

mancanza
young men,
giovane

and sup-

a
All the warriors, and

(took pride) in being skilful in the

inf.
destro
pregiarsi
di

hunter, and only exercised

but he who was simply a
[2,%) cacciatore
(173)
the vigour of his arm against (wild beasts), was despised as

chase

fiera

ox ALL THE RULES.

cowardly and unwarlike, (so that)
cosicch
codardo
iiibelle

207

this distinctive title

became a

term of reproach.
rimprovero.

The

The

was singing.

greatest passion of the Caledonians

(264)
carried farther
enthusiasm for poetry and music could not be
(214) spingere (322)
(25)
those rough but sensitive mountaineers.
Their
than
by

(107) [facessero] (160) rozzo

sensibile

wars commenced and ended with song

songs were the most

seasoning of their banquets

welcome
convito
aggradevole condimento

rendered funereal honours

(to the

funebre

dead

;)

by singing they
(214)

the warriors sank to sleep

^pl.

amidst songs to the sound of the harp

(231)
with songs they went
(213)

to

meet

[incontro a)

and honoured

the most distinguished

the guests,

ospite

music in short had a share in

'^
parte
(358)

and

all their affairs,

whether serious or
serio

may

be said, in (a certain) measure, the

potere (214)
qualche
modo
Caledonians led
a musical life.

pleasing

it

vivere sub. 2

'

the Druids, they maintained the order of

abolishing

After

Vabolimento di

Druido

the bards, or singers, which had been established amongst

them

bardo
in

the most remote times, and whose principal office

was

to

da

(180)
celebrate in verse the most brilliant deeds of the nation, and of
luminoso fatto
the heroes.
eroe.

bad

Each

chief, or distinguished

member

(in his service)

presso di se

of the tribe,
trib

(192)

one or more of these bards

they followed

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES

208

everywhere the chieftain on

whom

they depended, and performed

da

(193)

fare
Their character was

the functions of ambassadors and heralds.

ambasciatore
respected,

(17)

and held sacred, even by usurpers and enemies

tenere sacro

and

usurpatore

were the most precious reward of the exploits

canzone
guiderdone
(60*)

their

lays

of heroes, and were considered as the great consolation in death,

and the necessary

requisite for happiness in the other

^

'^

To

preserve the

life.

(196)

memory

of their most famous deeds, the

(60*)
(344) conservare
Caledonians used to erect a stone, which was called by them

rizzare
(239)
" The stone of memory^^ and this event was accompanied by
(214)
(16)
songs and
particular ceremonies.
A warrior, followed by

(16)

one or more bards, repaired

portarsi

(to the spot)

where the deed had

col

fatto

happened, the fame of which he desired

(244)
then raised a torch over an
alzare
fiaccola

immortalize he
volere (280) immortalare

oak-trunk,

to

and with

intended to invite the shades of his ancestors to

(308)
trophy of their descendant's

(108|)
glory.

this

he

witness this
riguardare

Under the

was

stone

(214)

trofeo

placed

a sword and some

and the stone was

rings

of the enemy's shield

cerchio (57)

collocare

then

surrounded by a

heap

of earth.

All

cumulo
(239) (321) attorniare di
this proceeding was executed in cadence, the movements of the
operazione (214) fare
warrior (being in accordance) with the musical notes of the bards,
"
'
a
adattarsi

ON ALL THE RULKS,

who accompanied bim with

songs.

(123)
those " stones of

memory"

are

still

(214)

It

209
some

said that

is

of

(214)
(to be found) in the north.
trovare
nord.

there are found no particular laws

Concerning marriages,
i
3
Intorno a maritaggio (57) * (214)
or ceremonies

and although the name of wife often

known

not clearly

is

(256)
2

in

what

it

occurs,

it

itrovarsi

differed from that of friend

(255)
wish of both parties formed or dissolved a marriage.
volont
matrimonio.

(214)
the simple

In marriages

approved of by the parents,

congiunto
confermare *

An

dowry was given.

Irishwoman

it

(232)

had the right

to

ob-

Irlandese (64)

dote (239)
tain a divorce from

her

husband without alleging any other

allegare

(141)

reason than her will, and covdd, at the same time,

half of the
often followed

claim
the
pretendere

Besides, abductions were frequent,

flocks.

greggia.

(78)

appears that a

and

ratto

by murders amongst the

omicidio

relations

and

rivals,

congiunto

sometimes by wars between nations.

talora

of

Hospitality was

common amongst

them practised

it

the Caledonians, and some

even towards their enemies.

This duty

(126) anche

was

sacred,

and became hereditary

had a right to claim

*

help

in families.

Every guest

(192) ospite
from another in his perils
they
;

soccorso

(were accustomed), in separating, to exchange shields, which

costumare
ref.
scambiare
they afterwards preserved in their halls,
poi
conservare
sala

in

order that their

(256)

210

RECAPITULATOKY EXERCISES

descendants might have a testimony of the friendship of their

posteri
heat of battle, two enemies happened to
calor
venire
(9)
discover that their ancestors had been mutual guests, they de*
antenato
parents.

If,

in the

padre

posed their arms immediately, and renewed between them the

ancient friendship.

(On

this account)

Quindi
cowardly act to reveal
^codardo ^
svelare

enemy, as

it

was considered

it

(214)
one's name, or to
seek

reveals his

name

to the

that of the

ricercare

(156)
seemed a pretext to

the conflict

escape

and

the

cimento

sottrarsi a

man who

as a

che

enemy was a proverbial term of

2

(165)
contempt.
ignominia.

had

It does not appear that they

(232')

(251)

any knowledge of
*

arts,

conoscenza

except that of building roughly

some houses of stone for the
fuorch
rozzo (310)
(262)
chiefs of the tribes, and of manufacturing iron for the purposes
*
trib
lavorare
uso
of war.

It

is

unknown what

liquor

they

made

use of for

(214) ignorare
drink,

which was served

in shells,

and from

bevanda
conca
(239)
phrase in Ossian, " The feast of shells."
(50)

this

comes the

(168)

They

liked to invite

amare

one another reciprocally to banquets, which were

spread with
convito
(214) imbandire
the gifts of the chase.
The night, which for the most part was
*
dono
devoted to their

feasts,

destinare
oak, as candles were

(72)

was illuminated by torches of burning

(239)

unknown.
ignoto.

confiaccola

acceso

For the most particular solemIn

ON ALL THE KULES.

211

was

burned,
which
abbruciare
(they apparently) reserved for this use, and called " The trunk
tronco
sembrava
a
the

nities,

of the feast."

It

oak

an

trunk of

entire

be observed,) that in the feasts and

cosa osservabile

(to

is

rejoicings of the Caledonians, in which, as

allegrezza

music had always the

pri)icipal share, there

parte

(25)
tion

we have

already said,

(1'''9)

made

never any men-

is

(214) (313)

of (dancing,) although this has naturally

danze

a
naturale (311)

(256)

connexion with music, and the universal custom of

""

all

strict

nations

'uso

(187)
has rendered dancing inseparable from poetry and music.
It

(264)
seems that the Caledonians had no distinct notions of

gion

reli-

(251)

(232)

nevertheless some ideas are found amongst them, which

(214)

l^er

(were meant) to supply

(to) that defect.

We

find frequently in-

valere

dicated a class of

spirits,

which seem

of a superior order to
^

spirits

of the

dead

(19)
they bear no particular name, but are
avere
(214)

pi.

only

denominated

the

of nature in which

after that part

it

da

soltanto

is

(214)

supposed they particularly delighted

dilettarsi
(251)

such as the spirits of the

tempests, of the mountains, of the night, of the heavens, &c.

They considered

that the air

was swarming with these

{251) popolare

and they attributed

to

them

all

the

phenomena

spirits,

di
of nature.

The

(131)
immortality of the soul was one of the principal points of the

RECAPITULATORY EXERClSKa

212
doctrine of

tlie

Druids, universally and faithfully preserved by

conservare

the Caledonians

and they considered, that

after death

their

amusements would be the same as those which had occupied

trattenimento

them

in this

life.

They thought they

hunt
amidst
andare a caccia

could

(123)
the

clouds,

with darts of mist,

aerial

stags,

(As they were

Siccome

former wars against the shades of their enemies.

antico
con
to preserve) their passion for song, they

were

hasten wherever
accorrere ovunque

to

conservavano

summoned them.

the voice of their praises

lode

it

chiamare

Greeks
and the Eomans, consiGreco[bi)
but
as the greatest misfortune not to be buried

The Caledonians,
dered

or continue

di aereo cervo

nuvola

like the

seppellire

(121)

sepulture was not sufficient for their happiness

the shades of

ombra

(25)

the departed could not enjoy that species of beatitude which the
godere di
trapassare

uncultivated mind of the Caledonians had imagined, until a

mente L
(355)
rozzo

song was chanted in their honour

cantare
Canzone
as the most sacred duty towards the dead.
funereal

this

was considered

Until this honour

estinto pi.

was paid

to the spirits,

rendere

they wandered through the clouds agitated

errare

by the winds like a ship in a tempest.

tossed
*
travagliare
(352)

and

The funereal
^

freed
spirit ascended to the highest
elegy (being sung), the
i(274)
spiv'gionare
^elegia

and purest region of the

air,

and there received a kind of

(319)

ON ALL THE RULES.

reward or chastisement, according

guiderdone
gastigo
(352)
ous men,

who had

'

nanimous

distinguished themselves

were met by their fathers with a serene and

(whilst,

on the contrary,) the proud and cruel

per

(268)

superbo

contrario

lo

by the frowning aspect of

terrified

by generous and magcon

(228)
actions,

smiling aspect

were

213
Valor-

to his past conduct.

spaventare

their indignant fathers,

oscuro

who chased them

far

from the habitations of heroes, to wander

scacciare

through wands and tempests.

Finally, cowards,
^poi

who

and

all

lived ivithout infamy or without praise, to

(make use

per

usare

phrase

from Dante, were (driven back) into the mist, a

ricacciare

espressione di

those

^(25)
of)

fit

* degno

dentro

dwelling for the slothful and ignoble.

soggiorno di
neghittoso

The Caledonians placed

a superstitious trust in omens, and

^

prestare

^fede

a presagio

sudden sound whatever was believed by them to be the

'
* improvviso
\2n) (239)

any

warning

If the chords of their harps,

voices of spirits.

arpa

ammoiiitore {Qo)
agitated a
scuotere

little

by the wind, (sighed

forth) a

mandare

was the sign

of a shade,

avvisare

gli astanti

The howling

of dogs, the

faint

Heggiero

sound, this
^

who, in passing, touched the harp, and

(263)
informed (those assembled) of the death of an absent friend.

urlare

bounding

lontano

wagging

of their ears, and the sudden

*
crollare

of stags and goats, were also fatal omens, as it was

cervo
cavriolo
funesto
(214)

s/anc2bpl. (57)

believed that those animals could see from afar the shades of the

(251)

(276)

214

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES
Sometimes they imagined (they saw) a rain of blood

dead.

di vedere

pi.

which announced approaching war, and they even thought they

prossimo
di
perceived in their houses the arms of the distant warriors tinted
^
inf.
Hontano
with blood, which was considered as an infallible sign of their
di

(171)

death.

The Caledonians had

religious respect,
^

which did

for the

not,

'

worship
culto

shades of their ancestors a

however, reach to adoration or

per giungere

they were never wearied praising them and celebrating

inf.
(214) (313) stocare (265)

their exploits,

and

at every

impresa

moment they thought they saw and

(192)

inf.

heard them. They retired to their mountains with the intenref. sopra
inf.
(128)
they also invoked them before
tion of conversing with them
(262)
war, and in the most important solemnities, not, however, as
;

beings that could give them aid, but only as witnesses and
ente

(276)

(131)

friends.

From
Su

appears they had formed a kind

(251)
(232)
of divination, of which they made use in some cases. When they
these pretended signs,

were in doubt as to
*

whom

it

should
(172) dovere

the battle, they used

to

be

confided the

command

of

{2U)

invoke the shades of their ancestors,

solere (280)

striking three times on their shields, and then retired to sleep,

volta

supposing that the shades would appear

(251)

quindi
to

ref.

them and design the

destinare

215

ON ALL THE RULES.

most worthy for the
degno a
fully their

battle.

Re-awakened, they related

Risvegliare

(245^)

dream, and described the form,

attitude,

faith-

and

(35) atteggiamento
voice of the spirits they

had seen

and whoever could relate the

riferire

(211)

most distinct and least equivocal

indications of the will of

equivoco (53) contrassegno

the shades,

was

from amongst the others.

{2^9) prescegliere *
chosen

It is pro-

bablo that they had another kind of divination, founded on the

genere
(251)
sound of the wind and in this they were not more absurd than
;

(106)
from the entrails of victims,
viscera
(traevano gli auguri)
(168)

the Romans,

who

augured

from the pecking of hens, or from the flight of crows.

corvo.
beccare
pollo
volo

Finally,

they had recourse to another expedient in choosing their com-

manders

the

rival

tano

(263)
champions, followed by several

retired
ref.

to

sopra

hill

capisingers,

vario (56)

which was enveloped in mist, and each waringombro di

the command of the armies was

(321)
(214)
given to him whoso shield resounded the loudest, as they ima(180)
(213)
sup(165)
(118)
gined that the shades of the dead had co-operated in rendering
porre
ph (261)
a
inf.
rior

then struck on his shield

the sound powerful and clear.

gagliardo

The

veneration that the Caledonians had for the shades of the

2yer

dead,

made them even

respect their bodies.

After the battle,

pi.

the conqueror gave sepulture not only to his

vincitore

own

warriors v/ho

216
had

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES
fallen,

but also

enemy

to those of the

and

to sacrifice this

(225)
pious observance to resentment would have been deemed an expio
riputare
uffizio

There was no duty performed by the Caleadempire

donians with greater care and willingness than that of attend
cess of inhumanity.

compiacenza

(108*)

The

iug to the sepulture and funereal honours of the dead.

pi.

mode

of interment

was

this

dug

they

a grave from six to

scavare

seppellire

fossa
deep
the bottom was then covered with fine earth,
profondo
'^fino ^creta
(306)
on which they lowered gently the body of the defunct. If he
adagiare
eight feet

had been a

warrior, they placed beside

him

his sword,

and the

(352)
points of twelve arrows.

punta

Over the corpse they spread another

m.

strale

cadavero

stendere

layer of earth, in which they placed a horn, the symbol of chase,

strata
collocare corno *

and a hunter's bow

they then covered the whole with fine

poscia (306)
(1^9)
earth and with four grey stones, which were placed at the extre;

cacciatore arco

estre-

bigio

mities

mit
are

to

mark

the

of the tomb.

size

Those stones

am/nezza
(48) (344) segnare
frequently mentioned in the poetry of Ossian,

and are

pi.

sometimes called " The stones of fame."

In their centuries of
secolo

talora

heroism, the Caledonians, like

many

other nations, used to bury

with the master his favourite dog, but this

2

Ossian.

is

not mentioned in

During the ceremony of interment, the singers

sepoltura

called

217

ox ALL THE RULES.

on tLe shade of the warrior three times, inviting him
"A/5 narrow house," as
angusto

the sepulchre

was

called

(239)

'

to visit

(by them.)
i

appears that the mourning and funereal songs were regularly

It

lutto
funebre
(214)
renewed each year, and autumn was the season devoted

Immediately

to this

destinare

(251) (192)
annual
commemoration.
^
^anniversario

after death, the shades of the departed

revealed
trapassato far vedere

ombra

themselves to their relations

they were generally preceded by
(141) congiunto comparire per lo pi,
;

a meteor, which, according to the Caledonians, served (to escort

Mi

and
e

them through the darkness, and

light)

di lume

2(131)

They sometimes

always accompanied by a strong gust of wind.

(16)

came

to

demand

'^funebre

of their sons or descendants,

share

prender parte

Halora

soffio

witness

funereal honours, or to

in

their

assistere

in order to

glory

was

partenza

oscurit

in

scorta

their departure

the exploits

impresa

animate them and

but for the most part

their

appearance indicated some approaching misfortune, and in this

comparsa

vicino

case they sometimes abandoned their natural form, and assumed

2

lasciare

various shapes, (such as that) of an afflicted (old man.)

come

As
III

to the

vecchio.

appearance of the Caledonians,

quanto

were generally of high stature and

(251)
very
(1

it

seems they

fattezza
fair

complexion

they had

bianco carnagione

long

hair,

and thought

15) (1 IG) capigliatura

it

a particular ornament to
vezzo

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES ON ALL THE RULES.

218
let

down

it fall

way as) frequently

modo che
The women esteemed most

their face (in sncb a

gi per (150) viso

lasciare

in

cover their cheeks

and eyes.
{copriva) (152) guancia[5)

to

beautiful are always praised for blue eyes and black

hair.

The

capelli.

(72)

Caledonians attained to a great

age,
but were usually
giungere
lungo vecchiezza
afflicted

with blindness,

opprimere da
rivalled

In

the

beautiful

and almost unin-

cecit

poetry of Ossian, a detailed and minute description

comparabile

may
be found of the manners, customs, opinions, and obserpotere (214)
vances of the people who have been slightly sketched in the
leggermente tracciare
preceding exercises

and

to the

poems

of Ossian

we

therefore

(268)
refer
the student who may desire to acquire a further know*
ulteriore
rimandare
"
ledere of
The Customs and Habits of the Ancient Cale-

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

219

PHEASES AND DIALOGUES.

Arts and Trades.

Arti e Mestieri.
11

MERCANTE Vende

all'ingrosso

a minuto
compra,

l'avventore

L'agoraio

fa gli

spilli

gli

sells

wholesale

or retail; the customer buys.

The needle-maker makes

pins

and needles.

aghi,

L'argentiere lavora
cesella

l'argento,

getta ogni

specie

d'argenteria,

di armi,

come spade, pugnali,

scimitarre, fioretti, fucili, pis-

monta

&c.,

The

silver-smith works in

ver,

sil-

and chisels and moulds

kinds of plate.
The armourer makes, repairs,
and polishes all kinds of arms,
as swords, daggers, sabres,
foils, guns, pistols, &c., sets
blades and fits them in scabbards and handles.
all

L'ariiauiolo fabbrica, raccomoda, e forbisce ogni sorta

tole,

The tradesman

le

lame e

adatta loro il fodero o guaina

ed il manico, impugnatura o
elsa,

L'arruotino arruota
forbici,

coltelli,

e affila le

temperini,

barriere rade,
i

fa la

suoi arnesi sono,

il

barba

coreggina, il bacino,
sapone, e lo sciugatoio.

calderaio

rasoio,

la

Il

il

fa e racconcia le

caldaie e le casserole,
Il

knives,

sharpens
penknives,

all'avventore, e gli fa stivali,

scarpe, stivaletti o pianelle

ciabbatino racconcia
vecchie scarpe,

The barber shaves

his imple-

ments are a

razor, a strop, a

basin, soap,

and a towel.

The

makes and repairs

and pots.
The shoemaker takes the measure of a customer, and makes
him boots, shoes, half-boots,
brazier

boilers

calzolaio prende la misura

il

knife-grinder

scissors,

&c.

&c..
Il

The

le

or slippers; the cobbler

old shoes.

mends

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

220
II

cANDELOTTAio vencle
dele di sevo

Il

gabbie,
vimini,

le

can-

di cera,

CANESTRAIO fa
strini, zane o
ed

vende Cane-

culle, panieri,

lavori

altri

di

Il

CAPPELLAIO

Il

CARROZZIERE fabbrica cocchi,

fa e tinge

cap-

carrozze,

barocci,

calessi

carri e ogni specie di legni.

Il

CARTARO fabbrica

nella car-

tiera pi sorte di carta, fina,

mezzana, ordinaria, sugante

cartastraccia, bianca, bigia,

turchina,

da mu-

e rigata

CHiAVARO

fa

chiavi,

le

le

serrature o toppe.
Il

COLTELLINAIO
bici,

Il

sells baskets,

cages, and other osier

works.
The hatter makes and dyes hats
pers,

The coachmaker

builds

car-

and

riages, chaises, carts,

all

kinds of conveyances.

The papermaker makes in the

paper-mill many kinds of
com-

paper, fine, middling,

mon,

and

blotting-paper

white, grey, blue, and music-

The locksmith

makes

keys,

and key-holes.
cutler
makes knives,

locks,

fa coltelli, for-

temperini,

lancette,

The

scissors,

penknives,

lancets,

razors, &c.

rasoi, &c.,
Il

or

paper.

sica,

11

tallow

makes and
cradles, ham-

Tlie basket-maker

and caps.

pelli e le berrette,

The chandler sells

wax candles.

CONCIATORE concia le pelli

per farne cuoio.
CURANDAIO cura i panni lini,
purgandoli dalla bozzima, e
imbiancando

rozzi,

The

tanner dresses skins for

leather.

The

bleacher bleaches linens,

them from roughness,

and whitening the unbleachfreeing
ed.

Il

DORATORE indora

metalli,

frames, &c.

le cornici di legno, &c..

Il

FALEGNAME

fa tavole, sedie,

stipi, scrivanie, telai,

armadi,

ed ogni mobiliare,
Il

FILATORE lavora
e

fila seta

Tlie gilder gilds metals, wood-

The

presses,
al

filatoio,

The

cap-

The

filo,

makes

carpenter

tables,

chairs, cabinets, desks, looms,

and

all furniture.

spinner works with the

spinning-wheel, and spins
silk or thread.

La MODISTA vende

cuffie,

milliner sells caps,

flowers,

bonrib-

pellini, fiori artefatti, nastri,

nets,

ghirlande, ed altre acconciature alla moda per l'uso delle

bons, wreaths, and other

fashionable habiliments for

donne,

ladies.

artificial

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

II

VETRAIO

fornaciaio di vetri

vetro, e ne

bot-

tiglie, fiaschi, bicchieri,

cam-

il

FUNAIO

fa le funi, la corda,

con

canapi, &c.,

napa
Il

pietre

aiineli di

incastra

vende

vezzi,

imbianca

L'iiiBiAN'CATORE

le

e le cornici

in

il

le-

figure,

fogliami, &c.,

La lavandaia

lava i pannilini,
che insapona, lava, sciacqua,
torce, e stende per farli asciugare, inamida i pi fini, e
poi col ferro da spianare li
stira.

Il

MONETiERE batte e impronta

monete col conio alla

le

MURATORE

costruisce

brica le case ed

mattoni o

sassi, e

L'ombrellaio

fab-

i muri con
con calcina.

ombrelli
per parar la pioggia, ed i
paraseli per preservare dal
fa

gli

sole.
Il

pellicciaio fa

le

pellicce o

jeweller

stones

precious

sets

ear-rings,

and

ornaments,

for

necklaces,

bracelets,

and rings of
emeralds,

dia-

rubies,

The white-washer whitens

the

and walls of houses

with his brush.
The wood-carver carves wood
and frames into figures,
leaves, &c.
The laundress washes the linen,
which she soaps, washes,
rinses, wrings, and spreads
out to dry.
The fine things
are starched, and then ironed
with the smoothing iron.
front

The

coiner

and

strikes

stamps

off

them

coins,

in

The mason

the

builds houses

and

walls with bricks or stone,

and mortar.

The

umbrella- maker makes

umbrellas to save from the
rain, and parasols to preserve
from the sun.

The

furrier

makes

articles

of

mar-

dress from the fur of the fox,

di lupo, di orso, di ar-

the marten, wolf, bear, ermine, rabbit, and other skins ;

vesti di pelle di volpe, di

tora,

hemp

mint.

zecca.
Il

ropes,

turquoise, pearls, &c.

facciate delle case e le pareti

col suo pennello.
L'intagliatore intaglia

The

monds,

diamanti, smeraldi,

rubini, turchine, perle &c.,

gno

glass,

window panes, &c.

The ropemaker makes

sells

ed

orecchini,

braccialetti,

makes

into the form of

or flax thread.

preziose per farne

ornamenti,

it

cord, cables, &c., with

di lino.

GIOIELLIERE incassa
le

ca-

di

fila

glass-blower

bottles, flasks, glasses, bells,

pane, lastre, &c.,

Il

The

and blows

soffia

fa

221

mellino,

di

coniglio,

&c.

vende manicotti, berrette di

pelle, &c.,

he

sells muffs, caps,

&c.

222
II

PURASES AND DIALOGUES.

SARTO

fa

gli

nette
cuce,

abiti,

taglia

panno, lo cona punto di baste, lo

d a cucire ai lavo-

colle forbici

il

The

makes

tailor

dresses

he

cuts with his shears the cloth,

bastes

sews

together,

it

or gives

it

to his

it,

workmen

to

sew.

ranti,

Lo SPAZZATURAIO netta e spazza

le strade,

The

scavenger
cleans
and
sweeps the streets and street
crossings.

Lo SPAZZACAMMINO

The

Lo STAMPATORE Stampa i mano-

The

spazza

puliscC

cammini.

con tipi di varie grandezze, con lettere capitali,

piccole e italiche, ed altri
scritti

chimney-sweeper cleans
and sweeps the chimney.
printer prints manuscripts
with type of various sizes,
with capital letters, small

and

italic letters,

and other

signs.

Quadrupedi.

Quadrupeds.

L'asino un animale da
da basto mangia i cardi,
ha le orecchie lunghe e ra;

The
it

ass

is

a beast of burden

eats thistles, has long ears,

and brays.

glia,
Il

cinghiale o cignale

una

specie di porco salvatico, che

si

Il

difende colle zanne,

generalmente nero, e alcuni

hanno corna grandi ecurvate.
L'orso, animale forte e peloso,
trova spesso nelle regioni
esso bufonchia e
rugghia,
castoro o bevaro stato

si

fredde

chiamato
animali,

l'architetto
pell'artifizio

wild boar is a kind of wild

which defends itself with

pig,

its tusks.

TORO o BUE ed il giovenco

mugghiano
la vacca e la
la
giovenca muggiscono
carne del bue si chiama
manzo,
BUFALO
bue salvatico
;

Il

The

The

bull

and bullock bellow

cow and heifer low

flesh of the ox is called

the

The

buffalo

or

wild

the

beef.

bull

is

generally black, and some

have large twisted horns.
The bear is a strong hairy
animal, generally found in
cold

regions

and roars.
The beaver

it

grumbles

has been

c.illed

degli

" the architect of animals,"

col

on account of the art with

which it constructs its

quale costruisce la sua casa.

PllRASES
I

GATTI ed

AND DIALOGUES.

gattini miagolano,

GHIRO dorme sotterra tutto

l'inverno,

11

Il

mew

kittens

and

scratch.

e sgraffiano,
II

223

and

Cats

DROMEDAKio Una specie di

cammello a doppio scrigno.
CANE il pi intelligente
degli animali

domestici, vi

The

dormouse sleeps under

ground all the winter.
The dromedary is a kind of
camel with a double hump.
The dog is the most intelligent
of domestic animals

there
shepherds'
;

sono

cani da guardia, da
pecorai, mastini, levrieri o

are watch dogs,

barboni, cani da
fermo, &c. I cani ringhiano,

bull dogs, spaniels, pointers,

veltri, alani,

mordono, abbaiano o latrano, gagnolano, mugolano, e

dogs,

mastiffs,

Dogs

&c.

greyhounds,

snarl, bite, bark,

and squeal.

yelp, howl,

squittiscono,

naso

11

FANTE
i

tromba dell'ELEchiama proboscide,

la
si

suoi denti son detti avorio,

sporgono

The

elephant's nose or trunk

the jaws.

L'arjiellino animaletto di pelle

bianca e coda nera.

The ermine

La VOLPE

The

in

fuori

and project from

are ivory,

dalla

is

called a proboscis, its teeth

mascella,
is a little animal,
with a white skin and black

tail.

mente

acchiappa

&c. In
d la caccia,
sua lunga coda il

Inghilterra
e

la

trofeo

destra-

polli, conigli,
le si

della

caccia

essa

fox catches cleverly fowls,

it is hunted in
England, and its long tail or
brush is the trophy of the

rabbits, &c.

chase

it

yelps or cries.

gagnola.

La GIRAFFA

si
addomestica
la pelle sua
macchiata come quella del
leopardo, ed ha un collo

facilmente

lunghissimo,

una

testa

The
its

giraffe

skin

is
is

easily

spotted

tamed
like

the

and it has a very

long neck, and a very small
leopard's,

head.

piccolissima.

giovane capro o capretto

gambetta per i prati,
la lepre giovane si
chiama leprotto,
La iena crudele e feroce, e
Il

Quando

somiglia

il

lupo,

The young goat or kid frisks

the meadows.
"When the hare is young, it

in

is

called a leveret.

The hyena
cious,

is cruel and feroand resembles the wolf.

221
11

PITRASI-S ANT) DTAI.OfiUF.S.

RICCIO
lo SPINOSO coperto
di spine o pungiglioni, e si
rannicchia come in un gomitolo, quando da alcuno vien

The hedgehog
and

is

covered with

up like
when any one touches

quills,

a ball

rolls itself

it.

toccato,

CAVALLO

Il

domato o

scoz-

zonato dallo scozzone

o
domatore
bardato e sellato
dal palafreniere o mozzo, e
cavalcato e
spronato dal
;

The

horse is trained by the

horse-breaker, bridled and
saddled by the groom, and

ridden and spurred by the

rider.

cavalcatore,

eavallo va al passo, ambia,

galoppa, ma spesso

Il

trotta, e

ombreggia,
leva la

The

horse walks, ambles, trots,

and

kicks,

mano

away

nitrisce.

il cavallo
cavalcatore

Il

monta a cavallo, e smonta

da cavallo, e lo regola per
mezzo delle redini, della

and often shies,

and runs

gallops,

tira calci, restio,

restive,

is

horses neigh.

The

mounts and dismounts

his horse, and controls him
with reins, bridle, spurs, and
rider

whip.

briglia, dello sprone, e della

frusta.

L'agnello chiama

pecora

la

col belare,

The lamb

the sheep by

calls

bleating.

Alla LiONESSA manca la giubba,

il che la distingue dal leone;
questi animali ruggiscono,

The

La SCIMMIA

The monkey,

has

lioness

which

no

distinguishes

from the lion

mane,
her

these animals

roar.

molti

riguardi

somiglia
all'uomo,
cerca d'imitare,

La

pelle

della

ch'essa

zibellina,

gran prezzo,
sorcio o topo

di
Il

non

in

man,

many

whom

respects,

it tries

The

to

skin of the marten, espe-

cially

the

sable,

is

very

costly.
stride,

rosicchia mobili e vivande,

fino a che

like

imitate.

martora, spe-

cialmente della

is

sia acchiap-

The mouse

squeaks, and nibbles

and eatables, till it
caught in a trap.

furniture
is

pato in una trappola,

Il

rinoceronte ha un corno

Il

sua

grossa
pelle quasi impenetrabile.
ratto pi grande del
sul

naso,

la

The
its
is

The

rhinoceros has a horn on

nose, and its thick skin
almost impenetrable.
rat is larger than the

PIIKASES
sorcio,

sua gran-

per la

AND PIALOGUF.S.

dezza molto feroce,

Il

TARANDO

dove gli abitanti se ne servono come bestia da tiro e

da soma. In un giorno pu
fare ottanta miglia.
Il

Il

CONIGLIO si rintana in buche

che scava sotterra,
CERVO un animale boschereccio velocissimo al corso,

adorna di corna

la sua testa

maestose. Cerviatto
il

Lo

si

chiama

giovane cervo,
SCOIATTOLO,
animaletto
dotato

salvatico,

di

una

lunga coda vellutata, s'arrampica su per gli alberi,

e da uno ad un altro salta
coll'agilit quasi di

for its size,

very

ferocious.

cervo del Nord,

il

225

mouse, and,

un uc-

The

reindeer

is

the stag of the

North, where the inhabitants

it as a beast of carriage
and of burden. It can travel
eighty miles in a day.
The rabbit burrows in little
holes it digs in the ground.
The stag is a forest animal,
very swift on foot its head
is
adorned with
majestic
branches or horns.
The
young stag is called a fawn.
The squirrel, a little wild
animal, with a long velvety
tail, climbs trees, and jumps
from one tree to another,
almost with the nimbleness
of a bird.
use

cello,

La

pelle

Il

quando

digrigna

LUPO

tigre picmacchiata

della

chiettata

irata ruggisce,

denti.

suoi lupi-

cini,

and

gnashes

it

and roars when

teeth,

its

in

The wolf

roars, and the female

defends her whelps with great

ferocity.

La ZEBRA

cavallo d'Africa,

listata

giallo

maschio,

nero nel

nero e giallo nella

femmina,

The

Rapina^

black
white

acutissima,

possa fissare

e
il

ha

si

sole

is

if

Birds.
Notturni,

L'aquila, per la sua forza, e

pel suo ardire, vien detta il
re degli uccelli

or the horse of
striped yellow and
male, and black and
if female.

zebra,

Africa,

Volatili,
Uccelli di

tiger's skin is spotted

speckled
passion.

lupa difende

urla, e la

con gran ferocia

The

la vista

che
vive di

dice
;

Nocturnal Birds^ Birds of Prey.

The

eagle, owing to its strength

and daring, is called the
king of birds it has very
sharp sight, and can even, it
is said, gaze on the sun.
It
;

PHRASES AND ftlALOGUES.

226

rapina, e nidifica fra le rupi

lives

mon-

eyrie

inaccessibili d'altissime

L'astore
cellare

on prey, and builds its

amidst high and in-

accessible mountains.

tagne,
si

di

teneva per ucforma e colore

si distingue dalper avere il capo

coperto di lanugine, o calvo,
quandoch questa l'ha col'avvoltoio
perto di penne
si ciba di carogna, e l'aquila
co'snoi artigli ghermisce viva

l'aquila

la sua preda,

un

uccello

notturno, molto simile al

gufo, e com'esso, odiato dagli
uccelletti, e perci serve per
l'uccellagione

essa

squittisce.

stride

poeti

la

chiamano augello di Pallade,

MULACCHIA,
CORNACCHIA,

La

devastatrice de'seminati, pi
piccola del corvo

essa grac-

goshawk

resembles

in

colour and size the falcon,

and was used

simile allo sparviere,

L'avvoltoio

La CIVETTA

The

hawking.

in

The

vulture differs from the

eagle in having its head
either covered with down or
bald, whilst the eagle's head
the
is covered with feathers
;

vulture feeds on carrion, and

the eagle seizes with its
claws live prey.
The screech-owl is a nocturnal
bird, very like the owl,

and

both are hated by smaller

screech-owl is
a decoy-bird, and
Poets have called
it Minerva's bird.
The rook is the devastator of
crops, and is smaller than the
crow it caws.
birds

the

used

as

screeches.

chia,

pasce

Il

nero corvo, o coreo,

Il

carname, e crocita,
cuculo si pigro che eziandio
le sue uova non vuol covare.

si

di

Il

Il

suo verso cuculiare,

FALCO, o falcone, armato

di becco, e d'unghie ricurve
serve all'uccellagie acute
;

one.

Havvene

di pii specie

girifalco
falconi

gambe

will feed on carrion,

and croaks.

The

cuckoo's indolence

is prothat it
does not even hatch its eggs.
Its note is the sound cuckoo.

verbial

it

ha

il

il

supremo dei
becco

le

azzurrine forte, ingegnoso,

ben avventurato
in predare,
;

said

is

The falcon

is armed with a
beak, and with bent and
sharp claws it was used for
hawking. There are several
;

species of

e variet,
Il

The raven

it.

The gerfalcon

the chief spe-

is

cies of falcon

legs are bluish

its
;

beak and

it is

strong,

dexterous, and very daring in

capturing prey.

niRASES AND DIALOGUES.

II

solingo GUFO, dagli occbi di

va tubando

fuoco,

sopra gli antichi

mura
dia,

Il

Il

diroccate.

dolente
e su

tetti

Il

volgo

l'o-

stimando di cattivo au-

gurio il suo canto,

NIBBIO, che volentieri insidia
alle galline, fa ruote in aria
volando, come quasi ogni altro
uccello di rapina.

PIPISTRELLO
turno,

un animale not-

mezzo topo

uccello

mezzo

esso stride,

The

flies

disconsolately about old

roofs

and ruined walls. It is

by the ignorant, who

disliked

consider

its

whoop an

evil

omen.

The

kite,

which entraps cleverly

chickens, wheels about in the

air, like almost all birds of
prey.

The

bat

a nocturnal animal,
half bird.
It

is

half mouse,
screams.

Singing Birds.

Uccelli Cantatoli,
Il

22?

lonely owl, witli fiery eyes,

The

va sui verdi prati

soavemente cantando.

is a pretty little
yellow bird, that sings very
called the
is
it
sweetly
Canary sparrow from the
Canary Isles, from which it
comes.
The playful tomtit, with its
pretty little head, is seen ic
the fields while it sings sweet-

CARDELLINO,

The

CANARINO

un uccelletto gen-

che canta
dolcissimamente dicesi pure
passera di Canarie dalle isole
di questo nome, donde ei

tile di color giallo,

;

viene,

La scherzosa CAPINERA dal becco

gentile,

canari/

ly.
Il

col capiciuo ncro

pezzato d rosso, e le ale di

giallo, gareggia col canarino
nel canto,

nn uc-

celletto piccolissimo,

da noi

L'Americano colibr

goldfinch, with its little

black head speckled with red,
and its yellow wings, rivals
the canary in song.

The American humming-bird

is

Italiani detto mellivoro, per-

a very small bird, called in

Italian the honey-bird, be-

ch, librandosi in su'fiori, vi

cause, poising itself on floAV-

va succhiando

ers, it

mele dal loro

calice.
Vaghissimi sono i
colori delle sue lucide piume.
il

extracts the honey from

their cups.
its

The

colours of

glossy feathers are beau-

tiful.
Il

FANELLO si addimcstica facilmente, e ghiotto di canapuccia va svolazzando por le

The

linnet is very easily tamed,

and very fond

it

of

hemp-seed
about the

aroes fluttering

228

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

stanze, beccandone gli acini

che trova,
La GAZZA, o PICA, garrula e
loquace, imita maravigliosa-

mente

la favella

umana,

La LODOLA, O ALLODOLA,

da'

Latini detta Alauda (quasi

da a laude Dei), pei'ch sollevandosi a volo verso il cielo,
si perde di vista, e solo se ne

ode la sua armoniosa canticolla quale pare che

lena,
lodi

il

Signore,

nera merla (o il merlo) ha

il becco giallo, e chioccola,
L'ortolano col suo piacevol
canto diletta in vita, e morto
buon boccone.
Il PAPPAGALLO
ve n'ha di pi
specie
tutte per convengono nell'avere il rostro grosso
e torto, con la mandibula di
sopra pi lunga dell'inferiore,
la lingua carnosa, non appuntata i piedi con quattro
diti, mediante i quali, e con
l'aiuto del rostro, salgono e
scendono come per una scala.
I pappagalli imparano a parlare
sono garruli, piuttosto
docili, ed hanno vita assai
lunga,
;

PASSERO

si

diletta di stare so-

litario e solo, e in ispecie la

mattina va

pispilando.

up any grains

it finds.

The magpie is a great

chatterer,

and imitates wonderfully the

human
The lark,

voice.

by the Latins
(probably from a
laude Dei, praises to God),
because, soaring towards heaven, it is lost from sight, and
its sweet lay, which appears
called

Alauda

sung

in praise of the Creator,

ahme

heard.
blackbird has
beak, and sings.

is

La

Il

rooms, picking

Tlie

The

ortolan,

with
is

its

yellow

delights

alive,

sweet song, and dead,

a great delicacy.

The parrot.

There are many

species of this bird

all

are

alike in havingathick curved

beak, with the upper mandia

fleshy tongue, not pointed
feet with four claws, by means
of which, aided by their beak,
they climb and descend as if
by a ladder. Parrots learn
to speak they are very talkative, rather docile, and live
pretty long.

ble longer than the lower

The sparrow

likes to be soli-

and particularly in the

morning its chattering is
tary,

heard.
Il

PICCHIO, che volando a scosse,

va a posarsi sugli
quivi,

col

alberi,

suo fermo becco

il suo nome)

picchia (donde

e ripicchia sul tronco di essi,

The woodpecker, which

flies

by

perches on trees, and

with its strong beak taps
them (the origin of its name),
in order to shake out of the

starts,

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

per farne uscir faora

vermi-

celli di cui si pasce,

Il

PIVIERE ha per
solito, bianca la testa, nero il petto, e
gialli i piedi, se la fa per le
sabbionose rive dei fiumi,

La QUAGLIA ha

le

chiettate, e talora
fetto

il

penne
ha il

picciuf-

suo volare dritto,

e vive per seminati e per le

stoppie

sua carne squi-

la

trunks the worms on which

it

il

229

feeds.

The plover has

generally a
white head, black breast, and
yellow feet, and frequents the
sandy shores of rivers.
The quail has speckled feathers,
and sometimes a crest
it
;

straight

flies

lives

in

fields

corn

and

forward,

and

stubble

excellent.

its flesh is

sita,

La RONDINE,
un uccello

RONDINELLA,

di passo, e traver-

sa tutta la larghezza del

diterraneo in

men

Essa prende

la

di

24

Meore.

sua pastura
volando, e costruisce il suo
nido di creta con mirabile

The

sicalloiv is a bird

sage,

of pas-

and crosses the Medi-

terranean in less than twentyhours.

It catches its
food while on the wing, and
builds its nest of mud with
admirable skill.
four

maestria,
Il

ROsiGNUOLO

un

uccelletto

stimatissimo per la soave dolcezza del suo canto. Posato

cime dei pioppi,

sulle

manda

egli

suoi pi melodiosi

gorgheggi nella notte

al

lume

di luna. I poeti fingono ch'egli sia

Il

TORDO

l'innamorato della rosa.

di varie specie.

Il

tordo d'America, detto Canoro, vince qualunque altro uccello per la soavit e facilit
di cantare, contrafiacendoli e

superandoli
so

si

tutti.

Il

suo ver-

trutilare o zirlare,

Uccellame Salvatico

Domes-

The nightingale is a small bird

much prized for the melodious

sweetness

of

its

song.

Perched on the top of the

poplar, it warbles its most
melodious notes at night by
moonlight. Poets imagine it
to be enamoured of the rose.
There are various kinds of the
thrush. The American thrush,
called the Singer, excels every

other bird in the sweetness

and ease of its song, imitating
and surpassing them all. It
whistles.

Wild and Tame Birds.

tico,

L'anitra, o anatra, un uccello acquatico a tutti noto ;

The duck is an aquatic bird

known to all of us it quacks,
;

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

230

essa schiamazza, s'attuffa, e

nuota.
Le salvatiche hanno
vari nomi
come quello di
Mestolone, dalla forma del
suo becco Tuffetto, dal con;

dives, and swims.

The wild
ducks have various names
the spoonbill^ from the shape
the diver^ from
of its beak
;

constantly diving,

(fee.

tinuo tuffarsi, &c.,

La

CHIOCCIA cova le uova, e

guida i pigolanti pulcini il
;

suo verso di chiocciare,

The hen hatches and leads about

her brood of chirping
chickens
she clucks
;

little

and

cackles.
Il

candido cigno, dal lungo collo

e dal ricolmo petto; esso,
come ogni uccello acquatico,
adopra le palme dei piedi a
guisa di remi
si tiene per
ornamento nelle vasche e nei
;

laghi dei parchi.

11

I poeti fin-

gono che canti dolcemente

quando vicino a morire,
COLOMBO e la colomba si sogliono allevare nelle colombaie
essi tubano, grugano e
gemiscono, i poeti hanno immaginato che tirino il carro
di Venere, e sono uccelli de;

dicati a questa

Dea.

I pic-

The

fair

neck

swan, with the long

and swelling breast,

like all aquatic birds, uses its

it is kept as an
ornament of ponds and lakes

feet for oars

Poets fancied that

in parks.
it

sang sweetly when near

death.

Doves are generally bred in

they coo, and are
dovecots
dedicated by the poets to
Venus, whose car they draw.
Pigeons are of the same
family, and the wood-pigeon
;

is

a kind of wild dove.

cioni sono della stessa famiglia.

Il

Il loro

verso tubare.

colombaccio

colombo

il

selvatico,
Il

fagiano, si custodisce ed alleva nelle fagianaie i piccoli

fagianotti, s'ingrassano dando loro a mangiare delle formiche,
FRANCOLINO ha Ic penne va;

Il

riegate, e la cresta gialla,

Il

GALLO ha
un ampia

The pheasant

ants.

The
The
a

Tronfio e

heath-cocJc has variegated

feathers and a yellow crest.

cresta, e porta gli

pettoruto, con la cresta alta.

confined and
;

la testa adorna di

sproni ai piedi.

is

young
bred in preserves
pheasants are fattened on

cock's
fine

spurs.

head

is

adorned with
feet bear

crest; its

Haughty and

pre-

sumptuous, with itscrest aloft,

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

va Intorno, e signoreggia nel

di tempo in tempo
d una chicchiriata, o, come
pollaio

si

Il

231

it walks about, lord of the

poultry-yard, crowing from

time to tune.

suol dire, canta,

GALLO d'India, vien pur detto

Gallinaccio, e Tacchino, ha
rossi e larghi bargigli, striscia
l'ale e fa la

ruota a guisa di

pavone, e grida gi gi allungando il collo.

Il GRIFONE animale biforme e
favoloso, la cui

parte ante-

riore d'aquila con le ale, e

la

posteriore

leone

di

con

quattro piedi,
GRU, o GRUE, volano a stor-

Le

mi una dietro l'altra,

vendo nell'aria varie

descrilettere

The turkey has

large red gills,

wings, and fans
them like a peacock ; it
clucks, stretching out its neck.

trails

The

its

griffon

is

a fabulous bi-

formed animal its foreparts

resemble an eagle with wings,
its hind-part a lion with four
;

feet.

Cranes

fly in

flocks,

one after

the other, describing various

forms and letters in the air.

e figure,

o ibidi, una spezie di

cigogna d'Egitto, che va facendo strage di serpenti, di
cui si ciba. Veniva venerato

L'ibi,

dagli antichi Egiziani,

T/ocA, a chi non nota ? Colla
sua lanugine si riempiono e
formano i soffici piumini le
penne delle sue ale si adoprano per iscrivere,
;

Il

PAVONE ha

collo di serpente,

ale di angelo, voce di diavolo,

e piedi d'andar cheto di ladro,
cosi lo descrisse

il

Sacchetti.

Esso vagheggia la sua occhiuta coda che spiega facendo ruota, e si va pavoneggiando,
Il

PELLICANO

The

ibis is

on which

l'Asia Minore.

pi grosso uc;

campa nelEsso ha nel-

l'inferiore parte del collo

un

it

feeds.

held sacred by the

was
Egyp-

It

tians.

Who

does not know the goose ?

With its down soft cushions
made the feathers of its

are

wings are used

for writing.

The peacock has

the neck of a
angels' wings, the
voice of a demon, and the
stealthy feet of a thief.
Sacchetti describes it thus.
It
admires its own starry tail,
which it displays in a fan,
serpent,

and
il

cello acquatico

a kind of Egyptian

stork, that destroys serpents,

struts proudly about.

The pelican
tic

bird

the largest aqua-

is
it

is

a native of

Asia Minor.
It has in the
lower part of the neck a

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

232

falso esofago, in cui conserva

una parte dei

cibi trangugiati,

ne nutrisce i suoi figliuoli.

Ci ha dato luogo alla favola

ch'egli

si

ferisca

petto col

il

becco, onde nutrirli del suo

sangue. Quindi venne preso
per simbolo dell'amor materno,

La PERNICE ha

gli occhi rossi,

molto scaltra nello sviare

cacciatore dal luogo dove

sono i suoi pcrniciotti.
quantunque vestito
STRUZZO,
Lo
di penne ed abbia ale, ha
il

gambe

come

piedi

quelli

del cammello, ed perci che

da alcuni vien detto struzzo

cammello.
E il pi grande
Si serve

di tutti gli uccelli.

delle ale, che in proporzione

sono corte, a guisa di remi

agitandole mentre corre.
La TORTORA molto simile alla
colomba, ma pi piccola
ha penne bigie essa pure
;

tuba,

pouch, in which it stores some

of its food already swallowed,
This
to feed its young with.

gave

rise to the fable, that it

tore its

own

breast with

beak, and fed

its

blood.

It

this account, as a

symbol of

maternal love.
Hha partridge has red eyes, and
is very cunning in misleading
the sportsmen from its young.

The

ostrich^ although covered

with feathers and having
wings, has legs and feet like
a camel, and has been sometimes called the camel ostrich.

It is the largest of all birds.

It uses its short
oars, flapping

wings like

them while

it

runs.

The

turtle-dove

is

very like the

dove, but smaller, and its

it coos.
feathers are greyish
;

geme,

Dei Pesci.

FiSH.

I pesci vivono nell'acqua

nuo-

si muovono, e sguizzano nell'acqua per mezzo

delle loro pinne per le bran-

tano,

chie respirano

loro ossa

le

chiamano lische. Ci sono

mare e d'acqua dolce,
I TESTACEI, e crostacei hanno

Fish live in water; swim, move,

and dart about in the water,
by means of their tins they
breathe through their gills,
and their bones, in Italian,
;

There are
and fresh-water fish.

si

are called lische.

pesci di

sea-fish

il

its

its young with

was chosen, on

guscio

Le acciughe,

nicchio.
alici, o

sono pesciolini che

sardelle
si

pescano

The

shell-fish are covered with

a shell.
Anchovies and sardines are little
fish caught in the Meditar-

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

colle reti nel Mediterraneo,

si

sogliono conciare in sa-

ranean,

233
and are pickled

in

brine.

lamoia,

L'anguilla

un pesce d'acqua

dolce, a foggia d'angue, con

pelle scivolosa.

Le

anguille

mare son pi grosse, e si

chiamano Gronghi,
Le ARINGHE che si pescano in
di

nell'Oceano,
(ove sogliono passare in infinite frotte ;) per il solito si
salano, o si seccano, e si afcerte

stagioni

The

eel is a fresh- water fish, resembling a serpent, with a

The

slippery skin.

are

larger,

sea eels

and arc called

conger eels.
Herrings, which are caught at
certain seasons in the ocean,
(where they float in immense
shoals,) are generally salted,
dried,

and smoked.

fumicano.
Il

BAccAL

MERLUZZO, sorta

di pesce che viene spaccato,

salato,

disseccato.

Prima

mette in acqua
ad ammollare,

di cuocerlo si

La

BALENA

smisurata

un

pesce

grandezza

di
il

primo della specie de'cetacei.

Si pesca nei mari settentrionali ove
abbonda, onde
l'olio.
I bastimenti
che vanno a questa pesca si
dicono balenieri.
CARPIONE pesce delicatissimo
d'acqua dolce, coperto di
belle scaglie argentine pic-

estrarne

Il

chiettate di rosso.
Il

Ling or stockfish is a kind of

fish which is split, dried, and
Before being dressed,
steeped in water to soften

salted.
it is
it.

The whale

is a fish of gigantic
the chief of the cetaceous species.
It is caught in
the Northern Ocean, where
it abounds, in order to extract the oil.
The vessels

size,

which are engaged in

this

fishery are called whalers.

The carp

is

a very

delicato

fish,

covered

fresh-water

with
silvery
fine
speckled with red.

scales

CEFALO, dai Toscani detto

muggine, pesce che nasce

The

nei fiumi, e quindi entra in

is

mare, ove si pesca in alcuni

luoghi colle reti, in altri
colla fiocina, come nella baia
di Napoli, ove di notte si
vede una quantit di barchette muovere lentamente,
con una gran fiaccola a prua,

thence enters the sea where

it is sometimes caught in nets,
and sometimes with a spear,
as in the bay of Naples, when
a quantity of boats are seen
slowly moving about, with a
great torch fastened at the

mullet, called

cans muggine,

spawned

by the Tus-

is

in

fish

that

rivers,

and

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

234
col

lume

gliano

della quale abba-

che infilzano

pesci,

colla fiocina,
Il

DELFINO va

ed.

in schiera, e salta

fuori dell'acqua.
Il

GAMBERO, ed il GRANCHIO,
sono del genere dei testacei,

La LAMPREDA

UH

delicatis-

simo, bench indigesto pesce

di

mare

prow, with which the fish are

dazzled, and are then spear-

di

fiume

della

The

dolphin swims in slioals,

and jumps out of the water.
The lobster and the crab are
shell fish.

The lamprey

is a very delicate
but indigestible sea and river

fish of the eel species.

specie delle anguille.

LUCCIO un pesce d'acqua

per esser molto
vorace; spesso divora i lucci
pi piccoli. Deve avere circa
sette cento dentini,
La MORENA un pesce del
Mediterraneo, va nei fiumi,
e vive pi giorni fuori d'acqua.
Ha somiglianza con
Il

dolce, noto

l'anguilla,

ma

la pelle

non ha squame,
ha macchie bian-

The pike is a fresh-water fish,

well known for its voracity

it

often devours smaller pikes.

must

It

have

about

700

teeth.

The lamprey
fish, is

i?,

a Mediterranean

found

in

rivers,

days out
resembles the

and

several

lives

water.

It

has no

of
eel,

scales
its skin
spotted white and black.
;

is

che e nericce.
Il

NAUTiLO ha tante cartillagini,

che comparendo a fior d'acqua, pomposamente tutte si
spiegano, rassomigliando ad

una navicella,
L'orata pesce di mare,

le cui

scaglie son del color d'oro,

L'ostrica un mollusco
Il

bi-

valve notissimo,
ROMBO pesce piatto, una
specie di sogliola.

L'aletta

dorsale s'estende dagli occhi

in fino alla coda.
Il

SALAMONE

SERMONE

The

nautilus has so

tilages, that

many

car-

on appearing on

the surface of the water, and

spreading them all, it resembles a little vessel.

The goldfish is a sea fish, and
has gold-coloured scales.
The oyster is a well-known
two-shelled mollusc.
The turbot is a flat fish, of the
its dorsal fin extends from the eyes to the

sole species

tail.

UH

pesce di mare e di fiume, la

cui carne saporitissima.
La SEPPIA CALAMAIO Contiene
in se un certo liquido nero

The salmon
fish

The

is

a sea and river

the flesh

is

exquisite.

c!<<<Ze-^sA, also called in Ita-

lian the Ink-bottle, contains

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

simile

che

all'incliiostro,

getta fuori quando vien cacciato dagli altri pesci, onde

rendersi

invisibile

suoi

ai

a kind of black liquid like

which it discharges when
pursued by other fish, and
ink,

becomes

invisible to its ene-

mies.

nemici,

La SOGLIOLA

distingue per

si

The

sole is

known

for the ir-

l'irregolarit del

suo piatto

regularity of its flat

occhi

ha da un

its

corpo

gli

lato; di rado le pinne eguali,

e

mai

ca

le

due parti della boc-

suol farsela al fondo,

gran pesce di
mare, rimontai fiumi, amando
la sua carne
l'acqua dolce
Con le sue uova
ottima.

Lo STORIONE,

in

salate

botti,

se

ne fa

il

caviale.
Il

235

TONNO

body

eyes are to one side, its

fins are seldom even, and
never the two parts of its
mouth.
It generally lives
at the bottom of the sea.

The

sturgeon, a large sea fish

rivers, liking

which enters

Its flesh is ex-

fresh water.

is made with
eggs salted in casks.
The tunny is the largest eatable
fish
it weighs
sometimes
400 to 1000, and even 2000
pounds, and is very voraci-

cellent.

Caviar

its

il

mangiabile.

pi grosso pesce

Pesa 400

e fino

a 1000, e talora fino a 2000

ed voracissimo,

libbre,

ous.

La TROTA
ne'laghi

se

per lo pi
d'acqua chiara
la fa

guizza due o tre piedi fuori

dell'acqua per acchiappare

The

generally lives in
It leaps
two or three feet out of the
water to catch insects.
ti^out

fresh- water lakes.

insetti,

Insetti,

Insects.

L'ape, ola pecchia, nota per

la sua industria nel fare il

mele

e la cera.

alveario regna

Neil' arnia

suprema

la

regina sopra circa qundici o

trenta mila api operaie.
Le
api pungono con un pungiglione vanno a sciami, ronzando per l'aria, e dai fiori
traggono il pi squisito ali;

mento.

The bee

is

remarked

for its in-

dustry in making was and

honey.
In the bee-hive the
queen reigns supreme over
about 15,000 or
30,000

working

bees.

Bees sting

with a sting they fly buzzing about in swarms, and

extract from flowers the most
;

exquisite food.

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

236
II

BACO DA SETA, O FILUGELLO,

quando s'incrisalida, s'inviluppa in un involucro tessuto
da se. Si nutrisce di foglie
di gelso,
abbonda in Lombardia,

The

silk-worm, in becoming a
up in a
covering of silk which

chrysalis, rolls itself

little

spins.
They are fed on
mulberry leaves, and are
kept in great quantities in
it

Lombardy.
Il

ERUCO

s'incrisalida, sfarfalla,

Eode

e diventa farfalla.

verdura,

suol

guasti agli

far

The

becomes a
and bursts out a

caterpillar

la

chrysalis,

gran

butterfly.

It

eats

leaves,

and commits great ravages

orti,

in the kitchen garden.

CALABRONE

Il

Una Specie

di

grossa vespa, armato di gagliardo pungiglione, e ronza

The hornet

is a large kind of
wasp, with a sting, and
buzzes loudly.

fortemente.

La CAVALLETTA, O LOCUSTA,
di varii colori e

ha

le

gambe

grandezze
le

ale pi

lunghe di quelle del grillo.

E molto vorace, e volando a
schiere fa guasti infiniti,

La

CICALA, nel bollor dell'essuo roco stridere,

tate, col

molto infesta

all'udito.

La FARFALLA

nascc dal vorace

bruco, il quale si trasforma in
crisalide, e poi sviluppandosi,
si spoglia del suo involucro,
e fuori se n' esce con ale variopinte, la leggiadra farfalla,
la quale va scherzando fra i

suggendone il mellifluo
Secondo i poeti,
umore.
l'emblema dell'anima,
fiori,

The

locust

a torto o a ragione,
vien reputata l'insetto il pii
industrioso, infaticabile, ed
accorto.

Le

differenti Fj)ecie

si

of various sizes
;

cricket.
It is very
and a swarm commits the greatest ravages.
The grasshopper, in the heat
of summer, with its sharp
note irritates the ear.
The butterfly springs from the
which,
greedy caterpillar,
after being transformed into
a chrysalis, becomes developed, and, bursting from its
covering, flies forth a beautimanyful butterfly, with
coloured wings, which sports
amidst flowers, extracting
their honeyed juice. According to the poets, the butter-

of the

voracious,

fly is the

La FORMICA,

is

and colours
its legs and
wings are longer than those

The ant

is

emblem

of the soul.

considered, falsely

or with reason, the most industrious, indefatigable,

prudent of insects.

The

and
dif-

THRASES AND DIALOGUES.

muovono

la guerra reciprocamente, e si battono accanitamente,

Il GRILLO stride e salterella, e
si

diletta nel calore del foco-

lare,

La LUCCIOLA
che

un vermicello,

buio sfolgora pi o
meno, secondo che apre o
chiude le sue alette. Ce ne
sono pure senza ale,
al

La MOSCA,
mili
ria,

il

MOSCHERixo,

e si-

vanno ronzando per

dandoci

tutti

l'a-

molta noia

col cacciarsi negli occhi, in

237

ferent families go to

war with

one another, and fight with

great desperation.
The cricket chirps and hops,
and likes the heat of the
hearth.
The glow-worm is a little worm,

which shines more or

less in

the dark, in proportion as it

opens its wings. Some have
no wings.
The fly buzzes about in the air,

annoying us

all,

by flying

our eyes, mouth, and

into

throat.

bocca, in gola,
Il

ARAGXO, con mira-

RAGNO,
bile

industria,

tesse

suo

il

Ttie spider, with wonderful industry, spins

ragnatelo, per prendere altri

little

animaletti, e cibarsene,

feeds.

La SANGUISUGA,

MIGNATTA,

s'applica al corpo per succhi-

The

its

insects,

leech

is

web

on

to catch

which

it

put on the body to

extract unhealthy blood.

arne cattivo sangue,

Flowers.

Fiori,

L'amaranto

un

fioretto au-

tunnale di un color porporino,

L'anemone

un bellissimo

che nasce da bulbo

fiore

di

porporino o piuttosto
variato di pi colori. I poeti
fingono che l'anemone nascolor

cesse dal sangue di

Adone,

ucciso dal cinghiale,

La balsamina
estivo,

un vago fiore
bench inodorifero,

di vivacissimi colori.
gJTiaria delle Indie,

ori-

The amaranth

an autumnal

is

flower of a purple hue.

anemone is a beautiful

little

The

bulbous flower it is purple,

or rather variegated with several colours.
Poets have
;

fancied

that

the

anemone

sprang from the blood of

Adonis, who was killed by a
wild boar.
The balsam is a pretty summer
its coflower, but scentless
lours are very brilliant, and
it comes from India.
;

PHRASES ANO DIALOGUKS.

238

LacAMPANELLATURCHiNA cresce
spontanea nei campi e

si;

per

The

grows wild

blue-bell

fields

and on

in

hills.

le colline,
Il

CONVOL VOLVO

VILUCCHIO

SI

avvolge intorno alle altre

piante
il suo lungo fusto
coperto di fiori di varii co;

The convolvulus twines round

the other plants near

long stem

it

its

covered with

is

flowers of various colours.

lori,

ha

L'eliotropio

gentilissimi

che danno

fiorellini bianchi,

in turchino
Il

sa di vainiglia,

altri di viole

gli

ed

la

and smells

white blossoms
like vanilla.

fioraliso un fior campestre

che cresce fra i grani
e
bianco e azzurro,
GAROFOLO pu chiamarsi il re
dei fiori pel suo odore, come
la rosa vien detta la regina
per la sua bellezza. Gli uni
sanno di chiodi di garofano,
;

Il

The heliotrope has pretty bluish-

forma

colori di questo fiore sono

The

corn-flower is a wild flower

it
that grows in corn fields
;

white and blue.

The carnation may be called the
king of flowers for its scent,
is

queen
some smell of
some of violets the
shape and colours of this
as the rose is called the
for its

beauty

cloves,

flower are beautiful.

vaghissimi,
Il

GERANIO
quale
le

si

il

II

stima

la

giardini e

rosato mette fiori

pi vivo scarlatto
muschiato vulner-

tinti del
si

una pianta con

adornano

sale,

il

GIACINTO nasce dal bulbo i

sono bellissimi scempi o
;

fiori

doppi,

turchini,

bianchi,

Il

the scarlet gera-

nium has bright scarlet flowers, the musk geranium is

medicinal.

The hyacinth is a bulbous plant,

with beautiful flowers, either
single or double, blue, white,

GIGLIO d'odore acuto ma

soave, maestoso fiorisce sul
suo lungo fusto, ed l'orgo-

The

glio del giardino.

long stem, and is the pride of

the garden.
The sun-flower is so called from
always turning towards the

GIRASOLE vien cos appellato

volgendosi ognora verso il
LEUCOio

lily has a
strong scent
;

pleasing but
flowers ma-

it

jestically at the

summit

of its

sun.

sole.
Il

and rooms

and yellow.

gialli.

Il

The geranium adorns gardens

scempio o doppio,

The

stock gillyflower

is

simple

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

fior vengono a ciocche, ed
hanno un soave odore,
i

or

239

double

the flowers are

and have a sweet

clustered,

smell.

La MARGHERITINA
ha

rosa,

PRATELLINA

bianchi tinti di
nasce spontanea nei

fiori

The

daisy, with its white and

pink-tipped blossoms, grows
wild in fields.

campi;
Il

MIRTO

la

MORTELLA

Un

arboscello sempre verde, che

ha

bianchi ed odore grato.

Gli antichi lo dedicarono
a Venere, quindi vien riguardato qual simbolo dell'amore,
Il

fiori

MUGHETTO ha
fioretti

gentilissimi

bianchi e campani-

The myrtle

is an evergreen,
with white blossoms and a
sweet smell.
The ancients
dedicated this plant to Venus,

and it was considered the

symbol of love.

The

lily of the valley has pretty

white bell-shaped flowers.

formi.

L'orecchio d'orso, pianta Alpina che comparisce in Italia nel mese di Febbraio
le
fronde della doppia pianta
sono vellutate, ve ne sono di
;

pi specie,
Il

auricula is an Alpine plant

which, in Italy, buds in February
the leaves of the
double auricula are velvety,
;

and there are several kinds

of

papavero BIANCO contiene

un latte il quale l'oppio di
prima qualit.

it.

The white poppy

milky

juice,

bella,

di

ha

spine

il
;

The

rose,

though

beautiful, has

the stem covered with thorns;

bottoni chiusi da prima, sboc-

the rosebuds, at

ciano in bellissime rose spiranti un soavissimo profumo.

Vi sono le rose damaschine,
d'ogni mese, le cinnamomo,
le muscose, le canine, &c.

open into

TULIPANO, bench inodorifero,

un vago

vivacissimi.

fiore di colori

tulipani

co-

perti di fiori vaghi, sono belli

a vedere.
spira intorno

a se un profumo squisito, e
il

first

closed,

blossomed flowers, breathing a sweet scent.

There are damask, monthly,
cinnamon, and dog roses.

The
is

tulip,

full

although scentless,

a pretty brilliant-coloured

Tulip-beds, covered
with these flowers, look very
flower.

pretty.

La modesta viola
riceve

contains a
is
the

which

strongest kind of opium.

La ROSA, bench
gambo coperto

Il

The

suo

nome

dal bel

The modest

little violet difi"uses

around itself an exquisite perits name from

fume, and takes

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

240

colore violetto dei suoi vaghi

the violet colour of

fioretti,

flowers.

DrALOGIII,

Oh

buon giorno

ella

giunge

Ah,

zione con noi,

sono

gi due ore che ho fatto colase

me

Dialogues.
you are
good morning
;

us.

La ringrazioinfiiiitamente;

ma

sweet

just in time to breakfast with

proprio in punto per far cola-

zione,

its

lo permette,

bever una tazza di

Come stanno i suoi ?

Non benissimo, chi

caff.

infred-

ha mal di testa, chi

mal di gola, ed io ho sofferto
di mal di denti per alcuni
dato, chi

Many

thanks, I have

two hours ago

break-

but if
you will allow me, I will take
a cup of coffee.
How are you all at home ?
Not very well some have colds,
some headaches, some sore
throats, and I have had for
some days severe toothache.
fasted

giorni,

meno ella ha buona

ed ho caro di vedere
pu
uscire.
che
Oggi fa cos bel tempo, che

Non

di

You

che lo possono,
dovrebbero fare una passegtutti quelli

look very

well notwith-

am

standing, and I

cera,

glad to

you can go out.

To-day is so fine, every one
should take a walk who can.
see

giata,

Mi

stamattina
di
credeva
buon'ora che sarebbe piovuto,
ma poi s' rischiarato, ed ora
fa

un tempo magnifico.

Mangi un bocconcino
posso

uova

delle

della

carne

fredda, delle conserve, del

t,

it was going to rain

morning early, but it
and now the weather

thought
this

cleared,
is

che cosa

ecco

offrirle ?

fresche,

glorious.

what will you

take? here are fresh eggs,
cold meat, preserves, tea and

Eat something

coffee.

e del caff.

Per farle compagnia, prender

un poco di pollo freddo, una
fettina di presciutto, ed un
bicchier d'acqua,

Vuole averla bont di passarmi

i crostini ed il butirro.
TI
servo ha dimenticato i cucchiai ed

il

sale.

To keep you company,

take a
of

little

I will

cold fowl, a slice

ham, and a glass of cold

water.
I will trouble

and

butter.

you

for the toast

The

servant has

forgotten spoons and salt.

niRASKS AND DIALOGUES.

Abbia

compiacenza

la

eli

suo-

Be

211

so kind as to ring.

nare,

Mariuccia cosa vuoi per cola-

Little

un panino,
volentieri nella nuova

latte caldo ed

Come

sta

casa ?

Spero che sia comoda e convenga alla sua famiglia ?

Non molto, non vi sono abbastanza camere, e il pian terreno malamente disposto.
Le sale di ricevimento mi son
sembrate assai belle, special;

mente

Ha

il

salone,

ma

ragione,

mente

Mary, what

will

you take

for breakfast ?

zione ?

Del

tutti

disgraziata-

Some warm milk and a

roll.

How

do you like your new

house ?
I hope it is comfortable, and
suits your family ?
Not very well there are too
and the
few bed-rooms,
ground-floor is badly laid out.
The public rooms seemed to me
very handsome, particularly
the drawing-room.
Yes, you are right but unfor;

cammini fanno

tunately

all

the

chimneys

fumo, e la cucina estremamente umida.

Vi il gaz in tutte le stanze ?

smoke, and the kitchen is extremely damp.

Are all the rooms lighted with

Non vi in nessuna,
Come si chiama il suo padrone

None

gas?

di

is

your landlord's name

casa?

detto il suo nome, ma

ora non me lo ricordo,
proposito, son venuto oggi ad

Mi ha

of them.

What

He

Natale,
portato questi giocattoli per
i fanciulli
non sono ancora
;

the bye, I came to-day to

all a happy New
Year and a merry Christmas.

mezzo

tutti

alle

sette e

nell'inverno, e alle sei

I ragazzi saranno

ben contenti

have brought these toys

for

ones

up

the

little

We

all rise

in winter,

di presentarle

mio intimo amico,

The

are they

at half- past seven

and at

six in

sum-

children will be delighted

with your

de' suoi regali.

C-,

mer.

nell'estate,

Mi permetta

wish you

yet?

alzati ?

Ci leviamo

By

augurare a tutti loro un felice

Capo d'anno, ed un allegro

Ho

me his name, but

have forgotten it.

has told

now

il

un

Signor

gifts.

Allow me to introduce to you

an intimate friend of mine,
Mr. C.

212

Ho

PIIUASES

AND DIALOGUES.

niolto caro di far la sua co-

noscenza, e spero che

dremo

ci

ve-

spesso,

Ella molto cortese,

E questa la prima volta cb'ella
viene in Londra ?
No, vi ho dimorato per molto

tempo prima

di andare nelle

am

very happy to make your

acquaintance, and I hope we
shall see one another often.
You are very kind.
Is this the first time you have

been in London ?
No, I lived here a long time
before going to India.

Indie,

Come

le piaceva il modo di vivere in India ?

Passabilmente
per il clima
;

non mi

Ha
S,

si

confaceva.

l'intenzione di ritornarvi?

ma fra cinque o
anni spero di potermi stabilire in Europa,
mio amico va a passare un
poco di tempo in Dublino, e
le sarei molto tenuto, se ella
potesse favorirgli alcune letfra poco,

sei

Il

tutto

il

piacere

did you like Indian

in

My

Europe.

friend

is

going to spend a

short time in Dublin, and I

would feel much obliged by

your giving him a few

mi

dis-

Most willingly

letters

that

migliori amici

are just

trovino ora

but I regret

many of my best friends

now out of Ireland.

piace per che molti dei miei

si

life ?

of introduction.

tere d'introduzione.

Con

How

Pretty well
but the climate
did not agree with me.
Do you intend to return thither?
Yes, shortly but in five or six
years I shall be able to settle

fuori d'Irlanda,

Ci non fa niente, una o due

conoscenze bastano perch ne
faccia molte altre.
Ella pu star certo che io far
di tutto per servirla,

That does not signify, one or

two acquaintances will introduce him to many more.

It is time

tempo di uscire,
Dove vanno ?
Andiamo a fare una passeggiata
a cavallo prima di pranzo.

Faccia i miei
complimenti alla sua signora
madre.
Ho appunto preso in affitto una
rivederci.

You may
do

Where

We

rely on me, that I will

all I

can to obl'ge you.

we were going.

are you going ?

are going to

before

dinner.

remember me

I have just

take a ride

Good-bye

your mother.

taken an unfurnished

casa smobigliata, ed ora bi-

house, and

sogna che l'ammobigli,

nish

it.

to

now

must

fur-

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

La

pigione molto cara,

non vuole
tarla per meno,

proprietario

ma

il

243

The

rent is very high, but the

landlord will not let it for

affit-

less.

Bisogna che trovi un bell'apammobigiiato,

partamento
per un amico che deve ar-

want

am

to find a nice furnished

lodging for a friend, who is
coming to town this week.

rivare in citt questa setti-

mana,
sa male

Mi

non potere

di

assis-

tervi nelle vostre ricerche,

Ecco

in

una casa che ha un

cartello d'appigionasi,

Le

bill.

mi fanno, e la
casa non mi va a

stanze non

padrona

di

sorry I cannot assist you

your search.
is a house with a lodging

There
I

do not like the rooms, or the

landlady.

genio.

Dove dimorate

Where

adesso ?

Sto a casa di mio fratello, ma

siccome ho intenzione di fermarmi qui per qualche tempo,
bisogna che prenda casa.

Facciamo una partita

chi o a dama.

Non

agli scac-

giuoco n all'uno n

al-

you living now

are

am

staying at my brother's,
but as I think of settling
here for some time, I must
take a house.
Let us have a game of chess or
draughts.
I do not play either.
I

l'altro,

Giuocate mai alle carte

Molto di rado,
Suonate il pianoforte ?

Do you

Quando

io era in Italia mi divertiva a suonarlo, ma ora

son fuori d'esercizio,
I ragazzi sono stati tutta la
mattina in giardino a ruzzare,
ora chiamateli a merenda,

ever play cards

Very seldom.
Do you play the piano ?
When I was in Italy I used

now

play, but

am

to

out of

practice.

The

children have been playing

the morning in the gar-

all

den

them

call

in

now

to

lunch.
Siete disposto a venire a
delle visite

Molto

ftir

meco oggi?

purch siamo
di ritorno prima delle cinque.
volentieri,

Andremo

in citt in legno, e se

Are you inclined

visits

pay some

with me to-day ?
provided we

Certainly,

home by

We

to

shall

are

five.

drive to town, and

are not tired, wo

we

non saremo stanchi, possiamo

then, if

ritornare a piedi,

may walk

back.

niRASES AND DIALOGUES.

244
Facciamo un

Let US take a turn

meadow.

giro sui prati,

Fate attenzione ai vostri affari,

Non badate a ci che dicono,

the

in

Pay attention to your business.

Pay no attention to what they
say, they are jesting.

essi sclierzano,

Ci fecero ogni attenzione immaginabile, e non vollero

permettere che
restassimo

They

paid us every possible

and would not allow
us to remain at the hotel.
attention,

alla locanda.

Siate

pivi

rispettoso

verso

le

Pay

persone attempate,

Questo cammeo mi costa cinque

lire
quanto avete pagato il

have paid

proposito

mi

stato

re-

d'Italia,

ella

sa

che ho cominciato a prender

lezione d'Italiano, ella che
lo conosce a fondo potrebbe
assistermi in questo studio.
Ben volentieri, se lo vuole d'ora
innanzi parleremo sempre in
questa dolce lingua, e possiamo pure leggere insieme
un qualche poeta Italiano,
Mi si dice che la poesia sia
molto difficile, ed io che non
sono che un principiante
bisogna che resti alla prosa.
Vorrebbe dirmi i differenti
modi di rendere in Italiano
la parola /a?V.^
E perch no. Faccia attenzione
alle seguenti frasi, ed ella
imparer a tradurla in tutti,
quasi tutti i suoi varii
significati

Una
Una
I

aged

to

five

pounds
;

for this

how much

did you pay for yours?

galato,

respect

cameo brooch

vostro ?
Nulla, poich

more

people.

Nothing, because it was made

a present to me.
Apropos, you know I have

begun to take Italian lessons,

you who know Italian perfectly might help me in my
studies.

With
we

all

If

you like
always

speak that sweet language,

and we can read together

some of the Italian

I believe Italian

poets.

poetry

is

very

and as I am only
a beginner, I must content
Could
myself with prose.
you tell me the different
ways of expressing in Italian
the word /afr.^
difficult,

With

pleasure.

Pay

attention

to the following phrases,

you

will learn

how

hela signora.

carnagione bianca^

A fair

fair lady.

Fair

complexion.

hair.

and

to trans-

the word in
various significations
late

capelli biondi.

my heart.

shall henceforth

all
:

its

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

Un

prezzo giusto,

Questa

quando

parola,

ha

sostantivo,

un

fair price.

When

it is

a substantive, this

word means a market, and

significa-

la

245

di mercato, e corrisponde alla parola Italiana

zione

in Italian

is

fiera.

fiera,

La

ringrazio infinitamente, e
cercher di trar profitto dai
di lei cortesi schiarimenti.
Bisogna che la lasci per
adesso, a rivederci a questa

Many

thanks; I will try and

by your kind explanaI must leave you now,
so good-bye till this evening.

profit
tion.

sera,

ella Inglese ?

Is

England your native country?

Son nato

Germania, e

alle-

vato in Francia,
Sta ella pi volentieri in

citt,

in

in

campagna

or country ?

Se potessi seguire
starei

il

l'inverno

mio gusto,
in

citt,

campagna.
chiederle un favore,

l'estate in

Ho

da

vuol'ella accordarmelo ?

Che me lo
in mio

was born in Germany, and

brought up in France.
Which do you like best, town

dica prima, e se sar

potere,

non

glielo

If I could

gli stivali grossi

vestirmi per
vestito

si

il

onde

pranzo.

metter oggi

want you
Paris

ieri

la

to

take

me

when you next

to

go

there.

She has taken a fancy to dress

always in mourning.
Why do you wear such light
boots ? you will get cold.
off my strong
boots
before dressing for
dinner.
What dress will you wear to-

have just taken

day
Quello che ha riportato
modista,

taste,

so.

che ella mi conducesse seco a Parigi la

prima volta che vi andr,
L' saltato il grillo di vestire
sempre a bruno,
Perch porta degli stivali cosi
sottili? ella prender un'infreddatura,
Mi son cavato in questo mo-

Che

my

ricuser certo,

Desidererei

mento

follow

would live in town in winter,

and in the country in summer.
I have a favour to ask you, will
you grant it ?
Let me hear it first I will not
refuse it if I can help doing

The

one the milliner

brought back yesterday.

lias

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

246
Portami

my

il

ven-

Bring me

meco

tutti

I cannot carry all these parcels,

guanti ed

gloves and fan.

taglio,

Non

portar

posso

involti, bisogna che

mandiate,
bere un poco di vino

you must send them.

questi

me

li

Vuol
prima di uscire ?
Ho bevuto una tazza

Non

stanco, e

siete

di caff,

non avete

sonno dopoaver tanto ballato?

Un poco, pure devo scrivere
una lettera prima di andare
a letto,
Ho corso un gran pericolo
oggi il cavallo mi ha levato
la mano, e son caduto.
Spero che non vi siate fatto
alcun male ?
]\Ii son fatto molto male ad un
braccio, e un poco ad un

Will you take some wine before

going out ?
I have taken a cup of coffee.
Are you not tired and sleepy,
after having danced so much?
Rather, but I must write a
letter before I go to bed.
I

have had a narrow escape today

my horse ran away,
and I fell.
hope you are not hurt ?
;

hurt

my

my arm

severely,

and

foot a little.

piede.

Ho

gran fame,
Tanto meglio;

in

stay and
dine with us.
Sit down in the arm-chair.
Lie down on the sofa.
Do not stand on ceremony.
I am overjoyed to see you again

di

When

a pranzo

con noi.
Si accomodi sulla poltrona,
Si adagi sul canap,

Non

Ho

faccia ceremonie.

gran piacere di vederla

buona

Francia

ella

good health.
did you return
France ?

in

salute.

Quando

am very hungry.
So much the better

I
resti

ritornata

Io tornai sabato passato,

Che le sembra di quel paese

from

I returned last Saturday.

?

Bisogna essere senza parzialit,

la Francia un bellissimo

What

do you think of that

country ?
To be impartial, France is a
very fine country.

paese,

che dice dei Francesi

And what do you

cortesi

They

French

Sono

molto

verso

civili

forestieri,

say of the

are extremely civil and

polite to foreigners.

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

In qua! parte della Francia
ella stata ?

Sono

stato tutto

tempo

il

in

going thither I passed

through Normandy, and on
my return, through Picardy.

Parigi
nell'andarvi sono
passato per la Normandia,
e al mio ritorno, per la
Piccardia,

in

Si vede che

giorni cominciano

The days begin

a scorciare,

to shorten per-

ceptibly.

segno che saremo ben presto

alla fine delle belle giornate,

Kon sempre

247

In what part of France have

you been ?
I was all the time in Paris

abbiamo

noi

qualche volta l'estate in

autunno, e l'inverno nella
primavera,

pai^TED

II

y OMVEl!

is a sign that we shall soon

be at the end of the fine days.
Not always; we sometimes have
summer in autumn, and
winter in spring.

It

AND BOYD, EDINBURGH.

EDUCATIONAL WORKS
PUBLISHED BY

Oliver and Boyd, Edinburgh;

BOLD ALSO BY

SIMPKIN, MARSHALL,

AND

CO..

LONDON.

12
White's History of France
Great Britaiu and Ireland.l2
13
Sacred History
12
History of Scotland
13
History of Kome

Surenne's

New French

Dialogues... 19
19

French Classics
Liatin

and Greek.

Ainsworth's Latin Dictionary

22
24
Clyde's Greek Syntax
21
Rudiments of the Latin
Language
22
Dymock's Caesar and Sallust
22
Edin. Academy Class-Books:
Rudiments of Latin Language.. ..21
Latin Delectus
21, 24
Rudiments of Greek Language... 21
Greek Extracts
21
Ferguson's (Prof.) Gram. Exercises.24
Latin Delectus
24
Ovid's Metamorphoses .24
Fergusson's (Dr) Xenophon's Anabasis
23
Homer's Iliad, with Vocab...23
Geddes' (Prof.) Greek Grammar
21
Greek Testament, by Duncan
23
Hunter's Ruddiman's Rudiments... 22
Sallust, Virgil, and Horace. .22
Livy, Books 21 to 25
22
M'Dowall's Csesar and Virgil
22
Melville's Lectiones Selectas
22
Ogilvie's First Latin Course
22
Stewart's Cornelius Nepos
23
First Greek Course
23
Advanced Greek Course.23
Cicero's Orationes Select

Writing, Arithmetic, eto.

15
Gray's Arithmetic
15
Hutton's Book-keeping
Ingram's Principles of Arithmetic..l5
16
Maclaren's Arithmetic

Book-keeping

16
15
16
Copy Lines
16
Smith's Arithmetical Works
14
15
Stewart's Arithmetical Works
Trotter's Arithmetical Work8...14, 16
New Code Arithmetic
14
Hutton's Book-keeping... 15

Melrose's Arithmetic

Scott's Arithmetical

Works

Philosophy, Mathematics,

eto.

Barclay's Geometry for Schools

16
Ingram's System of Mathematics... 16
Trotter's Key to do
16
Schwegler's Philosophy
16
Stirling's Text-Book to Kant
16

French.
Beljame's French Grammar, etc... 20
Caron's First French Class-Book...20
First French Reading-Book.20
20
French Grammar
20
Chamhaud's Fahles Choisies
20
Christison's French Grammar
Choisis
20
Fables et Contes
Fleuiy's History of Frauce..20
20
French New Testament
20
Hallard's French Grammar
Schneider's First French Course. ...

Conversation-Grammar
French Reader
French Manual
crin Littraire
French Composition
Surenne'B Dictiouanes..

ItaUan.

Lemmi's

Italian

Grammar

24

German.
Fischart's First Class-Book
24
Reader in Prose and Verse. .24

School Registers.
Pupil's Daily Register of Marks
17
school Register of Attendance,

Absence, and Fees

17

Geometrical Drawing.
Kennedy's Grade Geometry

16

EDUCATIONAL WORKS.
ENGLISH BEADING, GRAMMAR,

Eto.

In the initiatory department of instruction a valuable series of works was

prepared by Dr M'Cuiloch, formerly Head Master of the Circus Place School,
Edinburgh, afterwards Minister of the West Church, Greenock.

DB M'CULLOCH'S SERIES OF CLASS-BOOKS.

These Books are intended

for the use of Schools where the general mental

culture of the pupil, as well as his proficiency in the art of reading, is studiously

and systematically aimed at.

They form, collectively, a progressional Series, so constructed and graduated
as to conduct the pupil, by regular stages, from the elementary sounds of the
language to its highest and most complex forms of speech and each separate
Book is also progressively arranged, the lessons which are more easily read
and understood always taking the lead, and preparing the way for those of
greater difficulty.
The subject-matter of the Books is purposely miscellaneous. Yet it is
always of a character to excite the interest and enlarge the knowledge of the
reader. And with the design of more effectually promoting his mental growth
and nurture, the various topics are introduced in an order conformaiile to that
in which the chief faculties of the juvenile mind are usually developed.
That the moral feelings of the pupil may not be without their proper
stimulus and nutriment, the lessons are pervaded throughout by the religious
;

and Christian element.

DR M'CULLOCH'S READING-BOOKS FOR

First Reading-Book.
Do.

Large

SCHOOLS.

l^d.
Type, Edition, in tvfo Parta, price 2d. each.

Second Reading-Book.

3d.

Third Reading-Book, containing simple Pieces in Prose

and Verse, with Exercises. Now Printed in Larger Type. lOd.

Fourth Reading-Book,
interest.

containing only Lessons likely to

With Synopsis of Spelling.

Is.

Series of Lessons in Prose and Verse.

Course of Elementary Reading

in

ATDBE, compiled from popular Writers.

Manual

of English

Grammar,

6d.

2s.

Science and Liter

39 Woodcuts.

3s.

Philosophical and

Pracwith Exerciaes; adapted to the Analytical mode of Tnition.

With a Chapter on Analysis of Sentences, la. 6d.

tical,

English Reading^ Grammar,

Lennie's Principles of English

I

etc.

Grammar.

Comprising

the Substance of all the most approved English Grammars, briefly

defined, and neatly arranged; with Copious Exercises in Parsing
and Syntax. Gopynght Edition ; with the Author's latest improvements, and a Chapter on Analysis of Sentences. Is. 6d.

The Author's Key

containing, besides the corrected ExerParsing and Syntax, many useful Critical Remarks, Hints,
and Observations, and explicit and detailed instructions as to the
;

cises in

best

method of teaching Grammar.

New

Edition.

3s. 6d.

Analysis of Sentences: Being the Appendix

Grammar adapted for General Use. Price 3d. Ket,

The Principles

of English

Grammar

to Lennie's
6d.

with a Series of

Progressive Exercises, and a Supplementary Treatise on Analysis

of Sentences. By Dr James Douglas, lately Teacher of English,

Great King Street, Edinburgh.

Is. Cd.

Simplicity of expression and methodical arrangement have been nnlfoimly aimed at; and copious exercises for the practice of pupils have been
introduced throughout.

for Junior Classes,

Printed in larger type, and containing a Supplementary Treatise on
Analysis of Sentences. 6d.

Douglas's Initiatory Grammar,

The Bead Master, Belie Vue House, Bristol." It contains the best and tersest
explanations for learners that have appeared."
The Head Master, Milton House Academy, Lewes. "The Initiatory Grammar
is an especial favourite with my junior boys."

Douglas's Progressive English Reader.

English Reading-Books.
numerous Engravings.
First Book.
Second Book.

2d.
4d.

Series of
The Earlier Books are illustrated with

Thibd Book.

Is.

Fourth Book.

Is. 6d.

Fifth Book.
Sixth Book.

2s.
2s. 6d.

Douglas's Selections for Recitation, with Introductory

and Explanatory Notes;

for Schools.

Is. 6d.

Douglas's Spelling and Dictation Exercises.

Athenceum."
nunciation

may

Douglas's English Etymology:

tives,

with numerous Exercises.

Scotsman."

Price

Is.

good practical book, from which correct spelling and probe acquired."

An

Price

Text-Book of Deriva-

2s.

especially excellent book of derivatives."

English Reading,

Grammar,

etc.

Outlines of English Grammar and Analysis, for

Elementary Schools, with Exercises.
By Walter Scott
Dalgleish, M.A. Edin.,
International College.

lately one of the Masters in the

Key,

6d., or 8d. cloth.

Grammar,

Dalgleish's Progressive English

cises.
2s.
Key, 2s. 6d.

London

Is.

with Exer-

From Dr Joseph Boswobth, Professor of Anglo-Saxon

in the University of
Oxford; Author of the Anglo-Saxon Dictionary, etc., etc.
" Quite a practical work, and contains a vast quantity of important information, well arranged, and brought up to the present improved state of philology.
I have never seen so much matter brought together In so short a space."

Dalgleish's Grammatical Analysis, with

Exercises. 9d. Key, 2s.

Progressive

Dalgleish's Outlines of English Composition,

Elementary Schools, with Exercises. 6d. Key, 4d.
Dalgleish's

Introductory

COMPOSITION,

based on

Text-Book

Grammatical Synthesis;

Sentences, Paragraphs, and Short Essays.

Dalgleish's

POSITION,
2s.

for

English

of

containing

Is.

Advanced Text-Book of English Comtreating of Style, Prose

2s. 6d.

Themes, and

Both Books bound together,

Key,

Versification.

2s. 6d.

Lamb's Tales from Shakespeare.

Oliver and Boyd's

School Edition.

Beautifully Illustrated.
Adapted for the New Code.

Is.

Robinson Crusoe (Oliver and Boyd's School Edition). BeauAdapted for the New Code. Is.
tifully Illustrated.
The Child's Story Book, for Junior Cl.\sses. Illustrated.
A series of favourite Tales, including, besides other stories, Cinderand the Bean Stalk, The Babes in the Wood, Tom
Thumb, Sinbad the Sailor, Ali Bab and the Forty Thieves,
Jack the Giant-Killer, Aladdin, etc., etc. Adapted for the

ella, Jack

New

Code.

Is.

Dictionary of the English Language,

containing

the Pronunciation, Etymology, and Explanation of all Words

authorized by Eminent Writers. To which are added, .a Vocabulary
of the lioots of English Words, and an accented list of Greek, Latin,
and Scripture Proper Names. By Alexander Reid, LL.D., late
Head Master of the Edinburgh Institution. Reduced to 2s 6d.

Dr Reid's Rudiments

of English

Grammar.

Greatly

Improved. This book is concise, simple, and of easy application.

Copious Exercises have been introduced throughout; together with
a new Chapter on the Analysis of Sentences. 6d.

English Reading, Grammar,

etc.

Dr Eeid's Rudiments of English Composition.

Copious Exercises.

Remodelled.

2s.

Key,

With

2s. (>d.

The work now includes Systematic Exercises in Sentence-making.

distinct division has been devoted to the Structure of Paragraphs. The
sections on Descriptive and Narrative Essays have been entirely rewritten.

History of English Literature with an Outline of the

Origin and Growth of the English Language. Illu.strated by
Extracts. For Schools and Private Students. By Professor
;

Spalding.

Revised and continued.

3s. 6d.

Tlie wliole work has undergone thorough and careful revision. The chapters
on the Language, and those on our Early Literature, have been brought into
harmony with the results of recent philological and historical investigations;
while the record of events has been brought down to the present time. A few
explanatory notes have been added in an Appendix, with the view of removing
the difficulties which recondite allusions and illustrations are apt to cast in
the path of the young student.

in Composition: a Text-book for Arlvanced

By David Pryde, M.A., LL.D., Head Master of the
Classes.
Edinburgh Merchant Company's Educational Institution for Young

Studies

Ladies.

2s.

English Composition for the Use of Schools.

By

PiOBERT Armstrong, LL.D., Madras College, St Andrews; and

Thomas Armstrong, Heriot Foundation School, Edinburgh. Part
I., Is. 6d.
Part II., 2s. Both Parts bound together, 3s. Key, 2s.

Armstrong's English Etymology.

2s.

Armstrong's Etymology for Junior Classes,

4d.

Etymological Guide to the English Language.

This is a collection, alphabetically arranged, of the principal
and prefixes, with their derivatives and compounds.

Old

Testament

Biography,

containing

Is. 6d.

roots, affixes,

notices

of the

chief persons in Holy Scripture, in the form of Questions, with

references to Scripture for the Answers. 6d.

New

Testament Biography, in the form of Questions,

with references to Scripture for the Answers, on the same plan as
the preceding.

6d.

Grammar,

English Beading,

etc.

STANDARD EEADING-BOOKS.
M.A., D.Sc, Principal of Newton Place Establishment,
Glasgow, formerly English Master, George Watson's College School,
Edinburgh, one of the Educational Institutions of the Merchant Company.

By James Colvillb,

Primer: being
to

Standard

I,

Spelling and Reading Lessons Introductory

36 pages.

(Illustrated.)

First Standard Eeading-Book

Script.

(Illustrated.)

95 pages.

IJd.

with

Easy Lessons

Second Standard Eeading-Book with Dictation

;

(Illustrated.)

partly in Script.

108 pages.

Third Standard Eeading-Book

4d.,

Fourth Standard Eeading-Book; with

216 pages, strongly bound.

8d.

Dictation Exercises.

Is. 3d.

Fifth Standard Eeading-Book

300 pages, strongly bound.

with Dictation Exercises.

Is. 6d.

Sixth Standard Eeading-Book

with Biographical Notes,

and Outlines for Exercises in Composition.

bound.

Glasgow

2s.

Exercises,

or 6d. cloth.

with Dictation Exercises,

144 pages, strongly bound.

partly in Script.

in

4d. in stiff wrapper, or 6d. cloth.

394 pages, strongly

6d.

Infant

School

Magazine.

Compiled

by

D. Caughie, Master of the Initiatory Department in the Glasgow

Normal Seminary. With numerous Woodcuts. 1st Series, 43rd
Thousand, price 3s. 2nd Series, 13th Thousand, price Ss.
These volumes furnish a great variety of valuable material for intellectual
and moral teaching, comprising Anecdotes and Stories, Hymns and Simple
Verses set to Music; Lessons on Natural History, Botany, and on Familiar
Objects; Sacred Geography, Bible Lessons, and Scripture References.

Household Economy: a Manual intended

Training Colleges and the

for Female
By
Senior Class of Girls' Schools.
of ""Work,

Margaret Maria Gordon (Miss Brewster), Author

or Plenty to do and how to do it," etc
23.

System of English Grammar, and

position.

With

the Principles of Cora-

Exercises, and a Treatise on Analysis of Sentences.

F.E.I.S. Is. 6d.

By John White,

Ohject-Lesson Cards.

OBJECT-LESSON CARDS.
On the Vegetable Kingdom.
On the Animal Kingdom.

On

the Mineral Kingdom.

Set of 20 in a Box.

Set of 14 in a Box.

1,

Is.

1, Is.

Set of 14 in a Box.

1, Is.

Each subject is illustrated with specimens, attached to the Cards, of the

various objects described, the whole forming an interesting Industrial Museum.

How
of

to Train Young Eyes and Ears

being a Manual
Object-Lessons for Parents and Teachers. By Mary Anne
:

Ross, Mistress of the Church of Scotland Normal Infant School,

EdinburgL

Is. 6d.

GEOGRAPHY AND ASTEONOMY.

Oliver and Boyd's Pronouncing Gazetteer of the World,
Descriptive and Statistical. With Numerous Etymological
Notices:
a Geographical Dictionary fob Popular Use.
Crown 8vo, 5s. or with Atlas of 32 Coloured Maps, 6s. 6d.
;

An

entirely neto Edition, vnth the latest Population Returns of our

Countries, and the information otherwise brought down.

own and

other

Daily Telegraph. " GTea.t pains have evidently been taken to set down
facts briefly but accurately, and its compiler has given a very fair amount of
space to the results of the most recent explorations and discoveries. It will
prove a most useful book of reference."

By James Clyde,

School Geography.

M.A., LL.D., one

of the Classical Masters of the Edinburgh Academy. With Special

Chapters on Mathematical and Physical Geography, and Technological Appendix. Eevised throughout.
With 9 Coloured Maps. 4s.

'

Educational News. " The grand characteristic of the ' School Geography
is its singular readableness
the sunny ray
its clear, fluent, lively narrative
of realistic art that everywhere brightens the subject with the charm aLmost
of romance, dispelling the heavy cloud of superfluous facts and figures."

Dr

Clyde's Elementary

Sacred Geography.

Geography

Eevised throughout.

With an Appendix on
With

5 Coloured Maps.

Is. 6d.

Educational Times."

thoroughly trustworthy manual."

Geography and Astronomy.

Stewart's

Compendium

of

Modern Geography,

Poli-

Phtsigal, and Mathematical.

With Descriptive and
Pronouncing Tables, Questions for Examination, etc. Enlarged and
entirely New Edition. 525 pages. With 11 Coloured Maps. 3s. 6d.

tical,

This edition has been most carefully prepared, and gives a life-like
picture of each country, with the results of recent census-taking in various
parta of the world. The work is unusually complete in every respect.

An

Abstract of General Geography, comprehending a

more minute Description of the British Empire, and of Palestine or
the Holy Land, etc.
With Numerous Exercises. For Junior
Classes.
By John Whitk, F.E.I.S., late Teacher, Edinburgh.
Carefully Bevised and Enlarged. With 5 Coloured Maps, Is.

White's System of Modern Geography with Outlines of

AsTEOKOMT and Physical Geography comprehending an Account
:

of the Principal Towns, Climate, Soil, Productions, Religion, EducaWith

tion, Government, and Population of the various Countries.
Sacred Geography, Problems on the Globe, Exercises, etc. Carefully Bevised. 2s. 6d. ; or with 6 Coloured Maps, 2s. 9d.

By Alex. Reid,

Rudiments of Modern Geography.

Improved.
late Head Master of the Edinburgh Institution.
5 Coloured Maps, Is.
The names of places are accented, and accompanied with short descriptions,
and occasionally with the mention of some remarkable event. To the several
countries are appended notices of their physical geography, productions,
government, and religion; concluding with an outline of sacred geography,
problems on the use of the globes, and directions for the construction of maps.

LL.D.,

With

Book of Geography; being an Abridgment of

Reid's Rudiments of Modem Geography, with an Outline of the
Geography of Palestine. With Map of the World. Improved. 6d.

First

Dr

Dr Reid's Outline

An

of Sacred Geography.

Introductory Geography,

for

6d.

By Dr

Junior Pupils,

James Douglas, lately Head Master, Great King Street

Edinburgh. With Map of the World. Carefully Bevised.

Dr Douglas's Progressive Geography.

School,
6d.

On a new

plan,
showing recent changes on the Continent and elsewhere, and embracing much Historical and other Information. 160 pages, Is.
Carefully Bevised.

AtliencEum." The information

the present state of knowledge."

is coplons, correct,

Dr Douglas's Text-Book

Physical and Political Geography of

Globe.

Maps,

38.

well put, and adapted to

of Geography, containing the

Systematically arranged.
Carefully Remscd

2s. 6d.

all
;

the Coimtries of the

or with 10

Coloured

Class-Book

Geography.

of

By

F.R.G.S.. St Mark's College, Chelsea.

complete Text-Book. Is. 6d.

%*

Also sold in stparatf. Farli, each

Geooraphical Primer. 2d.

England and Wales. 2d.
Scotland and Ireland. 2d.

to()l

William

With

Lawson,

7 Coloured Maps.

a Coloured Map.viz.

The British Colonies. 2d.

Europe, "d.
Asia, Aprica, and America.

The following four books have heen prepared hy Mr Lawson

requirements of the New Code :

Geographical First Book; embracing

Meaning and Use of a Map Size and Shape

to

4d.

meet the additional

Lessons on

the

of the World ; Geo;

graphical Terms ; Hills and Mountains ; and Rivers. Designed to
meet the requirements of Standards I. and II. With Diagrams and

Coloured Map.

2d.

England and Wales'

for

Reading-Book

With Maps and

Standard III.

f^chnolmaster."

Illustrations.

in

Geography

Is.

Mr LawBOn

gives a great deal of Infonnation

fthoiit England and Wales in this pleasant volume, not in the dry detailed
manner of the geography, but rather in the descriptive style, which is the
chief excellence of the Geographical Reader. The subject, however, is not
over-described. Mr Lawson evidently describes the subject from a full mind,
and scarcely a page turns over but what we find a little sketch map, or pleasing illustration. We do not remember seeing a Geographical Reading Book
on England and Wales that, on the whole, we like so well as this."
Ifalinnal

Schoolmaster." This

new Geographical Reader presents a compact

outline

of the physical features and industrial character of England and Wales,

arranged in fifty chapters. It is written in a plain, straightforward style,
seeking ra*her to convey information than to strike the reader by any
rhetorical flourishes."

Edvcat'onnl Times. "Lawson's 'England and Wales' consists of carefully

writtpn lessons, with cuts prepared to illustrate the text. In this case the
pictures are generally a real help, and rarely distract attention."

Primary Physical Geography; embracing Lessons on

Latitude and Longitude; the Seasons; Day and Night; Climate;
Vegetable and Animal Productions. Designed to meet the additional
requirements of Standards V. and VI. With Diagrams and Coloured
Maps. 2d.

Lawson's

Elements

of

Physical Geography.

With

Examination Papers. Adapted to meet the requirements of Standard

V U. of the New Code, and for Pupil Teachers. With Coloured

Map.

96 pages.

6d. in stiff wrapper, or 8d. cloth.

of Physical Geography, with

Examination Papers. A complete view of the whole subject,
combining simplicity of style with scientific accuracy. New Edition,

Lawson's
3s. 6d.

Text-Book

Geography and Astronomy.

Lawson's Outlines of Physiography. With
In Two Parts. Price 23. 6d. New Edition.
This manual

11
Illustrations.

intended as a Text-Rook of Physiography as prescribed by

the syllabus of the Science Department, South Kensington. In Part I.,
which corresponds with the Elementary Stage of the subject, the Earth is
considered apart from other portions of the universe, and chiefly in relation
to the materials of which it is composed, the forces which act upon those
materials, and the distribution of vegetable and animal life.
In Part II.
the Earth is considered as a planet, and its position in the solar system, as
well as its relation to the distant stars, are pointed out.
is

The Parts may le had separately , price

Is. 6d. each.

Educational News. "So far as the Science and Art examinations are concerned, no better book could be used."

Geography of the British Empire.

With Maps and Diagrams.
Classes.

Carefully Revised.
For Pupil Teachers and Advanced

3s.

Paet

I.

Outlines of Mathematical and Physical Geography.

and Commercial Geography of the British

II. Physical, Political,

Islands.
III. Phyrical, Political,

and Commercial Geography of the British

Colonies.

News." For advanced pupils we know nothing better."

Scotsman." Deservedly one of the most popular text-books of its kind."
Tlie Board Teacher." About perfect as a text-book for pupil teachers and
Educational

students in general."

Oliver and Boyd's

Handy

Atlas of the World, showing

32 full-coloured Maps.
Eecent Discoveries.
bouud, and suited for the book-shelf, 2s. Gd.

Oliver

and Boyd's School Atlas,

coveries.

8vo,

very neatly

sliowlng Recent Dis-

32 large full-coloured Maps, including Palestine and the

of Geographical Terms. Price Is.
;

Roman Empire with Diagram

Reid's Elements of Astronomy for Schools and Private

Study. Beviseli and brought domi to the present state of Astronomical
Science, by Rev. Alex. Mackav, LL.D., Author of " iManual of
Modern Geography," etc. With 66 Wood Engravings. 3s.
;

Reid's Elements of Physical Geography; with Outlines

of Geology, JIathematical Geography, and Astronomy, and
Questions for Examination. With numerous Illustrations, and a
large coloured Physical Chart of the Globe.

Murphy's Bihle Atlas

Descriptions.

Reduced

to Is.

of

24

coloured.

Is.

Maps,

with

Historical

HISTORY.
In this department have been prepared with the
greatest care. They will he found to include Class-books for Junior
and Senior Classes in all the branches of History generally taught
in the best schools. While the utmost attention has been paid to
accuracy, the narratives have in every case been rendered as
instructive and pleasing as possible, so as to relieve the study from
the tediousness of a mere dry detail of facts.

The works

History of England for Junior Classes; with Questions

Edited by Henry White, B. A. Trinity College,
for Examination.
Cambridge, M.A. and Pli.D. Heidelberg.

Is. 6d.

"
cheap and excellent history of England, admirably adapted
AtJienceum.
for the use of junior classes. Tlie various changes that have taken place in
our constitution are briefly but clearly described. It is surprising how successfully the editor has not merely avoided the obscurity which generally accompanies brevity, but invested his narrative with an interest too often wanting in
larger historical works. Tlie information conveyed is thoroughly sound ; and
the utility of the book is much increased by the addition of examination
questions at the end of each chapter. Whether regarded as an interesting
reading-book or as an instructive class-book, this history deserves to rank

high.

History of Great Britain and Ireland

with an Account

of the present State and Resources of the United Kingdom and

With Questions and a Map. By Dr White. 3s.
Colonies.

its

Aihenceum." A carefully compiled history for the use of Schools. The

writer has consulted the more recent authorities: his opinions are liberal,
and on the whole just and impartial: the succession of events is developed
with clearness, and with more of that pictaresque effect which so deliglits the

young than

is

common

in historical abstracts."

Observer. " It is decidedly one of the best 'works yet furnished for the
information of those who seek to acquire a good general knowledge of the
political and social history of the British Empire."

History of Scotland; with Questions

Edited by

Dr White.

History of France
Map.

Edited by

for

Examination.

Is.

with Questions for Examination, and a

Dr White.

3s. 6d.

Athenaeum." The concluding chapter on the Intellectual Progress of France

will be found to be a practical guide to the young student through the extensive but perilous fields of French literature. Dr White is remarkably happy
in combining convenient brevity with sufficiency of information, clearness of
exposition, and interest of detail. He shows great judgment in apportioning
to each subject its due

amount

of consideration."

Outlines of Universal History.

Edited by

Dr White.

Spectator. "TUstinct in its arrangement, skilful in its selection of leading

and clear in its narrative."

features, close

Dr White's Elements

On

of Universal History.

New

and Systematic Plan. In Three Parts. Part I. Ancient History

Part II. History of the Middle Ages Part III. Modern History.

With a Map of the World.

7s.

or in Parts, 2s. 6d. each.

The author has divided the history into periods of centuries, preserving at
the same time such distinctness and continuity in the narrative tliat the annals
of each country may he separately studied. The work contains numerous
synoptical and other tables, to guide the researches of the student, with
sketches of literature, antiquities, and manners during each of the great
chronological epochs.

Outlines of the History of Rome; with Questions

Examination. Edited by Dr White. Is. 6d.
London Review.

for

"This

abridgment is admirably adapted for the use of

scliools, the best book that a teacher could place in the hand of a youthful
student."

Sacred History, from the Creation of the World

Destruction of Jerusalem.
Edited by Dr White. Is. 6d.
Baptist Magazine.

With Questions

for

to the
Examination.

"An interesting epitome of sacred history, calculated to

inspire the young with a love

mind with knowledge."

of the divine records, as well as to store the

Elements of General History, Ancient and Modem. To

which are added, a Comparative View of Ancient and Modem
Geography and a Table of Chronology. By Alexander Fraseb
Tytler, Lord Woodhouselee, formerly Professor of History in the
University of Edinburgh. New Edition, with the History continued.
With two large Maps, etc. 3s. 6d.

Watts' Catechism of Scripture History, and of the

Condition of the Jews from the Close of the Old Testament to
Time of Christ. With Intboduction by W. K. Tweedie

the

D.D.

2s.

Simpson's Goldsmith's History of England With the

Narrative brought down to the Middle of the Nineteenth Century,
To which is added an Outline of the British Constitution. With
;

Questions for Examination at the end of each Section.

3s. 6d.

Simpson's Goldsmith's History of Rome. With Questions

for

Examination

at the

end of each Section.

3s. 6d.

14

and Book-keeping.

Writing, Arithmetic,

WRITING, ARITHMETIC, AND BOOK-KEEPING.

Arithmetic adapted to the New Code, in Three
By Alex. Tiotter, Teacher of Mathematics, Edinburgh.
Pabt

I.

II.

The Simple Rules, ... 36

The Compound Rules,
36
.

III. Practice to Decimals,

.*

Or strongly bound

pages.
pages.
52 pages.

2d.

2d.
3d.

Parts.

Answers, 3d.
Answers, 3d.
Answers, 3d.

in one Volume, price 8d.

By Henry

Practical Arithmetic for Junior Classes.

G. C. Smith, Teacher of Arithmetic and Mathematics in George

Heriot's Hospital.
66 pages, 6d. stifif wrapper. Answers, 6d.

&

From

tht Rev. Philip Kelland, A.M., F.R.SS. L.

E., late Fellow of Queen's
College, Cambridge, Professor of Mathematics in lite University of Edinburgh.

"I am glad to learn that Mr Smith's Manual for Junior Classes, the MS.
of which I have examined, is nearly ready for publication. Trusting that
the Illustrative Processes which he has exhibited may prove as eflBcient in
other hands as tliey have proved in his own, I have great pleasure in
recommending the work, being satisfled that a better Arithmetician and a
more judicious Teacher than Mr Smith is not to be found."

Practical Arithmetic for Senior Classes

being a Con-

tinuation of the above; with Tables and Exercises on the Metric

System.

By Henry

G. C. Smith.

Key,

Answers, 6d.

2s.

2s. 6d.

't* ^e. Exercises in both works, which are copious and original, have been
constructed so as to combine interest with utility.
They are accompanied by
illustrative processes.

By James

Lessons in Arithmetic for Junior Classes.

Trotter.

71 pages, 6d.

stiff

wrapper

or 8d. cloth.

Answers, 6d.

This book was carefully revised, and enlarged by the introduction of Simple
Examples of the various rules, worked out at length and fully explained, and
of Practical Exercises, by the Author's son, Mr Alexander Trotter, Teacher of
Mathematics, etc., Edinburgh and to the present edition Exercises on the
proposed Decimal Coinage have been added.
;

Lessons in Arithmetic for Advanced Classes; Being

a Continuation of the Lessons in Arithmetic for Junior Classes.
Containing Vulgar and Decimal Fractions Simple and Compound
Proportion, with their Applications Simple and Compound Interest
Involution and Evolution, etc. By Alexander Trotter. New
Edition, with Tables and Exercises on the Metric System. 80 pages,
Answers, 6d.
6d. in stiflF wrapper or 8d. cloth.
;

Each subject

is

minutely explained.

also accompanied

The

by an example

fully

worked out and

Exercises are numerous and practical.

Writing, Arithmetic,

and Book-keeping

Complete System of Arithmetic.

Theoretical

15
and

containing the Fundamental Rules, and their Application

Mercantile Computations Vulgar and Decimal Fractions ; Involution and Evolution; Series; Annuities, Certain and Contingent.
Practical

to

By Mr Trotter.

Ss.

Key,

43. 6d.

' * All the 3400 Exercises in this work are neio.

They are applicable to the
business of real life, and are framed in such a way as to lead the pupil to reason
on the matter. There are upwards of 200 Examples wrought out at length and
minutely explained.

Ingram's Principles of Arithmetic, and

their Application

Popular Manner, and clearly Illustrated

Eemodelled and greatly
Enlarged, with Tables and Exercises on the Metric System. By
Alexander Trotter, Teacher of Jilathematics, etc., Edinburgh. Is.

to Business explained in a

by Simple Rules and Numerous Examples.

Key,

2s.

The Elementary Rules are explained in concise and intelligible language

Each rule is followed by an example
adapted to the capacity of youth.
wrought out at length, and is illustrated by a great variety of practical
questions applicable to business.

Melrose's Concise System of Practical

Arithmetic;

containing the Fundamental Rules and their Application to MercanExchanges;

tile Calculations; Vulgar and Decimal Fractions;
Involution and Evolution; Progressions; Annuities, Certain and
Contingent, etc. Re-arranged, Improved, and Enlarged, with Tables
and Exercises on the Metric System. By Alexander Trotter,
Teacher of Mathematics, etc., in Edinburgh. Is. 6d. Key, 2s. 6d.

Each rule is followed by an example worked out at length and minutely

The Rules will be found
explained, and by numerous practical Exercises.
so arranged as to lead the pupil by an easy gradation from the simplest to
the most difficult operations in arithmetic.

Hutton's Book-Keeping, by Trotter,

Sets of

per

Ruled Writing Booiti. Single Entry, per

2s.

set, Is. 6d.

Double Entry,

set, Is. 6d.

Stewart's First Lessons in Arithmetic, for Junior Classes;

containing Exercises in Simple and Compound Quantities arranged
so as to enable the Pupil to perform the Operations with the greatest
With Exercises on the Proposed Decimal
facility and correctness.

Coinage.

6d. stiff wrapper.

Answers, 6d.

Stewart's Practical Treatise on Arithmetic, Arranged

for Pupils in Classes. With Tables and Exercises on the Metric
System. Is. 6d. This work includes the Answers; with Questions
Examination. Key, 23.

for

Gray's Introduction to Arithmetic; with Tables and

Esereisea on the Metric System.

lOd.

bound

in leather.

Key,

23.

Copy-Books^ Mathematics^

16

etc.

Lessons in Arithmetic for Junior Classes. By James

Maclaeen, Edinburgh. With Answers annexed. 6d.

Maclaren's Practical Book-Keeping.

Set

Is. 6d.

of Ruled Wnting Books, expressly adapltdfor

Scott's First Lessons in Arithmetic.

Scott's

Mental Calculation.

Scott's

Copy Lines,

6d.

this

6d.

work,

Is.

6d.

Answers, 6d.

Teacher's Copy, 6d.

in a Progressive Series, 4d. each.

PHILOSOPHY, MATHEMATICS, ETC.

Text-Book to Kant.
esthetic,

Categories,

The Critique of Pure Reason

Schematism.
Translation, Reproduction,
:

With Index and Biographical Sketch. By J.

Commentary.
HcTCHisoN Stirling, LL.D., Author of " The Secret of Hegel."
8vo, Us.

A Handbook

of the History of Philosophy.

By Dr
Albert Sciiwegler. Eighth Edition. Translated and Annotated
Crown 8vo, 6s.

by James Hutchi.son Stikunq, LL.D.

Geometry

for Schools.
Comprising Books I. and II. of
Euclid, with Adcitms and Numerous Exercises. By A. J. G.
Barclat, M.A., Mathematical Master in George Watson's College,
Edinburgh. Is. bound. Second Edition now ready.

Schoolmaster. "ThorongMy practical."

Sdwobnistress. "We can safely recommend it.
Glasgow Herald. "A text-book of exceptionally bigb merit."

Ingram's Concise System of Mathematics,

Theoretical
Improved by
and Practical, for Schools and Private Students.
James Trotter. With 340 Woodcuts. 4s. 6d. Key, 3s. 6d.

GEOMETRICAL DRAWING.
The First Grade Practical Geometry.

Intended chiefly

Drawing Classes in Elementary Schools taught in

connexion with the Department of Science and Art.
By John
Kennedy, Head Master of Dundee School of Art. 6d.
for the use of

Music, School Registers,

17

etc.

SCHOOL SONGS WITH MUSIC.

Elements of Vocal Music: An Introduction to the Art
of Reading Music at Sight. B7 T. M. Hdnter, Director to the
Association for the Revival of Sacred Music in Scotland.

Price 6d.

This Work has hem prepared with great care, and is the result of long
practical experience in teaching. It is adapted to all ages and classes, and toill
be found considerably to lighten the labour of both teacher and pupil.
The
exercises are printed in the standard notation, and the notes art named as in the
original Sol-fa System.

Contents. Music Scales. Exercises in Time. Syncopation. The Chromatic Scale. Transposition of Scale. The Minor Scale. Part Singing.
Explanation of Musical Terms.

With Preface by Rev. James

Hunter's School Songs.

Cdreie, Training College, Edinburgh.

FOR JUNIOR CLASSES:

voices.

First Series.

60

voices.
*;st*

First Series.

TONIC SOL-FA
in Price.

Songs,

principally set

4d. Second Series

FOR ADVANCED CLASSES:

6d.

for

63 Songs.

two

4d.

44 Songs, principally set for three

Second Series : ^6 Hongs. 6d.

Edition of Hunter's Songs, both Series, Reduced

Jdnior Classes, 2d.Advanced Classes,

2d.

Hunter's National School Song Book, composed

Duets, Trios, Choruses, and Rounds.

Tonic Sol Fa.

of Songs,
89 Songs. 4d.

Songs for Schools. Written and Composed by Clift

Wade. With Simple Accompaniment for Harmonium or Pianoforte.
Price 6d.

The Tunes will be found easy, melodious, and of moderate compass, and
Words simple and interesting; both being easy to teach and remember.

the

*:j^*

Second Series

School Psalmody

School Register.

of

Wade's Songs

is

now

ready, price 6d.

58 Pieces for Three Voices.

Pupil's

4d,

Daily Register of Marks.

Improved Editimi. Containing Spaces for 48 Weeks ; to whicli are

added, Spaces for a Summary and Order of Merit for each Month,
for each Quarter, and for the Year.
For Schools in general, and
constructed to furnish information required by Government. 2d.

School Register of Attendance, Absence, and Fees

adapted to the Provisions of the New Codes for England and Scotland.
By Morris F. Mykon, F.E.LS. Each folio will serve 54 pupils for
a Quarter.
Is.

Class-Books by

CMS. HENRI SCHNEIDER,

Lato senior French Master in

and Watt Institution,

etc.

F.E.I.S., M.C.P.,

tlie Edinburgh High School, the School of Arts

French Examiner to the Educational Institute

of Scotland, etc,

Is. Sd.
Schneider's First Year's Frencli Course.
%* TbiB work forms a Complete Course of French for Beginners,

and
comprebenda Grammatical Exercises, with Rules; Reading Lessons, with
Notes; Dictation; Exercises in Conversation; and a Vocabulary of all the
Words in the Book. Easy Lessons are given in translating French into
English and English into French, with Exercises for translation and retraoslation and repetition.

The Edinburgh High School French ConversationGliAMMAK, arranged on an entirely New Plan, with Questions
and Answers.

Key,

3s. 6d.

Dedicated, by permission, to Fro/essor

Max

MiMer,

2s. 6d.

Letter from

Pbofebbob

Max MBllkb,

University of Oxford.

" My Deae Sib, I am very happy to find that my anticipations as to the

success of your Grammar have been fully realized. Your book does not
require any longer a godfather; but if you wish me to act as such, I shall be
most happy to have my name connected with your prosperous child. Yours
very truly,
" To Mons. C. H. Schneider, Edinburgh High School."

The Edinburgh High School

New

Max

M3li<kb.

Practical French

READER: Being a Collection of Pieces from the best French

Authors. With Questions and Notes, enabling both Master and
Pupil to converse in French. 3s. 6d.
The Edinburgh High School French
CoNYEBaATiON and Commeecial Correspondence.

Manual

of

2s. 6d.

In this work, Phrases and Idiomatic Expressions which are used most
frequently in the intercourse of every-day life have been carefully collected.
Care has been taken to avoid what is trivial and obsole^te, and to introduce all
the modem terms relative to railways, steamboats, and travelling in general.

Collection of Lively Anecdotes, Jkux de Mots, Enigmas, Charades, Poetry, etc., to serve
3s. 6d.
as Readings, Dictation, and Recitation.

crin Littraire: Being a

Progressive
Donaldson.

French

Dr
to
Partie Fran9aise, 3s.

Dedicakd

Composition.

Partie Anglaise, with Notes, 3s.

collection of Htunorous Pieces chiefly from the French,

translated into English for this work, and progressively ananged,

Being a

with Notes.

19

French.

Standard Pronotmcmg Dictionary of the French and

ENGLISH LANGUAGES. In Two Parts. Part L French and
English. Vast II. English and French. By Gabeiel Sdbenne,
late Professor in the Scottish Naval and Military Acadenay, etc.
The First Part comprehends Words in Common Use, Terms connected with Science and the Fine Arts, Historical, Geographical,
and Biographical Names, with the Pronunciation according to the
French Academy and the most eminent Lexicographers and Grammarians. The Second Part is an ample Dictionary of English words,
with the Pronunciation according to the hest Authorities. The
whole is preceded hy a Practical and Comprehensive System of
French Pronunciation. 7s. 6d., strongly bound.

The Pronuncio Iwn

is

shown hy a

different spelling

and
French - English
DICTIONARY, without the Pronunciation.

Surenne's Fenelon's Telemaque.

wrapper or bound together,
;

wrapper

3s. 6d.,

French

each,

Is,

vols.,

strongly bound.
stiff

2s. 6d.

Surenne's Voltaire's Histoire

stiflf

of the Words.

English

Surenne's

de Charles XII,

Is.

or Is. 6d. bound.

Surenne's Voltaire's Histoire de Russie sous Pierre

LE GRAND.

2 vols.,

Is.

Surenne's Voltaire's
or

Is. 6d.

each; or bound together,

La Henriade.

6d,

2s.

stiff"

wrapper;

With an

Introduc-

Is.

bound.

Surenne's

New

French Dialogues.

French Pronunciation, a Copious Vocabulary, and Models of

Epistolary Correspondence. Pronunciation marked thrmi.ghmit- 2s.

tion to

New

Surenne's

Manual

French

and

Traveller's

COMPANION.

Containing an Introduction to French Pronunciaa Copious Vocabulary; a very complete Series of Dialogues
on Topics of Every-day Life ; Dialogues on the Principal Continental Tours, and on the Objects of Interest in Paris ; with Models
of Epistolary Correspondence. Map. Pronunciation marked throughtion

out.

3s. 6d.

Surenne's

French Primer.

Pronouncing

Containing

the Principles of French Pronunciation, a Vocabulary of easy and

Is. 6d. stiflf wrapper.
familiar Words, and a Selection of Phrases.

Surenne's Moliere's L'Avare

Surenne's
Comdie.

Moliere's
6d. stiff

Le

wrapper; or

Surenne's Moliere's Le

K AaiAOE FORCE

Comdie.

Is.

bound.

Gentilhomme

bound.

Misanthrope

Comdis.

6d., or Is.

Bourgeois

6d.

stiff

Comdie.

wrapper ; or

Is.

Le

bound.

First French Class-Book, or a Practical and Easy Method

of learning the French Lanquage, consisting of a series of French
and Enqlish Exercises, progressively and grammaticallj arranged.
By Jdles Caron, F.E.I.S., French Teacher, Edin. Is. Key, Is.
This work follows the natural mode in which a child learns to speak its own
language, by repeating the same words and phrases in a great variety of forms
until the pupil becomes familiar with their use.

Caron's First French Reading-Book

Interesting Lessons, pro^essively arranged.
lary of the Words and Idioms in the Text.

The

Is.

work is to make the pupil familiar with both forms of

language of books and the language of conversation, by giving
French as it is written and French as it is spoken.

object of this

French,

him

Being Easy and

With a copious Vocabu-

tlie

correct models of

Caron's Principles of French Grammar. With numeroixs

Exercises. 2s. Key, 2s.
Spectator. " May be recommended for clearness of exposition, gradual progression, and a distinct exhibition to the mind through the eye by means of typographical display : the last an important point where the subject admits of it."

An Easy Grammar

of the French language.

ExERCisEa and Dialogues. By John

Modern Languages. Is. 4d. Key, 8d.

Christison's Recneil
r Usage de la Jeunesse.
Christison's

la

Jeunesse.

The French

de
Is.

Fables

With

Christison, Teacher of

et

Contes Choisis,

4d.

Fleury's Histoire de France, Raconte

With Translations of the difficult Passages. 2s. 6d.

New

The most approved Pro-

Testament.

testant VER.SION, and the one in general use in the French Reformed Churches. Pocket Edition, roan, gilt edges. Is. 6d.

Chambaud's Fables

With a Vocabulary conBy Scot and Wells. 2s.

Choisies.
Words.

taining the meaning of all the

Hallard's French Grammar.

Grammar

3s. 6d.

of the French Language.

Key,

3s. 6d.

By A. Beljame,

B.A., LL.B., Vice-Principal of the Paris International College.

Beljame's Four Hundred Practical Exercises.

,* Both Books hound together, 3s.

The whole work has been composed with

28.

28.

M.

a view to conversation, a great

number of the Exercises being in the form of questions andaiuirers.

Latin and Greek.

21

EDINBURGH ACADEMY CLASS-BOOKS.

Rudiments of The latin Language,

1.

Academy. In Two Parts.

LL.D., author of "Greek Syntax," etc.

the Edinburgh

Two

for the Use of

By James Clyde, M. A.,

12mo, price 23.; or in

Parts, sold separately, price Is. 3d. each.

It is divided into two parts, each containing the same number of sections
nnder the same headings, in which the same subjects are treated of in Part
1. with a view to beginners, in Part II. with a view to advanced students.

Athenieum. "This volume

is a very full, correct, and well-arranged gramof the Latin language, and is wonderfully cheap. It compares favourably
with the Clarendon Press Elementary Grammar. Distinguishing features
are the simple but effective device of making two parts of accidence, instead
of relegating important matter to the comparative obscurity of an appendix,
and the rejection of the objectionable method of combining a reader and exercises with the grammar."

mar

Educational News. " A fresh, thorough, and methodical treatise, bearing on

every page evidences of the author's ripe scholarship and rare power of lucid
expo.sition."

\*

The old edition of

the

EDixBtmoH Academj Latin Eodiments moy

be

in the Text.

Vocabulary
Difficult

containing an
Expression which occurs

3s.

Rudiments of The Greek Language,

3.

still

had if desired.

2. Latin Delectus; with a

Explanation of every Word and

with the Syntax

entirely re-written, and with Accent and Quantity treated of according to their mutual relations. 3s. 6d.

4.

Greek Extracts;
Explanation of every
the Text.

with

Word and

Vocabulary containing an

of the

more

Difficult Passages in

3s. 6d.

for the use of Colleges and

Schools. By \V. D. Geddes, M. A., LL.D., Principal, late Professor
of Greek, in the University of Aberdeen. New Edition, Revised
and largely Keconstructed. 4s.

Compendious Greek Grammar

Scotsman. "One of the best working

college use that are before the public."

Greek Grammars

Greek Syntax
By Jas. Clyde,

for school or

with a Rationale of the Constructions.

LL.D., lately a Classical Master of the Edin.
S. Blackie, lately
Professor of Greek in the University of Edinburgh. 5th Edition.
Revised throwjliovt and largeli/ re-irritten, containing an English
Summary for the use of Learners, and a chapter on Accents. 4s. 6d.
;

Academy.

With Prefatory Notice by John

Latin and Greek.

DR HUNTER'S

CLASSICS.

1.

Hunter's Euddiman's Rudiments.

2.

Hunter's Sallust;
Reduced

3.

with

Hunter's Horace.

5.

Hunter's Livy.

Beduced

Dymock's Caesar

Reduced

Illustrations.

to

M.

XXV.

With

Critical

to 23.

with Illustrative Notes, a Historical and

Geographical Index, and a

Dymock's Sallust;

Map

with

of Ancient Gaul.

43.

Explanatory Footnotes

Historical and Geographical Index.

;

to Is.

Books XXI.

and Explanatory Notes.

Notes,

and other

Notes

to 2s.

4.

Caesar

Is. 6cL

and Translations.

to Is.

Hunter's Virgil
Reduced

with Footnotes

Reduced

and

Is.

with Vocabulary explaining every Word in the Text

Map, and Historical Memoir. By William M'Dowall,

late Inspector of the

Heriot Foundation Schools, Edinburgh.

M'Dowall's Csesar. Book I.

ing every Word in the Text. Is.

With Vocabulary

3s.

explain-

M'Dowall's Virgil with Memoir, Notes, and Vocabulary

explaining every Word in the Text. 3s.
;

or, Select Latin Lessons in Morality,

;
History, and Biography for the use of Beginners. With a Vocabulary explaining every Word in the Text. By 0. Melville, late
of the Grammar School, Kirkcaldy. Is. 6d.

Lectiones Selectse

Ainsworth's Latin Dictionary, by Duncan. 1070 pp.

A New

9s.

comprising Grammar and

By Geo. Ogilvie, M.A., LL.D., Head

First Latin Course;

Exercises, with Vocabularies.

Master of George Watson's College for Beys, Edinburgh.

Is. 6d.

*,* In the Neto Edition, the number of the Simpler Exercises has been
increased and the book rendered more generally useful by an Appendix on
Irregular Declensions, Prosody, the Soman Calendar, and the Subjunctive Mood.
Educational News." Exceedingly well adapted for the purpose for which it
Banffihire Journal. " An admirable book."
is intended."
Educational Times. " Well and carefully done." *,* This Claia-booJc supplies
sufficient work /or a f/ear, without the necessity of using any other book.

Latin and Greek.

A New

First Greek Course

23
Grammar,

comprising

Syntax, and Exercises; with Vocabularies containing all the

V/ords in the Text. By Tiios. A. Stewart, oneof H.M. Inspectors
of Schools in Scotland, lately Senior Classical Master in George
Watson's College Schools, Edinburgh, and formerly Assistant-Professor of Greek in the University of Aberdeen.
2s. 6d.

"Superior to most works of the kind."

Record." The easiest, and most practical, and most useful introduction to

AthencEum.

Greek yet published

in this country."

Educational Neiiis. "This little book deserves the highest commendation

Great skill is shown in selecting those facts of Accidence and Syntax
which ought to be given in such a book.
*,* This Class-book supplies sufficient work/or a year, without the necessity of
using any other book.
.

Stewart's

Advanced

Greek

Course.

Comprising

Synopsis of Greek Syntax, Hints towards Composition, Exercises in

Continuous English Narrative, and a full Vocabulary containing all
the Words in the Text. 2s. 6d.

Educational News. " This is an admirable little manual, and will form an
excellent sequel to the author's deservedly popular First Greek Course.' "
Glasgow Herald. " The synopsis of synta.^ is masterly, and the more useful
and important idioms are clearly put before the student."

Key

'

to Ditto, price 2s. 6s.

Cornelius Nepos;

Stewart's

with Notes, Chronological

Word

Tables, and a Vocabulary explaining every

Reduced

in the

Text.

to 2s.

Duncan's Greek Testament.

3s. 6d.

Xenophon's Anabasis, Books I. and II. with Vocabulary

giving an explanation of every Word in the Text, and a TransBy James Fergusson, M.D.,
lation of the more Difficult Phrases.
;

late

Rector of the West

End Academy, Aberdeen.

2s. 6d.

The copious, correct, and

Athenoeum. "This admirable little work. . .
well-arranged Vocabulary at the end contains good translations of difRcult
passages, with exact information upon points of antiquities, derived from the
best and most modern authorities."

Homer's

Iliad,

Books

I.,

VI., XX.,

and XXIV.

from

Bekker's Text, as revised by Dr Veitch with Vocabulary explaining every Word in the Text, and a Translation of the more
;

Difficult Passages.

By Dr FEEacssON. Reduced to

Alhenceum." The portions selected are suitable.

and meaning of each word are well explained, and

2s. 6d.

The

all difficult

appropriately translated."
<?ttordton. "The Vocabulary Is painstaking nd elaborate."

derivation
phrases are

24

Latin,

Greek,

etc.

LATIN ELEMENTARY WORKS AND CLASSICS.

Edited by Geobqb FEBonsON, LL.D., lately Professor of Hnmanity in King's
College and University of Aberdeen, and formerly one of the
Masters of the Edinburgh Academy.

Ferguson's Grammatical Exercises.

1.

and a Vocabulary explaining every Word.

With

2s. Key,

to follow the Latin

Notes

2s.

Ferguson's Introductory Latin Delectus:

2.

Intended

Eudiments with a Vocabulary containing an

Word and of every DifBcult Expression.
;

Explanation of every

Reduced

to Is. 6d.

Ferguson's Ovid's Metamorphoses.

3.

With Notes and

Index, Mythological, Geographical, and Historical.

Ferguson's Ciceronis Orationes Selectae.

4.

2s. 6d.

Containing

Manilla, IV. in Catilinam, pro A. L. Archia, pro T. A.

Ex Orellii recensione. Reduced to Is.

pro Lege
Milone.

ITALIAN.
Theoretical

and Practical Italian Grammar;

with

numerous Exercises and Examples,

a

illustrative of every Eule, and

and iJialogues.
By E. Lemmi, LL.D.,
H.K.H. the Prince of Wales. 5s. Key, 6s.

Selection of Phrases

Italian

Tutor

to

From Count Saffi, Professor of the Italian Language at Oxford. " I have
adopted your Grammar for the elementary instruction of students of Italian
in the Taylor Institution, and find it admirably adapted to the purpose, as
well for the order and clearness of the rules, as for the practical excellence
and ability of the exercises with which you have enriched it."

GERMAN.
A New German

in Prose and Verse

with a
Grammatical and Etymological Vocabulary, containing the Meaning
Forms of Commercial ami other
of all the Words in the Text
Correspondence, and Specimens of German National Hanawriting.
For the Use of Schools. By Charles Fischer-Fischaet, of the
Edinburgh Merchant Company's Educational Institutions, etc.
Reduced to 2s. 6d.

Reader,

Fischart's
a series of
etc.

On

German Class-Book
German

Stories,

an Original Plan.

for Beginners:

Being

with Vocabulary, Grammar, Exeroisea,

Enlarged Editwn. Is. 6d.

PUBLISHED BY OLIVER AND BOYD, EDINBURGH

60LD ALSO BY SIUPEIS, MABSBALL, AND

CO.,

LONDON, AND ALL BOOKSELLERg.

Oliver

and Boyd's Educational Works.

LATIN AND GREEK.

Clyde's (Dr) Greek Syntax,

witli Notice

by Professor

Blackie..., 4

Kdikburgh Acadkmy Latm Kudimeiits

^
6

New Kdition by Jas. Clyde, LL.D. 2

Do.
3
Latin Delectus, with Vocabulary
3 6
Greek Kudiments
Greek Extracts, with V ocabuUry and Index 3 6
Fbbguson's (Professor) Grammatical Exercises [Tlie Key, 2s.]... 2
6
1
Introductory Latin Delectus, with Vocabulary
2
Ovid's Metamorphoses, with Notes and Index
Ferousson's Xenophon's Anabasis, Books I. and II., with Vocab. 2 6
Homer'slliad,BooksI.,VI.,XX.,XXIV.,with Vocab. 2 6
Geddes's (Principal) Greek Grammar, for Colleges and Schools.. 4
6
1
Huntek's Ruddiman's Latin Rudiments
M'Dowall'b Gasar, with Vocabulary, Notes, Map, and Memoir.. 3
3
Virgil, with Vocabulary, Notes, and Memoir
Melville's Lectiones Selecta;, for Beginners, with Vocabulary.. 1 6
6
\
Ooilvie's (Dr) New First Latin Course
Stewabt's Cornelius Nepos, with Notes, Index, and Vocabulary 2 6
2 6
(Thomas A.J New First Greek Course
Advanced Greek Course fA'f^, 2s. 6d.]... 2 6

FRENCH.
BELJAME'sFrencli Grammar,2s. I''renchExercises,28. Complete 3
1
Gabon's First French Glass-Book (The Kty, Is.J
1
First French Reading-Book, with Vocabulary
2
French Grammar, with Exercises [The Key, 2s.]
CHASiBAnD'sFablesGhoisies, by Scot and Wells, with Vocabulary 2
Chbistison's Easy Grammar of the French Language [A'ey, 8d.]. 1
Recueil de Fables et Contes Choisis, with Vocab... 1
2
Fleury's Histoire de France
1
French New Testament, Protestant Version
3
Hallard's French Grammar [The Key, 3s. 6d.]
Schneider's French Conversation Grammar [The Key, 2s. 6d.]... 3
Edinburgh High School New Practical French Reader 3
2
French Manual of Conversation, etc

4
4
6

EcrinLittraire; forReading,Dictation,&Kecitation 3

1
First Year's French Course
3
Surbnne's French Manual and Traveller's Companion
2
New French Dialogues
French and English Dictionary,without Pronunciation 3
7
Pronouncing French and English Dictionary
Fnlon'sTlmaque, 2vols.,eachls.; bound together 2

6
6

Voltaire's Histoire deCharlesXII.,stiffwrapper(bd. 1/6) 1

each 1
Histoire de Russie, 2 vols
1
La Henriade (bound, Is. 6d.)
Molire's L'Avare Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme.. each

ITALIAN

6
6
6
6
6

6
6

AND GERMAN.

Lemmi's Theoretical and Practical Italian Grammar[Thefl'e!/,

Fischabt's German Glass-Book for Beginners (a Course)
New German Reader, with Vocabulary

5s.]

5
1

Oliver

and Boyd's Educational Works.

PHILOSOPHY AND MATHEMATICS.

..

d.

Text-Book to Kant
14
Handbookof the History of Philosophy. By Dr Schwegler 6
Baeclay'3 Geometry. Euclid, Books I. & II., with Additions and
STlBLlJfo's (Dr Iliitchisnn)

Exercises
IsGEAJi's System of ilatliematics, by Trotter [Key, 3s. 6d.]

WRITING, ARITHMETIC, AND BOOK-KEEPING.

10
Gbat's Introduction to Arithmetic [The Key, 2s.']
2
Hcttok's Book-keeping, by S. & D. Entry, by Trotter
I
6
Two Ruled Writing-Books for Ditto Single Entry
Double Entry
1
6
Ijjgbam's Principles of Arithmetic, Improved Edition [Key, 2s.]
1
MACLAREN'sArithmeticfor Junior Classes, -with Answers annexed
6
System of Practical Book-keeping
1
6
6
1
A set of Ruled Writin,c-Books adapted for the Work
Melrose's Arithmetic, by Ingram and Trotter \^Key, 2s. 6d.]
1 6
:

Scott's First Lessons in Arithmetic [^swers, 6d.1

Mental Calculation, Pupil's Copy, 6d.; Teacher's Copy....

6
6

Copy

Lines, ."0 Sorts

.....each
Smith's Practical Arithmetic for Junior Classes \Ansv)ers, 6d.]....
Arithmetic for Senior Classes [^nsi/jers, 6d.; Key, 2s. 6d.] 2
Stewart's First Lessons in Arithmetic [Annwers, 6d.]
Practical Arithmetic, Improved Edition [The Key, 2s. J 1
Trotter's Arithmetic adapted to the New Code. Parts I. and 11^
each 2d.; Part III., 3d. In 1 vol., Sd. ^nsifers, 3d. each Part
.arithmetic for Junior Classes [^(iswers, 6d.]
Arithmetic for Advanced Classes \ Answers, &A'\
Complete System of Arithmetic [The Key, 4s. 6d.]
3

Keitsedt's First Grade Practical Geometry

Object-Lesson Cards on the Vegetable Kingdom 20 in a Box_.21

on the Animal Kingdom; 14 in a Box
21
on the Mineral Kingdom; 14 in a Box
21
Ross's How to Train Young Eyes and Ears
1
Glasgow Infant School Magazine, compiled by Caughie, 1st and
2nd Series, each, bound
3

6
6

6
6

SCHOOL REGISTERS.
Myron-'s School Register of Attendance, Absence, and Fees,
adapted to the Provisions of the New Codes for England and
Scotland. Each folio serves 54 pupils for a quarter
Pdpil's Daily Register of Marks. Spaces for 48 Weeks with
Spaces for a Summary and Order of Merit for each month, for
each quarter, and for the year

*.' A Specimen Copy of most of these WorTiS sent to Bead Teachers

POST FREE, on reuiptof half price in stamps, by Oliver and Boyd, Edinburgh.